Beitman 1947 FM TV

Most -Often - Needed
1947 F. M.
and Television
Servicing Information
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS
CHICAGO
VOLUME TV -1
$2
Most - Often - Needed
F. M.
and Television
Servicing Information
r4pmfll'itil
Compiled by
M. N. BEITMAN
CHICAGO
/
P reface
This manual has a two -fold purpose.

First, the material included will aid you
in servicing and adjusting popular F.M.
and Television receivers. Second, you can
employ this material as a study -manual of
factory instructions for carrying out tests,
adjustments, and repairs of F.M. and
Television equipment. The contents will
give you the "know-how" to do F.M. and
television servicing, and will guide you
step-by-step if you are called to repair
any of the popular models included.
As always, it is the object of

SUPREME PUBLICATIONS to bring to servicemen
needed books of practical nature and this
volume is a worthy addition. The time
spent in the study of this manual will be
repaid handsomely when more and more P.M.
and television service jobs will be coming
your way. You have made a wise move in
wanting to keep abreast of developments.
Our sincere thanks is extended to
the many manufacturers whose receivers are
described and whose cooperation was secured
in this undertaking.
M. N. BEITMAN
February, 1948.
Copyright, 1948, by
SUPREME PUBLICATIONS.
Chicago, Ill.
All rights reserved,

including the right
to reproduce or quote
the contents of this
book, or any portion
thereof, in any form.
2
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F. M. and Television Receivers
Table of Contents
Preface 2 Motorola, Inc.

Table of Contents 3 Models 95F31, 95F33, -B, -M,
Chassis HS -38, HS -39 109-113
Admiral Corporation Models 77FM21, -22, -23,
Chassis 9A1, Model 7C73 5-12 Chassis HS -89, HS -97 114-120
Bendix Aviation Corp. Models 77XM21, -22, -223,
Model 847-B 13-17 Chassis HS -102 . . 121-124
.
Crosley Corporation Models VT-71,VK-101 using

Models 88TA, 88TC . 18-20
. .
Chassis TS -3 .
. 125-134
. .
87CQ, & Revised 86CR,8605 21-28 Olympic Radio & Television

Models 146CS, 146CS(V) 29-32 Models 7-925, 7-934,
Du Mont Laboratories, Allen B. 7-936, and 7-939 135-136
. .
Model RA -101 33-46 Packard -Bell Co.

Emerson Radio & Phonograph Corp. Model 872 137-138
Model 528, Chassis 120038 47-50
Model 537, Chassis 120043 51-53 Pilot Radio Corp.
Espey Manufacturing Co. Model T-601 139-140
Model 7-B 54 R.C.A. Victor
Farnsworth Television & Radio Models 610V1, 610V2 . . 141-144
Series GK -140 to GK -144 55-58
Models 612V1, 612V3 . . 145-152
Models GV-220,-240,-260 Model 630TS 153-162
59-62
General Electric Co. Sparks-Withington Company
Model 417A 63-68 Model 10 -76 -PA . . .163-168
.
Model 801 69-88 Stromberg-Carlson Tel. Mfg. Co.

Howard Radio Company Model 1210, Series 10-11 169-170
Model 474 89-90 Stewart -Warner Corp.
Models 472AC, -AF, -C, -F 91-92 A72T1,-2, -3,-4,9026- 171-174
Majestic Radio & Television Corp. Model T-711 hints .
. . 175-176
Model 8FM776, Chas. 8807D 93-96 Western Auto Supply Company
Models 12FM475, -778, -779, Model D1752, Truetone 177-180
Chassis 41201, 12826E 97-100 Model D1846, 181-182
Meissner Manufacturing Co. Westinghouse Electric
Models 9-1091A, 9-1091B 101 H-113, -114, -116 to -119 183-186
Midwest Radio Corp. H-161, H-168, -A 187-188
Models R-12, RT-12, RGT-12, Zenith Radio Corp.
Chassis RGT-12 . . . 102-104 Models 12H090 to -094
Montgomery Ward Co. Chassis 11C21 .
. 189-191
.
Model 74BR-1812A . . . 105-108 Index 192
3
9 CHICAGO 12, ILLINOIS
S. BEDZIE AVENUE
O Simplified Radio Servicing by
SUPREME DIAGRAM MANUALS
COMPARISON Method
Repair radios in minutes instead of hours.
Revolutionary different COMPARISON
technique permits you to do expert work on
all radio sets. Most repairs can be made
without test equipment or with only a volt -ohmmeter.
Many simple, point-to-point, cross-reference, circuit sug-
gestions locate the faults instantly. Plan copyrighted.
Covers every radio set-new and old models. This new
Be prepared to repair quickly all new 1948 servicing technique presented in handy manual form, size
1948 sets. This big single volume contains clearly 8V2x11 inches, 72 pages. Over 1,000 practical service hints.
VOLUME 8
printed, large schematics, needed alignment 26 large, trouble -shooting blueprints. Charts for circuit
Price $2.00 data, replacement parts lists, voltage values, analysis. 114 tests using a 5c resistor. Developed
and information on stage gain, location of by M. N. Beitman. New 1945 edition. Net Price SI50
trimmers, and dial stringing, for almost all new 1948 sets. A
worthy companion to the seven previous volumes used by
over 120,000 shrewd radio servicemen. Large size: 8%2 x 11 0 STEWART-WARNER MANUAL 50c
in., 192 pages plus index. Manual style binding.
Price postpaid, only $2,
O ARVIN DIAGRAM MANUAL 50c
PREVIOUS VOLUMES OF DIAGRAMS
Speed up and simplify all radio repairs. Service radios faster, O GENERAL -ELECTRIC MANUAL
better, easier, save money and time, use these most -often - 64 pages of popular circuits. .5%x8% 50c
needed diagram manuals to get ahead. At the low cost (only
$2 for most volumes) you are assured of having in your
shop and on the job, needed diagrams and other essential
repair data on 4 out of 5 sets you will ever service. Clearly
O RADIO MATHEMATICS
printed circuits, parts lists, alignment data, and helpful serv- Introduces and explains arithmetic and ele-
ice hints are the facts you need. Each volume has between mentary algebra in connection with units,
192 and 240 pages, large size 81/4 x 11 inches. Manual style color code, meter scales, Ohm's Law, alter-
nating currents, ohmmeter testing, wattage
0 1947 0 1946 1942 ID 1941 rating, series and parallel connections,
$2.00 VOLUME 6 VOLUME 5 VOLUME 4 capacity, inductance, mixed circuits, vac-
VOLUME 7 $2.00 $2.00 $2.00 uum tubes, curves, the decibel, etc., and has
0 1940 1939 1926-1938 numerous examples. Plainly written. rte
32 pages. Size: 5%x8% inches AJC
VOLUME 3 VOLUME 2 POPULAR VOLUME 1
$2.00 $2.00 Price $2.50
O CYCLOPEDIA OF TELEVISION FACTS
This new television book defines and explains every term
ADVANCED RADIO SERVICING and part used in television transmitting and receiving
Use these 30 lectures in giant manual form to learn advanced equipment. The more important terms are described in
methods. hints, tips. and suggestions. Take advantage of greater detail. Well illustrated. Reprinted in
1945. 48 fact -packed pages ; 5%x8% inches 4tPC
M. N. Beitman's 19 years of radio experience as presented
in these easy -to -follow, illustrated lectures. Every servicing
topic of importance. including F.M. and television.
Complete 30 lectures. large size:
O RADIO SERVICING COURSE -BOOK
81,4 x 11 inches, only $3. Learn new speed -tricks of radio fault
finding, case histories of common troub-
les, servicing short-cuts, extra profit
PRE-WAR RECORD PLAYERS ideas. Many large lessons on the use of
Just what you need to repair quickly thousands of auto- regular test equipment, explanation of
matic record changers, manual units, pick-ups, wireless signal tracing, television to the minute,
oscillators, recorders, and combinations. Hundreds of recording dope. Many active servicemen
mechanical and electrical diagrams. Instructions for ad- used this reduced price radio training
justments and repairs. Most popular units of all $1.50 for brush -up and study of new service methods. Re-
makes. 132 large pages. 8"2x11 inches printed in 1946 with new information on signal -tracing,
television, visual alignment, P.A., photocells, and every
other fact you must know to be more expert in your
POST-WAR RECORD CHANGERS work. Complete, 22 lessons, size 8;4x11 inches, 224 pages.
Service expertly all new (1945-1947) record changers. Fol- With self -testing questions and index. Greatest bar. t's KA
low simplified factory instructions to make needed adjust- gain in home -study radio training. Postpaid, only
ments and repairs. Hundreds of photographs and exploded
views, thousands of test hints: service instructions for all n How to Use Diagrams in Servicing 10c
popular makes. Large size: 81/2x11", 144 pages.
Just published. Great value at only $1.50
El Radio Repairing with SUBSTITUTE Parts
HOW TO MODERNIZE RADIOS 25c
Hints, ideas, suggestions, changes; 32 pages.
!MIIP Cash in by improving and modernizing all all
radio sets and cabinets. Add S.W., record O REFRIGERATION Repair uandijtusst,
changers, improve audio response. Practical

job -sheets with schematics and photographs
make the work easy. Covers every phase: DI Practical Radio and Electronics Course
written for servicemen. In 3 volumes, 53 lessons, 332 pages, size 81/2x11". $3.95
Size 8%x 11 in. Price. only $1.
4 Giant manual. Wt. 31/2 lbs. Price only

Olehnihai CHASSIS 9A1 MODEL 7C73
FM ALIGNMENT POINTER SETTING

The model 9A1 chassis should be aligned only with an AM With the gang closed, the lower edge of the pointer should be
signal generator and a vacuum tube voltmeter. Any standard set at the upper tip of the pear-shaped opening (in the dial scale)
brand vacuum tube voltmeter with a DC scale of not over 5 volts on the A.M. range (see "Stringing Diagram" Fig. 1).
is suitable. A 3 -volt zero center scale is desirable. A signal genera.
tor with a frequency range up to 110 MC. is desirable. It is TRIMMER IDENTIFICATION CHART
possible however, to align the receiver with a signal generator TRIMMER SYMBOL FUNCTION
going to 20 or 30 megacycles, by using the harmonics of these
lower frequencies. To do this merely set the signal generator A,F T3 Ratio Detector
dial as follows and align exactly as explained in the alignment B.0 T2 2nd I.F. Transformer (FM)
instructions. D,E T1 1st I.F. Transformer (FM)
G C16 FM Oscillator Trimmer
Where alignment chart specifies 108.5 MC., set signal generator H C14 FM Converter Trimmer (RF)
to highest available frequency of the following: I C7 FM-RF Trimmer
108.5 MC 27.13 MC J L7 FM Oscillator Coil
54.25 MC 21.7 MC K L5 FM Converter Coil (RF)
36.17 MC 18.08 MC I. L4 FM-RF Coil
Where alignment chart specifies 102 MC., set signal generator to M,N, 15 2nd I.F. Transformer (AM)
highest available frequency of the following: 0,P T4 1st I.F. Transformer (AM)
Q C21 AM Oscillator Trimmer
102. MC 25.5 MC R C11 AM Converter Trimmer (RF)
51.0 MC 20.4 MC S C6 AM Antenna Trimmer
34.0 MC 17.0 MC T L8 AM Oscillator Coil
Signal generators which do not tune to 110 MC or whose har- U 1.6 AM Converter Coil (RF)
monics are not strong enough, cannot be used for FM alignment. L3 AM Antenna Coil
REPLACING TUNING SLUG
If it becomes necessary to change a tuning slug proceed in
the following manner: Set the gang to its wide open position, un-
solder and remove the old slug. Set the slug adjusting screw about
half way down. Place the new slug in such a position that PA
inches of its length is above the coil form (or 1" above the
chassis top). Solder it in this position making sure that it does
not slip during the operation and that the slug wire is straight.
Realign as directed.
CHASSIS REMOVAL (For Servicing)
Due to the type of chassis mounting used, removal of the en-
tire tilt -out door assembly (with receiver chassis attached) sim-
plifies removal of the receiver chassis. The receiver chassis can then
be easily removed from its shock mountings. Removal is a little
"tricky" but can be done most readily as described below:
Disconnect all cabinet wiring and cables from the chassis.
Difficulty may be experienced in removing the phono pickup plug
due to the tight fit in the socket shield. This plug can best be
removed with long -nose pliers.
Remove the screw and washer (#1 in figure 5) from both
tilt -out spring studs (2), one on each side of the tilt -out assembly.
Slip the tilt -out springs (3) off their respective studs. Unscrew the
Fig. 5. Receiver Tilt -Out Mounting ends of the tie -bar (4). The tie -bar then hangs free on the cop-
per braid used to bond it to the chassis.
Stand at the end of the cabinet (next to the radio compartment)
and hold the tilt -out door open slightly with the left hand. Use a
screwdriver to pry both tilt -out arms (#5 in figure 6) off their
studs (#6). Then push the tilt -out arms toward the front of
the cabinet (against bracket #7). The tilt -out assembly can
now be removed from the front of the cabinet by tipping it forward
and then pulling it straight out.
CHASSIS REPLACEMENT
\lake sure the rubber Dumpers (#9, Fig. 5) and rubber
strips (#8) are in place.
To replace the radio tilt -out door assembly in the cabinet, set
the assembly in so that the tilt -out arms (#5) are in back of the
studs (#6) they normally hinge on. Use your left hand to hold
the assembly in the proper position in the same manner as was
done in removing the tilt -out assembly. Use a screwdriver (in
your right hand) to spring the tilt -out arm clear of its stud
I #6). Push it forward as far as possible (as shown in figure
6). When both tilt -out arms are in this position, the assembly
can be lifted up and the tilt -out arms slipped into place on their
respective studs. The tilt -out assembly will now support itself (in
the open position).
Replace the tie -bar (#4). Replace the tilt -out springs ( #3.
See figure 5). Reconnect the cabinet wiring and cables to the
receiver chassis.Check to see that the rubber bumper (#9)
and rubber strips (#8) are in place. The assembly should now
appear as shown in figure 5.
Fig. 6. Receiver Tilt -Out Mounting

Ohinehai CHASSIS 9A1 MODEL 7C73
67.5 IAC. 10E5 MC.

POINTER EXTREMES
540 K.C. 1605 C.C.
FIGURE 1. FIGURE 2.
ADMIRAL FREQUENCY MODULATION CIRCUIT

An amplitude modulated (AM) signal varies in amplitude in pulse), E3 and E4 would increase in proportion. Since k5 is the
accordance with the sound being transmitted. If the frequency of difference between E3 and E4, it must also increase. An increase
the sound increases, the amplitude variations in the transmitted in signal amplitude causes an increase in output voltage under
carrier occur at a faster rate (at the new audio rate). If the volume these conditions. This illustrates the fact that the discriminator is
of the sound increases, a greater amplitude variation takes place
in the transmitted carrier. sensitive to amplitude variations as well as frequency deviation.
Since noise is essentially an amplitude variation, all amplitude
In the case of frequency modulation (FM), the transmitted sig- variations must be removed from the signal before it is fed to the
nal varies in frequency in accordance with the sound being trans- discriminator. This is the function of the one or more limiter
mitted. if the frequency of the sound increases, the variations in stages normally employed ahead of the discriminator circuit in an
transmitter carrier frequency occur at a faster rate. If the volume F.M. receiver.
of the sound increases, a wider frequency variation takes place
in the transmitted carrier.
AUDIO
Due to the higher operating frequencies used for frequency + OUTPUT
modulation transmission, a higher intermediate frequency is also RI
used in F.M. receivers. An IF of 10.7 Mc. is most frequently used.
The converter in the receiver changes the original signal to this TO LIMITER ES
new frequency without changing the modulation characteristic. PLATE
R2
LI
The audio modulation is obtained from the carrier in an amp-
litude modulation receiver by the second detector. This function
must be performed by a different type of circuit in a frequency
modulation receiver since the type of modulation is different. This
can be done by either a discriminator or a ratio detector. Fig. 3. Discriminator Circuit
C tional Discriminator Due to the function of a limiter (which is essentially a class

An elementary discriminator circuit is shown in figure 3. LI, "C" R.F. amplifier), a large input signal is required before it
L2 and L3 are all part of the discriminator transformer. LI is the will remove amplitude variations from the F.M. signal. This re-
primary and signal input for the circuit. The voltages induced in quires the use of a high gain R.F. and 1.F. ampliher system in
L2 and L3 add vectorially and are applied to the plates of the an F.M. receiver using a uiscriminator type second detector. This
two diodes, Dl and D2. When the I.F. signal is exactly 10.7 Mc., type of circuit does not provide noise rejection on weak signals
El and E2 are equal. The diodes then pass equal currents since the limiter must have a certain minimum signal in order
through RI and R2. Since RI and R2 have the same resistance, to operate. The result is an expensive receiver that is noisy on
equal voltages E3 and E4 will appear across them. Due to the weak signals.
polarity of E3 and E4 (as indicated in figure 3), output voltage
E5 will be equal to their difference. When the I.F. signal is ex- The Ratio Detector
actly 10.7 Mc., E3 and E4 are equal and E5 is zero.
The ratio detector was developed to overcome the afore -men-
If the I.F. signal is below 10.7 Mc., El will be greater than tioned limitations of the discriminator -limiter type F.M. second
E2, thus DI will pass more current than D2. E3 will then be detector circuit. An elementary ratio detector circuit is shown
in figure 4. Although a similar discriminator type transformer
greater than E4. Since E5 is the difference between E3 and E4, is used in the ratio detector, note that the connections of one
E5 will be positive. If the I.F. signal is above 10.7 Mc., conditions diode are reversed as compared to the discriminator circuit in fig-
will be reversed and E4 will be greater than E3. E5 will now be ure 3. As before, El and E2 are equal when the 1.F. signal is 10.7
negative. Mc. El will be greater than E2 when the 1.F. signal is below
10.7 Mc. and E2 will be greater than El when the I.F. signal is
Since the I.F. signal varies above and below 10.7 Mc. at the higher than 10.7 Mc.
audio modulation rate (it carries the same modulation as the
original transmitter signal), the positive and negative output If the total signal voltage across L2 and Cl be considered,
voltages from the discriminator will conform to the audio modula- diodes DI and D2 are connected in a series rectifier circuit. The
tion wave form. E5 is then amplified and reproduced as sound. load for this circuit consists of RI and R2 in series. Load voltage
E6 is developed across these two resistors and filtered by C4. Since
Assuming the I.F. signal is below 10.7 Mc., E5 will be a positive C4 has a capacity of 4 or 5 Mfd., E6 is essentially a D.C. voltage.
voltage equal to the difference between E3 and E4. If the signal Since variations in amplitude are filtered out by C4, E6 is pro-
amplitude were to increase at this time (as it might due to a noise
portional to the average I.F. signal strength. Point "Y" is the
electrical mid -point of this circuit and is grounded.
6
So far, the circuit from the center tap of L2, through L3 and to The voltage at point "X" is determined by the ratio between
point "X", has been disregarded. This is permissible when con- E3 and E4. The ratio between E3 and E4 is determined by the
sidering a 10.7 Mc. input signal since the signal voltages El and frequency deviation of the I.F. signal input. The sum of E3 and
E2 are equal only for this condition. The diodes then pass E4 must be equal to E6 (series voltages E3 and E4 are paralleled
equal currents and current can flow from the bottom side of icross E6). Since E6 is proportional to average signal strength,
12, through D2, through R.2 and RI, through DI and back through
12. No current flow will take place between center tap of L2'and
point "X". C2 and C3 having equal capacity are connected in
series across the load resistors RI and R2. They will charge up
4
to equal voltages, E3 and E4 respectively. The electrical mid -point
of this capacitive circuit, point "X", will be at ground potential. TO IF.
(Resistive center tap "Y" is groundid. Therefore, capacitive LI
center tap "X" must be at ground potential). Output voltage ES
is zero. AUDIO OUTPUT
When the I.F. signal is below 10.7 Mc., El will be greater than Fig. 4. Ratio Detector Circuit
E2. C2 will then charge through Dl to a higher voltage (this amplitude variations being filtered out by C4, E3 and E4 will be
center connection now plays a vital part in the operation of the unaffected by amplitude variations (such as might be caused by
circuit). Since E2 is a smaller voltage, C3 will charge through noise signals). Therefore, output voltages E5 is purely a function
D2 and assume a charge that is less than that of C2. Therefore, of input signal frequency. The ratio detector is, therefore, in-
E3 and E4 are proportional to voltages El and E2, respectively. herently insensitive to amplitude modulated noise signals and
Although E3 is greater than E4, their sum is still equal to E6 provides noise rejection without the use of a limiter.
(due to the parallel circuit arrangement), point "X" is negative Since noise rejection does not depend on limiter action, a
with respect to point "Y" and ground. Output voltage ES is ratio detector provides noise -free reception of weak signals. For
negative. When the I.F. signal is above 10.7 Mc., E2 is greater this same reason, the receiver is relatively quiet when tuning
than El, E4 is greater than E3, and ES is positive. E5 varies from one station to another. Due to the fact that a limiter is not
positive and negative in accordance with the I.F. signal modula- used with a ratio detector, elaborate and expensive R.F. and I.F.
tion wave form. amplifiers are unnecessary.
ADMIRAL 9A1 R ECEIVER CIRCUIT

Due to the unusual nature of some portions of the circuit, and a very low impedance at the operating frequency since this
the fact that their function may not be too apparent, examination frequency is far removed from the resonant frequency of the un-
of the circuit prior to servicing will simplify the task of locating used windings. Therefore, they have little effect on the operation
trouble. This is the purpose of the following information on the of the circuit.
function of various portions of the circuit. Although it does not cause difficulty in tracing the operation
of the circuit, it is important to note that CH4 and CIO form a
Grounded -Grid R.F. Amplifier series resonant circuit at 10.7 Mc. Since this series resonant cir-
cuit is effectively connected from plate to ground on the RF
The input signal is introduced between grid and cathode in amplifier, it acts as an IF wave trap for FM operation. This pro-
any amplifier circuit. It is conventional to apply the signal be- vides excellent rejection of any strong 10.7 Mc. signals which
tween grid and ground. The cathode is then grounded at signal might be present in the input circuit of the receiver. (It is
frequencies. If the grid is grounded, the signal can just as well desirable to detune this trap for FM -IF alignment.)
be applied between cathode and ground. This is the circuit
arrangement of a grounded -grid RF amplifier.
FM Second IF Amplifier, AM Second Defector
Since the cathode circuit of a vacuum tube has a low character-
istic impedance, the grounded -grid amplifier has a low input im- A 6BA6 tube is used as a second IF amplifier for FM opera-
pedance and provides a satisfactory match for a folded dipole tion. Self -bias is developed in the grid resistor (R15 and R16 in
antenna. This eliminates complicated antenna coupling devices. series) of this stage. Since this DC bias voltage is dependent on
signal strength, it is used for AVC purposes.
Due to the low impedance and inverted nature of the input In the AM setting of the band switch, plate and screen voltages
circuit of the grounded -grid amplifier, feedback which might re-
sult in oscillation, is unlikely. This permits the use of a triode are removed from this tube. The grid and cathode of this tube then
tube. The use of a triode tube greatly reduces circuit noise in function as an AM second detector (diode) and AVC tube in a
comparison to that present in a pentode amplifier stage. A triode conventional manner.
RF amplifier circuit provides excellent circuit stability without
the use of tricky circuits or adjustments. Ratio Detector
In AM reception, the transmitter signal varies in amplitude in
Band -Switching accordance with the sound being transmitted. The second detector
There is little that is unusual about the operation of the band of the receiver converts these amplitude variations into an audio
switch in the FM position. Due to the fact that some of the FM signal that is a duplicate of that used to modulate the trans-
components are not removed from the circuit in the AM setting of mitter. In the case of FM, the transmitter frequency is made to
the switch, it is rather difficult to trace the operation of the circuit. vary in accordance with the sound to be transmitted. These fre-
For AM operation, C7 is still in the circuit. Due to a relatively quency variations are again converted into an audio signal by the
low capacity, it does not bypass the signal around the RF ampli- discriminator or ratio detector in an FM receiver.
fier grid (but acts as a small portion of the tuned circuit capacity). The conventional discriminator has the disadvantage of being
L4 is also left in the circuit and is in series with the feed to the sensitive to amplitude variations as well as to variations in fre-
RF grid. It, like C7, has no appreciable effect due to its low quency. Amplitude variations, such as might be introduced by
electrical value. A shunt feed system is used on the RF amplifier noise signals, can be removed by the use of a limiter circuit ahead
grid, R3 being the grid return resistor. of the discriminator. However, the input signal to the limiter must
C13 and L5 remain in series across the signal grid of the con- exceed a certain minimum amplitude before limiter action takes
verter stage for AM operation. They have no appreciable effect on place. Therefore, the limiter -discriminator type circuit does not
the circuit since C13 has a very low capacity. C14 is also across provide noise rejection on weak signals.
this grid circuit but it is also a very small capacity. The effect Since the ratio detector is relatively insensitive to amplitude
of these circuit components is merely that of added capacity. variations, it can be used without a limiter stage. It provides noise
rejection on weak as well as strong signals. This is the reason
The band switch shorts the primary of the first IF transformer for the use of the ratio detector in preference to the limiter -dis-
that is not in use (the FM first IF transformer primary is criminator type circuit.
shorted out for AM operation). This prevents the production of
undesired frequencies in the plate circuit of the converter. The
unused IF transformer windings which remain in the circuit have
7
Fig. 8. VOLTAGE DATA ° 1.F.
0 0
l\itt station tuned in. Dial turned to high frequency end. 0.. SW4 0
0
Fig. 9. Simplified Schematic, Phono only
\ oltages measured with a vacuum -tube voltmeter. 11 0
'Voltages measured between point indicated and chassis. R34
Readings with bandcwitch in F.M. position. RI2
ri OUTPUT
T7
6AC0 C29 6SJ7 R31 6V6 M4 MS,
6SJ7 o -.8* 6AL5 * 06BA6
0 6AC * 1-4
0 0 *80 80 86 C41
0 RID
R23
0 70
1
R24 C42
100 6AC 6 A.C. 0 5
R27
0 0 100 0 R26
0
*90 -5.2*
250 * 250 0 C47_ ISMFACZASW
*190 268
250 13 -.8 I I IT C43E-,
6 -7 6 R21q
AC
0 C50
AC 0 0 A.C. C46-1- -±-C44
6 0 0 0 0 0
AC SW7 SWITCH OPEN WHEN TONE CONTROL
6V6 6BA6 6BA6 6SB7-Y R33 TURNED FULLY COUNTER -CLOG WISE.
`Zero or prac ically zero if measured with band switch in phono position. TO Me
RF CONVERTER 1ST. LB 2ND.DET.
6BA6 6S87 -Y 6BA6 6BA6
Ti
C13
C21 yo
C19
r
TR
L L__
L2
C25
R3
c3cd.
Fig. 10.
O
FRONT
OSC
o I .00 SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC, AM ONLY
SVO 4
o o
SW3
0 e .44
0 AUDIO
0 SW5
R34
,L3
C23.
it 65J7
REAR
POWER SUPPLY OSC.

SW3 R23
T6
R
R27
TO R26
DIAL BULBS
MAZDA '47
C4L_ 1717...5.4%4W
CH7 C43=
2 ND. IF 1ST If G.G.RF R.F CONY 26
6V6 6SJ7 GALS 6646 6846 6866 6846 6567-T lErl 11T C44
C46; 0-
SVIT:SWiTCH OPEN WHEN TONE CONTROL
R33 TURNED FULLY COUNTER-CLOCKW SE.
151
CHASSIS 9A1 MODEL 7C73
COILS, TRANSFORMERS, ETC.

CHI .. Choke, F.M. Antenna AB 103-33
rc
0 CH2 .. Choke, Grounded Grid Cathode AB 103-35
0-
o CH3 .. Choke, Grounded Grid Plate AB 103-35
CH4 .. Choke, R.F. Plate AB 103.36
-1 CH5 .. Choke, A.M. Oscillator Cathode.AB 103-1
o .ex
o tLt CH6 .. Choke, F.M. Oscilator Cathode. AB 103-34
CH7 .. Choke, R.F. Filament...Consists
sr of approximately 8 turns of
=-20 solid hookup wire wound
around condenser C51
CH8 .. Choke, Filter 74A 9
LI ... Antenna, F.M. Folded Dipole A8 128
L2 ... Antenna, A.M. (13') 95A 18-1
L3 ... Coil, A.M.Antenna (less slug) AC 105-2
L4 ... Coil, F.M.-R.F. (less slug) AA 122
15 ... Coil, F.M. Converter (less slug) AA 122
L6 ... Coil, A.M. Converter (less slug).AB 100-1
L7 ... Coil, F.M. Oscillator (less slug). AA 123
1.8 ... Coil, A.M. Oscillator (less slug). AC 101-:
When Ordering Slugs Specify Color Code
Slug, Iron Core (F.M.-Osc., Cony.,
& R.F. .71B 1-19
Slug, Iron Core (A.M.-Osc., Conv.) 7111 1-20
Slug, Iron Core (A.M.-Antenna) 71B 1-21
SW1.. Switch, Antenna (Second from
front) 76C 11-3
SW2.. Switch, R.F. (Fourth from front).76C 11-5
SW3.. Switch, Oscillator (Third from
front) 76C 11-4
5W4.. Switch, I.F. (Farthest from front)76C 11.6
W t0 COILS, TRANS.,ETC., Cont.
,
"t Description Part No.
inCD
Symbol
- --VVVre SW5.. Switch, Audio (Closest to front).76C 11-2
-7fjrAV. Band -Switch Shaft Assembly...76C 11-1
Set Screw, x y4
Spacers for Shaft Assembly
lA 5-54
29A 4-4
000 ., SW6.. Switch (On -off)
SW7.. Switch (Tone control)
Part of R23
Part of R26
ti Transformer, 1st I.F. (F.M.).... 72B 24
Transformer, 2nd I.F.(F.M )....725 26
0
Transformer, Ratio Detector....728 27
14 .. Transformer, 1st I.F. (A.M )... .728 25
TS Transformer, 2nd I.F. (A.M.)... 725 23
Slog (For TI, T2, T3, T4, T5) 71C 1-22
Transformer, Power 80B 2
Transformer, Output 98A 22
Speaker (12" P.M.) and Output
Transformer 78B 21
TUNER PARTS
Description Part No.
iiar, HI
E
Tuning Shot,
Slug Travel Bracket, Bushing and
Roller Ass, (front)
28A 17
.A1396
Slug Travel Bracket, Bushing and
uII
-0 ,..i
Li
w
Roller Assy. (rear)
Brass Guide Rod (Tuner)
Speed Nut (for Guide Rod)
41398
?8A 7-2
2A In.1.59
EC 0 Cam and Hub for Tuner (front) A1400
a 6 Cam and Hub for Tuner (rear) A1467
0 Spring, Bearing Takeup 19A 16
I Cable, Drive (for Corn and Hub) 95A 15-1
Spring, Coil (for Cam ard Hub) 19B 1.14
Bat -elite Plate for slug mounting
(1.11" x 23/.,") 32A 36
Bracket (for slug -mounting,
O bakelite plate) 15A 226
Slug -Adjusting Screw 27A 4
Drum and Hub on Tuner Shaft
(includes 1" drum and 3.1,(" drum) A1401
DIAL PARTS
Pointer Shaft 28A 19
Drum and Hub Assembly (Pointer Shaft).01388
Dial Cord (100 inches) 50A 1-3
Spring, Dial Cord (2 used) 19B 1-5
iHh Dial Scale & Indicator Assembly 41404
Indicator Link 15A 176
w Indicator Arm & Hub
u.
(on Band Switch Shaft) A1405
a co Piet Bulb r47 81A 1-8
tD Socket, Dial au% 82A 3-9
Dial Pointer A1477
Dial Escutcheon and Window
(less rectangular insert) 23E 20
Dial Escutcheon Insert
(Approx. 21/2" x 33/4") 23C 25
a .1
um
lD
C52a.. 30 mfd., 350 Volts) 6-22
C52b. 30 mfd.. 350 Volts(Electrolytic67C
L_
9
RESISTORS
Symbol Description Part No.
RI.... 100 Ohms, 1/2 Watt 60B 8-101
R2.... 330 Uhms, 2 Watt 6DB 8.331
R3.... 470,000 Ohms, V2 Watt 608 8-474
R4.... 39,000 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14393 4' 1,1
85.... 4,700 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14-472 Q
R6.... 33,003 Ohms, /2 Watt 40B 8-333
R7.... 47,003 Ohms, 1/2 Watt
R8.... 18,000 Ohms, 2 Watt
60B 8-473
60B 20-183
C
R9.... 120,000 Ohms, % Watt 60B 8-124
R10... 18,000 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14.183 O <
R11 ... 22,000 Ohms, 1 Witt 60B 14-223 oW
R12... 120,000 Ohms, 1/2 Watt 608 8-124
R13... 100,000 Ohms, Watt 60B 8-104
R14... 470,000 Ohms, '2 Watt 60B 8.474
R15... 220,000 Ohms, t/2 Watt 60B 8-224
R16... 82,000 Ohms, 1 Watt 608 8-823
R17... 8,200 Ohms, 2 Watt 603 20-822 11
R18... 2,200 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14-222

R19... 390 Ohms, -±-5%, /2 Watt 608 7-391 1-I
R20.. 27,000 Ohms, 1/2 Watt 60B 8-273
R21... 6,800 Ohms, ±5%, 1/2 Watt 60B 7-682
R22... 6,800 Ohms, ±5%, 1/2 Watt 60B 7.682
R23... 1 Megohrn Volume Control &
on -off switch SW6. Tapped at
300,000 and 600,000 Ohms 758 3-4
R24. 4.7 Megohms, 1/2 Watt 60B 8-475
R25. 47,000 Ohms, 1,'2 Watt 60B 8-473 2 co
R26. 2 Megohms Tone control 40
& D.P.S.T. switch 5W7 75B 1.14
R27. 10,000 Ohms, 1,2 Watt 60B 8-103
R28. 470,000 Ohms, 1/2 Watt 608 8-474
R29. 100,000 Ohms, 1/2 Watt 6011 8-104 Ea I 009 0
030. 470,000 Ohms, 12 Watt 608 8-474 11
R31. 2.2 Megohms, 1/2 Watt 6013 8-225
R32. 390 Ohms, 1 Wart .608 14-391
R33. 390 Ohms, 2 Watt .60B 20-391
R34 100 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14-101
`1(-111 2
CONDENSERS .A0V.
Cl .. 1000 mmfd., Mica 65B 5-33 W s0
C2.. .01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper. 64B 1-25
C3.. 35 mmfd. ±2%; 0 temp. t7,
coeff.; ceramic 69B 6-14
Cl.. 27 mmfd. -1-1 mmfd.; 0 temp
65B 6-17
CS..
coeff. ceramic
500 mmfd., Mica 6513 5-27 I I
-==
.
C6.. 3-40 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 12-5 -I 99 41
C7.. 3-12 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 22-1 1-1
I
1'1
C8..
C9..
200 mmfd., Mica
35 mmfd. -±2%; 0 temp.
55B 5-21
Li--If" I I "
coeff.; ceramic 658 6-14 L__J
C10. 40 mmfd. -L-2%; 0 temp.
coeff.; ceramic 658 6-22
C11. 12-170 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 12-1
C12. 300 mmfd., Silver Mica 65B 1-24
C13. 25 mmfd. ± 1 mmfd.; 0 temp.
coeff.; ceramic 65B 6-15
,
C14. 3-12 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 22-1
C15. 50 mmfd. ±2%; 0 temp.
C16. 3-12 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 22.1
C17. 200 mmfd. .±3-r; --.00033
coeff; ceramic 658 6-20
C18. .005 mfd., 600 Volts, Pope- 64B 1.12
C19. 100 mmfd. ±10%; -.00075
temp. coeff.; ceramic 658 6-19 11 tiro
O
C20. 5000 mmfd., Ceramic 658 9-53 Qom
C21. 3.40 mmfd., Trimmer 66A 12-5
C22. 27 mmfd. ± 1 mmfd.; 0 temp
C23... 180 mmfd. ±5%; -.00033
temp. coeff.; Ceramic 658 6-23
C24... 2500 mmfd., Mica 65B 5-37
C25... .01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 64B 1-25
C26... 01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 64B 1-25
C27... .01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 648 1-25
C28... .10 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 64B 1.20 o 4 Z
C2?... .2 rnfd, 400 Volts, Paper 648 1-19 13:37
64B 1-32 to
C30... .05 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper ca
C31... 200 mmfd , Mica 65B 5-21 o
C32... .55 mfd., 250 Volts, Paper
C33... .05 mfd., 200 Volts, Paper
648 1-22
64B 1-22
O
; .11 '1'1
1-
3a.
C34... 100 mmfd. ±10%; -.00075
temp. coeff.; Ceramic 658 6-19
C35... 100 mmfd. ±10%; -.00075 3 r. az
temp. coeff; Ceramic 658 6-19
C36... 4 mfd., 150 Volts, Electrolytic 670 4-2 t.C1
44(
C37... .002 mfd., 6110 Volts, Paper 648 1-14 (13
C38... .005 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 648 1-12 4.0
C39... )000 mmfd., Mica 65B 5-33
C40... 500 mmfd., Mica 65B 5-27
C41... .555 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 64B 1.12
C42... .505 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 64B 1.12
C43... .n5 mfd., 200 Volts, Paper 648 1-22
C44... .05 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 648 1-32
C45... .01 mfd., 405 Volts, Paper 648 1-25 00 nP 0
C47... .005 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 648 1-12
C49... .502 mfd., 600 Volts, Paper 648 1-14
C50a.. 20 mfd., 250 Volts
C50b . 30 mfd., 350 Volts I Electrolytic.67C 7.7
C51... .01 mfd., 400 Volts, Paper 648 1.25
10
Chthilied PRELIMINARY ALIGNMENT STEPS CHASSIS 9A1 MODEL 7C73
With the gang closed, the lower edge of the pointer

should the shaft. See Fig. 1 for correct drum position.
be at the dotted position shown in Fig. 1. That is, the lower In the wide open position, the roller on the slug tuning plat -
edge of the pointer should be at the upper tip of the AM pear -form must be as shown in dial stringing diagram, Fig. 2.
shaped opening in the dial scale. If the pointer is in different
position, move it by hand while keeping the gang closed. With the gang wide open, all slugs should be P/i inches out
of their coil forms. If there is any serious deviation or if there
Check the set screws that hold the tuning drum to the shaft to has been any tampering, turn the adjusting screws until this
see that they are tight and that the drum has not slipped on distance is corrected.
FM IF AND RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT

Solder output indicator leads in place and keep them well FM antenna disconnected during alignment
separated from signal generator leads and chassis wiring.
While peaking IF's, keep reducing signal generator out- Band switch in FM position (red signal at MC on dial)
put so VTVM reading is approximately +1.5 volts DC
with exception of Step #5 Speaker must he connected during alignment
I.F. SLUG INFORMATION
To avoid splitting the slotted head of the powdered iron of the coil form, it will be necessary to remove the other
core tuning slug in the I.F. transformers, use a screw -driver tuning slug on the opposite side of the I.F. can. Then, using
with a blade 1A" wide for I.F. alignment. a thin rod and screw -driver, "jockey" the dislocated slug
until it re-engages the threads in the coil form. Since this
Under normal operating conditions, mis-alignment of slug- is a difficult operation, care should be exercised as outlined
tuned circuits with age is slight. Therefore, re -alignment of above in paragraph and this difficulty will be avoided.
the I.F. transformers should be accomplished by only a slight
adjustment of the slugs. Do not turn a slug in an extreme If the iron core slug should become stripped or if the
amount or it will fall into the center of the coil form. slotted head should become rounded or cracked, it may be
Always try to adjust by first turning slug out. Should an removed by removing the opposite slug and forcing the
I.F. tuning slug be turned in too far and fall into the center defective slug out with a thin screw -driver.
Steps 1 and 2 may be omitted if set is not badly out of alignment so signal comes through in Step 3
Before proceeding, be sure to follow all steps listed above. under "Important Preliminary Alignment Steps."
Connect Generator Receiver Adjust as Follows
Output Indicator and Special Connections (very carefully)
Signal Generator Frequency Dial Setting
Thru .01 cond. Connect 3300 ohm carbon resistor across second - "A" (ratio detector primary)
10.7 MC Tuning aries of both FM -IF transformers. Connect
to 2nd IF grid
1
(Pin #1 of unmodu- gang VTVM (DC probe) from point "W" to ground. for maximum VTVM.
reading on
lated. wide open (See Figure 19.)
____
6BA6 2nd I.F.).
Thru .01 cond. Iron cores "B" and "C" (2nd
2
to 1st IF grid " . Same as above. IF trans.) for maximum
(Pin #1 of reading on VTVM.
6BA6 1st I.F.) .
Iron cores D and E for maxi -
To FM antenna Same as above. In addition, connect a 50 mmfd.
condenser in parallel with C10 to detune the IF mum
B on VTVM. Re -adjust A,
terminals. (Do " ,, , C.D E for maximum.
3 not feed signal rejection trap consisting of CH4 and C10. (See (Keep reducing generator out -
into converter note at bottom of page.) This condenser MUST put to keep VTVM at 1.5
grid.) be removed after step 5. volts.)
a. Remove 3300 ohm resistors from IF transformers.
b. Reduce output of signal generator until VTVM reads exactly +1.5 volts DC.
c. Tune generator frequency above 10.7 MC until VTVM reads exactly +1.0 volt. Note exact
generator frequency. Extreme care in reading this is essential.
d. Tune generator frequency below 10.7 MC until VTVM reads exactly +1.0 volt. Note exact
4
0 generator frequency. Extreme care in reading this is essential.
e. Add generator frequency in step c to generator frequency in step d and divide by 2. The
result is the center frequency of the IF curve to he used in step 5. See example on page 10.
f. Tune generator frequency above and below 10.7 MC and note voltage reading on VTVM at
different frequency points until you have a good impression of the shape of the selectivity
curve. If you have two peaks as in Figures 17 or 18, note readings (voltage) of both peaks.
A selectivity curve that would require realignment is illustrated by Figure 18.
Center of IF
selectivity Iron core "F" (detector sec -
curve per Set pointer ondary) for zero voltage read -
step 4e to upper Connect VTVM (DC probe) from point "X" ing on VTVM. (The correct
5
above. See limit on to ground. (See Figure 19.) zero point is located between
"EXAM- dial. a positive and a negative
PLE" maximum.)
on p. 10
If any adjustments were very far off, it is desirable to repeat steps 3, 4 and 5.
Note: Condenser C10 is mounted parallel to the chassis on the position shown in figure 19. the correct terminal board lug is
hakelite terminal boar -I. Connect added 50 mmfd. condenser located on the corner nearest trimmer -G", and on the left side
between the terminal board lug (junction of CH4 and R5) and of the terminal board.
pin #1 of the 6BA6 (CG RF stage). With the chassis in the 11
C7hbreitai CHASSIS 9A1. MODEL 7C73
SETTING SIGNAL GENERATOR TO

CENTER OF IF SELECTIVITY CURVE
CAUTION: Due to the difficulty of setting a signal generator to
the accuracy required by this operation, extreme care must e
exercised in making each setting. Otherwise improper alignment
_h
0
10.7 M.C.
-V 1--
o IA
of the radio detector and consequent audio distortion will result.
EXAMPLE: (See Figs. 13 and 14) 10.64 M.C. 10.8 M.G. 10.64 M.C. 10.8 N.C.
Voltage reading in Step 4b is + 1.5 volts. FIGURE 13. FIGURE 14.
Generator frequency on low side of 10.7 MC for a reading
of +1 volt DC = 10.640 MC.
TYPICAL SELECTIVITY CURVES
Generator frequency on high side of 10.7 MC for a reading
of +1 volt DC = 10.800 MC.
Center frequency is obtained by adding 10.640 and 10.800, then
dividing by 2. For these readings it will be 10.72 MC.
Set generator frequency to 10.72 MC as this is center of CORRECT CORRECT CORRECT
selectivity curve as shown in Figure 14. INCORRECT
Note: Numerical vernier dial readings may be used instead of MC. FIGURE 15. FIGURE 16. FIGURE 17. FIGURE 18.
S R
(ANT) iosai (RF)
FM RF ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
0 0 AM. TRIMMER
CAPACITIES
Alignment of FM RF section will require re -alignment of AM RF section
due to common trimmer capacities during AM operation. AM RF
section can he aligned, however, without affecting FM alignment.
10 GO HO tiA TRIMMER
G.G.R.F) (osc.) I R.E)
Cqpnect Generator Receiver Output Indicator
Signal Dial and Adjust as follows
o
o
o
o
D
o
o
0-0-0
o
GeneratorSetting
Frequency Connections
PLACE 3300 OHM
PIN I A.M.
Thru 270 108.5 MCI- Tuning Connect VTVM Capacity trimmers "G",
RESISTORS ACROSS 68A6
F.M. I SECONDARIES Ist.LF IEs 6 ohms to (unmodu- gang (DC probe) from "H" and "I" for maxi -
WHEN ALIGNING FM ant. lated). wide open Point
"W" to mum reading on VTVM.
0 terminal. ground.
00 B
0 0 102 MCI- *Iron slugs "J", "K"
PH I 7 " (unmodu- 102 MC " and "L" for maximum
2nd.I.E lated). mum reading on VTVM.
O 0 (PRL) 108.5 MCt Tuning
012)1)- A RATIO 8 " (unmodu- gang " *Repeat Step #6.
O 0 DETECTOR lated). wide open
9 Alignment of the FM RF section will affect the AM band also so the AM RF
section must be realigned after the FM RF alignment.
* It is advisable that generator output be adjusted so that VTVM readings do not exceed
approximately +1.5 volts DC after peaking.
BOTTOM VIEW
t If your signal generator does not reach this frequency, use harmonics as described in
FIGURE 19. paragraph on "FM Alignment" .
F.M
0 ANT. AN.01.1 OT 0V
2 (R.F.) (OSC) (ANT) AM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
3 0 LOOP EM.ek 0..1 01-
Use regular output meter connected across speaker voice coil.
---. ANT (R.E) (OSC) (GG.R.E)
Be sure both the set and the signal generator are thoroughly warmed up before
starting alignment.
Turn receiver Volume Control full on.
Use lowest output setting of signal generator that gives a satisfactory reading
on meter.
0- EF Proceed in sequence as outlined below.
Connect Dummy Antenna Signal Receiver Adj. Trimmers
Signal Between Radio and Generator Dial in Following
1.1
Generator Signal Generator Frequency Setting Order to Max.
Set Band Switch to Broadcast position center) and be sure to fo low instructions
CIF under heading "Important Preliminary Al gnment Steps.' (See page 9). Loop antenna
can be disconnected from chassis in Steps 1. 2 and 3.
6SB7.Y
(Pin #8) MFD 455 KC Tuning gang
wide open M, N, 0, P
0- F RATIO DETECTOR
(SEC)
FM. 2
To loop ant.
terminal #3
Direct
connection 1605 KC Tuning gang
wide open Q, It
To loop ant. Direct 1300 KC
3
terminal #3 connection 1300 KC T, U
Set Receiver Chassis on table next to back of cabinet. Connect
Loop Antenna to Receiver.
To loop ant. 10 MMFD (Or wrap sev- Tune in
TOP VIEW terminal #3 eral turns of generator 1605 KC signal S
12 FIGURE 20. 5
To loop ant. lead around white loop
terminal #3 lead.) 1300 KC Tune in
signal V
'Vendje7adio
COPYRIGHT 1947 BENCH% AVIATION CORPORATION
ea 55° pso -109
MODEL 847-B B 9 A 6e.
10.
1
fa °ea ida '12b

s
:lin: 113B
92 95
99 it..1.1NCIP 911 1132 105 1137
MOOtilaTiOes
0
OFF ON TREBLE
VOLUME TONE
BASS
ElEICIEICI
MANUAL -I
P HOF
AM
RANGE
M 0
TUNING
Controls - -The various controls are shown in the above drawing.
osc
ANT
0
®®
0-0
A
540
925
650
1250
650
250
®,WI MAN
900
1550
0_7
900
1550
KCS KCS KGS KCS KCS
Pushbuttons --The adjustment position of the pushbutton assembly is
shown below. Pushbutton operation is provided by rotating the band
switch to the center position and depressing the desired Pushbutton.
The extreme right hand pushbutton is depressed when MANUAL tuning
operation is desired.
Access to the adjustment screws is obtained by pulling the Push-
buttons off the shaft vertically. The osc. and antenna adjust-
ment screws, with the Pushbutton frequency ranges, is shown in
the above diagram.
TO RIT TO R6
CIRCUITS USED ON EARLY MODELS
T
RIB R 15
I MEG
54 6 TO RI3
rc5 039
Cpl 33
TO 1214
T .02 100
Values of RI5 & R33 Changed Test Socket Connection Changed R37 Not Used
S4 RI5
SI 52 S3
FRONT FRONT GND FRONT R33 -LOOK FRONT
C30 PROMO
AM OSC. TERM*2 PLUG
74 IST I F.
PIN *6 PB RIB -I MEG.
7H7 SW ITC TERM * 5 G59-.01
1ST 1F R 33-100K
TERMa4 TERM *6 R15
1ST. IF 1ST I F 2.2 MEG.
TERM *5 -45 PAW

1ST IF EG
PIN *6 GN
TERM ,14 2 7F
1ST. LE
SI S4
REAR REAR
TERM 44
1ST. I.F. T4
AM OSC.
TERM Y3
1ST. I.F. PIN *4
TERM *2
1ST. I.F.
7FB
BAND SWITCH SECTIONS 13
CONDITIONS OF MEASUREMENTS
LINE VOLTAGE 117 A -C ZERO SIGNAL INPUT VOLTAGE
VOL CONT MIN SOCKET TO COMMON GROUND D -C AT A -C AT
RESISTANCE 20,000 .0/V 1,000 .11/V
AM DEMODULATOR 8 POWER
FM -R F AMP CONVERTER IL, I F AMP IF288 AMP FM DEMODULATOR Ir AUDIO AMP RECTIFIER
6AG5 o 7F8 7A H7 7AG7 6H6 6507 6V6 GT 5Y3 GT
210 0 NC 0
6/-51171- 20 i
§63AC,H
M., 20 210 __0_ 275VAC NC
P/2767--( AM 80 V.- ' 0 NC 0 G3 NC..... p, MEG - 200.-. 7
KI 2 p2 250243 K G2 Gi. 470 K 1. r,71
60 F 'o
. 0 (5) -L112-n ._.-..1___ (1) 100 NC
C' 29- .,- _?..%2_
244 K 12 MEG 2441( 551 1
NC -(02---K
IN_ g75 V Ac
"-Cr" n't 23(411 61 (3 460K 2451 NC NC 200
G.
_g_._ K
0
_______
-9-H
0
(I) fl P 2.129_p c
v4 O iI.._630C F .9 9 NC
0 47 244 603A(H 0 10 MEG 0 fil6& Hg- 245 NC
H
-..-x5-,91 AM 3V G G __LIA&,H 6.3A(/H.,2 s 0 0 ,S K2 20
1.2 MEG FM 2V /0 22400K 0
\S-. 0 0 0 23 K 0 NC
22 K AM 224VK
HAI4-22,4EG
FM 0
AM - 455 KC IF FREQUENCY FM -10.7 MC
F.M. ANT
IN CABINET 0
ri (52 B)
CA:) R9 CIB PART OF TRIMMER
IJT2 1 2 470
C> 1 .05 T ASSEMBLY C4513
o BI r
LJ C> C5 %t2 C57- 17
2-20, 0027 .05 C 43a
5.6] ..;+.4.50 20 47 K
R5 1 R14
1-1 C16 .,b - C2OT c07%0-;007- R"
R23 r .22T° tg 230. -°5 220 K
68 K C46 47 C52
J "Ii C 41
15 / C 59® CSI 0:-L1
6c \ 6 C43b 6). . 0 I 0
/C44 C 45 R4 C7 .01 R 31 C 448'
/ 45 680 6800 T5 10 20 116
/ C58 4 R17 220 K
R18 / 409 55
L I MEG 20 00
-
A8 C 38
C6 _J
0 DT0
__EsfT/
0154 220 45 4
EXTERNAL ? R300 JACK 7AG7
ANTENNA JI C 23 C 21
330 3 1 6
87 6 6H6 001 ..F26 646
7F8 1,1 020o
, 7 c 22
0 .1.6°830 0,k S1A/ 3..~8_,Ta .001
EXTERNAL
RI ASIA -11M
GROUND 1800 R2 19 TEST
RIO SOCKET
1000 R12 R29
I MEG. 05 221 C42
220 2 3 33
B7 A2 ,00
AM O T R 13 0241
LOOP 4 37
0 A 0 -= 2.2 MEG. To.,
J6 3 MF
_C-
(Sae)
R3
NOTES
O FM 22 K 5
1
ALL CAPACITANCE IN WHOLE

NOS. IN MMF-THOSE IN DEC. AM C> C lir
ao
OSC.
C9 ... 100
C8T 02-1-15-1-2-10-- r .01 )1
-2 A10 1
-
_ IMEG
me,
-
NOS. IN MF.-ALL RESISTANCE 220 ,
OSC. 3_ r 1010
IN OHMS UNLESS OTHERWISE e / Cal15
--- _L
STATED. K 1000 0 1 R37
f (---0 A4 100 K C49
0. 0 C 36
.05
0 TO I
1-- R27 R28 .006 C30

FM c) - BAND (T 10) 0-,A.A2e) R 21 .002 1119
AM 04.-0- i SWITCH ...40Ar040.A0r, (S4 A) 100 K 220K T9
I POSITIONS 55 R20 4W
__I I PHONO. 0 C 31
-__I 36 TONE .006
D C
MANUAL /
7, fr A-
470K C 27
Cs -7) I 7 -..-r C 29
C 32 .00 6
----rrO 6507 .01 SPKR.
20 MF C 25
C34 i3=i) 6
20 MF J3 .006
20 MF
/C13 / 1.001
C 35 2 MEG
/420- / 5
/ 8 00 C6 c63 T 005 5Y3 C26 Ofri 6V6
/ C6:2 62. ASSEMBLED,Ii
CIO / c,2 /
I t., TOGETHER -----, 220 C47 GT
ms6 'PL.6 7-17 L8/ L9 r* 25
C60
1 R 24 MF 11 25
470 K 270
4-75 C l a 4-75 C1,1470 ' (L33)
1 ILI° 8 8 4
1125- 900 - 650`650- 540- .7 oa Y. T .01 nin
r...
1600 500 1250 1250 925 2 Oa, 4.-
KC KC KC KC KC 10 ul 'i ,
0_L, fa>g0- 2, ,
9:, g 93
BROADCAST BAND ALIGNMENT
Rotate gang condenser until full closed. Set pointer to reference mark.
Connect output meter across voice coil on lowest scale.
Signal Generator amplitude modulated.
Rotate volume control full ON. Keep generator output low as practical.
Band
Dial Adjust
Apply Thru To Switch Setting
Position
455 KC .05 mfd. Term. #2 gang AM -mid- Gang cond. IF slug, C4I8, C43A,
cond. & chassis position full open C438, C45A, C456 for
max outout
Bendix dummy Dummy loop plugged " 580 KC ref. CI3 for max. output
580 KC
loop ADOLOO in AM ant. socket mark
9n rear of chassis
. " 1475 KC ref. *C12,C10 for max.
1475 KC "
mark outvut
" Approx. 580 CI3 for max. output
580 KC "
KC ref. mark "Rock" gang during
'ustment
. " Check Calibration
965 KC "
KC ref. mark
580 KC " Approx. 580
" **Check Calibration "
KC raf mark
* Repeat 1475 KC and following 580 KC adjustment in rotation several times until receiver is
properly aligned.
sections.
** If calibration does not check within 10 KC, "knife" oscillator and antenna gang
BAND SWITCH TEST
PHONO AM -FM TONE
SOCKET
n
CHASSIS TRIMMER LOCATION
(.(6
TUNING fl,---
(74;)
1
PUSH
I I/11 BUTTONS
f:162
AM -4 55 KC IF
frOFF-ON
VOLUME
AM C4I B-4&,
I F AM SLUG ----0
-M.
A`F C401
FM-10.7 MC IF
1ST IF FM SIGNAL TEST JACK

I L _,../C 13
FM DETECTOR - CO
AM OSC PADDERADI
1 I OSC CONY
FM OSC 5
0
FM
GII OSC '&
,-
IF
012 -1 9 IF FM INPUT 6AG5 DEMODULATOR
FM .
I F AM INPUT
I I
3
*2 1
IST AUDIO
C5 R f0-
2ND. IF 411i, 6 4:110
1,11 TERM.R
04 FM (T) F T
GV6 )
N AMP FM \,____/
2ND IF OUTPUT RECT.
AM ANT TRIMMER
010 AC43A sC45A ,...--..s.
Am I AM e----
SC438------, SC45B
r----1
I I
GC42A Fm0C44A
FM I I
1
1,_~",i 49C428 0 cL-ri3-1
/ 0 2 N., TEST SOCKET is 4..NI I I 1
% "'LUG 1-.5
,,,,,,
/0 04 eEnto/x STOCK C6 61
T
-46 c/P 3002 IJ
AC
FM ANT AM ANT PHONO INPUT SPEAKER LINE
Oi MED JACK CORD
VT1/41/ SHOULD , TO LOOP ANTENNA CONNECTION
TOOK /00K PREFERABLY NAVESIG. GEN. ( ON SOCKET
/9 LOW RANGE c_DI
c);
ZERO CENTER c+
SCALE. A
I,' T V
OPA4
50 MICRO
GND 1 ij ' TO LOOP ANTENNA CONNECTION
ON SOCKET (CHASSIS CND)
4 AIMETER A.M
COIL FOR 6476 IS ;.7 MICRO -HENRY
TEST C/RCL//T FOR DEMODL/LRTOR
TRANSFORMER AL/GA/ME/VT 01 MED
300 OHM I/4w
HOT HOTSIDE- ANTENNA TERMINAL
11
TEST CIRCUIT FOR FM ALIGNMENT 30 vALUE OF TO BE

SIG. GEN." .ADJUSTED TOTHIS
OHM OUTPUTRESISTOR IMPEDANCE
....------.. - OF SIGNAL GENERATOR
GND SIDE OR CHASSIS

r,1 BENDIX RAD101 GND
F.M. DUMMY ANTENNA

Servicing Notes on 1E)47-19443 F. M. and Television Receivers
FM ALIGNMENT
For reference marks see Fig.
Rotate gang condenser fully closed and set pointer to reference mark
Trimming screwdriver must be 100% Insulated A - CW METER METHOD
Generator output - pure RF or amplitude modulated
VTVM must not be AC -DC, or with GND. connected to AC line or through resistor
Gen. Dummy Gen. To Band Sw. Pointer Special VTVM

Freq. Ant. Position Setting Conditions Adjust Remarks
Connections
10.7 .01 Term. #3 on FM -Full Short FM Test socket 1st IF -C40 Realign several times
mc. mfd gang & counter- osc.term. pins #1(,') 2nd IF-C42A to assure max. output
chassis clock- #5 to & #2 (-) C425 Signal may be fed into
wise chassis Low Scale 3rd IF-C44A "Test Jack" in 1st IF
for max.out- can for prel. align.
Put on VTVM of C44A,C42A & C428.
R
10.7 " "
pi
*Center of 3rd. IF -C446 "Alternate step #1
mc. jumper res- (C44A for max. output)
istors & To zero & step #2 (C446 for
test sock. reading on zero) several times
Pin #4 - VTVM to assure correct
Fig. #2. alignment
106 Std. FM ant " 106 mc. Remove Teat socket "*Osc.-C11 "Rock" tuning control
mc. FM input refer. short from pins #1 (10 RF -05 during alignment
Fig. term's. mark osc. term. & #2 (-) Ant -C4
#4 #5 Low scaly for max.out-
put on VTVM -
. . .
97 " Approx. " "Check Calibre-
mc. 97 mc tion
'
ref.
mark
90 " " " Approx. " "'Check Calibru-
mc. 90 mc. tion
refer.
mark
* See Fig. "Test Circuit for FM Alignment".

*1 A VTVM with a zero
center scale is very convenient for use in this alignment step. A50 microammeter may be
used in place of the VTVM, but is not as accurate.
*** The oscillator circuit has been designed to operate on the high freq. side of the incoming, signal. It is
possible to adjust the trimmer (CII) at 106 MC such that the osc. is operating on the image" or low
freq. side of the signal. To check the osc. (CII) adjustment, set sig. gen. to 84.6 MC, freq. modulated,
dial pointer at 106 MC. If signal is NOT heard, adjustment of CII is correct, but if signal J. heard,
osc. trimmer CII has been incorrectly-idjusted on the "image" frequency. Readjust CII to other setting
at 106 MC and recheck with gen. freq. at 84.6 MC. Signal MUST NOT be heard with pointer at 106 MC and
sig. gen., freq. modulated, set at 84.6 PC.
If calibration is not within reasonable tolerance at these points, the osc. coil inductance must be ad-
justed. If dial pointer reading is on low freq. side, inductance is too low, and turns must be compressed
slightly. If pointer reading is on high freq. side, osc. coil is too high and coil turns must be spread
slightly.
To check and adjust inductance of ant. and RF coils, tune recelver to 90 MC signal and observe AVC
reading. Insert iron core end of "tuning wand" into RF coil, at same time rocking tuning control to max.
AVC. If reading increases as wand Is inserted, RF coil inductance is too low and turns must be com-
pressed slightly. If reading decreases, reverse wand and insert metal end into coil, again rocking
tuning control to max. AVC. If reading decreases, (after iron core check), inductance is properly ad-
justed. If reading increases, inductance is too high and turns must be spread slightly.
Ant coil is checked and adjusted exactly like RF coil.
SET POINTER TO THIS MARK

--WITH CONDENSER GANG AT
MAXIMUM CAPACITY(
CLOSED)
55° :MO
SE40 KC 60. --t475 KC
AM
STANDARV 140
AM
90 MC ---
Fm
as° fa lb °Kid 120
106 MC
FM
970AC "965KC
FM AM
3 TURNS.
16 ALIGNMENT REFERENCE POINTS

TUNING SHAFT
Visual Method. FM ALIGNMENT
Dummy Generator Band SW. Special Dial VTVM Oscillo-
Gen.Freq. Gen. Mod. Adjust Remarks
Ant. to Position Conditions Setting Conn scope
10.7 MC Pure RF .05 High side FM -Max. Short Osc. Test No coon. 1st IF Adjust for max -
or mfd to Term. CCW. Stator- Socket C40 imum output on
Amplitude #3 Gang Term.#5 Pins 2nd IF low range of
Cond. Low to Chassis #I(+ C42A, VTVM - Realign
side to Gnd. 8(#2l-) C428 each Cond.
chassis Low 3rd IF several times to
Scale C44A assure max. out-
put.
Signal may be fed
into "test jack"
in 1st IF can
for Prelim.
Alignment of
SeJ4.4A.C42A&C428.
.
Approx. Freq.Mod. " " " No con- Connect 3rd IF "Adjust for max.
10.7 MC 60 Cy- nect ion vert. in- C448 symmetrical "S"
Adjust Sweep put to curve similar
until width Test to Fig. 5.
Ratio max. Socket Alternate adjs.
Detector possible Pins #4 of C44A & C44B
curve (should &Chassis to obtain Max
is cen- be 200 KC Gnd. desired curve.
tered Min)
on Horiz
Scope
Sweep
Line
106 MC " Std. FM Ant. " Remove 106MC No con- " FM **Adjust until
FM Terms's short from ref. nection Osc. "S" curve is
Fig.4 thru Term #5. mark CII centered on
dummy Hor i z. Sweep
scope line.
106 MC " " " " " " " FM RF Adj.for Max.
Trimmer height of "5"
C5. FM pattern -"rock"
Ant. tuning control
Trimmer at same time
C-4. to keep "S"
curve centered
on Scope.
97 MC " " " " Approx. " ***Check Cat -
97 MC ibration
ref. mark
. . . .
90 MC " Approx. " ***Check Cal -
90 MC ibration
ref. mark
* Some phase shift between the Signa Generator and the scope horizontal sweep may be encountered, resulting
in a double trace pattern, shown in Fig. 6. In some Oscilloscopes, provision is made for connecting this
phase shift directly in the oscilloscope circuit. If so, rotate the "phase shift" control until the curves
coincide as in Fig. 5. If no provision is made in the scope, the connection might be accomplished by in-
serting a condenser of suitable value in series with the signal generator "Synchronized Sweep Voltage"
output. The condenser value will depend upon the amount of phase shift and the horizontal input impedance
of the scope - approximate condenser range .01 to .1 mfd. See Fig. 7 for instrument connection diagram.
S. S.
See
*** If calibration is not within tolerance at these noints, the inductance of local FM oscillator coil, RF and
antenna coils must be adjusted.
NOTE: The latter operation is a very delicate and difficult procedure, and must be attempted only by tech-
nicians of considerable high frequency experience.
OSCELLOSCOAE
[Ai SIGNAL AKY

GENERATOR RECEIVER
TEST JACK
T NOR!
NOR : SGMAL mAT PE TAKEN 'ROM

popER L,AE KREOUEMCK SIGAAL
STA OUTAGEII
GENERATOR DOES NOT *AVE CAPACITOR
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 17

-C-ROSLEY- MODELS: 88TA, 88TC
F -M OSC. CORE
TO EXT. ANT. INTERLOCK PINS TO

TERMINAL POWER CORD
TO DIPOLE
ANT. TERMINALS
CHASSIS TOP VIEW SHOWING ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

0.7,0o yr. F Tool.
0. Muni Foos Nan 110
0..74. TOO
!`cr
1.110,
0F POOOOSOOTO
0 OF
S2r
j.:1- 4 IT=1-
10155,5
r17:
"ec:h
G.F.1.011 FO
18 =
Ind
ALIGNMENT CHART
Align- Type
ment Gen- Fre-
Se- erator quency Series
quence with
ToCurve
Signal Generator Output
Ran
Position of
Switch
Dial
Pointer
or
""" Var. Cond.
Adjust
Type of
Selectivity
Osc.
Fre-
quency
Remark,
1 AM 455 100 Mixer Grid AM Open A&B Single See Note 1

kc mmf. 6SH7 Peak
2 AM 1400 100 Stator Plates, AM 1400 kc. C Above See Notes 1 and 2
kc. mmf. Ant. Section
of Var. Cond.
AM 1400 220 Loop AM 1400 kc. D Above See Note 1.

kc. mmf. Primary
4 FM 10.7 30 2nd I.F. Grid FM Closed E See Notes 1, 3, 4. 5 & 6

mc. mmf. 6SH7
5 FM 10.7 30 1st I.F. Grid FM Closed F See Notes 3, 5 & 6.

mc. mmf. 6SG7
FM 10.7 30 F.M. Ant. FM Closed G See Notes 3, 5 & 6.

6
mc. mmf. Terminals '\..,
7 FM 98.0 *78 F.M. Ant. FM 98 mc. H&I Single See Notes 7 & 9
mc. ohm Terminals Peak
Dummy
8 Disconnect Generator. Connect Field FM 92 mc. J Adjust for null point. Set
Strength Meter.* Note 8.
9 If Trimmer (J) in Step 8 is turned more than % turn, repeat Step 7.
10 Repeat Step 8 if Step 9 was necessary.
11 FM 98.0 *78 F.M. Ant. FM 98 mc. K Adjust for maximum out

mc. ohm Terminals put.
Dummy
1. All Amplitude Modulated input signals are modulated 30% at 400 cycles with the High side of the signal
generator connected to receiver as indicated in the alignment chart. Connect the low side of signal genera-
tor thru a 0.1 mfd condenser to the receiver chassis.
2. Receiver should tune thru peaks at 540 and 1600 kc.
3. Sweep generator alignment. (For 10.7 mc. I.F. alignment use approximately 450 kc. sweep width).
4. Sweep generator output 0.1 to 1 volt R. M. S.
5. Connect high side of scope to discriminator transformer terminal at shielded lead wire junction. Connect
low side of scope to the receiver chassis.
6. Align for maximum peak amplitude. Peak separations should be 150 to 170 kc.
7. Disconnect scope. Connect output meter to voice coil (3.2 ohms).
8. It is important that the radiation balance trimmer be adjusted to the null point for proper operation of
the Frequency Modulation band. To check the null point, connect a Field Strength Meter across the
F.M. antenna primary trimmer.
9. (a) With the F.M. signal generator set to 98.0 megacycles, feed a signal, modulated with 400 cycles at
30% to the receiver as indicated in the alignment chart. Shunt the antenna primary trimmer with a
10 ohm carbon resistor and adjust trimmer (H) for maximum output.
(b) Place the 10 ohm carbon resistor across the F.M. antenna secondary trimmer and adjust trimmer (I)
for maximum output. Remove 10 ohm carbon resistor from secondary trimmer.
Copyright 1947. CROSLEY rision-AVCO Manufacturing Corporation 19
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST -MODELS 88TA, 88TC
Figures in ffrst column correspond to figures in Schematic Diagram
Item 49 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
No.
Part No. Description 60 39373-97 Resistor, 2.2 megohm, w.
51 39373-102 Resistor, 4.7 megohm, 1/2 w.
1 AC -137783 Transformer Amy., Antenna (F.M.) 52 W-139036 Resistor, 80 ohm (Wire Wound) l Two
2 AC -138819 Transformer Amy., let I.F. Resistor, 18 ohm (Wire Wound) (Section
3 AC -189094 Transformer Amy., 2nd I.F. 64 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
AC -139077 Transformer Amy., Discriminator 55 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
5 AW-138924 Coil Amy., Oscillator (Broadcast) 56 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper
6 AW-138950 Coil Amy.,Oscillator Mixer Coupling 57 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper
7 AW-138978 Choke Amy.,Plate (F.M. Osc.) 58 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper
8 AW-139056 Condenser Assy., .01 mid., 200 v., (shielded) 60 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper
9A AW-136720 Choke, R.F. Heater 1.... 61 39001-17 Condenser, .06 mfd., 600 v., paper
9B Choke, R.F. Heater J`''' 62 39001-17 Condenser, .06 mid., 600 v., paper
Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
10 AB -139118 Loop and Support Amy., Antenna 63 39001-17
11 Part of Item 1 Coil Amy. 64 39001-19 Condenser, .1 mfd., 600 v., paper
12A Part of Item 1 Coil }Two Section Amy. 66 39001-76 Condenser, .003 mfd., 600 v., paper
12B Coil }Tw 66 39001-80 Condenser, .02 mfd., 600 v., paper
13 AD -138246 Speaker 67 Part of Item 3 Condenser, 100 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
14A C-139028 Condenser, Variable) Two 68 Part of Item 3 Condenser, 100 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
14B Condenser, Variable( Section 69 Part of Item 2 Condenser, 100 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
15 B-137364 Transformer, Output 70 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
16A B-137781 Control, Volume (1 megohm) . 1 71 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
ASSY.
16B Switch, Power 72 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
39368-18 Control, Volume 73 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
{ 39370-2 Shaft, Plug, in 74 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
39369-1 Switch, Power 75 Part of Item 4 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
17 B-137782 Control, Tone (2 megohm) 76 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
39368-11 Control, Tone 77 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
18A B-137976 Condenser, 60 mfd., 200 v. 1 Four 78 Part of Item 10 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
18B Condenser, 50 mfd., 200 v. Section 79 C-137727-19 Condenser, 39 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
18C Condenser, 50 mfd., 150 v. Elect. 80 Part of Item 4 Condenser, 50 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
18D Condenser, 20 mfd., 25 v. Filter 81 C-137727-24 Condenser, 180 mmf., 600 v., ceramic
19 B-137986 Switch, Band Change 82 C-137727-28 Condenser, 51 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
20 W-48858 Bulb (Dial), Type 47, 6.3 v., .15 amp. 83 C-137727-37 Condenser, 10 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
21 39012-70 Iron Core, F.M. Oscillator Coil 84 Part of Item 4 Condenser, 10 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
22 AB -138971 Interlock Assy. 85 B-137499-5 Condenser, 600 mmf., 300 v., silver mica
23 C-132300-6 Cable and Plug Assy., Power 86 Part of Item 6 Condenser, 3.3 mmf., 500 v.
26 W-137143 Transmission Line, 75 ohm 87 W-139285 Condenser, 52 mmf., ceramic
26 W-139286 Coil, Oscillator (F.M.) 88 W-138268 Condenser, Trimmer
27 39373-9 Resistor, 47 ohm, 1/2 w. 89 C-136327-29 Condenser, Trimmer
28 39373-93 Resistor, 1.2 megohm, 12 w. 90 Part of Item 1 Condenser, Trimmer
29 39373-143 Resistor, 1000 ohm, 1 w. 91 Part of Item 1 Condenser, Trimmer
32 39373-33 Resistor, 1000 ohm, 1/2 w. 94 Part of Item 3 Condenser, Trimmer
33 39373-33 Resistor, 1000 ohm, 1/2 w. 95 Part of Item 3 Condenser, Trimmer
34 39373-33 Resistor, 1000 ohm, w. 96 Part of Item 2 Condenser, Trimmer
35 39373-33 Resistor, 1000 ohm, I/2 w. 97 Part of Item 2 Condenser, Trimmer
37 39373-54 Resistor, 10,000 ohm, 1 z w. 98 Part of Item 3 Condenser, Trimmer
38 39373-64 Resistor, 10,000 ohm, IA w. 99 Part of Item 3 Condenser, Trimmer
39 39373-64 Resistor, 33,000 ohm, 1/2 w. 100 Part of Item 4 Condenser, Trimmer
40 Part of Item 3 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, 1/2 w. 101 Part of Item 4 Condenser, Trimmer
41 39373-67 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, !4 w. 102 Part of Item 6 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, 2 w. I
42 Part of Item 4 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, IA w. 103 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper
43 Part of Item 4 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, 1A w. 104 39373-74 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, I w.
44 Part of Item 4 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, !/ w. 105 C-137727-8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
46 39373-84 Resistor, 330,000 ohm, 1/2 W. 107 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
47 39373-87 Resistor, 470,000 ohm, 1/2 w. 108 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, 1 2 w.
48 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w. 109 Part of Item 10 Resistor, 1 megohm, 4 w.
I -F AMPLIFIER AM. OECTECTOR 8 AVC FM DISCRIMINATOR
0 FM 2. I -F AMPL
---94 0 -
,94 NC
ES 05C
*A01471011 CAI
YAWNS #14014
=0
3
0: 0 0:
24 r34)0----- 94 _
V°P400
0 -- AN
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART 'MIXER
0
30 450 PI, AUDIO AMPL.
NOTES.
I HOTTOM THE Of TOM SOCKETS
2 11114210112 VOLTAGE ITH AN ITLECTAINHC VOL
POOH SOCKET LYE TO CHASSIS.
3 ALL VOLTAGES ARE THE SANE EON SC S IN SIECIPT
TO DELTA ICI, THIS IS TNT VOLTAGE
WITH SAND SWITCH IS THE FN. POSITION
4 LINE VOLTA* II/
5 NC SO CONNECTION
0^ OSCILLATOR 24 POWER OUTPUT RECTIFIER
H. 1I/J WINN, JUNCTION 0- 0
7 AC. VOLTAGE
CSOCKET VOLTAGE TO ..... CC 10%
AO
0404 1lL t. t12 NC
e4-0
i.
LA-NII
25 13 No Ir 526 10
- 95
Ass 67/6 ID: :Is T/G -62
r4:41":1 w j /r°4:0-),2
unremmignmag .00:`- ' -1°5
20
112 120
-CROSLE
Model: 87CQ and Revised Models: 86CR, 86CS
Pages 21 to 28.
Model 86CR-Walnut Cabine,t

and Albums.
Model 86CS-Mahogany Cabinet
Model 87CQ with doors. No albums.
TYPE: Eight -tube, three -band, Superheterodyne. Frequency Modulation Band: 10.7 mc.
FREQUENCY RANGE: Standard American Broad- POWER SUPPLY: 60 cycle a.c. only.
cast Band: 540 to 1600 kc. (Selector Switch to AM
position).
VOLTAGE RATING: 105-125 volts.
Short-wave Band: 9.45 to 11.9 mc. (Selector switch
at SW position). POWER CONSUMPTION: 85 watts maximum at
Frequency Modulated Band: 88.1 to 1107.9 mc., normal power supply voltage (117 volts), 20 watts
Channel 201 to 300 (Selector Switch at FM position). additional for record changer.
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY: Standard Ameri-
can Broadcast Band and Short-wave Band: 5825 POWER OUTPUT: 8 watts maximum at 3.2 ohm
and 167.5 kc. load.
NOTE: Models 87CQ, 86CR, 86CS, use the Model "K" Automatic Record Changer.
2nd A.M. MISER
RECTIFIER F.M.DETECTOR DISCRIMINATOR 1.F.AMPLIFIER A.M. 2nd I.F.T.-F.M. lot 1.F.AMPL.F.M. 1st I.F. TRANSFORMERS
TRARS. 10.7 MC 2nd I.F.AMPL.F,m. 1.1 SUS RC - 10.7 MC
10.71SC Set. -',1 dllitaria911, 10.7 11Ss (k.A or sm ' /JO I IF Pr, ',
300 25.5 SEC. ADJ.1 25 0 LINK AD T ADJUST. N
COOtt. O
0
1(:) 10"
I®
15825 AC Sec. 5825 IC P.I.
I
197.S KC
TA in T
f.tomogo Sac. Ad).
,
C.M.DET.-ARC.wlat A.F.AMPL. 43 I
, .....
f'147.6 IC hi., 1i1 -1:14:1111M1
NOTES: ADJUSTMENT F.M. MIXER
I. Bottom Rom of Sockets.
2. Voltage maseree hos socket
lags to ....... II
3. Voltage +calmed with an MiU S7141*
M OOING TM. NO'S
11.
Electronic Voltmeter.
Voltage ...... switch in .....
AM. malt.. .seal whore welled ltd
.
5.0 clime Switch in FM aoslhon.

Miring Junction. OUTPUT
9."
7.MC No nnett F.11.111T.111 NS.
C.C. Voltam.
11.
l'sN,..1C.CISC.CONE ADJ. SEC. MOEN 6:0
9. on voltam. aca ...... et eminal
ago ... ins voltage 117 rolt11-60 cycle f.M.ANT.TRAMS.
i?' piem-gn inV41:,=rgrammmer. 1st A 2ndOSC.A.M. PRI. TRIMMER
A:Awe t c ammo. OSCILLATOR F.N.
0
STKA
Ist 0 C1LLATON GNI WOOS 101 P411

S.W. ANT. SEC.
RAND
AM
F11E01)(11'
Mimeo.
VOLTS
-8.2
11% Zbe 13.5 TRIMMER
Se Minnow. -2.5
FM
i
Minim. -3.1
- - .
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART SHOWING BOTTOM ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

Copyright 1947_ CROSLEY Division-AVCO Manufacturing Corporation
21
ALIGNMENT EQUIPMENT
The following equipment is used as indicated in the alignment charts and alignment notes:
Signal Generators:
1. Amplitude Modulated Signal Generator with 400 cycle modulated signal to cover 167.5 kc. to 108 mc.
2. Frequency Modulated Signal Generator to cover 87 to 108 mc., with sweep to cover 10 to 30 kc. on narrow
band and 450 kc. on wide band (Scope alignment only).
Cathode Ray Oscillograph (Scope alignment only).
Meters:
1. Suitable Output Meter.
2. Field Strength Meter (Fig. 1). This meter may consist of a D.C. 100 microampere (full scale) meter, shunted
by a 1000 mmf. mica by-pass condenser; a crystal
rectifier connected in series with the meter and a 5 FOOT 75 OHM
GERMANIUM RECTIFIER
five foot, 75 ohm twisted, pair of leads. The open TWISTED PAIR
CRYSTAL
ends of the leads are connected to the dipole
antenna terminals. Connect condenser directly IO.ua. TO DIPOLE ANT.
across meter terminals, and crystal directly to one TERMINALS
1000 mmf
terminal of meter. Keep connecting leads as short as
Fig. I
possible.
Dummy Antennas: 39 OHM

F. M. SIGNAL
DIPOLE ANT.
1. 78 ohm Dummy Antenna (Fig. 2). GENERATOR CARBON RESISTORS TERMINALS
2. Dummy Loop Antenna (Fig. 3) is used to replace TERMINALS 39 OHM
"Signal Web" antenna, when chassis is removed

from cabinet. Fig. 2
HIGH SIDE OF LOOP

Condensers: GENERATOR THRU TERMINAL
14.7
30 uuf. CAP.
1. 0.1 mfd. Condenser. 70 uh.
2. 30 mmf. Condenser. mmf
GROUND SIDE OF
Shunts: GENERATOR GROUND
Fig. 3
1.. 5000 ohm carbon Resistor in series with a 0.1 mfd. Condenser.
2. Hairpin Shorting Shunt composed of two inches of No. 14 bare tinned copper wire.
Chassis top and

back view show-
ing location of 7
tubes and top

alignment ad-
0
justments. f
6117
C)
W07.0111. IF Art 107100 77017
010E7 010 R.
MINN 0
0 1211;r1Di.
0 0
;
06 Up"
0
0
In W01 1100710 101010 0,11,10
22
f 0171.0 0 00011. 0.17.1.1 0.011110711.
00 IN: Moe 701Zi071.07

Turn the tuning condenser to full mesh, against stop, and set the dial pointer to the reference point which is
to the left of Channel 200 on the dial.
Set tone control knob to the treble position, (extreme right).
When output meter is used, connect across voice coil: (3.2 ohms).
Feed an R. F. signal modulated 30% at 400 cycles to the receiver as indicated on the alignment chart
When F. M. signal generator is used, a 30% modulated signal is equal to 22.5 kilocycles deviation.
Turn volume control knob to maximum clockwise position and adjust signal generator output to produce
a noticeable output meter reading, (approx. 500 mw.) Keep signal generator output as low as possible to
prevent excessive AVC action in the receiver.
A. M. Signal Generator Output Position of ALIGNMENT CHART (Output Meter Method)

Dial
Align- In Series Range Pointer Osc. Remarks
ment Frequency with To Switch or Adjust Frequency (Alignment notes begin on page ZS)
Sequence Var.Cond.
1 167.5 kc. 0.1 mfd. 2nd I. F. Grid SW Open 2nd I. F. See Note 1
6SG7 (B) Trans. (8)
2 167.5 kc. 0.1 mfd. 1st I. F. Grid SW Open 1st I. F. See Note 2
6SG7 (A) Trans. (4)
3 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. 2nd I. F. Grid FM Open Discriminator See Note 3
6SG7 (B) Trans. (5)
4 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. 1st I. F. Grid FM Open 2nd I. F. 10.7 mc. See Note 4
6SG7 (A) Trans. (4)
5 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. See Note 5 FM Open 1st I. F. 10.7 mc. See Note 6
Trans. (2) & (3)
Link Coupling
6 5825 kc. 30 mmf. on 10.7 mc. SW Open 5825 kc. I. F. 167.5 ke. See Note 6-'The short lead
I. F. No. 2 Trans. (3) Above between Transformers No. 2 & 3
7 5825 kc. 30 mmf. 6AC7 SW Open 5825 kc. I. F. 167.6 kc. See Note 7
Grid Trans. (2) Above
F. M. Osc. Core
8 100 mc. *78 ohm F. M. Dipole FM Channel F. M. Ant. Trims. 10.7 mc. See Note 8-'See "Dummy
Dummy Terminals 260.5 Sec. & Prim. Above Antennas (1) "
9 97.9 mc. '78 ohm F. M. Dipole FM Channel F. M. Osc. Core 10.7 mc. See Note 9-'See "Dummy
Dummy Terminals 250 Above Antennas (1) "
10 Disconnect Generator FM Channel Radiation Bal. 'See Note 10-'See "Field Strength
'Connect Field Strength Meter 215 Trimmer Meter"
11 '9.6 mc. 30 mmf. One F. M. SW 9.6 mc. S. W. Oscillator 6826 kc. 'Disconnect Field Strength Meter
Ant. Term. Series Padder Above Connect Signal Generator. See
Note 11
12 11.8 mc. 30 mmf. One F. M. SW .11.8 mc. S. W. Osc. Core 5825 ke. See Note 12
Ant. Term. Above
13 10.7 mc. 30 nimf. One F. M. SW 10.7 mc. S. W. Ant. Prim. See Note 13
Ant. Term. & Sec. Padder
14 10.7 mc. 30 mmf. One F. M. FM 10.7 mc. S. W. Primary See Note 14
Ant. Term. (10.7 mc. Trap)
'HI. Side AM Closed B. C. Oscillator 5825 kc. 'See Note 15 --See "Dummy
15 535 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy Series Padder Above Antennas (2) "
Loop Ant.
HI. Side
16 1620 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy AM Open B. C. Osc. Core 5825 kc. See Note 16
Loop Ant. Above
HI. Side
17 1400 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy AM 1400 kc. B. C. Antenna See Note 17
Loop Ant. Trimmer
HI. Side
18 600 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy AM 600 kc. B. C. Antenna See Note 18
Loop Ant. Core'
HI Side
19 5825 kc. 30 mmf. of Dummy AM 1400 kc. B. C. Wave See Note 19
Loop Ant. Trap Trim.
600 kc. See Note 20
23
20
Refer to remarks (with corresponding asterisk) in last column.

N
NIP
.:#
*NA
Kt -1
00.1010
.1016111. 11VE MOO
411.00 11
MODELS 87CQ, AND REVISED MODELS 86CR, 86CS.
-1-42.311111.- La . 1- deg.
1.[ s yor .7i 1. LOP.
Seat
LOW IV W.
-eR0013E-Y-
DIVISION -41a? MANUFACTURING CORPORATION
ALIGNMENT NOTES (Output Meter Method)
Use the following notes in conjunction with ALIGNMENT CHART, TOP AND BACK VIEW,
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART and SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM. Reference numbers of
parts correspond to item numbers in Parts List.
1. (a) Place Shunt from link, between transformers (5) and (8), to ground See "Shunts (1):' Adjust
secondary (top) for maximum output.
(b) Connect the Shunt from diode plate (pin No. 4) of 6SQ7 tube socket to the shielded lead junction on
transformer (8). Adjust primary (bottom) for maximum output. Remove Shunt.
2. (a) Place Shunt from plate of the 6SG7 tube socket (A) to the transformer side of 2200 ohm resistor (106),
See "Shunts (1)". Adjust secondary (bottom) for maximum output.
(b) Connect the Shunt from grid of the 6SG7 tube socket (B) to Transformer side of 68,000 ohm resistor
(109). Adjust primary (top) for maximum output. Remove Shunt.
3. (a) Adjust secondary (bottom) core for null point.
(b) Tune Signal Generator for maximum Output Meter reading, approximately 75 to 100 kc. off the null
point obtained in 3 (a), and note reading.
(c) Tune Signal Generator to the opposite side of the null point for maximum reading on the Output Meter.
Note this reading. If the two readings are not equal, adjust primary (top) core until equal readings
are obtained.
4. (a) Set Signal Generator to peak on high side of 10.7 mc. and adjust primary (top) and secondary (bottom)
for maximum output. Note meter reading.
(b) Set Signal Generator to peak on low side of 10.7 mc. and note reading. If necessary, readjust primary
(top) and secondary (bottom), slightly, until Output Meter readings and frequency spacing are equal
on both sides of the 10.7 mc. null point.
5. (a) Connect Signal Generator output in series with a 30 mmf. condenser to either lug of the F. M. antenna
transformer primary Trimmer (60). Connect Signal Generator ground to the receiver chassis at a point
close to the trimmer. Keep lead lengths to a minimum and do not drape shielded cable, from Signal
Generator output, near under side of chassis.
(b) Set Signal Generator to peak on high side of 10.7 mc. and adjust 10.7 mc. primary (bottom) of trans-
former (2). Adjust 10.7 mc. secondary (top) of transformer (3). These two adjustments should be
adjusted for maximum output. Note reading on Output Meter.
(c) Set Signal Generator to peak on low side of 10.7 mc. and note Output Meter reading. If meter readings
obtained on the peaks on both sides of 10.7 mc. are not equal, readjust the 10.7 mc. primary of trans-
former (2), and the 10.7 mc. secondary of transformer (3). The peaks should appear approximately
80 kc. on each side of 10.7 mc.
6. (a) Set Signal Generator frequency control for maximum output. Adjust 5825 kc. secondary Trimmer and
secondary link adjustment, on bottom of transformer (3), for maximum output.
7. (a) Adjust 5825 kc. primary trimmer (bottom) and 5825 kc. primary link adjustment (top) of transformer
(2) for maximum output.
8. (a) Adjust F. M. oscillator core (131), on top of chassis, to midway position.
(b) Preset F. M. radiation balance adjustment (57), on top of chassis, to approximately two turns from
the closed position.
(c) Short circuit F. M. antenna primary trimmer (60), located on bottom of chassis, with Hairpin Shorting
Shunt See "Shunts (2),"
(d) Adjust F. M. antenna secondary trimmer (58), on bottom of chassis, for maximum output.
(e) Transfer Shorting Shunt to F. M. antenna secondary Trimmer (58) and adjust F. M. antenna primary
Trimmer (60) for maximum output.
25
(f) Remove Shorting Shunt.
9. (a) Adjust F. M. oscillator core (131), slowly, until 97.9 mc. signal is tuned in. Receiver should tune thru
87.9 and 107.9 mc. signal (channel 200 and 300).
10. (a) Connect Field Strength Meter to dipole antenna terminals, on back of chassis.
(b) Adjust F. M. radiation balance trimmer (57), on top of chassis, to null point. If it is necessary to move
this trimmer more than a quarter turn, repeat steps 8 and 10.
Alternate Method :-Connect a D.C. Vacumn Tube Voltmeter to No. 1 lug of 7F8 tube socket and adjust F. M.
radiation balance trimmer for maximum grid volt reading.
11. (a) Set Signal Generator to 9.6 mc. modulated 30e'c at 400 cycles.
(b) Turn volume control to maximum.
(c) Adjust short-wave series padder (55), on top of chassis, for maximum output.
12. (a) Adjust short-wave oscillator core, on bottom of chassis, for maximum output. Repeat steps 11 and 12
until dial tracks at 9.6 and 11.8 mc.
13. (a) Shunt short-wave antenna primary padder (51), (lug connected to coil) to chassis with a Shorting Clip.
(b) Increase Signal Generator output if necessary.
(c) Adjust short-wave antenna secondary trimmer (59), for maximum output, while rocking variable
condenser.
(d) Transfer the Shorting Clip to across the short-wave antenna secondary trimmer (59).
(e) Adjust short-wave antenna primary padder (51), for maximum output, while rocking variable conden-
ser.
(f) Remove Shorting Clip.
14. (a) Connect Field Strength Meter from Signal Generator side of 30 mmf. condenser to chassis.
(b) Increase or decrease Signal Generator output until Field Strength Meter reads between 10 and 15
microamperes.
(c) Adjust short-wave antenna primary padder (51), for lowest reading on Field Strength Meter. Make
this adjustment slowly, otherwise the dip may be passed unnoticed when a highly damped meter is used.
(d) Disconnect Field Strength Meter.
Alternate Method: After the receiver is installed in cabinet, turn band switch to F. M. position and tune in an
F. M. station. If a 10.7 kc. signal (indicated by a whistle or code) is heard in the speaker, adjust the short-wave
antenna primary (51) until the interferring signal disappears or is minimized. Make this adjustment slowly.
Connect Dummy Loop Antenna to Signal Web Antenna terminal and to ground terminal (See "Dummy
Antennas (2)."
Preset broadcast antenna wave trap (85), on top of chassis, to approximately two turns from the closed
position.
Adjust broadcast oscillator series padder (56), on top of chassis, for maximum output.
16. (a) Adjust broadcast oscillator core, on bottom of chassis, for maximum output.
(b) Repeat steps 15 to 16 until frequency shift stops.
17. (a) Adjust broadcast antenna trimmer, on top of variable condenser, for maximum output.
18. (a) Adjust broadcast antenna core (132), on top of chassis, for maximum output while rocking variable
condenser.
26
19. (a) Set dial pointer to approximately 1400 kc. and retune Signal Generator to maximum output.
(b) Adjust Signal Generator output to approximately midseaie reading on the Output Meter.
(c) Adjust broadcast antenna wave trap trimmer (85), for lowest reading on Output Meter.
(e) All Air Trimmers should be locked in position by applying a drop of household cement on the screw
threads.
20. (a) After the receiver is placed in cabinet and all connections are made for normal operation, readjust the
broadcast antenna core for maximum output at 600- kc.
ALIGNMENT CHART (Scope Method)

Signal Generator Output Position of
Align- Type Type of Osc.
ment Gen- Dial Selectivity Fre-
Se- erator Fre- In To Range Pointer Adjust Curve quency Remarks
quence quency Series Switch or
with Var. Cond.
2nd I. F. Flat or
1 F. M. 167.6 0.1 2nd I. F. Grid SW Open Trans. (8), Double See Notes 1(a) & 2(a)
kc. mfd. 63G7 (B) Top & Bottom Peak
1st I. F. 10% Double
2 F. M. 167.5 0.1 1st I. F. Grid SW Open Trans.
Bottom8!44,op Peal" See Notes 1(a) & 2(a)
kc. mfd. 6SG7 (A)
Discriminator Adjust *Disconnect F. M. Signal
3 10.7 30 1st I. F. Grid FM Open Trans. (6), for null Generator and Scope
A. M. mc. mmf. 6SG7 (A) Bottom point See Note 6.
Discriminator *Disconnect A. M. Signal
4 * 10.7 30 1st I. F. Grid FM Open Trans. (6), _.../\./.... Generator and Output
F. M. mc. mmf. 6SG7 (A) Top Meter
See Notes 1(b), 2(b), & 3
2nd I. F., 10.7 mc., See Notes 1(b), 2(b), & 4
5 F. M. 10.7 30 1st I. F. Open
mc. mmf. 6SG7 (A) Top & Bottom criminator primary (Top).
See Notes 1(b), 2(b), & 4
6 F. M. 10.7
mc.
30
mmf.
Grid.of
6AC7
FM Open 1st I. F., 10.7 mc.,
Trans. (2) & (3)
---A- Adjust Trans. (2) bottom.
Adjust Trans. (3) Top
7 A. M. Use Alignment Chart on page 4. Begin with sequence No. 6 and continue thru to sequence No. 19, inclusive.
'Beier to Remarks (with corresponding asterisk) in last column.
1. (a) Sweep align (Use approximately 20 to 30 kc. to sweep).

(b) Sweep align (Use approximately 450 kc. to sweep).
2. (a) For 167.5 kc.; connect Scope to terminal No. 8 on the rear plate section of band change switch.
(b) For 10.7 mc.; connect Scope, thru a 100,000 ohm resistor, to lug No. 6 of 6H6 tube socket.
3. Sweep Generator output 100,000 to 200,000 microvolts.
4. Scope Adjustment remains. Reduce Sweep input.
5. Connect Output Meter across voice coil. Feed an R. F. signal, calibrated at 10.7 mc. and modulated
30q at 400 cycles, to the receiver as indicated.
Cross index between channel calibrations on the dial and frequency in megacycles follow:
Channel No. Frequency in Megacycles' Channel No. Frequency in Megacycles
200 87.9 255 98.9
205 88.9 260 99.9
210 89.9 265 100.9
215 90.9 270 101.9
220 91.9 275 102.9
225 92.9 280 103.9
230 93.9 285 104.9
235 94.9 290 105.9
240 95.9 295 106.9
245
250
96.9
97.9
300 107.9
27
PARTS LIST-MODEL 87CQ AND REVISED MODELS 86CR, 86CS
Figures in first column correspond to figures in Schematic Diagram
Item Part No. Item

No. Description Part No. Description
No.
1 AC -136171 Transformer Assy. (F. M. Antenna) 81 Part of Item #4 Condenser, 33 mmf., 600 v., ceramic
2 AC -136264 Transformer, 10.7 mc. and 6.825 mc. 83 B-226638-49 Condenser, 10 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
I. F. (A) 85 C-137219-3 Condenser, Trimmer (B. C. Ant. Wave
3 AC -136081 Transformer, 10.7 mc. and 5.826 mc. Trap)
I. F. (B) 86 B-226638-27 Condenser, 82 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
4 AC -136276 Transformer, 10.7 mc. and 167.6 kc. I. F. 87 B-226638-51 Condenser, 39 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
5 AC -136260 Transformer, 10.7 mc. Discriminator 88 B-226638-52 Condenser, 91 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
6 AC -136509 Coil Assy., 1st Oscillator (B. C. & S. W.) 89 GC -210685-183 Condenser, 50 mmf., 500 v., mica
8 AC -136261 Transformer, 167.5 kc., Diode 90 B-226638-35 Condenser, 27 mmf., 600 v., ceramic
9 AW-136511 Coil, Antenna (B. C.) 91 Part of Item #3 Condenser, 27 mmf., 600 v., ceramic
10 AB -136444 Coil Assy., Antenna (S. W.) 92 Part of Item #1 Resistor, 1000 ohm, w.
24 W-136179 Coil, F. M. Oscillator 93 39373-87 Resistor, 470,000 ohm, 3 w.
25 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper 94 39373-87 Resistor, 470,000 ohm, 3 w.
26A B-137028 Condenser, 20 mfd., 400 v.) Four 95 39373-69 Resistor, 56,000 ohm, w.
26B Condenser, 30 mfd., 350 v. t Section 96 39373-94 Resistor, 1.5 megohm, w.
26C Condenser, 20 mfd., 300 v. (Elect. 97 39373-67 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, 3 w.
26D Condenser, 20 mfd., 26 v.JFilter 98 39373-75 Resistor, 120,000 ohm, 3 w.
27 B-135336 Transformer, Power 99 39373-75 Resistor, 120,000 ohm, w.
28A C-135946 Condenser, Variable)Two 100 39373-129 Resistor, 220 ohm, 1 w.
28B Condenser, Variable Section 101 39373-74 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, IA w.
29 C-136161 Switch, Band Change 102 39373-74 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, w.
30 B-135783 Control, Volume (3 megohm, Tap 103 39373-74 Resistor, 100,000 ohm, >4 w.
720,000 ohm). 104 39373-80 Resistor, 220,000 ohm, A w.
39368-22 Control (Volume) 105 39373-40 Resistor, 2,200 ohm, 54 w.
39370-2 Shaft (Knurled Plug-in) 106 39373-40 Resistor, 2,200 ohm, A w.
31A B-135784 Control, TonelAssembly 107 39373-40 Resistor, 2,200 ohm, w.
31B Switch, Power 108 39373-90 Resistor, 680,000 ohm, y w.
32A W-48858 Bulb (Dial), Type 47, 6.3 v., .15 amp. 109 39373-71 Resistor, 68,000 ohm, w.
32B W-48858 Bulb (Dial), Type 47, 6.3 v., .15 amp. 110 Part of Item #8 Resistor, 68,000 ohm, 34 w.
33 C-132300-2 Cable and Plug Assy., Power 111 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, 34 w.
34 39001-7 Condenser, .001 mfd., 600 v., paper 112 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, w.
35 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper 113 Part of Item #1 Resistor, 1 megohm, 34 w.
36 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 114 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
37 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 115 39373-67 Resistor, 47,000 ohm, w.
38 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 116 39373-62 Resistor, 27,000 ohm, IA w.
39 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 118 39373-60 Resistor, 22,000 ohm, 34 w.
40 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 119 B-226638-59 Condenser, 15 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
41 39001-1r Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 120A W-137021 Resistor (Wire -wound),)
42 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 400 ohm, 4 w. Two
43 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 120B Resistor (Wire-wound),(Section
44 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 700 ohm, 4 w.
45 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper 121 39373-107 Resistor, 10 megohm, 54 w.
46 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v,, paper 122 C-135974 Speaker & Transformer Assy. (86CR,
47 39001-13 Condenser, .01 mfd., 600 v., paper 86CS)
48 39001-17 Condenser, .06 mfd., 600 v., paper 123 AW-136911 Condenser, 1.3 mmf. (Transmission Line)
49 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper 124 39019-3 Terminal Board
50 39001-76 Condenser, .003 mfd., 600 v., paper 125 W-137143 Transmission Line (75 ohm)
61 C-137219-1 Condenser, Trimmer (S. W. Ant. Prim.) 126 W-137143 Loop Antenna (Transmission Line)
62 Part of Item #2 Condenser, Trimmer (5.826 mc. Prim.) 128 39001-17 Condenser, .05 mfd., 600 v., paper
53 Part of Item #3 Condenser, Trimmer (6.825 mc. Sec.) 129 39001-7 Condenser, .001 mfd., 600 v., paper
55 W-136964 Condenser, Air Trimmer (S. W. Osc. 130 B-226638-49 Condenser, 10 mmf., 300 v., ceramic
Series Padder) 131 39012-59 Iron Core (F. M. Osc.)
66 W-136964 Condenser, Air Trimmer (B. C. Osc. 132 39012-60 Iron Core (B. C. Ant.)
Series Padder) 133 W-136998 Connector, Phono Pickup
67 W-136964 Condenser, Air Trimmer (F. M. Radia- 134 W-137213 Cable & Plug Assy., Phono Motor
tion Balance) 135 B-138131-2 Transformer, Output ,
58 Part of Item #1 Condenser, Trimmer (F. M. Ant. Sec.) 137 39001-11 Condenser, .005 mfd., 600 v., paper
69 Part of Item #10 Condenser, Trimmer (S. W. Ant. Sec.) 138 39373-170 Resistor, 22,000 ohm, 1 w.
60 Part of Item #1 Condenser, Trimmer (F. M. Ant. Prim.) 139 39373-60 Resistor, 22,000 ohm, w.
61 Part of Item #2 Condenser, 82 mmf., 300 v., ceramic 140 W-138631 Condenser, 53 mmf., 500 v., ceramic
62 Part of Item #3 Condenser, 68 mmf., 300 v., ceramic 141 B-138774 Crystal, 5992.5 kc.
63 Part of Item #4 142
Condenser, 470 mmf., 300 v., silver mica 143 W-137398-6 Condenser, 4.7 mmf., 500v.
64 Part of Item #4 Condenser, 470 mmf., 300 v., silver mica 39373-92 Resistor, 1 megohm, 34 w.
65 Part of Item #8 144
Condenser, 470 mmf., 300 v., silver mica 146 Part of Item #1 Condenser, 30 mmf., 500 v., mica
66 Part of Item #2 Condenser, 150 mmf., 500 v., silver mica C-138777 Speaker & Transformer Assy. (87CQ)
67 Part of Item #3 Condenser, 160 mmf., 500 v., silver mica 146 AB -138936 Cable & Plug Assy., Speaker (87CQ)
68 Part of Item #5 Condenser, 150 mmf., 500 v., silver mica C-137173 Album, 12' Record (86 CR)
69 Part of Item #5 Condenser, 150 mmf., 50C v., silver mica C-137236 Album, 10' Record (86 CR)
70 Part of Item #5 Condenser, 62 mmf., 500 v., ceramic AC -136204 Background, Dial (86CR, 86CS)
71 B-226638-39 Condenser, 120 mmf., 300 v., ceramic AC -139380 Background, Dial (87CQ)
75 Part of Item #8 Condenser, 1000 mmf., 500 v., silver mica C-136222 Bracket, Variable condenser Mtg.
76 GC -210685-182 Condenser, 100 mmf., 600 v., mica R-137010 Cabinet (86CR)
77 Part of Item #8 Condenser, 100 mmf., 500 v., mica R-138491 Cabinet (86CS)
79 Part of Item #5 Condenser, 12 mmf., 300 v., ceramic R-138569 Cabinet (87CQ)
80 Part of Item #4 Condenser, 33 mmf., 500 v., ceramic W-136201 Clip, Dial Glass
W-131154-1 Cotter, External
28 There are also other parts.

-CRONLEY
Models 146CS, 146CS (V)
TYPE: Fourteen tube, four -band superheterodyne. Frequency Modulation Band: 88.1 to 107.9 mc.
(Selector switch at FM position).
FREQUENCY RANGE: American Broadcast Band:
535 to 1620 kc. (Selector switch at AM position). INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY: AM, Police and
SW Bands: 455 kc. FM Band: 10.7 mc.
Police Band: 2.25 to 6.7 mc. (Selector switch at POWER SUPPLY: 60 cycle a.c. only.
POLICE position). VOLTAGE RATING: 105-125 volts.
Short-wave Band: 6.7 to 18.5 mc. (Selector switch POWER CONSUMPTION: 120 watts.
at SW position). POWER OUTPUT: 18 watts maximum.
00
Top view of
..... .* chassis showing
trimmers and tubes.
o
al4
11.40 41.7
1.10wrommilmwmmOsaimis.
cl. feLvno
L imfrl Worms..
...Lvra.
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART
N.110011.
rixot 1411.1.1
29
PUSH BUTTON ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
Each of the six push buttons, for automatic tuning, has two adjusting screws by which it may be set to any
nearby American broadcast station whose frequency in kilocycles is within the kilocycle range covered by
that button. To gain access to these screws, carefully pull off the
push button. To set No. 1 push button to a desired position, pro - 540 590 680 750 880 1000
ceed as follows: TO TO TO TO TO TO
900 1000 1150 1300 1500 1620
KC 115_ KC CC KC
1. Turn the ANTENNA ADJ. SCREW clockwise until moderately
tight, then turn the OSCILLATOR ADJ. SCREW counter-
clockwise until the threaded portion extends approximately
Yi inch. Use a small screw -driver and do not exert pressure.
2. Turn the band selector switch to the "AM" position and manually
tune in the station to which the push button is to be set. The
ANTENNA ADJ SCREW
frequency of the station selected must be between 540 and 900
OSCILLATOR ADJ SCREW
kilocycles. Carefully adjust the tuning control to the point of
clearest reception.
3. Turn the band selector switch to the "AUTO" position and slowly turn the OSCILLATOR ADJ. SCREW
clockwise until the same station is heard. Adjust the screw for maximum volume.
4. Adjust the ANTENNA ADJ. SCREW for maximum volume.
5. Turn the band selector switch from "AUTO" to "AM" and back again to check if the adjustment has
been correctly made. There should be no change in tone quality when switched from one to the other.
6. Place the tab with the call letters of the station, to which the push button has been set, in a celluloid "V"
and slide it into the button from the side.
7. The remaining push buttons may be set in a similar manner. No adjustment of master tone control push
buttons is required.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE NOTES CIRCUIT
1. Sweep alignment (use approximately 500 kc. to sweep). 37.5 Ohm
F.M. Sig. 1111-AW---e- To Receiver
2. Sweep Generator Output .1 to 1 Volt RMS.
Generator Carbon Ant. Terminals
Resistors and 2
I
3. Scope connected to center terminal on phone switch.
4. align for maximum peak amplitude. Peak separation should be 150 to 200 kc.
37 5 Ohm
5. Scone connected to center terminal of 3rd I.F. through 200,000 ohms. FIG I
6. Repeat operations 8 and 9 until no change can be noted in sensitivity.
7. Rock gang. TO SIGNAL WEB

TERMINALS ON
CHASSIS
8. Repeat operations 12, 13 and 14 for maximum sensitivity.
C= --Channel number. FIG. 2
10. When aligning the shortwave oscillator trimmer, make certain the circuit is aligned at the correct frequency and not at the image
frequency which is 910 kilocycles lower in frequency as indicated on the receiver dial. To check, tune in signal generator frequency,
then increase the generator output and tune in the image frequency which should be audible, but weaker than the fundamental
frequency. If the image can not be tuned in, the oscillator trimmer is adjusted to the wrong peak. The correct peak is the second
peak of the trimmer from the closed position.
The F.M. channel numbers run from 200 to 300, and correspond to
frequencies from 87.9 to 107.9 megacycles. To find the frequency
in megacycles for any channel number, multiply the channel number
by 2/10, and add 47.9 . For example, channel number 280 when mul-
tiplied by 2/10 equals 56.0 and plus 47.9 gives 103.9 megacycles
amp as the frequency.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE CHART
Signal Generator Output Position of

Align- Adjust for
ment Maximum Output Remarks
Sequence Frequency In Series To Band Tuning
with Switch Dial
1 455 kc. .1 mfd. 2nd I.F. Grid AM Hi. Freq. 3rd I.F.
stop
2 455 kc. .1 mfd. 1st I.F. Grid AM Hi. Freq. 2nd I.F.
stop
3 455 kc. .1 mfd. 19 plate section AM Hi. Freq. 1st I.F. Retouch 3rd, 2nd, 1st.
of center gang stop
4 10.7 mc. .1 mfd. 3rd I.F. Grid FM Hi. Freq. Discriminator Notes 1, 2, 3, 4
stop
5 10.7 mc. .1 mfd. 2nd I.F. Grid FM Hi. Freq. 3rd I.F. Notes 1 and 5
stop
6 10.7 mc. .1 mfd. 1st I.F. Grid FM Hi. Freq. 2nd I.F. Retouch 3rd I.F.
stop
7 10.7 mc. .1 mfd. 3 plate section FM Hi. Freq. 1st I.F. Retouch 3rd, 2nd, 1st
of center gang stop
8 1400 kc. 200 mmf. Ant. 1 AM 1400 kc. BC.-Osc.-RF. &

Ant. Trim
9 600 kc. 200 mmf. Ant. 1 AM 600 kc. Broadcast Notes 6 and 7
Osc. Padder
10 6.0 mc. 400 ohm Ant. 1 Police 6.0 mc. Police Osc., R.F.
& Ant. Trimmers
11 18 mc. 400 ohm Ant. 1 SW 18 mc. Sw. Osc., R.F., & Note 10
Ant. Trimmers
12 108.1 mc. See Ant. 1 & 2 FM Hi. Freq. FM-Osc. Trimmer

Circuit Diag. stop
Fig. 1
13 87.9 mc. See Ant. 1 & 2 FM Low Freq. FM-Osc. Core

Circuit Diag. stop
Fig. 1
14 105.9 mc. See Ant. 1 & 2 FM *C-290 FM. R.F. & Notes 7,8 and 9*
Circuit Diag. Ant. Trimmer
To align, turn the tuning condenser to full mesh, against stop, and
set dial pointer to the reference line at the end of the dial scale.
Release all tone control buttons to the "out" position. Connect the
output meter across the speaker voice coil (3.2 ohms). Feed an R.F.
signal modulated 30% at 400 cycles to the receiver as indicated in
the chart above. Connect signal generator ground terminal to the
chassis of the receiver. When F.M. generator is used, a 30% modu-
lated signal is equal to a deviation of 22.5 KC. Advance volume
control to maximum clockwise position, adjust generator output to
produce noticeable output meter reading. Keep generator output low
to prevent excessive AVC action. The low impedance "Signal Web"
If chassis is
antenna should remain connected at all times.
removed use dummy antenna Fig. 2, page 30. Link in "Ext. Ant."31
.0 2t
4.10- .00. 3
Pun. 0011
11
0 0 cimri
K. Wel _
I.. COM. P.M .010 WWI
=We
.00
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM -MODELS 146CS. 146CS (V)

Model RA -101
© 1947 Allen B. Du Mont Laboratories
Passaic, N. J.
The material presented on pages 33-46 has been supplied by
Allen B. Du Mont Laboratories and is reproduced with the permis-
sion of this firm. While this information has direct reference
to Du Mont Model RA -101 television receiver, it will prove
helpful to television students and servicemen in servicing other
sets since much of these data are of a general nature.
AAITINNA
000
PREP AOC SYNC Akt

Siva PAM 11101
ANT101111%
Audio Amplifier Schematic
Figure 1. Block Diagram of RA -101 Receiver AUDIO AMPLIFIER CHASSIS.

The audio amplifier assembly contains its own power sup-
DESCRIPTION OF SET. ply furnishing sufficient output to operate the entire audio
system and sound IF of the RF tuner. The amplifier section
The Model RA -101 is a complete home entertainment unit itself contains four tubes, namely: two tubes, Type 6SN7, V1
containing facilities for television, FM and AM reception. and V2, and two tubes, Type 6V6, V3 and V4. The audio
Included in the model is an automatic record changer.
amplifier is resistance coupled. VI is a dual triode with both
All cabinet styles contain the following chassis and sub- sections connected as voltage amplifiers in cascade. The sound
assemblies: volume control is in the input circuit of the first stage. The
1. Audio amplifier chassis (containing the audio amplifier tone control is connected in the plate circuit of the second
half of Vl. The first half of V2 is another voltage ampli-
and its power supply).
2. Sweep chassis (containing sweep circuits, a power sup- J. H
ply for low voltage and bias voltage for the sweep and RF-IF 044
ft Iv**
eia
041
till./ 6- A .
chassis, and the high -voltage supply for the cathode-ray tube).
". ar
2a. Sync stabilizer chassis (containing automatic frequency g V
< ,
control circuit).
3. The RF-IF chassis (containing both sound and video IF
ag
*
'.. IV,
S,
I t 6 th
'''.- g
'
09
...
circuits, video amplifier, RF input system). A
le
4. The AM tuner chassis (containing the tuning unit for

AM reception).
5. The tuning meter assembly. (The Tele-FM tuning meter
plus the cable connecting it to the RF-IF chassis.)
6. The tone selector assembly (consisting essentially of a Figure 2. Audio Amplifier Chassis
push button switch and the tone control attenuators).
7. The service selector switch assembly (consisting of a push fier which in turn feeds the second half of V2. The second
button switch system). half of V2 is the phase inverter containing balanced plate and
8. Record changer assembly (containing the complete assem- cathode -loads from which the signal is derived to drive the
bly of motor, turntable, pick-up arm and changing mechanism). two 6V6's, V3 and V4 in push-pull. The power supply on
this chassis also furnishes B+ to the AM Tuner, the RF and
9. Cathode-ray tube assembly (consisting of the cathode-ray Sound IF sections of the RF-IF chassis, and focusing current
tube socket, cabling, focusing coil and deflection yoke).
to the cathode-ray tube focusing coil. The Focus control is
A block diagram of the set showing the relationship of the also on this chassis.
various circuits is given in Figure 1.
33
must be synchronized to those at the transmitter, and for that
purpose, synchronizing pulses transmitted with the video sig-
nal are used.
The sync pulses are obtained from the video channel on
the RF-IF chassis and fed to V2, the sync amplifier. The out-
put from V2 drives the circuits in the sync stabilizer chassis.
SYNC STABILIZER CHASSIS

Four stages comprise the sync stabilizer chassis. The signal
from the sync amplifier is clipped by VI, the clipper stage on
the sync stabilizer. The three other stages on the sync stabil-
izer chassis comprise the "automatic frequency control" circuit
The object of the "AFC" circuit is to obtain pulses for syn-
Figure 3. Audio Amplifier Chassis chronization that are stable in frequency and phase and not
affected by extraneous disturbances. The principle used is to
originate the pulses by a local oscillator, whose frequency
Figure 4. Audio Amplifier Chassis

SWEEP CHASSIS.
The sweep chassis contains the power supply which fur-

nishes both B±. and bias voltages to the sweep chassis and
also to the video IF amplifier and the video amplifier on the Sync Stabilizer Schematic
RF-IF chassis. A negative voltage is also derived from this and phase are controlled by the incoming sync pulses. The
same power supply to furnish a negative bias voltage for both oscillator output will then be used to pulse the sweep circuits.
the sweep and RF-IF chassis. This low voltage power supply The oscillator used is an electron coupled oscillator using
a 6K6 tube. The oscillator is coupled to the phase discrimi-
nator by transformer coupling (T1). The sync pulses are fed
to the center tap of the discriminator transformer from the
clipper stage. With respect to the center tap, the sinusoidal
11,010-
eraihrfe
a
te,
4114,11141114111410
46 Rt9
oscillator output on the discOtninator plates are 180 degrees
out of phase. The pulse, being center fed, adds to both plates
with the same polarity. When the oscillator frequency is in
adjustment, the pulse rides the sine wave at the 180 degree
point in its cycle. See Figure 7. During one-half the cycle,
one section of the dual diode will conduct, and during the
second half of the cycle, the other section of the diode will
conduct. The output voltage across the diode load will be
Figure 5. Sweep Chassis
the same in magnitude throughout the cycle, since the magni-
contains two 5U4G rectifiers, V9 and V10, each of which is tude of the voltage on each plate is equal during each diode's
conduction period. If the oscillator frequency changes, the
operated as a half wave rectifier to result in full wave rectifi-
cation. A time delay relay in this power supply prevents B+ pulse will no longer ride the mid -point of the wave. See
from being available for about 30 seconds. Figure 7. Now the pulse voltage adds to the sine wave volt-
The sweep chassis also contains the high voltage power age on one plate while it subtracts from the voltage on the
other plate. Thus during the cycle, the magnitude of the out-
supply. This power supply uses two Type 2X2 rectifiers,
put voltage will change. A bias of -1.5 volts is applied to
VII and V12, which are connected to operate as a voltage
doubler circuit. This voltage doubler furnishes high posi- the cathode circuit of the diode. Since this voltage supply
tive voltage to the anode of the cathode-ray tube. The sweep has no d -c return path to ground in the diode cathode cir-
circuits on this chassis generate both the vertical and horizon- cuit, no current will flow and the 1.5 volts will be applied
equally to both cathodes. The output voltage of the diode
tal sweep voltages for the deflection yoke of the cathode-ray
stage will add or subtract from the -1.5 volts. The -1.5 volts
tube. A toggle switch on the chassis is available to shut off
the high voltage at the convenience of the serviceman. are used to bias the "reactance tube" V4 through the diode
lead.
The sweep circuits are used to generate deflection voltages
which when applied to the cathode-ray tube will cause the There is, therefore, a d -c voltage that is constant for proper
electron beam to scan across the face of the tube. The sweeps oscillator frequency, but changes when the oscillator frequency
is not correct. The voltage is fed to the grid of the "reactance
34 tube" (V4). Output from the oscillator is fed to the cathode

of the reactance tube through CIO, a .01 id capacitor. This
Pot
SIN
=MOWN. 1
-
1111142. * 01 011 WIRAMONI
=.4.:14,
0W. ve., TM,
LON `MOW PORN /MN.
,11:141.
2
21,
Pon 0112. nt[104.
O. . WI* r
:1.%rierlr"" "= Om*
: [swat Wei Sal WO OS.. ".'""
1.11:1 ?,
r 9 0y ,.., .,
I I It ;
Pt re.
Sweep Circuit Schematic

IOW .11.144 Viror
There is a filter circuit between the discriminator and the

00011104141 reactance tube"(C12, R17 and C11). Any irratic pulses or
4 Oir
disturbances are by-passed to ground by the filter, and there-
fore will not affect the operation of the sweeps. The oscilla-
R
73, O.
e
0 OS. C'S
tor output is a distorted sine wave which, when differentiated,
1V6 6: will give a pulse output. The differentiating circuit used is
COC
ef
C6, C7, R9 and RIO.
C-3.3. The signal from the plate of the electron coupled oscilla-
tor is then fed to the second half of V2, a Type 6SN7, which
C-34 is connected as a driven sweep generator (sometimes called a
sawtooth wave generator). The signal from the sweep gen-
erator is then fed to the grids of the horizontal deflection
amplifiers, two tubes Type 807. These tubes are V3 and V4,
which operate in parallel to drive the horizontal output trans-
former T2. Because of the relatively high frequency com-
ponents present in the horizontal sweep signal, it is necessary
that the primary of this output transformer have relatively
few turns compared to the vertical deflection amplifier in
order to keep the distributed capacitance within the trans-
former to a minimum. Also, much more power must be deliv-
ered to the horizontal deflection coils due to greater energy
+-Intensifier Lead losses. 1 hus it is necessary to supply more current and power
to the horizontal output transformer than to the vertical.
The horizontal damping tube, V5, is a 6AS7. This tube is
Figure 6. Sweep Chassis a dual triode which is connected across the output of the hori-
zontal output transformer. The function of the horizontal
capacitor causes a phase shift of the signal. Depending upon damping tube is to eliminate the oscillation which occurs
the voltage on the grid of the reactance tube, the output from an overshoot on the sawtooth voltage. The horizontal
impedance of the reactance tube will be of a certain inductive sweep signal is fed to the deflection yoke. Horizontal posi-
value. Changes in the oscillator frequency or phase with tioning is obtained by means of a potentiometer which injects
respect to the pulse frequency will cause different valises of a portion of the bias voltage into the secondary of the hori-
voltage on the reactance tube grid and therefore vary the zontal output transformer.
inductive output impedance of the tube. The vertical sync amplifier, V6, is a 6SJ7. This tube ampli-
By coupling the reactance tube across the oscillator coil, fies the vertical sync signal and transmits it to one of the
the oscillator frequency will vary in such a manner as to cor- windings of the vertical blocking oscillator transformer. The
rect its deviation from the proper value. The oscillator is
thus synchronized to the pulse frequency.
35
PUL St
PULSE One-half of this tube is normally conducting and the other
half is normally cut off. If either of the sweeps fail, the half
of the dual triode which is conducting becomes non -conduct-
ing. Since the solenoid of the relay is connected in series with
PI: 3 PIN 3
the plate of the normally conducting half of the tube, the
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT
relay contacts are allowed to open. The opening of these
relay contacts applies a positive voltage to the cathode of the
PULSE
PULSE
cathode-ray tube, thus cutting off the beam of the cathode-ray
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT
OSCILLATOR
OUTPUT
tube, and preventing a stationary bright spot or line from
appearing on the screen if the sweep should fail.
PI 4 PIN 4
THE RF-IF CHASSIS.
The RF tuning assembly is the complete input system for
the Du Mont Teleset. It consists of three separate variable
inductors (the Du Mont Inputuner) which cover the range
7(a) Oscillator Synchronized to 7(b) Oscillator Not Synchronized of 44 to 216 megacycles without band -switching. In the Du
Pulse Frequency to Pulse Frequency
Mont input system are the tubes VI, V2, and V9. VI and V9
Figure 7. AFC Diagram are type 6J6 tubes and V2 is a Type 6AK5; Vi is an RF
stage; V9 is the local oscillator, and V2 is the mixer.
vertical blocking tube oscillator consists of one-halfV7, of a The output of the RF section is the intermediate frequency
Type 6SN7. This blocking tube oscillator triggers the sweep of the Teleset. This intermediate frequency differs, however,
generator which is the second half of V7. The vertical sweep from the normal AM receiver in that it is a band of fre-
signal from the sweep generator is fed to the vertical deflec- quencies which contains both video and sound signals. The
tion amplifier which consists of another 6SN7 with both halves video and sound IF signals can be separated because they
operating in parallel. The vertical deflection amplifier drives occur at different frequencies due to the fact that they were
the primary of T4, the vertical output transformer. Because transmitted on separate carriers, 4.5 megacycles apart. The
the vertical sweep operates at a low frequency of 60 cycles sound IF is separated from the video signals by means of a
(distributed capacitance has much less effect than at 15,750 sound trap and is impressed on the grid of the first sound IF
cycles), it is possible to use more turns of wire in T4 and thus stage. The sound IF amplifier is a three -stage amplifier con-
obtain the same number of ampere turns as used in the hori- sisting of V3, V4 and V5, which utilize Type 6BA6 tubes.
zontal output transformer, and drive the primary of T4 with After passing through the sound IF amplifiers, the sound IF
less current. Thus, a 6SN7, operated in parallel, will furnish signal passes through the two limiter stages, V6 and V7, which
sufficient current as a deflection amplifier to operate the verti- are connected in cascade. These tubes remove amplitude
cal output transformer. Vertical positioning is obtained by modulation from the FM signal. The output of the second
means of a potentiometer, which injects a portion of the bias limiter is coupled to the discriminator tube by means of the
voltage into the secondary of the vertical output transformer. discriminator transformer. The discriminator, V8, is a 6AL5.
The beam control amplifier, V13, is also on the sweep This is a typical discriminator circuit for removing the modu-
chassis. This amplifier is a dual triode, Type 6SN7, which lation from the intermediate frequency and is so tuned that
receives the signal from the vertical output transformer on its output is z2ro setts, at exactly 21.9 megacyles. The volt-
one grid and a signal derived from the horizontal output on age output of the discriminator is a varying DC voltage
the other grid. whose magnitude is dependent upon the deviation of fre-
CO
15 smi 0
IS "or5 CS tsar.
at .... cot, -SONsre S-SOssFO atwooso cot,
IfsFAIP oso0
ItIs 1 F CMWSJS
S.C1
S1
IL1,4 1sOla
oNi SF -IF CFAS.. tl VW'
I AS
"5" ro no or 04 (444154)
oN Rv-I. CHASSIS
3,
sof Purr IC ..C" to 11,3
tt.LATCS C.F., ox pr-lr CSASStS
SIOToR
,7,gogstaITA;24%
V os
RF Circuit Schematic
lo SEI.Csium SCCTIFISS
ON SI-1F CHASSIS
TO CS. w D,Pai
OF Ti FEF-IF CSASSIS
SCAN SWITCH NW,
atsttelay.-1-310 t') t)
36 00 CovoctsT t V ...IS...CATES. acv[11

a.
MICA ea OCOM6tIC Cs/MCl/VS.
"m.4 owe
-1
r
et.
too.
0o
1
1.
oeo
00.o,
0 0I II
.
Its
y.
A-
.
Jr 7
11 0.111 CAN1L1S411
Ill" LANK. TOM, .04 o 1.1.0tweend.
P
RF-IF Circuit Schematic

quency of the sound IF signal from the center value of 21.9 1. The Contrast Control, which effectively is the same con-
megacycles. The FM teletuning meter is connected to one trol on the video signal as the volume control is on the
of the cathodes of the discriminator and registers zero when audio signal, varies the output of the video IF amplifier by
the FM or television station being received is properly tuned. varying the negative bias voltage applied to the grids of the
The output of the discriminator is the audio signal which is first two video IF amplifiers.
fed to the audio amplifier, which in turn drives the speaker. 2. The Picture Brightness Control is located on this chassis.
The tuned circuit in the plate of the mixer tube, V2, is It is used to set the intensity level of the background of the
tuned to have a band pass between 21.5 and 26.4 megacycles. picture.
V-9 6J6 3. Because the Picture Brightness Control is located on this
6967 / V-2 6995 chassis, it is also convenient to place the relays for the sweep
V -I 6J6
Z-3 kg. failure protection circuit for the cathode-ray tube on this
.Z-5 same chassis.
vk5
69 96
4. The Sound Volume Control is also located on this chassis
to consolidate all controls on a single chassis, and is con-
nected by cable to the audio chassis.
5. The motor for driving the pointer on the FM teletuning
dial, the magnetic clutch, and the hand vernier tuning mech-
anism, all of which are used in conjunction with the induc-
re
tuner, are also included on this chassis, thus consolidating
all front panel controls on one chassis.
Figure 8. RF-IF Chassis 6. The Grid Drive Control-which adjusts the cathode-ray
tube grid sensitivity.
2.4 THE AM TUNER CHASSIS.

AM tuner chassis, which is employed in the Model RA -101,
consists essentially of four major sections. The. RF amplifier
is a tuned RF stage which feeds a 6SA7 converter. The
6SA7 serves the function of both oscillator and mixer to con-
vert the RF signal to an intermediate frequency of 456 KC.
This chassis contains one IF amplifier, a 6SK7, which in turn
feeds a 6SN7. One-half of this tube acts as a diode detector
and the other half as a cathode follower output. This chassis
contains its own heater transformer but B+ is supplied to it
from the audio chassis.
Figure 9. RF-IF Chassis
6SK7 T.- IR
The sound IF frequency is picked off prior to the tuned cir-

cuit and the video IF frequency passes through to the grid
of V10, the first video IF amplifier. Two sound traps are
located, one between the first and second video IF stages and
the other between the second and third video IF stages. These
sound traps prevent the sound IF signals from passing through R-7 C -St
the video IF amplifier and causing interfering patterns in the

picture. In all there are five video IF stages in the Model
RA -101. These five stages consist of V10, V11, V12, V13, and
V14. All of these stages employ the same tube type, a 6AU6,
with the exception of V14, which uses a 6AG7. The video IF
stages utilize special coupling circuits to provide a band pass
of 4 megacycles. The output of the fifth viedo IF stage feeds
V19, the video detector. V19 is a 6AL5 which is connected
as a half wave diode detector. The output of the video detec-
tor feeds the first video amplifier, V17, a 6AG7. V17 in turn
feeds V16, a 6V6, connected as a cathode follower output.
The output of V16 is coupled directly to the control grid
Hli 11
of the cathode-ray tube. However, V15, the DC restorer and Figure 10. AM Tuner
sync clipper is connected across the output.
The DC restorer and sync clipper consists of a single tube, THE TONE SELECTOR.
V15, a 6AL5. One-half of this tube operates as the DC The Tone Selector is a separate assembly with five different
restorer and the other half as the sync clipper. The signal is RC circuits connected for varying the quality of the audio
taken from the plate of the sync clipper and fed to the sweep signal. This separate assembly is located directly behind the
chassis as composite sync. bezel for the teleset.
There are a number of other components also located on
this chassis. These items are enumerated below: THE SERVICE SELECTOR.
38 The Service Selector is a push-button switch assembly which

connects both AC and DC circuit voltages to the proper units
?.%
1-
1111()_&.1
AM Tuner
Tuner Schematic
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
Before attempting any sort of servicing or adjustment it is
imperative that the serviceman bear in mind certain safety
precautions.
HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS

1. The high voltage applied to the accelerating electrode
is 12,003 volts and contact with it can cause severe burns or
Figure 11. AM Tuner even DEATH.
depending upon the service selected, and switches the output 2. Always turn OFF the high voltage switch on the sweep
of the three different chassis to the input of the audio amplifier. chassis before doing any work on this chassis.
3. Always turn OFF all power, and remove the power plug
.0 J
from wall receptacle before removing any chassis from the
0.0e
( 6,66u6) cabinet.
vr..v.-.4.. ii
4. Always make adjustments with only one hand.
I. I resey
0e 0% re 5. Always turn OFF all power before soldering or making
Ow re .)
(.6
lveuce6 t Tsar r)
connections.
1.161 Oe now)
CATHODE-RAY TUBE PRECAUTIONS
,
:0 cue re 34.31
1. Do not bump the tube against hard objects.

J
ra.,.,-.=14111"
re ea s 2. Do not use tools near the tube.
ors p.e ar
0 ALPK. Sror
3. Always wear safety goggles and gloves when handling
the tube.
Service Selector Schematic
4. Always stand the tube on its face on a thick piece of felt
in a protected place if it is removed from the cabinet.
5. Always replace a tube if it becomes scratched and return
it to the factory for a pressure test.
4.2 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROLS.

Normal operating procedure should be followed. See oper-
ating instruction manual. If satisfactory results are not ac-
quired, then further adjustments should be made as outlined
below. If required results are still not obtained, a diagnosis
Tone Selector Schematic

should be made to locate the trouble.
39
A. LOCATION OF CONTROLS EFFECTS OF CONTROLS ON LINEARITY
Location on
Control Effect on Pattern
Control Chassis Designation Chassis
RF-IF R96 (Fig. 8) Rear -Left
Hor. linearity Flattens and expands pattern on right side.
Sensitivity
Audio R22 (Fig. 3) Rear -Left
Hor. peaking Flattens and expands both sides, but affects
Focus
left side more.
Vert. Hold Sweep R29 (Fig. 5) Rear -Left
Flattens and expands left side of pattern.
Hor. damping
Vert. Size Sweep R33 (Fig. 5) Rear -Left
Vert. linearity Flattens and expands top side of pattern.
Vert. Linearity Sweep R37 (Fig. 5) Rear -Center
Vert. Positioning Sweep R36 (Fig. 6) Top Front TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE.
Hor. Peaking Sweep R14 (Fig. 5) Rear -Center
Although much information can be given for diagnosing
Hor. Linearity Sweep R46 (Fig. 5) Rear -Right trouble in the Telesets, the information is of a general nature.
Hor. Size Sweep R31 (Fig. 6) Top -Center The nature, location and repair of troubles must be analyzed
Hor. Positioning Sweep R20 (Fig. 6) Top -Rear by the repairman. This necessitates a good working knowl-
Hor. Damping Sweep R19 (Fig. 5) Top -Rear edge of the circuits of the sets, as well as an understanding of
television principles. It behooves the repairman to study tele-
Hor. Frequency Sync. Top of Phase
set circuits as well as outside information on television.
Stabilizer Discriminator
Transformer
Before attempting to repair a set, a diagnosis should be
made to determine in what channel or circuit there is trouble.
Hor. Phase Sync. Bottom of Remember that in 9970 of cases only one trouble develops at
Stabilizer Phase a time. It is only a waste of time and effort to indiscriminately
Discriminator test circuits of a set when trouble occurs. The method to fol-
Transformer low is by use of logic and symptoms to localize the trouble
All other controls are on the control panel and are marked. before testing. When the troublesome circuit has been local-
ized, a tube check should be made for faulty tubes. A few
B. ADJUSTMENT OF CONTROLS examples of proper reasoning are presented below.
1. Sensitivity Control Adjustment (should not be touched Assume that the following trouble is evident: No picture
except when cathode-ray tube is changed). can be obtained, but sound is operating. First of all, it can
a. Press the "Tele" button on the service selector switch. be assumed that the Inputuner is operating correctly. If it
b. Increase brightness for raster appearance. weren't, the sound channel would not be operating. Turn
c. Decrease brightness until raster just fades out. the brightness control clockwise. If a raster appears, the sweep
d. Check voltage on cathode of cathode-ray tube. If the circuits must be operative. The trouble has-been localized to
voltage is less than 45 volts, this adjustment is correct. If the the video channel. The repairman can now test the video
voltage is greater than 45 volts, turn sensitivity control full channel.
clockwise, increase brightness until 45 volts are obtained and PHOSPHOR
then turn sensitivity control for disappearance of raster. BRONZE
-LEADS
2. Turn up contrast control for image, and adjust the focus
control for a clear picture.
3. If the picture is tilted, adjust the yoke on the neck of
the cathode-ray tube. Loosen both top and bottom screws to
turn yoke. Be certain that the set is turned off. Remember,
contact with the high voltage may be lethal.
4. Increase brightness more than usual, and adjust vertical
hold control if necessary.
5. When horizontal adjustment is necessary the following
procedure should be followed:
a. Turn the screwdriver adjustment (horizontal frequency
adjustment on phase discriminator transformer) until the test
pattern or picture comes into sync.
b. Turn clockwise until the test pattern falls out of sync,
then back off until it pulls in again. Note the position where
"pull in" occurs.
c. Continue rotating counterclockwise until the test pat- PIN PIN
3
tern falls out of sync again. Then turn clockwise until it Figure 12(a).
I
pulls in. Note the position of the control for this second 6AK5 Adapter Tube
pull in point. If when the brightness control is advanced, no raster ap-
d. Set the adjustment half way between the two "pull in" pears, the difficulty can be in either the sweep circuits or the
points. high voltage power supply. A failure of either sweep circuit
6. Adjust phase control for proper blanking and sync pulse, will cause excessive bias on the cathode-ray tube and cut it
if necessary. Then readjust frequency as outlined above. off. Check the voltage on the cathode of the cathode-ray tube.
7. Set the vertical linearity, size and positioning controls If it is excessive, a failure of sweep is indicated. If it is nor-
for a good pattern. mal, a failure of high voltage is indicated. Thus, the trouble
8. Set the horizontal controls for good linearity, as well as has been localized to either the sweep or high voltage circuits.
for size and positioning. Another condition is that there is picture, but no sound.
40 Check the action of the tuning meter. If it is operating cor-

rectly, the trouble is in the audio amplifier. If it is not, the
trouble is in the sound IF channel. This assumption comes OPTIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
from the fact that the tuning meter operates from the sound VIDEO SWEEP GENERATOR-Output varies from 0 to 6
discriminator. Again, it can be assumed that the Inputuner megacycles.
is operating correctly since the picture is being received. VOLTAGE CALIBRATOR-Du Mont Type 264-A recom-
If the receiver is completely dead (no picture, no sound), mended for use in measuring peak -to -peak voltages.
check the input power, input power cords and interlock SQUARE WAVE GENERATOR-For servicing audio and
(safety) switches. The antenna lead-in cable or the Inputuner video amplifiers.
may be bad. If these checks do not reveal the trouble, the SWEEP WAVEFORMS.
low voltage power supply outputs should be checked. In
case of Inputuner difficulties (aside from bad tubes), the entire Sweep waveforms are given in Figure 16. Waveforms were
unit should be removed and sent back to the factory. taken with the following control settings:
If the sound channel is operating correctly, and the picture Line Voltage -115 volts a -c
alone is distorted, an analysis can be made by merely viewing Horizontal Damping Control-Full counterclockwise
the screen of the cathode-ray tube. Such faults as too strong Horizontal Linearity -Full clockwise
a signal, too weak a signal, outside interfering signals, exces- Horizontal Peaking -Full clockwise
sive ripple, distortion and phase shift, can be viewed on the Vertical Linearity -Full counterclockwise
screen. Once recognized as specific faults, corrections can be Vertical Size -Full clockwise
made. The procedure to follow then is: Horizontal Size -Full counterclockwise
Vertical Hold -Set to lock picture
1. Analyze symptoms. Positioning Controls -Normal setting
2. By reasoning, localize trouble to possible channels.
3. By tests,, locate actual channel.
4. By further tests, find and correct trouble. INSTALLATION
Normal signal tracing methods of testing is recommended Installations, at the present state of the television art, are
for the audio amplifier and the sound channel. For the video of the utmost importance. Customer satisfaction will depend
channel, response curves can be checked by using a wobbula- entirely upon a well made installation. The best teleset manu-
tor and an oscillograph. For the sweep channel, waveforms factured is not capable of improving upon the signal presented
can be viewed and checked against those given in section 4.5. to it by its antenna. The consumer is not technically edu-
cated enough to appreciate the difficulties involved in obtain.
IN34
TO bRYSTAL 220" ing a clean picture in our urban areas. He will judge the
PLATE
0-1 - 1/2 W
OUTPUT television industry by the picture presented to him in his
.0010 home. No amount of explanations or apologies will offset the
10K .0010 .001pf
RF INPUT I/2W unfavorable impression created by a noisy, blurry, jumpy
picture.
GND. Remember also, that a teleset purchaser will remain a tele-
TO
OND.
set owner, only as long as he is able to enjoy the entertainment
Figure 12(b). Probe Detector provided by the art. A rejected and returned teleset will not
improve a dealer's net profit. It, therefore, is important for
REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT
the service or installation man to bend every effort to make
a good installation when a teleset is sold, not only for his own
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER -20,000 ohms -per -volt volt- immediate profit, but also for the good of the art as a whole.
meter with ranges approximately 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, The mortality will be high among servicemen attempting to
0 to 100 V, 0 to 500 V. profit from television installations. The field is complex and
CATHODE-RAY OSCILLOGRAPH-Du Mont Type 208-B demanding of perfection. Only thcse who have firmly grasped
recommended for RF-IF alignment, and audio ampli- and assimilated the necessary techniques and principles, will
fier servicing. Du Mont Type 224-A or Type 241 survive the competitive era now approaching. The following
for troubleshooting sweep chassis. installation data is not complete. To be of value to a prac-
SIGNAL GENERATORS- ticing serviceman it should he amplified by study and experi-
(1) FM Signal Generator-This is a wobbulator-type sig- mentation on his part.
nal generator whose center frequency ranges from
20 to 30 megacycles with a sweep width of ±5 Select a temporary position for the antenna, bearing in
megacycles (adjustable). The voltage output of this mind the requirements for a clean signal. Connect the antenna
generator should be 0.1 volts. to the receiver and examine the resulting picture.
(2) RF Signal Generator-With amplitude modulation If the picture is satisfactory on all stations available, orient
available. RF range from 20 megacycles to a mini- the antenna for maximum signal strength, and note the loca-
mum of 60 megacycles. The RF signal must be tion so determined. A permanent ,installation may then be
made.
adjustable to within 10 kc with a calibrated attenua-
Should the location prove to be poor, one or more picture
tor on the output. defects will be evident. Various remedies should be applied
(3) Audio Signal Generator (for Checking Audio Ampli-
fiers).
until a clean picture results. A permanent installation can
then be made. The advantages of the survey method should
TRAVELING DETECTOR-This is a crystal detector
mounted in a probe assembly to enable IF stages to be self-evident. Trying out different antennas and antenna
be aligned stage -by -stage. (See Figure 12b.)
positions in permanent form is not only difficult but almost
6AK5 ADAPTER TUBE-See Figure 12a. impossible.
41
The detailed alignment instructions presented below, and the resulting
patterns illustrated on the next two pages, will not only assist you ih
carrying out necessary alignment of the Du Mont Model RA -101 television
receiver, but will also serve as instructions for clearly understanding
the effect of various adjustments on the response. In general, the same
information can be applied to any modern television set. Please bear
in mind that these patterns were obtained on a separate oscilloscope
connected as instructed. To obtain the values of voltage A and B, a
source of measureable and controlled voltage is applied with the con-
trols of the test oscilloscope unchanged for the particular test, see
page 45. For instructions of the connections see diagram on page 37.
DATA FOR ALIGNMENT SOUND CHANNEL
Food Output Leads Adjust

Connect Coonoct Directly Into Oscillograpit Cods to
To Typo of Inpat Ginairator Output or Into OscHlograph Via Conform
Adjust Signal Required Loads Across Loads Across Probe Detector to Fig. No. Remarks
Z2 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V3 Pin 5, V4 Probe Detector 15-E RF Signal Generator Set at

Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis 21.9 mc to give birdie
Z3 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V4 Pin 5, V5 Probe Detector 15-E RF Signal Generator Set at

Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis 21.9 mc to give birdie
Z4 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V5 R27 Direct 15-F Connect 100 k resistor in series

Signal Generator and Chassis with oscillograph
Z2, Z3, Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V3 R27 Direct 15-G

Z4 Signal Generator and Chassis
Z5 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V7 Pin 1, V8 Direct 15-L Readjust Z4 and Z3 to obtain

Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis good response curve
VIDEO CHANNEL
L37, L44 Wobbulator, RF Pin 4, V14 Pin 8, V16 Direct 15-0 RF Signal Generator set at
Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis 26.4 mc
L34, L35 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V13 Pin 8, V14 Probe Detector 15-S
Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis
L31 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, V12 Pin 5, V13 Probe Detector 15-T

L9 Wobbulator, Pin 1, V12 Pin 5, V13 Probe Detector 15-V RF Signal Generator at 21.9
Signal Generator and Chassis and Chassis mc
(Sound Trap Adjustment)
L27, L28 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, VII Pin 5, V12 Pfobe Detector 15-X
L26 Wobbulator Pin 1, V11 Pin 5, V12 Probe Detector 15-Z Second sound trap adjustment.
and Chassis and Chassis Remove RF Generator
L24, L25 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, VIO Pin 5, VII Probe Detector 15 -BB
L5, L6 Wobbulator, RF Pin 1, 6AK5 Pin 5, V10 Probe Detector 15 -CC Remove V2 and replace with
Signal Generator Adapter (V2) and Chassis 6AK5 adapter tube. See Fig-
and Chassis ure 12(a)
Wobbulator Pin 1, 6AK5 Pin 8, V16 Probe Detector Signal generator set at 26.4 mc.
42
15 -DD
Signal Generator Adapter (V2) and Chassis
and Chassis
Figure 151 Figure 15C

Figure 15-A Oscillogram of the single sound IF curve Oscillogram of Figure 15-1 with birdie
Oscillogram of the dual sound IF curve (untuned). This is the response curve at 21.9 mc.
(untuned). appearing on the right of Figure 15-A
after it has been expanded.
Figure 15-D Figure 15-E Figure 15-F

Oscillogram showing the effect of too Properly tuned sound IF curve with Sound IF curve obtained at the grid of
much birdie. birdie at 21.9 mc. the first limiter (properly adjusted).
Birdie at 21.9 mc.
Figure 15-G Figure 15-H Figure 15-1

Oscillogram of overall sound IF re- Oscillograph showing a slight amount Oscillogram showing excessive over-
spanse. (The improper alignment is of overload caused by too much sig- load caused by too much signal from
due to the different amplitude of the nal from the wobbulated signal gen- the wobbulated signal generator.
sig nal now being applied to the grids Orator.
of each stage.) (Birdie at 21.9 mc.)
Figure 15-K Figure 15-L

Figure 15-.1
Single discriminator curve (expanded Properly aligned discriminator curve.
Double discriminator curve. from double curve). Birdie at 21.9 mc. Birdie at 21.9 mc.
Figure 15-M Figure 15-N Figure 15-0

Videos IF response curve: Wobbulated Same as Figure 15.M except that the Same as Figure 15-N with L37 and L44
signal g for at the grid of V14. sweep of the oscillograph has boon properly tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.).
Oscillograph at the cathode of V16. expanded to obtain a single curve.
Birdie at 26.4 mc.
Figure 15. Alignment Waveforms
43
Figure 15-P Figure 15-0 Figure 15-R

Same as Figure 15-0 except that this Video response curve showing exces- Video IF response curve showing slight
birdie is at 22.4 mc. sive overloading due to too much overloading due to too much signal
signal applied to the stage from the applied to the stage from the wob-
wobbulated signal generator. bulated signal generator.
Figure 15-5 Figure 15-T Figure 15-U

Video IF response curve: Wobbulator Video IF response curve: Wobbulator Sound trap much too low. Birdie at
to the grid of V13 and the traveling to the grid of V12 and the traveling 21.9 mc.
detector to the oscillograph at the detector to the oscillograph at the
plate of V14. 1.34 and L35 properly plate of V13. L31 and L32 properly
tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.). tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.).
Figure 15-V Figure 15-W Figure 15-X

Sound trap properly set. Birdie at 21.9 Sound trap slightly too high. Video IF response curve: Wobbulator
mc. to the grid of VI 1 and the traveling
detector to the oscillograph at the
plate of V12. L27 and L28 properly
tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.).
Figure 15-7 Figure 15-Z

Sound trap too low . Figure 15 -AA
Sound trap properly adjusted. Sound trap too high.
Figure 15.88
Figure 15 -CC Figure 15 -DD
Video IF response curve: Wobbulator
to the grid of V10 and the traveling Video IF response curve: Wobbulator Overall video IF response curve: Wob-
detector to the oscillograph at the to the grid of V2 and the traveling bulator to the grid of V2 and the
plot* of Vii. L24 and L25 properly d or to the ascillograph at the oscillograph to the cathode of V16.
tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.). plate of VIO. 1.5 and L6 properly The birdie at 26.4 mc. is 50% down
44 Figure 15
tuned (birdie at 26.4 mc.).
Alignment Waveforms (Continued)

on the
Oscillator Grid, Tube V3 Pin 5 Sync Stab Oscillator Plate Tube V3 Pin 3
Cathode of Discriminator Tube V2 Pin 8 Sync Stab A 35 volts A-52 volts
A-22 volts B-20 volts
Horizontal Saw Gen Tube V2 Pin S Damping Tube Plate Tube V5 Pin 2
A- 50 volts A 450 volts
Horizontal Saw Gen Grid Tube V2 Pin 4
A 72 volts
lA
Sync Amplifier Plate Tube V2 Pin 2 Vertical Sync Amp Grid Tube V6 Pin 4
A-17 volts A- -35 volts
Sync Amplifier Grid Tube V2 Pin 1

A 4.5 volts
B
tB
Vertical Saw Gen Grid Tube V7 Pin 4

A 25 volts B 105 volts
Vertical BTO Red Trans Lead

Vertical Sync Amp Plate Tube V6 Pin 8 A 60 volts B---50 volts
A -55 volts B 50 volts
//, Vertical Amp Plate Tube V8 Pin 2

Sweep Non -Linear Due to Extreme Position of Controls
A -125 volts
Vertical Deflection Amp Grid Tube V8 Pin 4
Vertical Saw Gen Plate Tube V7 Pin S
A -25 volts B 125 volts
A-60 volts
Figure 16.
5-85 volts
Sweep Waveforms 45
Test patterns presented by Allen B. Du Mont Laboratories in connection
with their television receiver Model RA -101, but applicable to other
modern television sets.
Normal Picture Brightness Control Misadjusted Focus Control Misadjusted*
Contrast Control Set Too High Contrast Control Set Much Too High* Contrast Control Set Too Low
Horizontal Frequency Control Vertical Hold Control Misadjusted Horizontal Linearity Control
Misadjusted Misadjusted*
Vertical Linearity and Size Controls Horizontal Size Control Misadjustes1" Outside Interference Caused By
Misadjusted" Diathermy
* Test patterns token with INS news tape.
46 Figure 17. Test Patterns

A self-contained loop antenna is provided for broadcast An internal power line antenna is provided for FM op-
band reception. For permanent home installation, how- eration in relatively strong signal areas. An external
ever, if it is desired to improve reception of weak sta- dipole antenna is recommended for maximum FM op-
tions, an additional outdoor antenna may be used. Con- eration. To connect the dipole, remove the wire from
nect the outdoor antenna to the single screw terminal the FM ANT. screw terminal "A" and connect the
on the loop terminal marked BCST. ANT. The loop dipole leads to "A" and "G."
antenna operates at maximum efficiency when its posi- A ground connection is not required for AM or FM
tion is at right angles to the broadcasting source. Once operation.
the station is tuned in, rotate the cabinet back and forth
through a quarter of a circle, leaving it in the position An external phonograph can be connected to the jack
where the station is received with maximum volume. provided at the rear of the chassis base.
Fp. TUPONG
NOY Tom. \ 304,4 0

(1) 0
( 6AG5 \ 6BA6 6BA6
r'. ®
ANT.
41.6., fa \
REAR 77
-L.
TC
AM ANT.
17 8
L 7,230
.IRONY y®Zl
22
O
-4(.01) 0'0 44--
Is 5`GT NW" 0 f
O 0
010-0
3. T
O
o
O
O
m
UI
03
250 MI IF-10.7MC(FM)
P.M. LINE ANT. 0 !MEG
SO MAP IF -4 55KC (AM)
GABS C) TREBLE
71
-
I
POWER SUPPLY: 60 -cycle a.c. If replacements are made or the wiring disturbed in the
r -f section of the circuit, the receiver should be care -
VOLTAGE RATING: 105.125 volts. fully realigned.
POWER CONSUMPTION: 80 watts. The color coding of the i-f transformer leads is as fol-
lows:
CURRENT DRAIN: 0.75 amp. at 117 volts a.c.
Grid -green Plate -blue
Grid return -black B+ -red
INSTRUCTIONS FOR VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE READINGS

1. All readings taken in broadcast position except those for item 4A, 6BA6 tube, which should be taken in FM position.
2. Voltage readings are in volts and resistance readings in ohms unless otherwise specified.
3. D -C voltage measurements are at 20,000 ohms per volt; a -c voltages measured at 1,000 ohms.
4. Socket connections are shown as bottom views.
5. Measured values are from socket pin to common negative.
6. Line voltage maintained at 117 volts for voltage readings.
7. Nominal tolerance on component values makes possible a variation of ± 15% in voltage and resistance readings.
8. Volume control at maximum, no signal applied for voltage measurements.
9. Resistance readings in the B+ circuits may vary widely according to the condition of the filter capacitors.
VOLTAGE READINGS
SYMBOL TUBE PIN 1 PIN 2 PIN 3 PIN 4 PIN 5 PIN 6 PIN 7 PIN 8
1 6AG5 -0.5 DC 0 6.5 AC 0 225 DC 137 DC 0
2 6BE6 -0.3 DC 0 0 6.5 AC 270 DC 100 DC 0
3 6BA6 -0.1 DC 0 0 6.5 AC 260 DC 115 DC 0
4 6BA6 -0.4 DC 0 6.5 AC 0 0 0 0
4A 6BA6 -0.3 DC 0 6.5 AC 0 250 DC 110 DC 0
S 6AL5 0 0 6.5 AC 0 0 0 -0.8 DC
6 6AU6 -0.8 DC 0 6.5 AC 0 105 DC 32 DC 0
7 6V6GT 0 0 260 DC 270 DC 0 105 DC 6.5 AC 13.5 DC
8 5Y3GT 0 300 DC 0 300 AC 0 300 AC 0 300 DC
RESISTANCE READINGS
1 6AG5 1.5 meg. 0 0.2 0 55,000 90,000 0
2 6BE6 20,000 1 0.2 0.5 50,000 68,000 12,000
3 6BA6 680,000 0 0 0.1 50,000 77,000 0
4 6BA6 3 meg. 0 0.1 0 inf. inf. 0
4A 6BA6 3 meg. 0 0.1 0 50,000 77,000 0
5 6AL5 inf. inf. 0.1 0 520 0 135,000
6 6AU6 2.5 meg. 0 0.1 0 520,000 1.5 meg. 0
7 6V6GT 0 0 50,000 50,000 470,000 520,000 0.1 250
8 5Y3GT inf. 50,000 inf. 130 inf. 125 inf. 50,000
11;ft
-....
..-- ---.
FRAME ..
TO DRUM
...
FRONT IN IIMI
I s
111111
SLUGS
,. ee
???
?
/
I
TO TUNING
SHAFT SCREW
DETAIL OF FM COLLAR
STRINGING AND CORRECT
SETTING OF SLUG TUNER
WITH TUNING CONTROL
FULLY COUNTER -CLOCKWISE.
FREQUENCY RANGE: 0 II TURNS
Broadcast band (AM) -530.1620 kilocycles
48 Frequency modulation band (FM) -87.75-108.5

megacycles 6 TURNS
FM TUNING COLLAR
ALIGNMENT
To set pointer turn variable condenser fully closed and set pointer to last reference mark at low -frequency end of dial. To
inject signal in Steps 4, 5 and 6, remove tube and connect wire to pin 1. Replace tube, making certain that wire does not
short to shield base. For Step 8, connect two 100,000 ohm resistors in series from pin 7 of 6AL5 to chassis. After Step 8,
turn variable condenser fully counterclockwise and check adjustment of FM tuning unit per dial cord drawing. Volume con-
tra should be at maximum position; output of signal generator should be no higher than necessary to obtain an output read-
ing Use an alignment screwdriver for adjusting.
SIGNAL SIGNAL BAND RADIO
DUMMY GENERATOR GENERATOR SWITCH DIAL OUTPUT ADJUST REMARKS
ANTENNA COUPLING FREQUENCY POSITION SETTING METER
0.1 mfd. High side to stator 455 kc BC (center High f re. Across Al, A2, Adjust for maximum
of front section of position) quency end voice coil. A3, A4 output.
the variable con.
denser. Low side of dial.
to chassis.
0.1 mfd. High side to stator 455 kc BC (center Low fre- Across A5 Adjust for minimum
of front section of position) quency end voice coil. output.
the variable con- of dial.
denser. Low side
to chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 10.7 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- A6 Adjust for maximum
(grid) of 6BA6, clockwise) quency end nected to pin deflection.
1st 1.f tube (2). (unmodulated) of dial. 7 of 6AL5
Low side to chassis. and chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin I 10.6 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- A7 Adjust for maximum
(grid) of CBE& (unmodulated) clockwise) quency end nected to pin deflection.
Low side to of dial. 7 of 6AL5
chassis. and chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 10.8 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- A8 Adjust for maximum
(grid) of 6BE6. (unmodulated) clockwise) quency end nected to pin deflection.
Low side to chassis. of dial. 7 of 6AL5
and chassis.
High side to pin 10.7 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- A9 Adjust for maximum
0.05 mfd. (grid) of 6BE6.
1
nected to pin deflection.
(unmodulated) clockwise) quency end 7 of 6AL5
Low side to chassis. of dial.
and chassis.
High side to pin 10.7 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- A10 Adjust for maximum
0.05 mfd. (grid) of 6BA6,
1
nected to pin deflection.
(unmodulated) clockwise) quency end
2nd 1-f tube (4). of dial. 7 of 6AL5
Low side to chassis. and
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 10.7 mc FM (fully High fre- VTVM con-
nected from All Adjust for zero
(grid) of 6BA6, (untnodulated) clockwise) quency end junction of deflection.
2nd 1-f tube (4). of dial. two 100.000
Low side to chassis. ohm resistors
and junction
of condensers
21 and 26.
(See prelimin-
ary alignment
notes.)
150 ohms High side to "A," 108 mc FM (fully 108 mc VTVM con- A 12 Adjust for maximum
in series low side to "0" (unmodulated) clockwise) nected to pin deflection.
on FM antenna 7 of 6AL5
with each terminals. Dis-
lead. connect internal and chassis.
antenna.
150 ohms High side to "A," 88 mc FM (fully 88 mc VTVM con- A 13 Adjust iron core (hold
10 low side to "0" (unmodulated)
in series clockwise) nected to pin brass in position)
on FM antenna 7 of 6AL5 for maximum de-
with each terminals. Die.
flection.
antenna.
98 mc FM (fully VTVM con- A 13 Adjust brass and iron
11 150 ohms High side to "A,"
low side to "0" clockwise)
98 mc
nected to pin cores (one screw) for
in series on FM antenna 7 of 6AL5 maximum deflection. Re
with each terminals. Dig. peat steps 9. 10 and 11
lead. connect internal and chassis. until no further improve
antenna. ment can be made.
12 150 ohms High side to "A," 106 me FM (fully Tune for VTVM con- A 14, Adjust for maximum
in series
low side to "G" clockwise) maximum nected to pin A 15 deflection.
on FM antenna deflection. 7 of 6AL5
with each terminals. Dis-
antenna.
High side to "A," 90 mc FM (fully Tune for VTVM con - A 16, Adjust iron cores (hold
13 150 ohms low side to "0" maximum nected to pin A 17 brass in place) for
in series clockwise)
on FM antenna deflection. 7 of 6AL5 and maximum deflection.
with each terminals. Dis- chassis.
lead. connect internal
antenna.
Tune for VTVM con. A16, Adjust both Iron and
14 150 ohms High side to "A,"
low side to "G" 100 mc FM (fully A17 brass cores for maximum
in series on i'M antenna clockwise) maximum nected to pin deflection. Repeat steps
with each terminals. Dis- deflection. 7 of 6AL5 and 12, 13, and 14 until no
connect internal chassis. further improvement
lead. can be made.
antenna.
1600 kc Across voice A18 Adjust far maximum
15 200 mmfd. High side to "A,"
low side to "G"
1600 kc BC
coil. output.
terminals of AM
antenna terminals. Adjust for maximum
Tune for Across voice A19
High side to "A," 1400 kc
9
16 20 mmfd. BC
low side to "0" maximum
terminals of AM output.
antenna terminals
Emerson Radio
Model 528
Chassis 120038
TYPE OF TUBES:
1-6AG5, r -f amplifier
1-6BE6, converter
t-6BA6, first i-f amplifier and FM second i-f
l-6AL5, FM -AM detector, a.v.c.
1-6AU6, a -f amplifier
1-6V6GT, power output
1--5Y3GT, rectifier
YOUJNE CONTROL TUNINGBUD PRONG CONTROL
SWITCH
41 At2 117 AM r 96 6 9 42 39 40 61 44 103 3$ 31 37 83 414

5 7 110
a I
.M.
a
55
56
52 'j
95 3 *19 Al A2
88 87 417 112 104 101 94 61 90 29 92
L811 A13
46 33 32 31 63 65 108 64 30 21 67 11 29 68 69 28 73 49 25 29 84 80 24 81 82 23 186
34
98
60
27
62
45
47
53
54
70
12
71
15
21
34
I1I
It
57 93 83 79 78 43
50
16 102 17 77 15 14 86 20 12 13 16 56 16 18 51 105
MODEL: 537
Emerson Radio CHASSIS MODEL: 120043
o
P
SEC,'
OO 88A6
0
11
0 -,-
II n
11
AVC
""
rr 6U0 5 /
d' 6G5
0. -1.- 0
.-C
I F , 455 KC (AM)
N
P05.1 ',NON°
1 F = 10.7 MC (FM)
P05.2 BC
P05.3 T 0
5U4G 00
In SWITCH 15 SHOWN IN Cx TREME 6AL 5 6AU6
COUNTERCLOCKWISE POS, T ION
IRO
= MOTOR 9 9
r StCr
P.Mort
-r --
IA Sr L
PC KU,
EMERSON RADIO & PHONOGRAPH CORPORATION
ALIGNMENT
To set pointer turn variable condenser fully closed and set pointer to last reference mark at low frequency end of dial.
To inject signal in Steps 5, 6 and 7, remove 6BE6 and connect wire to pin I. Replace tube, making certain that wire does
not short to shield base. In Step 9, connect two 100,000 ohm resistors in series from pin 7 of 6AL5 to chassis. These resistors
should be equal within 5%. After Step 9, turn variable condenser fully counterclockwise and check adjustment of FM tun-
ing unit per dial cord drawing. Loop should be maintained in same relative position to chassis as when receiver is in cabinet.
Volume control should be at maximum position; output of signal generator should be no higher than necessary to obtain an
output reading. Use an insulated alignment 'screwdriver for ad jus ing.
SIGNAL SIGNAL BAND RADIO
DUMMY GENERATOR GENERATOR SWITCH DIAL OUTPUT ADJUST REMARKS
ANTENNA COUPLING FREQUENCY POSITION SETTING METER
0.1 mfd. High side to front stator 455 kc BC (center High fre- Across voice Al, A2 Adjust for maximum
of variable condenser.
Low side to chassis. position) quency end coil. A3, A4 output.
of dial.
0.1 mfd.High side to front stator 455 kc BC (center Low frequency Across voice A5 Adjust for minimum
of variable condenser. position) end of dial. coil.
Low side to chassis. output.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin (grid) 10.7 mc (un-
1 FM (fully High fre- VTVM con- A6, A7 Adjust for maximum
of 611A6, 2nd 14 tube (4). nected from
Low side to chassis. modulated) clockwise) quency end pin 7 of 6AL5 deflection.
of dial. to chassis.
0.05 mfd. high side to pin I (grid) 10.7 mc (un- VTVM con-
FM (fully High frequency nected from pin A8, A9 Adjust for maximum
of 611A6. 1st 14 tube (3). modulated ) clockwise) end of dial. deflection.
Low side to chassis. 7 of 6AL5 to
chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 (grid) 10.6 mc un- VTVM con-
FM (fully High frequency nected A10 Adjust for maximum
of 611E6. Low side to modulated) clockwise) end of dial. from pit deflection.
chassis. 7 of 6AL5 to
chassis.
0.05 mfd. high side to pin 1 (grid) VTVM con
10.8 mc (un - FM (fully High frequency fleeted All Adjust for maximum
of 611E0. Low side to modulated) clockwise) end of dial. from pit deflection.
chassis. 7 of 6AL5 to
chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 (grid) 10.7 mc (un- FM (fully High frequency VT V3I con Al2 Adjust for maximum
of 613E6. Low side to
chassis. modulated) clockwise) end of dial. reeled
7
from p1
of BALI to deflection.
chassis.
0.05 mfd. High side to pin 1 (grid) 10.7 mc (un- FM (fully High frequency VTVIII con- A13 Adjust for maximum
6.41-6, 3rd Lf tube (5). modulated) clockwise) end of dial. fleeted from pin
of 6AL5 to deflection.
low side to chassis. 7
chassis
0.05 mfd. high side to pin I (grid) 10.7 mc (un- FM (fully High frequency VTVM con A14 Adjust for zero
BA 1'6, 3rd I -f tube (5). modulated) clockwise) nected from
end of dial. Junction deflection.
Low side to chassis. of two
100,000 ohm re
sistors and
junction of con-
densers 31 and
32. (See pre-
liminary align-
ment notes).
10 150 ohms in High side to ungrounded 108 mc (un- FM (fully 108 mc VTVM con- Al5 Adjust for maximum
series with FM antenna terminal. modulated ) clockwise) nected from
Low side to chassis. pin 7 of GALS deflection.
each lead. (Disconnect internal to chassis.
antenna.)
side to ungrounded 88 mc (un- FM (fully 88 -me VTVM con A.ljunt Iron core (hold
11 150 ohms in Iligh
FM antenna terminal. fleeted from A16
brass in position) for
series with modulated) clockwise) pin 7 of 6AL5
Low side to chassis. to chassis. maximum deflection.
each lead. (Disconnect Internal
antenna.)
FM (fully 98 mc VTVM con Adjust iron and brass
12 150 ohms in Men side to ungrounded
FM antenna terminal.
98 mc (un- nected from A16
cores (single screw) for
series with modulated) clockwise) pin 7 of BALI maximum deflection. Re-
Low side to chassis. to chassis.
each lead. (Disconnect internal peat steps 10, 11, 12
antenna-) until no further im-
)rovement can be made.
FM (fully Tune for VTVM con A17, Adjust for maximum
13 150 ohms in High side to ungrounded 106 mc (un- fleeted from
series with FM antenna terminal.
Low side to chassis.
modulated ) clockwise) maximum pin 7 of BALI
to chassis.
A18 deflection.
each lead. (Disconnect internal deflection.
antenna.)
High side to ungrounded 90 mc ( un- FM (fully Tune for VTVM con- A19, A.1,1110 iron core (hold
14 150 ohms in FM. antenna terminal. nected from brass in position) for
series with modulated) clockwise) maximum pin 7 of 6A1.5 A20 maximum deflection.
Low side to chassis. deflection. to chassis.
each lead. (Disconnect internal
antenna.)
15 150 ohms in Digit side to ungrounded 100 mc FM (fully Tune for VTVM con A19, Adjust Iron and brass
FMI antenna terminaLLow modulated ) maximum nected from A20 cores (single screw) for
series with clockwise) pin 7 of GALS maximum deflection. Re-
each lead. side to chassis. (Discon-
nect internal antenna.) deflection. to chassis. peat steps 10, 11, 12
until no further Im
provement can be made.
16 200 mmfd. High side to AM un- 1600 kc BC 1600 kc Across voice A21 Adjust for maximum
grounded lug on antenna coil. output.
terminal strip. Low side
to chassis.
17 200 mmfd. High side to AM un- 1400 kc BC Tune for Across voice A22 Adjust for maximum
grounded lug on antenna
52 maximum coil. output.

terminal strip. Low sido output.
to chassis.
VOLTAGE READINGS
1 6AG5 -0.4DC 0 6.2AC 0 225DC 137DC 0
2 6BE6 -0.3DC 0 0 6.2AC 270DC 100DC 0
3 6BA6 -0.3DC 0 6.2AC 0 270DC 122DC 0
4 6BA6 -0.5DC 0 6.2AC 0 260DC 110DC 0
5 6AU6 -0.6DC 0 6.2AC 0 280DC 48DC 0
6 6AL5 0 0 0 6.2AC 0.4DC 0 -11DC
7 6AU6 -0.7DC 0 6.2AC 0 59DC 29DC 0
9 6V6GT 0 0 320DC 290DC 0 59DC 6.2AC 15DC
10 6V6GT 0 0 320DC 290DC 0 0 6.2AC 15DC
11 5U4G 0 330DC 0 300AC 0 300AC 0 330DC
RESISTANCE READINGS
1 6AG5 1.1 meg. 0 0.2 0 85,000 120,000 0
2 6BE6 22,000 0.7 0.2 064 80,000 98,000 12,000
3 6BA6 650,000 0 0.1 0 80,000 110,000 0
4 6BA6 650,000 0 0.1 0 45,000 70,000 0
5 6AU6 45,000 0 0.1 0 45,000 10,000 0
6 6AL5 inf. inf. 0 0.1 450 0 15,000
7 6AU6 2.4 meg. 0 0.1 0 770,000 1.8 meg. 0
9 6V6GT 0 0 80,000 80,000 450,000 0.3 0.1 170
10 6V6GT 0 0 80,000 80,000 0 620,000 0.1 170
11 5U4G inf. 80,000 inf. 69 inf. 72 inf. 80,000
1. Voltage readings are in volts and resistance readings in ohms unless otherwise specified.
2. All readings taken in broadcast position except those for items 4, 5 and 6, which should be taken in FM position.
3. D -C voltage measurements are at 20,000 ohms per volt; a -c voltages measured at 1,000 ohms.
4. Socket connections are shown as bottom views.
5. Measured values are from socket pin to common negative.
6. Line voltage maintained at 117 volts for voltage readings.
7. Nominal tolerance on component values makes possible a variation of ± 15% in voltage and resistance readings.
8. Volume control at maximum, no signal applied for voltage measurements.
9. Resistance readings in the circuits may vary widely according to the condition of the filter capacitors.
7 5 8 £13 I A14 111
48 63 62 50 48 43 61
123
115
;t
47
51
t 104
64
At?
128
89
116 ,,,,:L
58 A4
#.--
44 JR1d -,,.."./..!,..
#1411.,''
Ale
,---1 4,44-, 410
3 .
Al6 118
A20
59
An 3 III At Al 112 4 57 11 AS 45 108 65 106 103 119 88
ITS 161
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
Remove four push -on type control knobs from top of
cabinet.
Remove phono motor plug, phono pickup plug, and two
speaker plugs from chassis.
TO DRUM
Remove two Phillips head screws holding antenna ter-
minal strip to chassis.
FRAME Remove two nuts and washers fastening loop to cabinet.
Remove two Phillips head bolts in phono compartment
retaining chassis to cabinet.
Remove two hex head bolts and washers retaining chassis
SLUGS
to cabinet. Remove loop and chassis from rear of cabinet.
Remove four nuts fastening speaker to cabinet and re-
move speaker.
SCREW
TO TUN NG SHAFT
6 TURNS
DETAIL OF FM COLLAR
STRINGING AND CORRECT M COLLAR
SETTING OF SLUG TUNER
WITH TUNING CONTROL
FULLY COUNTER -CLOCKWISE.
4 TURNS
53
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE FOR A.M.: 10. Adjust primary of 2nd IF Transformer for
1. Connect generator to tuning condenser stator maximum VTVM reading.
(BC Antenna) in series with .01 mfd.; tune gener- 11. Adjust secondary of 2nd IF transformer,
ator to 455 Kc.; tune radio to quiet point on high keeping reading between 2 and 3 volts.
frequency end of dial, and adjust 1st and 2nd IF 12. Connect 10.7 Mc generator to point E and
transformers (455 Kc.) for maximum peak output. ground. Rotate 10.7 Mc adjustment screw of 1st
.2. Connect generator to antenna terminal in IF Transformer Secondary maximum number of
series with 200 mmf. Turn tuning control to ex-- turns counter clockwise. Adjust primary of 1st IF
treme full mesh position of tuning condenser. Set Transformer for maximum VTVM reading.
pointer to line located just below 55 calibration on
Bcst. Band. Tune receiver to 60 on dial; tune gen- 13. Adjust secondary of 1st IF Transformer for
erator to 600 Kc. Adjust BC padder, BC Ant. Coil maximum VTVM reading, keeping the voltage be-
Inductance (9z screw on rear of chassis) for maxi- tween 2 and 3.
mum output. 14. Connect 106 Mc. Signal Generator to FM
3. Tune receiver to 160 on dial; tune generator antenna terminals. If generator impedance is low,
to 1600 Kc. Adjust BC. Osc. and BC. Ant. trim- put one 150 -ohm carbon resistor in series with each
mers for maximum output. Repeat 2 and 3 for best of the generator leads. Tune receiver dial to 106
alignment. Mc.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE. FOR F.M.: 15. Adjust FM Oscillator Trimmer for maximum
Note: Points A, B, C, D, E, and F, are noted on VTVM reading.
circuit diagram.
16. Adjust FM Antenna Trimmer for maximum
1. Set Band Switch to FM. VTVM reading.
2. Connect vacuum tube' voltmeter (VTVM) ELAND YOLUNE TOTE
across points B and C. TUNING CONTROL --A. SWITCH CONTROL A. -CONTROL
CR -OFF
2 PILDT LIGHTS SWITCH
3. Connect 10.7 Mc. signal generator through .01 TYPE Nc, 47
mfd. condenser to point A and ground.

4. Adjust primary of FM Detector Transformer
for maximum VTVM reading.
5. Connect VTVM across points B and D
6. Adjust secondary of FM Detector Transformer
for zero VTVM reading.
7. Connect 10.7 Mc. Signal Generator to point 455 KC
F and ground. IF AD.I
105-1255.404,
8. Connect VTVM across points B and C. c Lodi.
LINE CORO
C) 0 SPEAKER
9. Rotate 10.7 Mc. adjustment screw of 2nd IF 300.r.

F SI DIPOLE
( (zk ) C
P4000 INPUT
O
Transformer Secondary maximum number of turns ANTI COIL
A I A 2 BC ANTENNA (EATERNALI
Plcmharce0
LINE CORD
counterclockwise.
IMAM 7r. "MGT TAG
CSR
4Or TURA%
NANSTONAEN
SOON CM71.7 2...r
IA DIPOLE SOO
I 32 31
AS
CSI=
IY OO:CS2
1500 Yip
MOAOCAST MOT
LOOT
r- 200
4-`
NS :070] A7
Rn
.T ic, 2200 ,
TZ. NC.
ARCOOCAST
IMIOCAS OSCALMOA
ANTOMA
COIL
OM. MATO MON ON, MO 705

Wow IN AmoN0
A05 I -.A.0010
020
polo o_gr
3.MOMI
Sn SPERM
cANNTATION DOT IMMO NORM
LTA LOAD
01,@,, 2.
Espey Mfg. Co. Or C
MAIM IMMO
c sr
00000,44 11-491047
7ILOT LIOATS
STS 7 i_,L_AANAL 110APP
.ST. II
°EMMA TRANSTOINEAS AWLS° CAT TOAC
AMNONNO TNT.. 007 UM K TAANSMIAMM DENOTE CONNIOLI
oAG TO ONION LEADS ANT CONNECTED M MOAN ON CM CM I
Model No. 7-B STANOMO TENONYL 70.0 MOTS
MCONO amh14211
462.
105-12S
17
VOL M2 KAMM 90.N. AT SOCKT PROMS
AAA TO CMS. INO AM DAMN VON NO Sle-
707 1A/7 71147 TM MI 777 MS TEII YY
NAL ono la ow PEA YOLT MO
54
WONo, iso rY MHO. PER AU. RAMS CA -
KOOK u1E C010 ars 707 TAM MAIMI N 04 AY MCI AM-
MON UM VOLTAM AT ell r. l012112 NO MA -
004 cnod vOLTME IS IMO ON MO LPN
411(-;1 TO we
...um 1 m.o....6d wetou 2 reowi "wax.
rct,.cg :ow,. 5 wpm... 6 mosming ms.soon rtgosvak,t. wow 10 Irm oct vol,7 11 1E mMmr.
IS.. msnooNA
moo.
e
13 mew.. Mi mane..
m (66. e.
00 do.
Vor
0- 0,,s12.me 1°L-. !?, 600.4
oc56):t. Siz s41,*cP
0dm. :2o .. °Otel.:"" :7 0 octds.' 8 "
,or
"- 014.
...
33X 32 X I 060 13 X 01 X
500 IC 600 KG 455 4C 4913S
5 I6 400 CV 400 GT 400 CV
3 5
7*57 6405 6557 INC TRANS
61117 IIS 7 Om.
FM IF AMP PM COMA a.15.; AM.F11111 IF g rand FM 214 IF 370 TRANS FM 361, NATIO NT FM AW
= -E:
600
,
I Ii
z aa
/
500/0Aii ,
270., o.-
500 05 MED
FIA ANT
IV GANG MOM
SOC ICY
GANG
MED
05 MF gCa.
-- Scut
02 NEP 003
470 AI , 9
SAINT 17ZAPECZT
moat OUTPUT
..-GLACK
GAN *ILA.
11.
L .005 .0 MEG BLUE -- .-1110

MEG 420 210
6
MEG 20*51,025v
AM DE,
if! AVM a AVG - mr0 ItOm INC
sto
E1c 4TC1,1 S 220
G507
634? PHASE MV
SE, 61 GONv OSC
NONT
005
100 N _442,
;M 0 Oil 24,t,
22011
it
3 MEG 60601
*510 OUTPUT
t UT=
05
GK -140 'GANG 2 MEG
BASS
GK -141 It PM)
SIC 3 919
GK -142 0 OAN6
GK -143 SECO FM., SEC 5 FRONT
'0
GK -144
6 557
II Elf AMP -N4
a
PROORAN 3111TCN 16 ill ['OREM( COUNTER CAOCKVIISt ROS
MS NI 'NOON TROM GER END Of 51111705
POO
40.1:610
lif AI
4-1N0R7 MANE
ALL P01571 MARRED IF) CONNECTED TO UNGROUNDED IrS-
11101 API 3 VOLT IN1110156 ON PONE. III
VOLT.; ME03011EMENTS ----- VOTN 1010,111 NOE
000 5,700 NO SIGNAL, *40 1NORER6101 r- BC
UI 0
in
glwalt4tsiat GK -140 SERIES
TELEVISION &. RADIO CORPORATION TABULATION FOR AM ALIGNMENT
SET
STEPS CONNECT GENERATOR SET GANG ADJUST TO
GENERATOR AT AT OBTAIN
1 Set Tone and Volume Controls at Maximum
2 t ...6 2nd. I.E.

c Slugs
0i. .e: Grid Cony. tube 455 Kc Quiet
.c ,_, Point
3 H 1st. I.F.
Slugs
H
4 -6
.....
BC Osc.
Trimmer H
... 1500 Kc 1500 Kc ,---)
RF C
5 .. = of BC Mixer
1 rimmer
o-
C4
= GANG
o
" Osc.6
"c
H 600 Kc 600 Kc Padder * X
7
Check dial calibration at several frequencies. If not reasonably correct,
adiust oscillator padder. See Note 1
8 # Ext. Ant. Binding 1500 Kc 1500 Kc Loop

Post Trimmer
#Through RMA dummy antenna.
* This adjustment should be made while gang is rocked.
SHORT WAVE RF
9 Place Band Switch in Short Wave position.
10 15 MC SW Osc. Trimmer
See Note 2
t..
11 7'.A 15 MC SW Cony.
rA
Image at Trimmer
4) H
" 15.91 MC ri
12 SW Ant.
E
0 External Trimmer P
8 Antenna
SW ()sc.
0
13 .1- 9.4 MC
..= Padder
oz 5
14 ..IE 94 MC
.
SWConn.
CConn.H
Padder X
Image at <
10.31 MC S\V Ant. '.---:
15
Padder
16 Recheck Steps 10 to 15 inclusive.
NOTE 1. After any adjustment of oscillator padder, repeat steps 4, 5 and 6.

Ss 2. Set oscillator trimmer to maximum capacity, then slowly loosen trimmer until 2nd signal
heard.
is
Oscilloscope Alignment FM Band
FM IF ALIGNMENT 6. Shift connection of sweep signal generator
to the grid of the second FM IF tube.
1. Equipment Required : Oscilloscope. 10.7 MC NOTE: As alignment moves from stage to
sweep generator, voltomyst, and RF signal stage, reduce input instead of reducing oscillo-
generator. scope gain.
Set band switch in FM position. 7. Align third FM IF transformer for a sym-
3. Make connection from vertical deflection am- metrical flat top pattern. (Fig. 2).
plifier of oscilloscope to pin #3 of 6H6 dis- 8. Shift signal generator to the grid of the first
criminator tube. Make certain that the 4M FD IF tube.
electrolytic condenser is disconnected from 9. Align second IF transformer in same manner
this same circuit. It is necessary that the as described in Section 7.
lead to the oscilloscope be shielded, of low Note that the width of the nose of the curve is
total capacity, and connection to receiver the same as before, but the sides have become
isolated by means of a 1 meg. resistor. steeper, as in Fig. 3.
4. Connect sweep generator to last FM IF grid 10. Connect the signal generator to the grid of
through a .1 MFD coupling capacitor. the converter tube grid in series with 10,000
5. Load primary of discriminator transformer ohm resistor and a .1M FD capacitor, or loosely
with resistor of approximately 39000 ohms. couple by stray capacity of an insulated wire.
Back out secondary slug (top slug) as far as 11. Align first FM IF transformer in the same
it will turn. Align primary (bottom slug) to manner as in Section 7.
obtain curve similar to figure 1. This does Note that the sides of the curve have further
not constitute a final alignment of discrim- steepened, but that the nose of the curve has
inator, but is a convenient expedient to assist retained approximately the same width as in
in I.F. alignment. Fig. 3.
GK -140
GK -141
GK -142
GK -143
GK -144
(1)
(3) (4)
12. Connect 4 MFD electrolytic capacitor that was 14. With sweep signal input to converter grid,
previously disconnected, and take off load realign discriminator transformer for conven-
sistor on discriminator primary. tional discriminator pattern, as in Fig. 4.
13. Connect oscilloscope to audio output terminal 15. Connect signal generator to converter tube
of discriminator. There are several points grid through .1M Fl) capacitor. An unmod-
where contact can be made and can be identi- ulated signal input of 65 microvolts at 10.7 Mc
fied as the circuit connected to the terminal should develop .55 volt rise on the AVC line
on the terminal board (nearest the discrimina- with voltohnlyst connected to AVC line
tor transformer) to which the shielded lead is
connected.
through 1 megollm resistor.
57
g.rait4atiFe GK -140 SERIES

FM RF Alignment
1. Equipment Required: 8. Set tuning controls so dial pointer calibrates
a. RF Signal Generator. Range 88 to 108 MC. at the equivalent of half way between channels
b. Output Meter. 200 and 201.
c. Insulated Screw Driver.
9. Apply 88 MC signal.
2. Connect RF signal generator in series with
400 ohm carbon resistor to ''high" side of FM 10. Adjust oscillator, converter, and antenna slugs
antenna socket. Connect output meter across to maximum output.
voice coil of speaker. 11. Repeat operations 3 to 10 inclusive.
3. Set tuning control for pointer to calibrate at NOTE: The degree of adjustment required
the equivalent of half way between channels in the tuning of the oscillator slug will deter-
300 and 301. mine the number of times operations 3 to 10
4. Apply 108 MC Signal. must be repeated until no further gain in sen-
sitivity- is obtained.
5. Set converter and antenna trimmers at mini-
mum capacity. 12. Carefully tune across the entire FM band for
6. Adjust oscillator trimmer by tuning from the observance of the dead or weak spots that
maximum capacity to first signal that is heard, may be a resultant of improper alignment or
and peak for maximum output. defective components. This can be deter-
mined by carefully noting the degree of re-
7. Adjust antenna and converter trimmers for ceiver noise, that is, high noise generally is
maximum output. accompanied by good sensitivity.
CHASSIS LAYOUT FRONT OF CHASSIS
(-TUNING TREBLE VOLUME
(-PROGRAM SW I BASS -OFF -ON --.11 SW. CONV. S.W. OSC
n 11
F.M. OSC,
I I I
(-FM. CONV
Inl I II FM.R.F.
nn
S.W. ANT
PAD
0
TRIM
S.W. CONV. OSC TRIM

PAD TRIM 1600 KC
AM
OSC
AM
CONV
=7_ AM
RF
0
S W. ANT BC CONV
0
S.W OSC OSC PAD
TRIM TRIM PAD 600 KG
FM. TRIMMERS ,d0,0 FM. ANT 0 0 0 0
ST I.FO
FM OSC FM. CONV PAD FM ANT PAD
000
TRANSF
6AG5 6SA7
0
7AG7 650(7
6C4
DRIVE CORD STRINGING
0.7 MC 455 KC FM. OSC CONV A.M. OSC F.M.R.F.
CONV
2ND I.F. 3RD I.F DET.

651(7 TRANSF 651(7 TRANSF 6SK7
1ST I.F TRANSF
2ND LE 3RD I.F
ELECT 455 KC 10.7 MC O 10.7 MC

0 10.7 MC
6507 6H6
POWER A.M DET 6507 FM. DET

5U4 1ST AUDIO DRIVE CORD
TRANSF 6V6GT 6V6GT
PHASE
INV
RE CT
OUTPUT OUTPUT
1-.J TO PREVENT BINDING, THIS CORD

PHONO--) MUST BE WOUND AS SHOWN TUNING SHAFT
. PHONO PULLEY
SPEAKER COMP LIGHTS
58 KNOB END
,ED
MODELS GV220, GV240

Model GV-260 is similar
The features described below
will be of special interest to
the serious student of televi-
sion. By referring to the com-
plete schematic diagram on this
page, you will note that the
control grid of the first tube
is grounded, and that cathode
injection of signals into the re I
R.F. amplifier is used. This

technique has the advantage of
simplifying the input circuit
and reducing tube noise.
The R.F. section uses sub -
chassis construction for better
isolation of circuits. This is
especially advantageous at fre- 14:
quencies above 100 MC.

A separate broadcast band
adapter is avilable which can .12
be plugged in and will permit

the reception of both televi-
sion and broadcast stations. ii
Band -switching is accom-

plished through a compact and
stable turret assembly. This
assembly carries all tuning
inductances, slug -tuned, and
the associated damping resis-
tors. It is in three scetions,
corresponding to plate coils of
V1, grid coils of V2, and the
[0
oscillator tuning inductances. 211-
In the video I.F. amplifier tt
a wide pass -band is obtained
through the use of loading re-
sistors across the overcoupled
transformer secondaries, while
adjacent channel suppression is
secured with trap circuits in
1'416
each transformer. '1
Video detection, sync sepa-

ration, automatic gain control
action are accomnlished with a
single tube. Quite a complete :1
explanation of such a circuit L_

is given in "Advanced Radio
Servicing" by Reitman. 59
In connection with the presentation of material on the Farnsworth
television receiver, stress will be placed on detecting the existence
of faults through observation of a test pattern. These are several
different types of patterns and these are transmitted for short periods
for use by servicemen. The Farnsworth Company pattern used in our
illustrations embodies some special features, but in general the sugges-
tions given can be applied to other patterns.
Refer to Figure 32a which shows this pattern. It consists of
several sets of converging alternately black and white lines, a
centrally -located series of concentric circles of graduated shading,
certain lettering, and a series of horizontal and vertical lines. These
shall be discussed in turn and their purpose explained.
The converging lines constitute "resolution wedges" whose purpose is
to indicate the amount of resolution which may be had in a picture.
Those bars which are situated in a vertical direction measure the
resolution in horizontal direction and those lying horizontally measure
the vertical resolution.
At the transmitter, the scanning of two lines, one black and one
white, produces an electrical signal of one cycle (not one cycle per
second). The scanning rate is a constant and it is evident that the
more closely spaced these lines are placed, the greater the number of
cycles are produced in a given lapse of time.
So may a known spacing of the lines represent a certain frequency
of the video signal. It is also evident that, should the receiver be
incapable of reproducing the high -frequency components in the reproduced
image. The high -frequency portion of the resolution wedge will not be
reproduced --the alternate black and white lines will not be distinct.
Rather, they will merge into a single dark mass. Therefore, the point
at which the lines merge into indistinction indicates the degree of
frequency response of the system.
For example, the normally -functioning receiver should reproduce
the lines approximately to the point marked 400 --which means the equiv-
alent of 400 alternately black and white lines between one side of the
picture and the other. If the receiver is out of adjustment and the
bandwidth is too narrow, it will not reproduce this many lines.
Next, we shall consider the concentric circles shown in the chart.
Even as in photographic work, an improper gamma in reproduction will
lead to a picture which is "washed out" or one which is "overly
60 32a Normal test pattern 32b Loss of vertical sync.

contrasty." If the proper gamma is present, the graduation of shading
in these concentric circles will appear to be equally darker or lighter
than adjacent circles. Misadjustment in the receiver may cause, for
example, the two inner circles to be equally shaded - black - or the
two circles may both be equally white. The first condition would
produce an overly contrasty picture while the latter would produce a
picture having a "washed out" appearance. Gamma is determined by the
relative settings of the contrast control and the brilliance control.
The circles must not become oval, for this indicates that there
exists excessive sweep amplitude in the direction of the longer axis
of the ellipse (or insufficient in the direction of the shorter axis
which may also be shown by the fact that the raster is not filled).
Non -linearity of sweep is shown by an improper relationship between
the various portions of the test patterns and by an egg -shaped set of
"circles."
Some test patterns incorporate two large circles, one somewhat
lerger than the other. These may be used to obtain proper setting of
the width and height controls, for the larger of the circles should
just fill the screen in a horizontal direction, the smaller in the
vertical direction. They, too, should be circles and not ellipses.
There are a few additional items to be observed in the use of the
test chart. Its aspect ratio is 4.3, the proper ratio for a televi-
sion picture. Therefore, it may be adjusted to just fill the screen
by properly setting the height and width controls.
Should the frequency response of the receiver be peaked at any
portion of the response curve, this will be indicated in the test
pattern as an excessively dark portion of the resolution wedge. A
dark portion across the screen may be the result of hum -modulation Of
the signal, such as the entrance of 60 cycle hum into the video portion
of the receiver but this will be distinguished by a dark band extending
from the left to the right extremities of the raster. Peaking in the
video section will produce a darkened portion of the wedge alone and
the frequency of this peak may be judged by the portion of the wedge
which is dark (overly contrasty). If at the high frequency portion of
the pass -band, the effect will be noted at the high -frequency portion
of the wedge. The various figures illustrate the appearance of the
pattern when defects in reception are present.
32c 120 cycle hum in video and in H. scan 32d Faulty horizontal linearity 61
32k Horizontal oscillator out of sync.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
RADIO
SERVICE DATA
FOR
MODEL 417A
SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATING FREQUENCIES: each tuner in the best physical and electrical position in the
Standard Band . . ... 540 to 1600 kc assembly. Furthermore, since the shunt capacity is small and
Short Wave 1.... . ... .............. .
Short Wave 2.... . ..... ......... . ......11.6 to 12.1 mc
9.4 to 9.9 mc the inductance is consequently at its highest corresponding
value, the additional unavoidable inductance introduced in
Frequency Modulation 1 ...... . .. 42 to 50 mc the wiring, band switch, etc., produces a minimum of circuit
Frequency Modulation 2 88 to 108 mc losses and unbalance.
AM I -F Frequency.. .. . ............. . 455 kc The guillotine tuner consists of a heavy, silver-plated, two -
........... .
. .
FM I -F Frequency.. . . . . 10.7 mc turn square coil, rigidly supported between two plastic posts.
A flat, solid vane slides up and down between the two turns.
POWER OUTPUT (117 volts It is guided in grooves in the plastic posts so that it passes
Undistorted. 4.0 watts between the two sections of the coil without touching them.
Maximum 5.5 watts The posts are so moulded and the coil so constructed that the
whole assembly is held rigidly at a predetermined spacing.
ANTENNA INPUTS: The tuning vane is raised and lowered by the tuning elevator.
Broadcast and Short Wave-conventional antenna When the elevator is all the way up (set tuned to lowest
FM -300 -ohm input for folded dipole frequency), the vane is completely above the coil which then
acts as a simple two -turn coil. As the set is tuned toward the
PHONOGRAPH PICK-UP: higher frequencies, the vane moves downward into the field
Type Variable Reluctance of the coil until, finally, it is all the way in. The vane reduces
D -C Resistance 250 ohms
the inductance of the coil through two principles. First, it acts
as a shorted turn, and thus reduces inductance directly;
second, it provides a barrier between the two turns of the coil
GENERAL INFORMATION which reduces the mutual coupling and thus also reduces
INTRODUCTION inductance.
The information contained in this service note covers the The tuners described above are identified as T2, T4, and
Model 417A completely except for the record player. This T5, on the schematic diagram.
receiver employs either the type P2 (two -post) or type P3 FM BANDS
(single -post) record player which are covered in separate Guillotine tuners T2, T5, and T4 are used as the tuned
service notes.
circuits, for the r -f amplifier, converter, and local oscillator
THE TUNING SYSTEM respectively, in both FM bands. In the higher frequency
The "r -f end" of the receiver is unusual in a number of band, the tuner is used with only a small shunt trimmer for
respects. Variable inductance tuning is employed instead of adjusting distributed capacity. In the lower band, a higher
using a conventional tuning capacitor. This design makes value shunt trimmer is used to reduce the frequency. The
possible two distinct advantages. First, it provides a high layout of band switch, tuners, and tube sockets is arranged to
efficiency FM circuit in the 88 to 108 megacycle range which give the shortest possible leads when the FM bands are in use.
would not be possible with the more conventional methods of The lead length in the other bands is not nearly so critical.
tuning. Second, it provides stable short-wave spread -bands
which tune as easily as the.broadcast band. Other advantages SHORT-WAVE SPREAD -BANDS
are also obtained but the two mentioned above are the most Bandspread tuning in the short-wave bands is obtained in
important. the converter and oscillator circuits by inserting the guillotine
Tuning is accomplished by an "elevator" which consists of tuners in series with a higher inductance so that the two
a rigid plastic horizontal plate raised and lowered by means of inductances together form the "L" part of the short-wave
a windlass controlled by the tuning knob at the panel. From tuned circuit. The small percentage change in inductance
this plate are suspended three powdered iron cores which tune obtained in the tuner provides smooth, wide, and stable
the broadcast r -f, converter, and oscillator coils; and three tuning. The "C" part of the tuned circuit consists primarily
tuning "vanes" which tune three low -inductance circuits. of a shunt trimmer. Switching from one short-wave band to
These latter circuits are employed in both FM bands and both the other is accomplished by selecting a different shunt
short-wave bands with the exception of the antenna circuit for trimmer.
the short-wave spread -bands when a broad tuned antenna coil The converter grid circuit, as an example, includes L7 and
is used and the r -f guillotine tuner is switched out. They are T5 in series in both the SW1 and SW2 bands. Tuner T5 is in
called "guillotine" tuners because of their appearance. the ground end of the circuit and the signal is fed into the
grid and through C10. The shunt tuning capacity is either
FACTS ABOUT "GUILLOTINE" TUNING C56 or C57, depending upon which of the two short-wave
The "guillotine" tuners are designed primarily for the bands is used. Additional oscillator coupling capacitors, C72
88-108 megacycle FM band where special technique is needed or C73, are also added to compensate for the lower coupling
to realize high gain and circuit stability. Ordinary coils, tuned through C67 when the higher shunt capacitors are In the
by a variable capacitor, are inefficient at these frequencies, circuit.
first, because of the low inductances required to reach these In the r -f stage, a section of the loop is used as the grid
frequencies when a variable tuning capacitor is employed circuit. It is tuned for resonance by a shunt capacitor (C54
and, second, because shunt capacity reduces the gain of the and C55) and a shunt inductance (L20). Because a tuned
amplifier circuit; shunt capacity must be kept very low. circuit of this type is inherently broad, tuning through the
Another disadvantage of standard tuning arrangements at relatively narrow spread -band offers little advantage and
these frequencies is that common coupling is obtained through is not done.
the shaft of a ganged tuning capacitor unless insulated single
sections are used (cumbersome and costly). Common coupling
of this type tends to cause oscillation or general instability
and precludes high gain per stage. The guillotines make
possible short leads, completely isolated sections, stable
tuning, high Q circuits, low shunt capacity, and location of 63
STANDARD BROADCAST BAND These checks with oscillator tube (V3) removed:
When manual tuning is employed (Band Switch in STD VI grid to V2 grid ...... 13 (gt 1000 kc
.
position), the receiver employs an r -f stage, a converter, and VI grid to V2 grid 6® 9.6 mc
an oscillator, all of which are tuned by iron slugs suspended VI grid to V2 grid 9 I@ 11.8 mc
from the tuning elevator. In the automatic position (Band
Switch in the AUTO position), the r -f stage is not used.
Instead, a separate antenna coil is used which couples the
VI grid to V2 grid.
VI grid to V2 grid . ... 13 ® 45 mc
10 @ 98 mc
.
These checks with oscillator tube (V3) removed:

antenna and loop directly into the converter. A separate coil V2 grid to V4 grid . .23 ® 455 kc
is used in order to make the tuning circuit independent of the
dial tuning mechanism so that it may be tuned by trimmers
V2 grid to V4 grid ......... .....
..37 ® 10.7 mc
in the push-button assembly. V4 grid to V5 grid ....... .. 23 ® 455 kc
.
V4 grid to V5 grid ........ 60 ® 10.7 mc

Switching from manual to automatic tuning is accomplished
in the oscillator by using an oscillator coil which is tuned by a
V5 grid to V6 grid.....40 ®® 10.7
V5 grid to V6 grid
.
455 kc
mc 25
separate shunt inductance. In manual tuning, the inductance (2) Audio Gain
is one which is tuned by the tuning elevator. In automatic
tuning, a fixed shunt capacity (C-76) plus one of a series of .07 volts at 400 cps across volume control with control set
push-button selected coils tunes the oscillator. at maximum will give approximately watt output across
the speaker voice coil.
1-F AMPUFER (3) Oscillator Grid Bias
The i-f amplifier consists of a composite 455 kc and 10.7 mc D -c voltage developed across R5 (average):
circuit. The .tlectrical changes required to transfer between 13 v. @ 1000 kc 2.7 v. @ 11.8 mc
AM and FM service are made by the Band Switch. When the 2.7 v. @ 9.6 mc 5.5 v. @ 45 mc
switch is in either the FM1 or FM2 position, the amplifier 7 v. ca. 98 mc
operates at 10.7 megacycles and delivers the i-f signal into an (4) Socke PM Volages
FM discriminator circuit. When the switch is in any of the Fig. 8 shows typical tube pin voltages. All readings should
other positions, the amplifier operates at 455 kc. Screen be made from the pins to ground unless otherwise indicated.
voltage is removed from the tube which acted as an FM
limiter and this tube then acts as an AM diode detector. REPLACEMENT OF DRIVE CORDS
Thus, the AM audio signal appears across R16 while the DIAL STRINGING:
FM audio signal appears across R22. A section of the Band Push the tuning elevator all the way down and string the
Switch switches the audio input circuit from one to the other. dial as shown in Figure 1. This illustration shows the stringing
The AVC bus is also shorted out for FM. as viewed from behind the dial scale, as you would see it when
working on it. The numbers and arrows indicate the pro-
gression of the dial cord from start to finish. Notice that the
STAGE GAIN AND VOLTAGE CHECKS dial cord, in progressive steps 9, 10, 11, and 12, is made to
Stage gain measurements by vacuum tube voltmeter or travel behind the start and end of cord stringing, as viewed
similar measuring devices may be used to check circuit per- in Figure 1. The procedure will be easier if pulley C is by-
formance and isolate trouble. The gain values listed may have passed until the rest of the work is finished after which the
tolerances of 20%. Readings taken with low signal so that cord can be pulled tight over that pulley. During the pro-
AVC is not effective. cedure, locate the two brass eyelets so that they fall between
pulleys A and B. When finished, crimp the eyelets on the
(1) R -F and 1-F Stage Gains
in the proper positions to act as minimum and maxi-
mum stops for the tuning mechanism and clip the pointer
Signal applied through IRE dummy antenna: on the cable half -way between the eyelets.
Antenna post to VI grid 4 (§, 1000 kc Separate detail drawings are given to show the three
Antenna post to VI grid 2 ® 9.6 mc different methods of attaching the ends of the cord. The
Antenna post to VI grid 2 ® 11.8 mc arrangement with the standard helical spring was used in
Signal applied through 300 ohms, including signal some earlier production receivers. If the cord and spring are
generator impedance: to be replaced, the Type 1 spring should be used. It fits the
Dipole terminals to VI grid 1 5 ® 45 mc same drum and is an improved type. The Type 2 spring
Dipole terminals to VI grid..... 2 ® 98 mc should be used with the later type of drum (with two tabs).
Figure 1-Dill Stringing Diagram Showing Later Production Springs
64 Figure 2-Elevator Windlass Stringing Procedure

When stringing the mechanism with either the Type 1 or The table is broken down into six parts, one for each switch
Type 2 spring, load the spring by pulling the hook over the wafer. Section 1 is nearest the front and section 6 is the rear-
projection at the other end of the spring, string the dial and, most wafer.
as a final step, release the hook so that it pulls up the slack Individual lugs on each wafer are numbered from 1 to 12, de-
in the dial cord. pending upon their position on the wafer. The method of num-
&valor Stringing
bering is illustrated in Figure 5.
The step-by-step procedure for stringing the elevator wind- SECTION 1
lass is shown in Figure 2, a rear view of the mechanism. Start
by inserting the metallic cord in slot as shown in Step 1. At this -the other end of which is
Observe that the cord is measured five inches from end of loop lug- -connect this- connected to this -
to where it enters the slot. Now bring the loop end around the
pulley counterclockwise, as in Step 2. Next, thread loop
through hole in elevator top plate, fastening it to the hoist 1 Insulated wire, 5" 1g. Antenna transformer T13, terminal 4
cord tension spring, as viewed in Step 3. Steps 4, 5, 6, and 7
show how the free end of cord progresses on the pulley, going 2 a. Insulated wire, 114" Ig. Antenna terminal at rear of chassis
clockwise and that each turn is laid progressively one in b Insulated wire, 2" lg. Switch Section 1, lug 6
c. Capacitor C50 Switch Section 2, lug 1
back of the other and in back of the vertical section, going
to the tension spring in tuner plate. In Step 6, pass the free 3 Capacitor C52 Switch Section 2, lug 3
end of cord down through the hole in chassis, grasping its 4 a. Insulated wire, 1W Ig. Antenna transformer T1, terminal 1
end with long -nosed pliers and drawing tension on cord while b. Insulated wire, 14" Ig. Beam -a -scope plug; terminal A
running elevator completely down to the bottom. Keeping c. Insulated wire, 5 w lg. Antenna transformer T13, terminal 2
tension on cord and forcing large dial drive drum so that 5 a. Short bare bus Ground lug on C65
hoist cord spring is compressed, complete Step 7 making a b. Resistor R15 Switch Section 1, lug 11
one turn loop of the cord's free end around the lug shown
on end of elevator shaft and solder. 6 See lug 2b, above
Concluding Comment 7 Insulated wire, 11" Ig. Terminal strip 1, lug 4
After replacing the dial cord or the elevator cord, it may be 8 Capacitor C31 Front terminal of T2
found that some correction in relative positioning is needed. 9 a. Insulated wire, 9" lg. Terminal strip 2, lug 5
This can be done by loosening the set screws in the large drive b. Insulated wire, r lg. Filter capacitor, C46C
pulley directly behind the dial scale and re -positioning it on
the shaft. The object, of course, is to permit the tuning control 11 See lug 5b, above
to drive the elevator through its full tuning range. Slight SECTION 2
errors in final setting are not serious since leeway is provided
in the location of the dial pointer itself.
See Section 1, lug 2c
WIRING OF BAND SWITCH 1
In order to facilitate repair, replacement, and circuit trac- 3 a. Insulated wire, 24" lg. Trimmer CI, lug nearer TI
ing, a table and diagrams are supplied with reference to the b. See Section 1, lug 3
GRID GRID
4 Insulated wire, II -5" lg. Trimmer C55, lug TI
GRID 5 Coil L20 Ground lug on trimmer C2
6 Short bare bus Trimmer C65, left-hand terminal*
PSI
GRID PLATE
LOOP
ANT 7 Short bare bus Trimmer C2, left-hand terminal*
PRI 5
8 Capacitor C7 Tube socket VI, pin 1
DOTTED CIRCLES ARE
RUMMY TERMINALS
DIODE GRID HOL PLATE
ASH? 9 Insulated wire, 4" lg. Antenna transformer T13, terminal 1
PILOT GSvl
"OLE
AM AM 10 Insulated wire, 3W lg. Antenna transformer T1, terminal 2
AUDIO
CATHODE
6A07GT 11** Insulated wire, 11" lg. Beam -a -scope plug, terminal C
PILOT B. AL1010
PILO
HOLE-. PLATE HOLE_/,
DIODE II DIODE IS)
v PLATE
ASCE
GRID
SECTION 3
CONY PLATE
RSVP RSVP
BOTTOM VIEW OF COILS LOOKING FROM FRONT OF cNASS1S
1 Shielded wire, 8%," Ig. Terminal strip 2, lug 6
Figure 3 -Terminal Identification of Coil Assemblies 2 Insulated wire, 1 W Ig. Switch Section 3, lug 12
(Numbers correspond with schematic) Converter coil T6, terminal I
3 a. Insulated wire, 2 -4" Ig.
b. Capacitor C16 Ground lug on terminal strip 3
connections made in the band switch. If used properly, these c. Choke L3 Switch Section 3, lug 11
will be of invaluable aid 4 Insulated wire, 7)4" lg. Terminal strip 2. lug 3
SOCKET FOR LOOP TERMINAL
OR ANT. TRACKING STRIP NO.1 5 Insulated wire, 1 34" Ig. Converter coil T6, terminal 2
COIL I 2 4
6 Short bus with spaghetti Chassis
7 Short bare bus Terminal strip 3, lug 4
10 Shielded wire, 10W lg. Terminal strip 2, lug 2
11 a. See lug 3c, above
2 b. Capacitor C10 Switch Section 4, lug 3
3
12 a. See lug 2, above
O b. Shielded wire, 7W lg. Push-button socket, terminal B
S
PUSH-BUTTON
SOCKET * Looking from front, chassis inverted.
TERM NM_ ** Double lug (front and rear) soldered together.
STRIP NO.3 7
0 (:)
209 2 CBS CI
.9 Figure 5 -Identification of Switch Lugs

-SO Inverted and Viewed
from Panel
Figure 4 -Physical Location of Components

Listed in Band Switch Wiring Table OP 65
GENERAL ELECTRIC
NOADCAST WIT
AMP. IR. tri V VS co.
SA ANTENNA NO DIPOLE
r 07. (1:02 MF 6V6GT
COMMRLf
IS UM 033 GT 133
IN. NO MTSPRIA 47
11610 TU
RE AMPLIFIER Cat
1 040 02104
399 1
260-1 WO- ON ITC
350 3.
PAK R39-926 0.733

j 1208 IS 21on Tc
4-
YZOR RO RHF-'
339 C34
100
333
969 ~ 3gOo" I
7-1,"
m 1.0 1m n4,
15 10MEG
N
II "
fM 04.00 390029
4,
It 000,41.1,
YF
A5 295 4310V
3.1
ns
,116
FICK VINO" 644.1rfal
CM, SIMONS LOCO SW. MISR RM
SICIS fOVAISOTIO.TC04 14,??.
SFJO014-10YS BASS TONE
OR
CONVERTER Tax. PIACI WNW OR 4 5W,T. SI
MyK
C14,
CC01.RIMCf F7OPITIFIVCR.Z. 0.444,
SOTT40.90fill Fort- PoLt SInfenIS SOW swoccs --G4u
144SSIION
i-V72
144;NraiffIrIVIV: riRS 303sI 30.01=
44444
(MIZOZITI:gr.Oft=/!IVIC"'"f1011 49
M. SRO. OSPRISSIO SS
COL 200 1006 POSIT4o4r4,0,4
311 LE 18k
IN1? Mf
SSA
O
-v6A-4
1400 00090
.03fe110Gge
SO?
p53906 ,
tor 0.91 1(39 T II

IR
4-4THICV-o PROMO w
Iwolo
960-1SNIC JACK AT MAIN
5.6 L IC CANN
3-101( L __TM% ANL_ j
T SNIELD
.0ZingrIal"
073 OV1W-, RICCIOISC,
Jr K'
=CS PMCROGRTIPT4
Cat 10
5-310 3iTtAgsb,1r. LOCAL OSCILLATOR =072 PRE-AMft it 1ER
SANS
15
6" C12 Nig 2.;
Ar
Ca3 _ ISO
4 NO -Plan 7111444
.1r-1(" SR6,,-,--,-..13OLWO101 A'r
4-1 449 C'S'IACT
11.10 Ti LI PLUG th
60667
T. _ICI 045
p'3-30 310 COOULS SLOW rw9Liskt 636i
640.1060 RC ow COL
TS.594,,,
7°T STD t' 11. TC;t4
4444. 7F0.:.0:77.4,Egir _ C4?
OR IRO . OF PI US + PYT
STD NM COC
0t 114. Of
09C 5419T 1550 6937
TOMO CM. CS, MOTOR 64976T
rzho 47.910...71,1, WAAL) 475- 003
575 ti ..14'
19341
4,0 (lsl
001811010.1, POLLEN ISIFfIR Of MM. FOR
* ..211"-Stvv,0.-
XII. WOW, 04164 OF
POMO SVITCOO SIMON OR mt v6
u. EgiF
L1 mot et Nom) - i'47ralMIT
nm o
Plopkoro 4-4elomalle Mops, Model 417*

Signal Signal Band Dial See
Step Generator Input Switch Setting Adjust Note Remarks
Frequency Point
FM IF ALIGNMENT
1 10.7 mc 6SH7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 C49 for zero** 1, 2 Adjust C49 for zero meter reading.
Apply 1 -volt signal input.
2 See last 6SH7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 Signal 1, 2 Detune signal generator to point of
column Generator maximum meter reading.
3 As in step 2 6SG7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 Peak C48 1, 2
4 10.7 mc 6SV7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 Peak C28 & 1, 3 6AQ7GT tube removed from its
C94 socket.
5 10.7 mc 6SG7 grid thru .01 mf FM1 Peak C26 & I, 3 6AQ7GT tube removed from its
C93 socket.
6 10.7 mc Cony. grid directly FM1 Peak C24 & 1, 3, 4 6AQ7GT tube removed from its
L-10 socket.
AM IF ALIGNMENT
7 455 kc Cony. grid directly STD Peak C86 & 5, 6
C61
8 455 kc Cony. grid directly STD Peak C15 es 5, 6
---
9 455 kc Cony. grid directly STD
C23
Peak C13 & 5, 6
C14
FM IF ALIGNMENT
10 88 mc DIPOLE terminals FM2 88 mc-6.8 to Peak C6" 1, 3, Set dial accurately-then adjust C6.
6.9 in.* 7, 10
11 98 mc DIPOLE terminals FM2 For max. out- Peak C3 1, 3, Tune dial for maximum output, then
put 8 peak C3 while rocking dial.
12 98 mc DIPOLE terminals FM2 Do not change Peak C2 1, 3
13 43 mc DIPOLE terminals FM1 43 mc-6 to Peak C45" 1, 3, Set dial accurately-then adjust C45.
6.1 in. 7
14 46 mc DIPOLE terminals FM1 For max. out- Peak C63 1, 3, Tune dial for maximum output, then
put 8 peak C63 while rocking dial.
15 46 mc DIPOLE terminals FM1 Do not change Peak C65 1, 3
SW RF ALIGNMENT
16 11.8 mc Antenna thru 400 SW2 11.8 mc-4.5 Peak C58 5, 6, Set dial accurately-then adjust C58.
ohms to 4.6 in. 7, 10
17 11.8 mc Antenna thru 400 SW2 Do not change Peak C57 5, 6, Peak C57 while rocking dial.
ohms 8
18 11.8 mc Antenna thru 400 SW2 Do not change Peak C54 5, 6 C54 is located on back apron of
---
19 9.6 mc
ohms
Antenna thru 400 SW1 9.6 mc-4.5 Peak C59 5, 6,
chassis.
Set dial accurately-then adjust C59.
ohms to 4.6 in.* 7, 10
20 9.6 mc Antenna thru 400 SW1 Do not change Peak C56 5, 6, Peak C56 while rocking dial.
---
21 9.6 mc
ohms
Antenna thru 400 SWI Do not change Peak C55
8
5, 6
ohms
BROADCAST RF ALIGNMENT
22 1620 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD Extreme right- Peak C5 5, 6
hand position
23 1620 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD Extreme right- Peak C4 5, 6
hand position
24 1620 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD Extreme right- Peak Cl 5, 6
hand position
25 1500 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD 1500 kc-1.4 Osc. Coil T3 5, 6, T3 iron slug is the rear one on the
to 1.5 in.* iron slug 7, 9 left side. Adjust for peak.
26 1000 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD For max. out- Cony. coil T6 5, 6, T6 iron slug is the center one on the
put iron slug 9 left side. Adjust for peak.
27 1000 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD Do not change R -F coil T1 5, 6, T1 iron slug is the front one on the
iron slug 9 left side. Adjust for peak.
28 580 kc Antenna via 200 mmf STD For max. out- Peak L8 5, 6, Peak L8 while rocking dial.
put 8
29 Repeat steps 22 to 28.
Important! See Note 7.
"Use insulated hex wrench, 3.'. 67
ALIGNMENT
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:
1. Test Oscillator with tone modulation. (See Table.) Notes in Comoction with Alionantint Table
2. D -C Voltmeter or Microammeter. (See notes 2 and 3.) 1. Use unmodulated signal.
3. A -C Voltmeter, 2 volts. (See note 6.) 2. Connect 20,000 -ohm -per -volt meter from junction of
4. Insulated hex wrench, 3e. (See steps 1, 10, 13.) R21 and C29 to chassis. Use ten -volt scale. (Steps 1-3.)
5. .01 MF Paper Capacitor. (See steps 1 to 5.) 3. Connect 20,000 -ohm -per -volt meter from grid pin 4 of
6SH7 to chassis with a 200,000 -ohm resistor in series.
6. 400 -ohm, ji-watt resistor. (See steps 16 to 21.) The resistor must be connected directly to the grid so
7. 200 mmf. mica capacitor. (See steps 22 to 28.) that capacity loading will be negligible and so that the
Important detailed instructions and references in connec- meter is isolated from the i-f signal voltage. Keep signal
tion with the alignment table which follows are keyed in by generator output down so that the meter indicates not
means of column 7, headed "See Note." The notes are in- more than one volt at the grid (5 micro -amperes through
cluded in numerical order after the table. They are important 200,000 ohms). (Alignment steps 4 to 6, 10, to 15).
-refer to them carefully. 4. Connect signal generator directly to the converter grid
at some convenient point. The generator lead must be
shielded up to this connection so that not more than
LOCATED ON SACK CS, Ili inch of exposed lead exists. Ground the shield solidly
APRON 0, CHASSIS
by clamping it firmly to the chassis or a shield as close
to the connection as possible. (Steps 6-9.)
5. Use 400 -cycle modulation. (Steps 7 to 9, 16 to 28.)
6. Connect a standard output meter across speaker voice
coil. Turn volume control fully on. Keep signal viler-
ator output down sa that the meter indicates not more
than 3 -watt output (2 volts) during alignment. (Steps
7 to 9, 16 to 28.)
7. If dial scale is not available, index pointer as follows:
Turn pointer to right-hand limit of travel. Mark the
dial back plate at a reference edge of the pointer slider.
GSA Then set pointer by turning dial knob until the indicated
1620 KC 0 e dimension exists between the reference edge and the
,F:Le mark.
8. "Rocking" consists of adjusting the indicated adjuster
CSS while turning the dial a small amount back and forth
U,0 STO
through peak output. The object is to find the maximum
0
GI 095M0
G2
IYt
III.
WI
peak. Rocking is necessary and is permissible only when
MAAKG interlocking circuits are being adjusted.
0 RANO SWITCH
POSITIONS
9. The main tunin% iron slugs are suspended from the left
side of the tuning "elevator." They are individually
46MC
adjustable by loosening the locknut and turning the sup-
porting screw into which the suspending wire is soldered.
VOLUME BASS BAND ON -OFF TUNING
10. Two oscillator settings will give response. The higher
SWITCH TREBLE TONE frequency response point is the correct one; the other is
the image. If in doubt, start with the trimmer screw
Figure 7 -Location of Tube. and Adlusters loosened completely and adjust for the first response.
V10- 6SC7 V4 -6S67 V5 -6S V7

CATHODE +2.3 ,-SCREEN +12S
2\er-EILATE +90 6.3 A.C. V6-6SH7
I.o7
30/ 76 PLATE +216
V-, 6
05 7 PLATE +230
3 O
L-PLATE+ 70 0 0
3.1A.C. 0.3 A.G.
-SCREEN+95 SCREEN +57
3.1A.C.
(F.M. BAND ONLY)
L 6.3 A.C.
PLATE +114
THIS TUBE ON
PRE -AMP CHASSIS V3-6AK 5 BOTTOM VIEW OF
CHASSIS SHOWN
PLATE
+140 ALL VOLTAGES MEASURED
V9- 5Y3GT SCREEN TO CHASSIS USING A V7-6AQ7GT
+14 0 L0,000 OHM PER VOLT
6.3 A.C. 6.3 A. C.
METER
V2 -SAKS
SCR0 7EEN
+
+310 PLATE
+16111
6.3 A.C. V8- 6V6G T
VI - 6AG 5
Cis ,0
SCREEN +247 6.3 A.C.
SCREEN
+67
PLATE PLATE 29
+142
68
6.3 A.C.
Figure 8 -Socket Voltage Diagram C7110DE+13
GENERAL ELECTRIC
SERVICE DATA
FOR
TELEVISION RECEIVER
MODEL 801
ELECTRICAL RATING: ANTENNA REQUIREMENTS:

Type Folded Dipole
Frequency 50/60 cps 60 cps Impedance.. 300 ohms
Voltage 105-125 v. 105-125 v.
Wattage (Radio) 85 85
Wattage (Television) 215 215 CAUTION NOTICE
THE REGULAR B+ VOLTAGES ARE DANGEROUS AND PRE-
CAUTIONS SHOULD BE OBSERVED WHEN THE CHASSIS IS RE-
R -F FREQUENCY RANGE: MOVED FROM THE CABINET FOR SERVICE PURPOSES. THE HIGH
Selector Switch Picture Sound VOLTAGE SUPPLY (8000 v.) AT THE PICTURE TUBE ANODE WILL
Position Freq. Range Carrier Carrier GIVE AN UNPLEASANT SHOCK BUT DOES NOT SUPPLY ENOUGH
Radio 540-1600 kc CURRENT TO GIVE A FATAL BURN OR SHOCK. HOWEVER,
44- 50 mc 45.25 49.75 SECONDARY HUMAN REACTIONS TO OTHERWISE HARMLESS
No. 1
SHOCKS HAVE BEEN KNOWN TO CAUSE INJURY. SINCE THE
No. 2 54- 60 mc 55.25 59.75
HIGH VOLTAGE IS OBTAINED FROM THE B
No. 3 60- 66 mc 61.25 65.75 VOLTAGE, CER-
66- 72 mc 67.25 71.75 TAIN PORTIONS OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING CIRCUIT
No. 4
76- 82 mc 77.25 81.75 ARE DANGEROUS AND EXTREME PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE
No. 5
OBSERVED.
No. 6. 82- 88 mc 83.25 87.75
THE PICTURE TUBE IS HIGHLY EVACUATED AND IF BROKEN,
No. 7 174- 180 mc 175.25 179.75
GLASS FRAGMENTS WILL BE VIOLENTLY EXPELLED. IF IT IS
No. 8 180- 186 mc 181.25 185.75
No. 9 186- 192 mc 187.25 191.75 NECESSARY TO CHANGE THE PICTURE TUBE, USE SAFETY
No. 10 192- 198 mc 193.25 197.75 GOGGLES AND GLOVES.
No. 11 198- 204 mc 199.25 203.75
No. 12 204- 210 mc 205.25 209.75
No. 13 210- 216 mc 211.25 215.75
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCIES:
Television Video (carrier freq. equivalent) 26.4 mc The General Electric Model 801 television receiver is a
21.9 mc
console type, 24 tube instrument providing reception of all
Television Audio 13 commercial television channels and radio reception in the
Radio 455 kc standard broadcast band. The television picture is reproduced
AUDIO POWER OUTPUT: on a 10 -inch electromagnetically deflected picture tube. All
3 watts electrical components are mounted on a single chassis, per-
Undistorted mitting optimum ease in adjustment and service.
Maximum 4 5 watts Features of this television receiver include a constant in-
TUSKS: (24 Including reetiflers) put impedance r -f amplifier, ion trap, safe high voltage
Purpose Type power supply, automatic frequency control for horizontal
Symbol synchronization, ten -inch picture tube, and high fidelity FM
(V 1) Television R -F Amplifier 6AU6 audio system.
(V 2) Television Converter -Oscillator 7F8
(V 3) 1st Video I -F Amplifier 6AC7
(V 4) 2nd Video I -F Amplifier 6AC7 DESCRIPTION -TELEVISION CIRCUITS
(V 5) 3rd Video I -F Amplifier 6AC7 The television receiver circuits are divided into the follow-
(V 6) Video Detector -Bias Rectifier 6H6 ing sections:
(V 7) Video Amplifier 6AC7 1. R -f amplifier, converter and oscillator
(V 8) Picture Tube 10BP4 2. Video and audio i-f amplifier
(V 9) Clipper -Horizontal Sync. Ampli 6SN7GT 3. Video detector and amplifier
(V10) Horizontal Discr.-D-C Amplifier 6SL7GT 4.. Sync pulse clipper -amplifier
(Vii) Horizontal Multivibrator 6SN7GT 5. Horizontal multivibrator and AFC sync.
(V12) Horizontal Output 807 6. Horizontal sweep output
(V13) High Voltage Rectifier 8016 7. Vertical multivibrator and sweep output
(V14) Horizontal Damping 6AS7G 8. High voltage power supply (H.V. supply)
(V15) Horiz. Discrim.-Vert. Sync. Amplifier 6SL7GT 9. Low voltage power supply (L.V. supply)
(V16) Vertical Multivibrator 6SN7GT A brief description of the operation of each section is de-
(V17) Vertical Output 6V6GT scribed in the following paragraphs. This is supplemented
(V18) Radio Converter 6SA7 by a comprehensive television training course in the publica-
(V19) lst Audio I -F Amplifier 6SG7 tion, RSM-4-TV.
(V20) 2nd Audio I -F Amplifier. 6SV7 A block diagram of the complete receiver is shown in
(V21) Audio Discrim.-Audio Amplifier 6AQ7GT Figure 1 to assist in signal tracing and to better visualize the
(V22) Audio Output 6V6GT operation of the receiver as a whole.
(V23) Low Voltage Rectifier 5V4G
(V24) Low Voltage Rectifier 5U4G I. R -F AAWUFMR, CONVERTER D OSCIUATOR (Soo FIgur. 2) -
Changed to a Type 5Y3GT in late production receivers, The r -f amplifier makes use of a Type 6AU6 tube connected
at approximately serial No. 2000. as a triode grounded -grid amplifier. The antenna is connected
into the cathode circuit so as to provide a substantially
LOUDSPEAKER: constant input impedance of 300 ohms to the antenna at all
Type Alnico "PM" Dynamic frequencies. With a 300 -ohm antenna and transmission line
Size 12 inches system, this coupling arrangement permits optimum transfer
Voice Coil Impedance (400 cycles) 3.2 ohms of signal from antenna to r -f amplifier for all 13 channels.
69
PICTURE SIZE:
Height . 6 inches
Width 8 inches
ANTENNA
YIRKS21-P V IQfQ tklitr14, CRT

R -F 2ND
AMPLI. CC" I F
1E1 OCT.AMPLI. 11311-
OSC
N.V.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SUPPLY
CLIPPER syroc
A.F.0 AMPLI.
AMPLI.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
SYNC
AMPLI M.V. AMPLL
AUDIO I- F AUDIO DETECTOR - OUTPUT
!'CAST 11fM AM
C AMPLI
IDET.
AM
FIg. 1. Mock Diagram, Modal $01
R101 is the normal bias resistor. A choke, I,K, is placed in 2. VIDEO AND AUDIO I -F AMPURERS (Soo Figure 3)-The
series with this cathode resistor to prevent the input im- video i-f amplifier makes use of a three -stage band-pass
pedance from being lowered by the shunting effect of the amplifier using three Type 6AC7 tubes. The transformers,
total stray capacity to ground of the cathode of the tube. T1, T2, T3, and T4, are overcoupled and then loaded with
The choke value is changed with frequency. resistance, RL, to give an adequate (approx. 4 mc).band-pass
The r -f amplifier is coupled to the converter tube by a frequency characteristic. A third winding is added to each
wide band transformer consisting of windings Lp and L.. video transformer and tuned to trap out the adjacent audio
CONV.
and associated audio interference. The trap on T1 is tuned
C103 C104 to 27.9 mc to provide rejection of the adjacent channel audio
i-f, while the traps at T2, T3, and T4 are tuned to 21.9 mc
to provide rejection of the same channel audio.
T22 VIDEO 1-F
AMPLI.
Lp I-
R104
ANTENNA
INPUT OSC.
COUPLED
C105
C107
T22
INDICATES SWITCHING
POINT
FIg. 2. R -f AnspiMisr, Convertor Oscillator
The windings are self -tuned by the distributed and tube

capacities to provide optimum gain. On channels No. 1 and FIg. 3. Video A Audio 1-f Ampliaor
No. 2 the transformer is triple tuned to prevent the image The audio i-f frequency is developed by taking the 21.9 mc
frequencies of the 88-108 mc FM band from interfering signal from across the trap on T2 and applying it to the grid
with these two channels. The triode converter is one section of the audio i-f amplifier tube V19. The ground return side
of a Type 7F8 dual triode, V2A. Bias for this tube is of the trap is effectively connected to ground at 21.9 mc
provided by the oscillator voltage appearing in the grid of through the low impedance circuit offered by the capacitors
V2A causing grid rectification charging the grid resistor - C74 and C42. Since the audio channel of the television is
condenser combination, R104 and C104.
The oscillator makes use of the remaining half of the Type frequency -modulated, the transformer T6 functions with the
7F8 tube, V2B, and is inductively coupled to the converter diode sections of V21 as the discriminator.
grid by locating the oscillator grid coil, T22, on the same Bias voltage, derived by rectifying 6.3 volts a -c through the
coil form as the converter grid coil, Lg. The oscillator is a diode V6B, is applied to the grid circuits of the video i-f
modified Colpits oscillator, oscillation being produced by the amplifier tubes, V3 and V4. A variable potentiometer con-
cathode -to -grid, Cg, and cathode -to -plate, Ck, interelectrode trast control, permits this voltage to be changed so as to
capacities of the oscillator tube. The choke Lt provides a d -c vary the gain of the i-f amplifier.
ground to the cathode of the oscillator but maintains the 3. VIDEO DETECTOR AND AMPUFIER (See Figure 4)-The video
cathode off -ground at the r -f frequencies. The oscillator i-f amplifier output is applied to a diode rectifier, V6, and
operates on the high frequency side of the r -f signal on all the diode load, R14, is connected so as to develop a negative -
bands. going signal voltage at this point. The signal is amplified by
The r -f amplifier, converter and oscillator is constructed tube V7 and then applied directly to the cathode of the pic-
as a complete unit sub -assembly which can readily be de- ture tube, V8. This provides direct coupling so that d -c re-
mounted from the main chassis. insertion is unnecessary. The chokes L5 and L3 are series
peaking chokes, while L4 is a shunt peaking choke. These are
used to obtain good high frequency response. L5 also pre-
70 vents harmonics of the i-f frequency from being passed
through the video amplifier. R16 is the V7 tube plate load
resistor.
speed, permitting a synchronizing system which is relatively
V6 V7 V8
free from random noise triggering. The Horizontal Hold
L3
control, R36, controls the speed of the multivibrator, per-
T4 itL5
R14
0
150v
L4
MI mitting the free -running speed of it to be set near the correct
frequency during the time when no sync pulses are available.
6. HORIZONTAL SWEEP OUTPUT (Soo Figure 6)-The horizontal
sawtooth voltage generated by the multivibrator, Vii, is
C20 To
shaped and then amplified by a Type 807 tube, V12. The
Clipper
4I5v-* output of this tube is coupled to the horizontal deflection
yoke through an impedance matching transformer, T9. An
RI6 70-I55v* oscillatory voltage, as shown in the dotted line in the wave
shape at the upper left of Figure 6, which results from the
rapid retrace in transformer T9, is removed by the damping
*VOLTAGE VALUES ARE APPROX FOR NO SIGNAL INPUT tube, V14. This tube is a triode Type 6AS7 and by its use the
FIg. 4. Video Oirtioctor a Ansplillor
transient may be dampened, linearity controlled and the
positive overshoot voltage retained for use in the high voltage
supply. The linearity of the horizontal trace is controlled by
With the cathode of V8 coupled directly into the plate varying the voltage wave shape applied to the grid of V14 by
circuit of V7, it is necessary to apply a variable positive volt- potentiometer R49. The horizontal size is varied by the
age to the control grid of the picture tube in order to control adjustable iron core inductance, L7, which is in series with
the beam current and, therefore, the brightness of the picture. the output to the yoke.
In late production receivers where the rectifier V23 is a
Type 5Y3G tube, the cathode and control grid voltages of
V8 will be approximately 25 volts less.
4. curvet AND SYNC AMPLIFIER-The triode section, V9A, of
a Type 6SN7GT tube is used to separate the sync pulses
from the video signal taken off at the load resistor, R16,
see Figure 4. This is accomplished by applying very low plate
voltage to V9A, then the resulting grid rectification causes
negative bias to be developed at the grid of V9A so that
conduction occurs only during the sync pulse intervals which
are the most positive component of the video signal.
Tube V9B is a horizontal synchronizing amplifier which
rejects the vertical pulse at the transformer, T2, by virtue
of its low inductance to the vertical synchronizing pulse.
The cathode impedance is required to raise the control grid
to a positive voltage with respect to chassis for proper
operation of V15B. The tube V15B is operated as a cathode
follower vertical synchronizing amplifier. Integration of the
vertical signal is provided in both the grid and cathode cir-
cuits.
5. HORIZONTAL MULTIVIBRATOR AND AFC SYNC (Soft Figure 5)-
The horizontal sawtooth oscillator makes use of a Type Fig. 6. Horizontal Swoop Output
6SN7GT tube, VII, in a conventional cathode -coupled
multivibrator circuit. Instead of its frequency being con- 7. VERTICAL MULTIVIBRATOR AND SWEEP OUTPUT (Sim Figure 7)-
trolled directly by the horizontal sync pulses, it is controlled The vertical sawtooth voltage is generated by a Type 6SN7-
by a d -c voltage on its grid, which is the resultant of the GT tube, V16, connected as a multivibrator. This voltage is
phase error between the incoming sync signal and a saw - coupled directly to a Type 6V6G vertical sweep output tube,
tooth voltage derived from the output of the horizontal sweep V17, and then to the vertical sweep yoke through the im-
amplifier. This voltage is called an automatic frequency pedance matching transformer, T8. Vertical speed is con-
control (AFC) voltage, trolled by changing the time constant of the multivibrator
The AFC voltage is developed by the diode -connected grid circuit by the potentiometer, R62. Sweep size is changed
triodes VIOA and VISA by mixing the horizontal sync pulse by the potentiometer, R61, which changes the B+ voltage
at the secondary of transformer T7 with a sawtooth wave- applied to the charging network of tube V16 simultaneously
form derived at the output of the sweep amplifier. When the with the screen voltage on tube V17. Vertical linearity is
sync pulse occurs at the time "a" shown in the sawtooth controlled by feeding back voltage through C37 from the
waveform drawing in Figure 5, no voltage will be developed cathode to grid of the output tube. The amount of the voltage
at the output of the filter. However if the multi v,brator runs is varied by the variable cathode resistor, R58.
faster or slower so that the pulse falls at a point other than
at "a," a positive or negative voltage will appear at the filter, S. HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY (Soo Figure 6)-The high voltage is
which will be amplified by the d -c amplifier V1013 and then derived by making use of the inductive "kick" voltage pro-
duced during retrace in the horizontal output transformer
0
R61
R64 C 22 c
R60
78
V16
S nc C36 VI7 VERT
SWEEP
Input YOKE
C37 R58
fig. 5. Horizontal M.V. a Sync Circuit R67 C22d
R62 R57
applied to the grid of the multivibrator. This change in d -c
voltage on the grid of the multivibrator will cause it to speed
up or slow down so as to cause the sawtooth wave to com-
bine with the incoming sync pulses until the correction volt- Vortical Swoop Output
age becomes zero. With the filter, consisting of C92, R32, FIg. 7.
and C30, the change is relatively slow in controlling the 71
This "kick" voltage is shown in the wave shape shown as a -b (b) Use a 200 mmf mica capacitor or standard RMA
in Figure 6. This voltage is generated in the primary winding dummy between the high side of the signal generator and the
and is further increased by an additional winding added to signal input point, as indicated in the Alignment Table.
the transformer which connects to the rectifier tube plate of 2. Broadcast R -F Alignment -Apply signal generator input
V13. The rectifier tube, V13, is a Type 8016 which derives to one of dipole input terminals through a 200 mmf mica
its filament voltage from the horizontal sweep transformer capacitor as in (1) above. An output meter may be used in
T9 by a single turn around the transformer. Because of the place of the oscilloscope for indicating output. First adjust
high frequency which is rectified, a 500 mmf capacitor is oscillator trimmer by tuning gang condenser to minimum
more than sufficient for filtering purposes. capacity and aligning oscillator trimmer for maximum with a
9. LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY -Two rectifiers are used to 1620 kc input signal. Next with 1500 kc input signal, tune
supply the required plate current for the television and radio in signal, set pointer to 1500 kc calibration then align r -f
receiver. A Type 5U4G tube, V24, supplies the bulk of the trimmer for maximum output.
3. Video I -F Tap Alignment -The video i-f traps are used
current and makes use of combination inductive and resistance to attenuate the sound i-f of the same and adjacent channels
type filter. A Type 5V4G or 5Y3G tube, V23, is used to from being detected and reproduced as sound bar interference
supply higher voltage to the horizontal output, horizontal on the picture tube. Misalignment of these traps results in
multivibrator, and the cathode ray tube 1st anode. This is the interference pattern, as shown in Figure 31.
followed by a choke filter. All filament supply leads except Set the contrast control about half -way up. Turn the
for tubes V19, V20, V21, V22 and the rectifier filaments Station Selector to channel 13. Connect the oscilloscope
pass through the band switch so that tubes may be switched through a 10,000 -ohm resistor, to the top of the 3300 -ohm
ON or OFF when switching from radio to television. video load resistor, R16.
Connect the output of an accurately calibrated signal
CIRCUIT ALIGNMENT generator with tone modulation to the grid of the converter
GENERAL -A complete alignment of the Model 801 television tube, V2A, through a 200 mmf mica capacitor. The alignment
receiver consists of the following individual alignment pro- frequencies are:
cedures. These are listed below in the correct sequence of T1 (C10)-27.9 mc
alignment. However, any one alignment may be performed T2 (C13)-21.9 mc
without the necessity of realignment of any one of the other T3 (C16)-21.9 mc
sectional alignments. T4 (C19)-21.9 mc
1. Broadcast i-f amplifier The trimmers should be aligned for minimum output, care
2. Broadcast r -f amplifier being taken to get the lowest possible indication at the output.
3. Television i-f traps The input signal should be attenuated below saturation of
4. Television sound i-f amplifier the i-f amplifier tubes at start, then raised as signal is at-
5. Video i-f amplifier
tenuated during alignment.
4. Television Sound 1-F Alignment -Since the television
6. Oscillator adjustments
7. Television r -f amplifier
sound i-f amplifier transformer is slightly overcoupled,
The alignment procedure is in table form on pages 8 through alignment by a sweep generator is recommended. Connect
11. The following paragraphs are important suggestions to be the generator through a 200 mmf capacitor to grid (4) of V3.
followed when attempting alignment and should be read For alignment, connect the oscilloscope through a 100,000
thoroughly before alignment is attempted. ohm isolating resistor across capacitor C49.
For step 1, insert a 21.9 mc marker signal from an un-
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS -To provide the over-all align- modulated signal generator into the same point of input as
ment as outlined above, the following test equipment is the sweep generator. This input from the signal generator
required. should be very loosely coupled by clipping the signal gen-
1. Cathode Ray Oscilloscope -This scope should preferably erator through insulation to the grid (4) of V3.
have a 5 -inch screen and should preferably have gobd high Keep the input of the sweep generator low enough so that
frequency response, which will be useful in making waveform the sound i-f amplifier does not overload. Check by increasing
voltage measurements on pages 20 and 21. the output of the sweep; the response curve on the scope
2. Signal Generator -This signal generator must have good should increase in size proportionally. Set Contrast Control
frequency stability and be accurately calibrated. It should be to half -advanced position.
capable of covering the following frequency ranges with tone The response curve of the amplifier at the grid return of
modulation where desired. V20 should appear as in Figure 8A.
(a) 455 kc for broadcast For discriminator alignment the secondary trimmer, C78,
(b) 550-1600 kc for broadcast of T6 is aligned by using a tone modulated 21.9 mc signal and
(c) 21.9 mc for video i-f trap listening to the tone at the loudspeaker. The trimmer is
(d) 27.9 mc for video i-f trap adjusted for minimum tone signal output. If the sweep is used
(e) 23.0 mc for video i-f marker for the secondary trimmer alignment, the cross -over should be
(f) 25.65 mc for video i-f marker symmetrical about a 21.9 mc marker and should be a straight
(g) 26.4 mc for video i-f marker line between the alternate peaks, as shown in Figure 8B.
(h) 44-110 mc and 174-238 mc for oscillator adjustment Reconnect oscilloscope across the top of the volume control.
and markers for the r -f channel bandwidth measure-
ments.
3. R -F Sweep Generator -This should give approximately
0.1 -volt output with adjustable attenuation of the output.
The output should be flat over wide frequency variations. The Fig. S. T -V Audio
frequency coverage should be: I -F Curves
(a) 20 to 30 mc, with 10 mc sweep width
(b) 40 to 90 mc, with 25 mc sweep width
(c) 170 to 220 mc, with 25 mc sweep width
4. Output Meter -An output meter with a voltage range
0-2,5 volts a -c.
ALIGNMENT SUGGESTIONS -With the exception of the broad- With the same sweep input as in step 1, adjust the primary
cast i-f and r -f trimmers and the FM sound i-f discriminator trimmer, C84, of T6 for maximum peak -to -peak amplitude
trimmers, all alignment adjustments are performed from the of the positive and negative peaks as shown in Figure 8B.
underside of the chassis. Remove the chassis from the cabinet 5. Video I -F Alignment -The video i-f amplifier uses trans-
and turn it on its side with the power transformer down. formers which are coupled and loaded to give the proper
This is the only safe position in which the chassis will rest band-pass characteristic. Before attempting alignment of the
and leave all adjustments accessible. The following sugges- video i-f, the sound i-f traps should be aligned as in (31, then
tions apply to each individual alignment procedure. do not touch these trimmers when making the video i-f
I. Broadcast 1-F Alignment -(a) Although the oscilloscope alignment.
is recommended in the table for indicating the output voltage Stage -by -stage alignment should be performed so as to
during alignment, an output meter may be connected across duplicate the curves, as shown in Figures 9A, B, C, and D.
the speaker voice coil as an alternate output indicating device. The markers are used to establish the correct bandwidth and
When this is used, the volume control should be set for frequency limits.
maximum volume and then attenuate the signal generator The trap formed by L20 and C89 in the cathode of V4 is
output so as not to cause audio overload. used to reduce the overshoot of the 21.9 mc traps. Adjust the
spacing of turns comprising L20 by either pushing them to-
72 gether or separating them so as to give a minimum amplitude
to the overshoot.
necessary that the curve be adjusted for maximum amplitude
23.0 M.C.
264 Mt _23.03MC consistent with correct band width. To provide these mini-
26.4 M C mum requirements, the r -f coils are overcoupled in a very
ADJUST similar manner to the video i-f transformers. However,
OYERSICOT
FOR MIN
instead of adjusting capacity to tune the coils, the inductance
83% 70% is varied by moving a few turns. Coupling is also adjustable
by moving the entire coil either away from or toward the
I adjacent coil on the form.
The physical assembly of the coils in the band switch
21.9 Y.C.
0 21.9 M.C.
locates the r -f amplifier plate coil at the rear of the switch
and the oscillator coil towards the front end. Two types of
coils are used-the Channel No. 1 and No. 2 coils have an
2545144 23D14.6. additional link circuit between the grid and plate coils to
2 DMA provide better image rejection of the FM band (88 to 108 mc)
signals on these two channels. These links are tuned by means
26.4 MC, of two copper rings which are moved along the coil forms for
22.4 M.C. adjustments.
The input sweep signal is applied to the antenna terminal
SO%
board at the r -f unit. The 300 -ohm cable between the antenna
terminal board and r -f amplifier input must be disconnected
at the r -f unit when making r -f alignment. The marker signal
Fig. 9. Video I -F Alignment Curves
Connect the sweep generator to the tube grid preceding the

transformer to be aligned. Adjust the sweep width for a PLATE
GRIO
OSCILLATOR
minimum of 10 mc about the center frequency of the video COUPLING LINK
i-f. The marker frequencies are supplied by a signal generator
and sufficient marker signal may be supplied in most cases
by merely connecting the high side of the signal generator to
the television chassis.
The primary of the transformer preceding the grid where
the signal is applied will act as a trap putting a hole in the COPPER ADJ. RINGS GRID
alignment curves as viewed on the scope unless it is short
circuited or detuned. It may be detuned readily by connect-
CHAN8ELS. I a.2 CHANNELS *3
ing a 100 to 200 mmf capacitor across the primary trimmer or
place a temporary short circuit across the primary trimmer.
Be sure to remove this capacitor after the stage is aligned. Fig. 10. It -F Coil Assembly
Keep the input of the sweep generator low so as not to
overload the video i-f amplifier. generator may be coupled loosely to the antenna input ter-
The response curves shown are obtained on an oscilloscope minals.
at the junction of L4 and R16. Use a 10,000 resistor in series The output r -f response curve is taken off at the junction
with the input lead to the oscilloscope. of RI and Cl. The Contrast Control should be set for mini-
The contrast control should be advanced approximately to mum for all r -f alignment.
its half -advanced position. For channels No. 1 and No. 2, the r -f coil should be aligned
The Selector Switch should be turned to radio position and to give approximately the curve shown in Figure 11A. The
a temporary jumper put across filament switch wafer so high frequency end of curve (at S marker) may be peaked
as to keep the television tube filaments lit while in this radio slightly higher than the low frequency end of curve, but the
position. If a television position is used, the i-f curve will be 'ow frequency end should never be aligned with more ampli-
affected by the interaction from the r -f coil in the converter tude than the high frequency end. The markers should be
tube grid. NOTE-When jumper is used, remove B+ from located on the inside of the humps of the curves, the video
r -f assembly by disconnecting external lead to terminal (2) marker (P) preferably being inside slightly farther than the
of r -f assembly, see Fig. 12. sound marker (S). Adjustment of the bandwidth is made
6. Oscillator Adjustment-The oscillator coil must be ad- by moving the plate coil closer to the grid coil or vice -versa.
justed so that the Television Tuning Condenser, C112, will In most cases the sliding of the copper rings will give both
tune the sound carrier of the television signal at the middle the required bandwidth and frequency adjustment. Spread
of its range. Set the condenser, C112, to mid -position. Then
adjust oscillator coil for channels No. through No. 6 b)
1
P
spreading turns to raise frequency or compressing turns t(
lower frequency. For channels No. 7 through No. 13, the
oscillator coil consists of a single turn. Adjust these coils by
spreading the gap to lower frequency or closing the gap to
raise frequency in the leads of the coil which run to the
terminals.
Apply the signal generator with tone modulation to the
antenna input terminals and set the generator to the sound
carrier frequency for the channel under alignment. The signal CHANNELS CHANNELS CHANNELS
generator must be very accurately calibrated. This can be 1 a'2 `3-`6 7 -.13
done by beating its output against a known channel carrier LEGEND P. VIDEO CARRIES
or use a station operating on the channel and tune in the sound. SOUND CARRIER
For output indication, advance the volume control about
to mid -position so that the tone modulation or audio modula- Fig. 11. 11-1 Alignment Curves
tion on the channel station may be heard through the loud- or squeeze turns in plate and grid coils if the frequency can-
speaker. not be obtained by sliding the rings. Spreading turns results
The oscillator coil is located on the coil form or assembly in a raising of the frequency; while squeezing turns lowers the
nearest to the front of the switch assembly and is wound of frequency.
heavier wire than the other coils. This is shown in Figure 10. For the remainder of the channels, the adjustment of the
7. R -F Coil Alignment-The r -f coil assembly is designed plate coil in relation to the grid coil changes the bandwidth
for stable, band-pass operation and under normal conditions while the spreading or squeezing of the plate and grid coil
will seldom require adjustment. In cases where it is definitely turns results in the raising or lowering of frequency. Only
known that alignment is necessary (such as when the present when the plate and grid coils are tuned to the same frequency
coil is damaged and has been changed), do not attempt the will the amplitude be greatest with the correct bandwidth.
adjustment unless suitable equipment is available. When The outside peaks of the r -f response curve should be aligned
tubes VI or V2 are changed, alignment of rf and oscillator to the carrier markers. In general it is desirable to have a
may be necessary. slight rise on the high frequency (sound carrier) side of the
The minimum requirements for correct r -f alignment is to curve, however the rise should not exceed approximately 30
provide the correct band width, and for the response curve
to be centered within the limit frequencies shown for each
of the individual bands, as shown in Figure II. It is also
73
per cent of the low frequency side. A low frequency rise in the
response curve is not desirable and must be avoided, as a TO GREEN LEAD OF
POWER TRANSFORMER, TM LIB SIB
picture with poor definition will result if this is done. SID
SIB
The upper channel coils (No. 11, No. 12, and No. 13) may SIE
have the plate winding reversed from the winding direction TO vrvi7
of the plate coil of the other transformers. If this is the case,
the bandwidth will be increased by separating the plate
and grid coils and vice -versa. This condition can be deter- .40,:z.07,1117,0111114§)
mined by inspection or by the effect on the curve when mak
ing the alignment.
TO R43
TO
To c41
ta.
TO GNO
TO R78
TO R70
L19 T20 T21
E TERMINAL 0 NOT USED ON EARLY PRODUCTION RECEIVERS
Fig. 12. R -F Coll & Switch Assembly
VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL

LI i TY HEIGHT HOLD HOLD WIDTH LINEARITY
R58 R61 R36 L R49
62
ION TRAP C31

rJUSTAI FEALELEC
REMOVED
V 24
5U40
Le
FOCUS COIL
CENTERING ADJUSTMENT
SCREWS 14)
YOKE ADJUSTING
SCREWS (3)
TS
00
AUDIO
L9
DEFLECTION YOKE
QE TRANS.
T-S:1
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
TI3
BROARAST HIGH VOLTAGE
ANODE CONNECTION
F TRANS
Ve
108P4
PICTURE TUBE
rn
,
®
AIR TRiMMER PICTURE TUBE MOUNTING STRAP
Cli2
VOLUME RADIO TELEVISION STATION `"-FOC US CONTRAS BRIGHTNESS

R694 TUNING SELECTOR R88 R846 R 84 B
C67 CII2 SI
I'-OFF TONE
R 696-S2
Fig. 13. Component Location, Top View of Chassis
74
LI
V24
FILTER
C30 CHOKE 114
POWER TRANS.
5U4G
0 0
V6 0
6H6
L2
V12 1 T4
O O O J 4TH VIDEO 1
F
T5 1ST
SOUND 1-F
FILTER
CHOKE
807 V5
6AC7 l T3
3RD VIDEO
C62 I -F
TB
V4
VERTICAL SWEEP
TRANS.
6AC7
r OI OI 0 713
I I V13\ 72 2ND 1ST B -C
/ i) VIDEO 1-F
1-F
\ 9016
I%
L c66 TIC
AUDIO
V8 OUTPUT
C69 108P4 TRANS
1ST
VIDEO I -F
10104
COATING 712
GROUND STRAP 711 B -C OSC TRANS
R -F SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
)
R848 B -C ANT R698

TRANS
RB4A R88 R69A
U
Fig. 14. Comp Location, bottom View of Chassis
2-2 TURNS
551.
7- 17-7
Fig. 16.
20 8
Television Tuning, Drive Stringing

Fig. 13. Radio Tuning, Dial Drive Stringing
75
ALIGNMENT TABLE
Before attempting the following tabular alignment procedure, read the preceding section "ALIGNMENT SUGGESTIONS"
SIGNAL SWEEP
STEP GENERA- GENERA- SIGNAL CONNECT STATION
OSCILLO - SELECTOR DIAL
NO. TOR TOR INPUT SCOPE TO SET- ADJUST REMARKS
FRE- FRE- POINT CHASSIS & SWITCH TING
QUENCY QUENCY
(1) BROADCAST I -F ALIGNMENT
1 455 kc Not Used Grid (4) Junction C41 Radio 550 kc C75 & C76
with tone of V19 & R69A for max.
modulation thru output
200 mmf
2 455 kc Not Used Grid (5) Junction C41 Radio 550 kc C73 & C74
with tone of V18 & R69A for max.
200 mmf
(2) BROADCAST R -F ALIGNMENT
1 1500 kc Not Used Ant. Junction C41 Radio C67B osc. * Tune gang condenser to
with tone terminal & R69A trimmer for minimum capacity setting.
modulation thru maximum
200 mmf output
2 1500 kc Not Used Ant. Junction C41 Radio 1500 kcs C67A r -f ** If pointer does not fall on
with tone terminals & R69A trimmer for the 1500 kc calibration when
modulation thru maximum 1500 kc signal is tuned in,
200 mmf output slip pointer drum on dial
cord until it does.
(3) TELEVISION I -F TRAP ALIGNMENT
1 21.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (8) Junction L4 Channel
of V2A & R16
#13 - C19 on T4 Connect 10,000 ohms in
for minimum series with oscilloscope input
modulation thru output lead.
200 mmf
2 21.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (8) Junction L4 Channel
of V2A & R16
#13 - C16 on T3
for minimum
200 mmf
3 21.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (8)
of V2A
Junction L4 Channel
& R16
#13 - C13 on T2
for minimum
200 mmf
4 27.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (8)
of V2A
Junction L4 Channel
& R16
#13 - C10 on T1
for minimum
200 mmf
(4) TELEVISION SOUND I -F AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT
1 21.9 mc 21.9 mc Grid (4)

unmodulated with 2 mc of V3
Junction of
R77 & C49
Channel #13 - C79 & C80
for max.
Detune C84 on T6; then ad-
just trimmers C79 and C80.
sweep width amplitude Adjust for max. amplitude
and symme- and symmetry about 21.9
try at 21.9 mc marker as, shown in Fig.
mc 8A.
2. 21.9 mc
with tone
Not Used Grid (4)
of V3
Channel #13 - C78 for mini- With volume control half -
mum tone way up and speaker con
modulation output netted, adjust C78 for mini-
mum tone output.
3 Not Used 21.9 mc Grid (4)
with 2 mc of V3
Junction of
C41 and
Channel #13 - C84 for max. Peak trimmer so that the
peak to peak positive and negative peaks
sweep width R69A amplitude have max. peak to peak
amplitude. See Fig. 8B.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3.
76
ALIGNMENT TABLE (CONT'D)
SIGNAL SWEEP
OSCILLO- SELECTOR
DIAL
TOR TOR INPUT SCOPE SET- ADJUST REMARKS
NO. TO TING
FRE- FRE-
QUENCY
POINT CHASSIS & SWITCH
QUENCY
(3) VINO 1-F AMPLIFIER ALIONMINT
1 23.0 mc &
26.4 mc
20-30 mc
sweep
Grid (4)
of VS
Junction of
L4 and R16
Channel #13 - C17 and C18 Shunt C14, T3 primary trim -
for max. mer with a 100 mmf capaci-
marker amplitude, tor. See Fig. 9A.
bandwidth,
and correct
positioning
of markers.
2 23.0 mc & 20-30 mc Grid (4) Junction of Channel 113 -- C14 and C15 Remove 100 mmf capacitor
26.4 mc sweep of V4 L4 and R16 for max. from C14, and shunt CI I, T2
marker amplitude, primary trimmer, with it.
bandwidth, See Fig. 9B.
and correct
positioning
of markers.
3 23.0 mc &
26.4 mc
20-30 mc
sweep
Grid (4)
of V4
Junction of Channel #13
L4 and R16
- Adjust L20 See Fig. 9B. Either spread or
for minimum squeeze turns together to
marker overshoot give minimum amplitude of
overshoot.
4 23.0 mc & 20-30 mc Grid (4) Junction of Channel #13 - C11 and C12 Remove 100 mmf capacitor
from C11 and shunt C8, T1
26.4 mc sweep of V3 L4 and RI6 for max.
amplitude, primary trimmer, with it.
bandwidth, See Fig. 9C.
and correct
position of
markers
5 23.0 mc &
26.4 mc
20-30 mc
sweep
Grid (4)
of V3
Junction of
L4 and R16
Channel #13 - Readjust L20 See Fig. 9 C. Repeat pro -
for minimum cedure as in step 3, except
overshoot for point of signal input.
6 23.0 mc,
26.4 mc, &
20-30 mc
sweep
Grid (8)
of V2A
Junction of
L4 and R16
Radio' - C8 and C9
for max.
Remove 100 mmf. capacitor
from C8. See Fig. 9D.
25.65 mc amplitude,
bandwidth, Jump filament wafer
and correct switch with clip lead so that
position of tube filaments will be lit. Re -
markers move B+ from r -f assembly.
(6) OSCILLATOR COIL ADJUSTMENT
I 49.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #1 - Turns of osc. Make sure that C112 is at
coil, T20. mid -position of travel. Use
modulation . sound output as indicator.
2 59.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #2 -- Turns of osc. Same as for Step #1.
coil, T21.
modulation
3 65.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #3 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step #1.
coil, T22.
modulation
4 71.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #4 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step #1.
coil, T23.
modulation
5 81.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #5 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step' #1.
coil, T24.
modulation
6 87.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #6 - Turns of osc. Same as for Step
coil, T25.
#1.
modulation
7 179.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #7 - Lead gap of Same as for Step
oscillator
#1.
coil, T26.
modulation
77
SIGNAL SWEEP
STEP GENERA- GENERA- SIGNAL CONNECT STATION DIAL
TOR TOR OSCILLO- SELECTOR
INPUT SCOPE SET-
NO. ADJUST REMARKS
FRE- FRE- POINT CHASSISTO
& TING
QUENCY QUENCY
(11) OSCILLATOR COIL ADJUSTMENT (Coned)
8 185.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
- Channel #8 - Lead gap of Same as for Step #1.
oscillator
modulation coil, T27.
9 191.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
Channel #9 - Lead gap of
oscillator
Same as for Step #1.
10 197.75 mc
with tone
Antenna
terminals
- Channel #10 - Lead gap of Same as for Step #1.
oscillator
11 203.75 mc
with tone
- Antenna
terminals
- Channel #11 - Lead gap of Same as for Step
oscillator
#1
modulation coil, T30
12 209.75 mc
with tone
Antenna
terminals
oscillator
#1
13 215.75 mc
with tone
Antenna
terminals
oscillator
#1
(7) 11-1, COIL ALIGNMENT
1 Markers
45.25 mc &
Channel #1 Antenna Junction R1
with 25 mc terminals and CI
Channel #1 - For max.
amplitude
See Fig. 11A for resultant
alignment curve.
49.75 mc sweep at r -f and for
amplifier recommended
response
2 Markers
55.25 mc &
Channel #2 Antenna Junction RI
with 25 mc terminals and Cl
amplitude
See Fig. 11A for resultant
alignment curve.
response
3 Markers
61.25 mc &
with 25 mc terminals and Cl
amplitude
See Fig. 11B.
response
4 Markers
67.25 mc &
Channel #4 Antenna Junction RI Channel
#4 - For max.
amplitude
See Fig. 11B for resultant
alignment curve.
response
5 Markers
77.25 mc &
amplitude
alignment curve.
response
6 Markers
83.25 mc &
Channel #6 Antenna Junction RI Channel
#6 - For max.
amplitude
alignment curve.
response
7 Markers Channel #7 Antenna Junction RI
175.25 mc & with 25 mc terminals and Cl
amplitude
See Fig. IIC for resultant
alignment curve.
78 response
SIGNAL SWEEP
OfICILLO- SELECTOR DIAL
TOR TOR INPUT SCOPE SET- AD JUST REMARKS
NO. FRE- FRE- TO
POINT CHASSIS & SWITCH TING
QUENCY QUENCY
(7) It -F COIL ALIONMINT (Cont'd)
8 Markers Channel #8 Antenna Junction RI Channel

181.25 mc & with 25 mc terminals and CI
#8 - For max.
amplitude
See Fig. 11C for resultant
alignment curve.
response
9 Markers Channel #9 Antenna Junction RI
187.25 mc & with 25 mc terminals and CI
amplitude
alignment curve.
response
10 Markers Channel #10 Antenna Junction RI Channel #10
193.25 mc & with 25 mc terminals and Cl
- For max.
amplitude
alignment curve.
response
11 Markers Channel Antenna Junction RI
199.25 mc & #11 with terminals and Cl
amplitude
alignment curve.
203.75 mc 25 mc sweep at r -f and for
response
12 Markers Channel Antenna Junction R1 Channel #12
- For max.
amplitude
alignment curve.
209.75 mc 25 mc sweep at r -f and for
response
13 Markers Channel Antenna Junction RI Channel
#13 - For max.
amplitude See Fig. 11C for resultant
215.75 mc 25 mc sweep at r -f and for alignment curve.
response
MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION AND SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS
RIPLACEPARIT OF PICTURE TUBE NOTE-Some ion traps have been magnetized so that it is
necessary to rotate the small magnet at 180 degrees to this
To remove the picture tube from the television chassis, normal position. Then slide the assembly onto the picture
remove the picture tube socket and then untape and slide tube neck so that the ion trap assembly slit is at the bottom
off the ion trap adjustment assembly. The ion trap can be or top (dependent upon picture tube) and lines up with pin
removed readily, if the gap in the assembly is pulled apart #12 or #6. Slide the assembly forward on the picture tube
slightly with the fingers while attempting to slide it. Loosen until it is about the position shown in the illustration. NOTE
the two set screws partially that clamp the left side of the -The wider of the two magnets should be located at the rear
picture tube mounting strap, then slide the strap backward or the base end of the picture tube. The final following steps
from the top -front rim of the picture tube until the rim of should be taken with the television receiver operating:
the tube is free from the strap. Carefully pull the tube out 1. With Brilliance control advanced, turn ion trap
through the focus and deflection coils. assembly so that gap in rubber holder is faced up or down and
To replace a picture tube the reverse procedure should be lines up with either pin #6 or pin #12. Whichever way gives
followed, being careful never to force the picture tube if it some illumination, is the correct approximate orientation of
sticks or fails to slip into place readily. Investigate and remove assembly. If the tube V16 is removed, it will be found much
the source of the trouble. The picture tube should be oriented easier to adjust for maximum illumination since the resultant
so that the anode cap is adjacent to the H.V. rectifier, V13, thin line will illuminate even though the magnets are consider-
and the high voltage lead. ably out of adjustment.
Wipe the screen surface of the tube to remove finger marks 2. Move assembly back and forth and rotating it while
and dust. PRECAUTION-Do not handle, remove, or install viewing screen, adjust for maximum brightness.
a picture tube unless shatterproof goggles and heavy gloves 3. If illuminated area gets very bright, reduce brightness
are worn. with control and repeat step 2. If tube V16 was removed as
suggested in Step 1, replace it before proceeding with step 4.
ION TRAP ADJUSTIANIT 4. If any shadowing of the tube neck is present after com-
The ion trap may be approximately located as shown in pleting step 3, rotate the small (front) magnet to correct
Figure 17; however its final adjustment must be made with shadow and repeat step 2 and 3. NOTE-Badly out -of -line
the television receiver operating. focus coils can also cause neck shadowing. The focus coil
The approximate adjustment requires that the gaps in the should be symmetrical and straight before starting the ion
two magnets be lined up with the break in the rubber holder. trap adjustment.
79
CENTERING (FOCUS COIL) ADJUSTMENT Minor Adjustments-If the receiver does not have the tuned
The four focus coil adjustment screws should all be tightened circuit consisting of L21 and C91 in the cathode of the
sufficiently so that the springs are always under tension. Too horizontal multivibrator, VII, the horizontal hold control,
loose pressure on the springs will result in the picture centering R36, should be adjusted until the above checks can be satis-
being unstable. These adjustments are not readily available factorily accomplished. If attempted adjustment of the hold
with the back cover in place unless a long screwd-iver is used. control will not permit all the above checks to be met when
Since each screw adjustment reacts in both the horizontal the tuned circuit is incorporated, then make the adjustment
and vertical directions, a maladjustment in the centering as outlined under "Complete Realignment."
may have to be corrected by the adjustment of one to four Complete Realignment-Tune in a television signal for
screws. optimum sound and adjust for normal contrast.
1. Adjust the Horizontal Hold control to the center of its
DEFLECTION YOKE ADJUSTMENT
range.
Three set screws permit the deflection yoke to be loosened,
2. Remove tube V9, and then adjust the iron core of L21
permitting limited turning in either direction. If the picture
until the picture is approximately synchronized (held in
frame) in the horizontal direction.
does not line up horizontally or square with the picture tube
mask, rotate the yoke until this condition is remedied, 'then 3. Replace tube V9 and then adjust the Horizontal Hold
tighten the set screws. control until the picture passed all tests as outlined in "Check
on Alignment."
HORIZONTAL (HOLD) OSCILLATOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT
VERTICAL (HOLD) OSCILLATOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT
The horizontal hold control is a preset adjustment on the This control, R62, is used to lock the picture in synchro-
rear of the chassis which is used to adjust the speed. In late nism with the transmitted picture in the vertical direction.
production receivers, a tuned circuit consisting of L21 and When the control is maladjusted the picture will slide ver-
C91 was added to the horizontal oscillator cathode circuit to tically out -of -frame or lock out -of -frame, giving overlapping
stabilize the horizontal hold operation. For complete align- vertical images or even double images in the vertical direc-
ment both controls must be adjusted. Check operation first as tion. After the picture is locked in vertically on a normal
follows:
picture, reduce the contrast control until the picture is barely
Check on Alignment-With a normal television signal visible, then readjust the control until the picture holds in
being received, free from excessive noise, turn the horizontal frame.
hold control to the position where the picture locks in hori-
zontally and passes the following tests: HORIZONTAL LINEARITY AND WIDTH CONTROL
1. With a picture being received, switch the Station
Selector to a channel having no program and then back to the These controls react on each other so that when one control
desired channel. The picture should immediately lock into is adjusted the other may have to be. The adjustment of the
position. linearity control should only be made on a test pattern signal.
First, obtain the correct width by adjusting the width con-
2. With a picture being received, turn the television re- trol, L7, until the picture extends approximately IA -inch out-
ceiver power "off" for two or three seconds and then turn it side the edge of the mask on both sides. Next, adjust the
back "on" again. The picture should come into synchronita- Horizontal Linearity control, R49, until the test pattern is
tion within ten seconds after the picture tube has been symmetrical in the left and right direction. A slight readjust-
illuminated. ment of the Width control well as
3. Turn the Station Selector to the "radio" position and touching up of the centering adjusting screws.
allow the television receiver to transfer for two or three
minutes to Broadcast reception, and then return to the tele- VERTICAL LINEARITY AND HEIGHT CONTROL
vision channel transmitting a picture. The picture should The Height control, R61, is adjusted until the picture ex-
synchronize within ten seconds after the picture tube becomes
illuminated with receivers not equipped with L21. Receivers tends approximately IA inch outside the edge of the mask on
-with L21 should sync immediately upon showing raster. both top and bottom. Next, adjust the Vertical Linearity
4. Turn power off for three or four minutes and then turn
control, R58, until the test pattern is symmetrical from top
to bottom. Readjustment of the Height and Vertical Hold
"ON." The picture should lock -in horizontally within ten controls as well as the centering adjustments may be neces-
seconds after the raster becomes illuminated. sary.
PICTURE TUBE
CS ATE..
DJuSTLIENTS
SIDE RIEW smornmG DIN
TRAP ADJUSTMENT
.
"DJUST.PTS
PTE.
.PC,. TV.
40/I SAP A. AD! STRAP
LINES UP we, PIM ..E
TOR .PROa ACTT!. TO DIPOLE
.DRAEDIETAL PORIE.111. VERTICAL

LINEPi, .1.,
0.1ZOISTAL
O
VERTICAL
(I) O
RT,AA
IPDTA POLO L.REAR.T.
80 Flo. 17. Location of Installation Adlustmont Controls

PRODUCTION CHANGES II. Change in R63-The 330F000 ohm resistor, R63, was
changed to 220,000 ohms so that the Vertical Hold control
The following production changes have taken place up to will operate near its mid -adjustment position.
the time that this service data was compiled. In most cases 12. Removal of R95-To correct a transient which ap-
the change can not be accurately identified with the serial peared in the vertical retrace as a white line at the top of the
number of the chassis. The order of listing below does not picture, the 2200 ohm resistor, R95, in series with capacitor,
indicate the chronological order of the change. C37, was removed. The potentiometer, R58, was reconnected
as a variable resistance as shown on the schematic.
1. Power Transformer, T14 and V23-The original trans- 13. Value Change of C52-The original capacity of C52
former, T14, supplied, gave insufficient B+ voltage (385 was 47 mmf. To improve vertical interlace, this capacitor
volts) when using a Type SY3GT rectifier tube, V23. This re- was changed to 240 mmf.
sulted in a low anode voltage of 7500 volts for the picture
tube. To increase this voltage, a Type 5V4G tube was sub- 14. Addition of Tuned Circuit, L2I and C91-A 15.75 kc
stituted for the 5Y3G tube, V23. At approximately serial tuned circuit was added to the cathode of the horizontal
number 2500, a new transformer T14 having Stock No. multivibrator, Vii. This stabilizes the horizontal AFC cir-
RTP-040 was substituted, which gave the correct B+ volt- cuit to the extent that it prevents picture wiggles on noise
age of 415 volts when a Type 5Y3G tube was used as V23. pulses and echoes. With this addition, the 240 µAlf capacitor,
This B+ voltage gives an anode voltage to the picture tube of C56, should be changed to 150 mmf. and the 150,000 ohm
8500 volts. resistor, R40, should be increased to 330,000 ohms. This pre-
2. Television Tuning Trimmer C112-For approximately
vents a white line at the left -center of the picture which may
the first 2000 receivers, the tuning trimmer C112 did not quite result with installation of L21 -C91. With addition of L21,
the capacitor, C30, was changed from a 40 mfd to a 1.0 mfd,
have the correct tuning range, making it necessary to add a and C92 was changed from 1.0 mfd to a .05 mfd.
fixed 10 mmf. capacitor C114 in series with it. The shunt
capacitor C102 had a value of 4.7 mmf. Later production 15. Connection of Primary of TII-On early production
trimmer, C114, has the correct range. With this new value receivers the primary of T11 was connected to a mid -tap on
of trimmer, the shunt capacitor C112 was changed to 6.0 choke LIO. This connection caused a resonant condition to
mmf. This shunt capacitor in a few receivers was merely a develop which affected the lower television bands. This was
5.0 mmf., while in most it will consist of two capacitors; a corrected temporarily by shunting a 47 mmf. capacitor be-
5 mmf. and a 1.0 mmf. capacitor in parallel. The early tween the midtap of LIO and ground. Later the primary of
production trimmer has a -in. 0.D., shaft, while the late TII was connected to the junction of L10 and C101 as shown
production trimmer is slightly larger and has a h -in. O.D. on the schematic.
shaft.
3. Tone Control, R69B-The tone control R69B, on early 50 -CYCLE OPERATION
production receivers was connected in series between the
Volume Control R69A, movable arm, and C39. C72 was a The supplement schematic diagram, Figure 18, shows
680 mmf. capacitor from C39 to ground. Hum in the audio the wiring of the power transformer, T14, through the special
dependent upon the tone control setting necessitated a revi- terminal board installed. Also, it shows the addition of capac-
sion as shown in the schematic. itors C98 and C99 required for additional filtering. The
4. Tuned Circuit, L20 and C89-The capacitor, C89, changes involved in changing from 60 -cycle to 50 -cycle opera-
was originally 240 mmf. and the coil, L20, was fixed -tuned tion are listed below:
and wound on a resistor form. This was later changed to 1000
mmf. and the coil turns were reduced and made variable, 1. The 50 -cycle power transformer, T14, is separated
resulting in a higher Q circuit. This change permitted adjust- from the chassis and installed on a mounting plate at the base
ment of the trap as described in the alignment procedure. of the cabinet.
5. Resistor, R87-This resistor was changed from 100,000 2. All filament and high voltage leads are extended on the
ohms to 330,000 ohms to prevent excessive beam current in transformer and terminated at the chassis ;Diaper in a ter-
the picture tube, V8. This excessive beam current caused the minal board. The connection of these leads through this
high voltage to be reduced when the Brilliance control was terminal board is shown in Figure 18. All leads are twisted.
advanced to maximum with the result that the control re- 3. A 90 mfd. capacitor, C98, is shunted across C62. A 90
duced brightness at end of its clockwise travel instead of mfd. capacitor, C99, is shunted across C45 -A.
increasing brightness. 4. The bias supply filter capacitor, C69, is changed to a
6. Resistor, R47-This resistor has been changed from 50 mfd. capacitor.
-watt to a 1 -watt size. In some cases, the original 2 -watt 5. Filament leads to V6, V7, V9, VIO, Vii, V12, V14,
resistor dissipation is exceeded, especially if the Width con- V15, V16, and V17 are twisted. The ground connection is
trol iron core is nearly all the way in the coil, resulting in a made at one point only for this series of tubes, and the high
reduction in the resistance value. This reduced resistance side is connected through the filament wafer of the band
changes the waveshape across C29 so much that the horizontal switch.
multivibrator may lock in at half frequency or not lock at all.
It may also result in the resistor burning out. TROUBLE SHOOTING
7. Change in Horizontal Output Transformer, T9-A new
design horizontal output transformer, T9, was used in late The following is a listing of possible troubles and their
production receivers. This may be identified by the fact that cures. This is not intended as a comprehensive coverage of all
it has two windings instead of the single winding design, as possible failures but serves to point out some of the more
characterized the early production receivers. When the late difficult troubles that may be experienced. From time to time
production transformer is used, a 3900 -ohm, 1 -watt resistor this information will be expanded as information becomes
must be added in series to the existing 6800 -ohm, 1 -watt re- available.
sistor, R47. Do not use a single 1 -watt resistor for this. The
capacitor, C66, should be returned to ground when the new I. NO RASTER ON MCTURE TUBE
type transformer is used.
8. Horizontal Multivibrator Cathode Switching-After (a) Ion trap adjustment incorrectly made. Assembly on
the first 150 receivers were built, a shorting contact was backward or improperly oriented. See ion trap adjustment
added to the filament wafer of the Station Selector switch so under "Miscellaneous Preset and Service Adjustments."
as to stop the horizontal multivibrator as soon as the Station (b) Check for waveform at output of T9. If present, the
Selector was switched to "Radio" position. This connects trouble is probably in the Type 8016 rectifier tube or filter
the multivibrator cathode to ground through the filament circuit. Check for open in high voltage winding of T9. If the
circuit when switching to "Radio" so that "birdies" are not V13 tube filament glows yellow, high -voltage is being gener-
heard on the broadcast band as the television tubes cool off ated and the trouble will possibly exist in the picture tube, V8.
after switching from television to radio reception. (c) If there is no waveform at output of T9, check opera-
9. Sceen Resistor, R79-This resistor was changed from tion of 807, V12, V7, and multivibrator VII by oscilloscope
an original 47,000 ohms to 33,000 ohms. This' reduces the waveform measurement.
operating d -c voltage on the plate of V7, and gives greater (d) Check that high voltage anode cap is contacting the
brightness. anode terminal of V8.
10. Addition of C21-A fixed 10 mmf. mica capacitor,
C21, was added across C10 so that the trimmer C10 would
peak at the center of its range. 81
I. NO RASTER ON PICTURE TUBE (Coned) B. NO VERTICAL OR NO HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
(e) Open Brightness control R84B, R87, or R85. (a) Check waveform and socket voltages of output and
(f) No. B+ voltage at junction L4 and L3. multivibrator tubes of respective sweep circuits.
(g) If only two or three thousand volts are generated, (b) Check output transformer and yoke for continuity.
check deflection yoke, L9, and Width control, L7, for con-
tinuity. 9. ONE OR MORE HORIZONTAL WHITE UNES AT TOP OF PICTURE
(a) Check for Production Change #12.
2. RASTER NORMAL, NO PICTURE OR SOUND
(a) Oscillator V2B defective, or oscillator coil resonates W. RIPPLE ON EDGE OF PICTURE
out of band. (a) Reflections on antenna lead-in.
(b) Defective antenna or lead-in. (b) Instability of horizontal AFC circuit. See Production
(c) Converter, r -f amplifier, or first video i-f amplifier Change #14.
stage defective. (c) Defective capacitor, C30.
3. PICTURE NORMAL, NO SOUND 11. RASTER EDGE NOT STRAIGHT--KEYSTONING
(a) 21.9 me audio i-f amplifier, discriminator, or audio (a) Defective yoke.
amplifier defective. (b) Defective sweep transformer.
(b) Oscillator V2B off frequency. (c) Improperly adjusted ion trap adjustment assembly.
(c) Defective speaker.
12. PICTURE JUMPY
4. RASTER NORMAL, SOUND NORMAL, NO PICTURE (a) Operation at too high contrast control setting.
(al Video i-f amplifier (after 1st i-f) inoperative. (b) If picture moves at regular rate sideways, check
(b1 Resistor R83 in contrast control defective or open. capacitor C30, R32 and C92. Put in change #14.
(c) Screen by-pass C32C open or shorted. (c) If left of picture jitters, change 807 sweep tube, V12.
(d) Noisy sweep or sync circuit tubes.
3. NORMAL PICTURE AND SOUND, NO HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL
SYNC. 13. POOR INTERLACE OF VERTICAL SWEEP
(a) Check for signal input waveform at grid (1 I of V9A. (a) Check Production Change #I3.
(b) Defective V9A or plate circuit components. 14. POOR PICTURE DETAIL
(c ) Operation of receiver with Contrast control advanced (a) Mismatch in antenna or lead-in.
too far.
(b I Misalignment of i-f or r -f circuits.
6. PICTURE NORMAL, NO VERTICAL SYNC. (c) Defective chokes L3, L4 or LS in video amplifier.
(a) Check grid of V15B for normal waveform.
) Make sure that focus control operates on both sides
of proper focus point.
(b1 Check speed of vertical multivibrator. Should be (e) Overload of video amplifier, check contrast control
capable of free running speed less than 60 cps. operation.
(c) Check V15B circuit components.
IS. PICTURE CANNOT BE CENTERED
7. PICTURE NORMAL, NO HORIZONTAL SYNC. (a) Move focus coil back by loosening all four adjustment
(a) Check AFC transformer, T7. screws.
(b) Check alignment of L21 and C91.
(c) Check socket voltages and waveforms of VIOB and 16. FOCUS CONTROL AT END OF TRAVEL
VII. (a) Short out resistor R96.
(d) Check resistor R47 for correct value. (b) Check for correct B+ voltages.
R7-1 MEG
BLACK
0 117V. 50
BLACK INPUT
BROWN
0
'----'--1)) i
'''' BROWN 1 1
LI
7H
II V23
RED RECTIFIER
16 4-
5V4G --+ C63 C62 +G913
RED -GREEN 30 MF 30 ME.-- ----- 90 MF
RED -YELLOW
RED -GREEN
7-6rITTO 41.
V24 L2
RED RECTIFIER 7H
7 5U4G
I
YELLOW 1?).i + G64 G45A G99
90 MF 30 MF --- 90 MF
YELLOW
13
GREEN
GREY
NOTE:- I ALL LEADS FROM POWER TRANSFORMER TO TERMINAL BOARD
GREEN MUST BE TWISTED.
to 63 V. 2 A -C LEADS FROM TERMINAL BOARD TO V23 a V24 ARE TWISTED.
GREY FILAMENTS &FILAMENT LEADS TO V14,V12.VII.V10,VIS,V16,V17,V9,V6,V7 ARE
TWISTED. GROUND CONNECTION IS MADE AT ONE POINT ONLY,
AND HIGH SIDE IS CONNECTED TO THE SAND SWITCH.
0
82 Fig. 18. Schematic Changes fer SO -cycle Operation

V2A V3 VS VIM V? ve
VI
1sr 00101 2. VICE0 If SM VIDEO $ F VIDEO DETECTOR 670E0 SIPPLIFIFJI ',cruet vvee
R F ASIPI1FIL71 COMVERTER.TELEVISICOP
S, 7F4 E4C7 SAO 6407 6,-614 SAC' L) -f0., V.P.
SAUS
20 CI j1 CW LE
I
FOCWCOL
MID Pit 7400,,
C
Cl.
WIC
RAP
V6
64 Cal VIOE0 IF 969 RECTIFIER
YI T
"6
LIT
,14f4 63v6C
Soar
LM DON IOW 1204,I
ROW 16041
6400
SID PIS
o 106 INC $0261
)1 110.4.
SIM
610,
013
334 NV RECTIFIER
S OIS
VIA VIA V106 V POO VI2
CLIPPER NOR SNSICAPIPLIFER NOR 01SCR6OI2TOR D C AMPLIFIER RCEI MULTIVIERATOR POR OUTPUT
X TOSS NO Oryni P.,. 0,
V:. All. 'alma ryryt .62010 64000 691757 - 606167 -65,761 12 62474T 656701 1107
N. 1177 mry /Oa $4.4. 2200
Tot WOK. Ciol 605
ImirySIN Mary CO01014 224
S OS ryirry 411 V14
lrytry1/10 OP USN.. 01,1,01 WIV
as v4CO Plow ryes, Or N. !Sea ( IN
62562
M.S. RIP
v28
mt 70D4
3. OSCILLATON ort C56
TELEVISIOS I'D 0521
LIP -1F
Cu'
$ 6
3
Fat 0
0
2607- 336 0
zir. ID IS^
OW CV" Tc. V
11,IC.T.I SMOLT&
0158 V16 L RAMS/
C1.4 VERT STK ASPLIFIER vERT MULTIVI8114TOR
ND NOTE - 651.741 65674T
II
V17
e_r.efr 616 VI9 V20 vERT OUTPUT
AUDIO I 1 AUCNO I F vERT 51 6V6GT
AAA, i5e16 CONVERTERRADO
6507 _ __1_5_ 6547
w MEWS 6547 v218 V22
SETS PIN
SETS V214
USK DSCRWIRATOR AUDIO AMPLIFIER ALDO OUTPUT
.4.16.61466 666
.! ,C1$
7 644 lit
640701 I' , 640741 6V600 6.1J
Si.i, C114 02W

*TA 0676
Tset
654 g9L 2806 Is6
0 11
000 P6 °Fa
C. LL_
Se cAr
TLL
CS6 MOO
.42 6T4
006 S ID
05-
Val
MM
t 614
CS6
LI
FL21Ni S
0
10
V* COD VII V22
Flip. 19. Sehornietie 0Ntr61111, Medol tot 60, 52 ESA., SETS -116S 64 SE A 5146
um?
?owes unr6 SETS WM 5904 S1/ILL Olt PT Of PORE4
aug maNSPORIIER SETS WNW MUT WILL USE
PT I Of PORER TRamSfoRRER
RT
MEG
GENERAL ELECTRIC
co
SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART
NOTE -All d -c measurements taken by a 20,000 ohm/volt meter. Station selector switch at Channel No. 1 unless noted. Con-
trast control at maximum, Brilliance at minimum.
-
SYM- TUBE PLATE SCREEN CATHODE GRID PLATE SCREEN
BOL TYPE NOTES
PIN VOLTS PIN VOLTS PIN VOLTS PIN VOLTS M.A. M.A.
VI 6AU6 5 140 6 140 7 1.3 1 0 7.2 -
V2A 7F8 6 115 5 0 8 -4.5' 2.5 - ' Measured with V.T.V.M:
V2B 3 180 - - 4 0 1 0 10 -
V3 6AC7 8 150 6 150 5 0 4 -2' 14 3 Measured on 50 v scale
V4
V5
V6A
-
6AC7
6AC7
6H6
8.
5
160
170
0
6
6
---
- -
160
170
_5
5
0
0
4
- -
-2'
0
15
14
4
3.2
-
3
Measured on 50 v scale
V6B 3 -8.5 4 6.3AC - - 0 -

V7 6AC7 8 150 6 125 5 0 4 0 15 3.7
V8 10BP4 CAP 8300' 10 415 11 150 - 2 90 - Use multiplier with 1000 v

--- ----- --- ---- ---
- ----
- --- ---- --- ---- --- - scale
V9A 6SN7GT 2
- -
12.5
---- __
-1 3 0 1 .2
V9B 5 110 -6 11 4 6 10
V10A 6SL7GT 2 -95 - - 3 0.5 1 -9.5 - 0
V1OB 5 42.5 - - 6 0.5 4 0.5

---- - 1
V11A 6SN7GT 5 170 - - 6 6 4 -25

---- -2.5
V11B 2 135 - - 3 6 1 0 -2.9
V12 807 CAP 415 2 345 4 22 3 -10 76 13
V13 8016 CAP - - - 2 8300 - - - - Use multiplier with 1000 v

scale
V14 6AS7GT 2&5 0 - - 3&6 10 -
1 &4 -15 -
VISA 6SL7GT 2 0.5- -- 3
--- ---- ---- --
7.5 1 0.5 0
V15B 5 105- - 6 10 4 4 1
V16A 6SN7GT
V16B
___
V17
V18
6V6GT
6SA7
2
_-----
5
3
30
14.5
195
200
4
- ---
---
4
- --- ----_- ----
135
80
6
8
1.5
1.5
23.5
0
-
-
1
6
0
4.5
14.5
0
- .7
.1
20
3
,
1.85
8.5
V19 6SG7 8 200 6 110 5 1 4 0 10 4
V20 6SV7 6 195 4 88 2 -0.5 3 0 9.7 1.7
V21A 6AQ7GT 1 & 3 0 - - 2 0 - - 0 -

V21B 5 75 - - 6 0 4 0 1 -
V22 6V6GT 3 230 4 200 8 10 5 0 41.5 4.5
V23 5Y3GT 4 & 6 315AC - -- 2 425

---_ - - 85' - 'Cathode current
82 5U4G 4 & 6 240AC - - 2 250 - - 160' Cathode current.
PICTURE MALADJUSTMENT OR INTERFERENCE
Fig. 20. Normal Picture Fig. 21. Contrast Too High
Fig. 22. Contrast Too Low, Brightnoss Fig. 23. Focus Control PAlsodlusted
Too High
FIg. 24. Vertical Hold Control Misadlusted Fig. 25. Hon' I Hold Control Misadlusted
FIg. 26. Vortical Linoarity Control

Mises!hashed
Fig. 27. Horizontal Linoarity Control
MisadIustod
85
PICTURE MALADJUSTMENT OR INTERFERENCE (Cont'd)
Fig. 28. Horizontal Width Control Fig. 29. Vertical Height Control
Misadlusted Misadjusted
Fig. 30. R -F Interference Pickup on Fig. 31. Sound Bar Interference Such as
Antenna Adjacent Channel or Microphonic
Fig. 32. Weak Diathermy Interf Fig. 33. Strong Diathermy or Hum in Video
I -F, Detector, or Video Output
,86 Fig. 34. Ion Trop or Focus Coil Not Properly

Adjusted
WAVEFORM MEASUREMENTS
The waveforms shown in Figures 35 through 55 represent An oscilloscope where the vertical deflection amplifier has
measurements on an average receiver wherein the controls been pre -calibrated is used to take measurements at the point
have been adjusted for a normal picture with correct Con- indicated in the waveform boxes. The oscilloscope sweep fre-
trast, Height, Width and Linearity. Most measurements quency is indicated in the waveform title.
must be made when a signal is being received.
GRID (4) OF V7 JUNCTION L38 L4
1111111111M 111111
111111
T
55 V.
2 V.
11111111111111 MI 111111
I
Fig. 35. Video Output of Detector (Osc. Fig. 36. Video Output of V7. (Osc. Synced
Synced at Half of Vert. Speed) at Half of Veil. Sweep Speed)
PLATE (5) V98
T
65V.
MOM 100 V.
Fig. 37. Clipper Output (Osc. Synced at Fig. 38. Sync Amplifier Output (Osc. Synced
Half of Vert. Sweep Speed) at Half of Her. Sweep Speed)
ACROSS R30
40 V
2}V.
I
Fig. 39. A.F.C. Sawtooth (Osc. Synced at Fig. 40. Discriminator Voltage (Osc. Synced
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed) at Half of Hor. Sweep Speed)
ACROSS R31
T
22 V.
I
Fig. 41. Discriminator Voltage (Synced at Fig. 42. Hor. M -V Cathode (Oct. Synced at
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed) Half of Her. Sweep Speed)
ACROSS L21 ACROSS R44
T
15 V.
50 V.
i_ 75V.
Fig. 44. Hor. M -V Output (Osc. Synced at

Fig. 43. Cathode Tuned Circuit (Synced at Half of Her. Sweep Speed)
Half of Her. Sweep Speed)
87
ACROSS HORIZ. YOKE JUNCTION C6I a R52
1 500 V.
850 V.
k I
Fig. 45. Hor. Yoke Input (Osc. Synced at Fig. 46. V14 Control Voltage (Osc. Synced at
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed) Half of Hor. Sweep Speed)
CATHODE (4) OF V12
50 V.
1
Fig. 47. 807 Cathode (Osc. Synced at Fig. 46. Vert. Sync at VISB. (Osc. Synced at
Half of Hor. Sweep Speed) Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
CATHODE (6) OF VI5B GRID (I)OF VI6
2-2 V. -v-
-114- v.
Fig. 49. Vertical Sync co Cathode VI 511 (Osc Fig. 50. Vert. Sync at Grid of M -V. (Osc.
Synced at Half of Vert. Sweep Speed) Synced at Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
CATHODE (3a6) OF VI6 GRID (5)0F VI7
II V.
Fig. Si. Vert. M -V Cathode (Osc. Synced at Fig. 52. Vert. M -V Output. (Osc. Synced at
Half of Vert. Sweep Speed) Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
CATHODE (8) OF VI7 PLATE (3) OF VI7
T
250 V.
12-1V.4
V.
Fig. 53. Vert. Output Cathode (Os . Synced at Fig. 54.

Half of Vert. Sweep Speed)
Vert. Output of V17 (Om Synced at
ACROSS VERTICAL YOKE
T
25V.
-i-
8V.
1
88 Fig. 33. Vert. Yoke Input (Osc. Synced at
!EXTERNAL
ANT
1ST. LF. DIODE I.F
128E6 LI-0021 I2BA6 1-0022 12AT6 50L 6GT
LOOP ANT. 5 5 7 3001
AN -0011
.0021 1
MMF
.01
7 4
MFD
3 F
6
400V
50 To -000I SIA-0009
2 ZMMF 220K
22K 10
MEG.
100 470K 150,,
.05 270." MMF -25
MFD 01 MFD
200V 47K 25V
MFD
.1 MFD
400V
100
B.C.OSC. MMF
LO -0024 47K
2.2 MEG. 77777g
K
I05MFD F.M. I.F.
I/2-12AT 7 LI-00215 I/2W
X0OV
2.2MMF CT -0004 40 `o
1,5-151.41.4F 7 MFD
1- 150V
1
0-1
FM1 C MMF A M< - 1>KF M 500K SR -0003
ANT. SW -0005
to 7- SWITCH SHOWN IN VOL CONT. 2K
AM POSITION AS VC -0001
0 VIEWED FROM REAR IW
LC -0011
1712130
R. F. COIL
2
GROUND --
02 L R-0008 e MMF C 150K fro
1.02 MFD
..11/441FD. 400V LC -0015 MFD 30 MFD 30MFD
600V C 05 150v 150/ 150/
5000 MFD
2.2- 2500 MMF -100 \
CE -0007
MMF. MMF 150
I.5K cmmF ON -OFF
100K SWITCH - .2 MFD
I
DIAL LAMP 4- 600 v
1-10MFD
25 V 50L6GT I2BA6 12BE6 12AT6 12AT7
22K 1000
500 MMF 7 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 5
CT MMF 774 791,, COLD
I/2-12AT7 RC -0097 100
WAFT
SOMME 500
C MMF 777777
AM I V 455 HC
I I
C
20 117 VOLTS
3-30MMF MMF
CT -000 INT F -M. ANT. 12476 126.46 12BE8
DIODE IF
E
RF
CONNECT TO F 44 ANTENNA CLIP
WHEN EXTERNAL F M DIPOLE IS
NOT USED
0:0:0
50L66T
1ST IF
12477
TUBE
LOCATION
CHOKE
F.M. OSC.
LO -0025 500
C
LC -0016
O 0 FM I F
MMF NOTES - 21 35 MC
1
4. INDICATES CHASSIS
2 777777 INDICATES B -
TUNING RAGE: FM 88 to 108 M.C.
3 ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4 WATT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
n 540 to 1600 K.C. 4 ALL CONDENSERS RATED AT 500 VOL TS UNLESS
OTHERWISE NOTED
5 INDICATES CERAMIC CONDENSERS.
SOCKET VOLTAGE READINGS
z Howard Radio Company
Tube Function Screen
Cath. Plate
1 Model 47t Grid
t rsilluollableilmectestc. 12BE6 Mixer 0 100 98
12BA6 I.F. Amp, 1 100 98

0I'm
:leo
__
Pin 8
Lirt-g61428°Baaalagig.1018;;: 11j,1 :al 12AT7 FM Tube - 120
^f-" iis,'
14 V.
104
12AT6 Det, 0 0 65
wmpu
50L6 Output 6.8 100 130
0 0 4) C)
All voltages taken from the buss bar (B-) to
the socket contacts, with a 20,000 Ohm per volt
D.C. meter and the line voltage fixed at 117
Volts A.C.
. 000FD 2 20 MU H
"I '.0 M -C 0 000
12AT8 11-7 0 REC. ANT.
12 BA8 I2BE8
DIODE 1.F. 1ST L F
I t
GEN OUTPUT Iviopti 400 -^
I2AT7
SOL 6GT .05 MFD
0 A
;.rA-1 I
2.t
1
I I
0 G
F i
(I-8) AM 3. t
C=- I 50''
v~A.c 0A
(7- 9) F M
0 0 150."
G
TRIMMER LOCATION CHART DUMMY GENERATORCHART
See
Sig. Gen. Order of
BuimAy Gen. Band Dial See
Connection Trimmer FUNCTION
Antenna Freq. Position Setting Note
To Add .
Chart
2
Grid of 455 Off I.F.Peak to
12BE6 K.C.
B.C.
Station CD 0 0 4, Max.Output
A.M.Ant. 1400 1400 B.C.Osc.

1
Clip K.C.
B.C.
K.C.
S a and R.F.
A
F.M.Ant. 21.35 Off

2
Clip M.C.
F.M.
Station S F.M.-1 .F, B
F.M.Ant. F.M.Osc,
105 105
3
Clip M.C.
F.M.
M.C.
e 0) Peak to C
Max, Output
Note A. Set pointer in horizontal position with condenser gang closed.
Note B. Adjust for minimum noise with modulation off.
Note C. Adjust ®to 105 M.C.- Oscillator section.
90 While adjusting e,
rock condenser gang slowly back and forth for
point of optimum: Check tracking of B.F. at 90 to 100 M.C.
SW -0016
SECTION 3
F CHOKE REAR
LC -00I2 1 3 T. LE. 2ND 1.f 2. Ai DETECTOR
100 6BA6 6AL5
6 BE6 0t5'0', LI-0023 6 BA6 L - 0024 Li -002S Vn
6BA6
5 0 f 30 0
0- of f,) 2
;M ANT COIL 100 0
LA -0014 MMF
il
::,;! II
I
C 30
MMF ii IIAP 100
6.111
T0F0 4- .005 MMF

50
MMF two
5000 30-0016
1000 -4 SECTION 2 100
_t_11
dil
66^ D.0 REAR 0
WAFT Ali
ISK /00 00'
2W .005
a 61=D
.005 3314
1/2W ISO
33K TMfD ClMMI 0
DIPOLE 33K 4.71 22K$
ANTENNA 4.7K 22K V2W MEG ar
AN -00I3 4.7K 1
.001 130 RFI
47K 7K I SOK
.002
MFD MFOI
6000 TWO 'CA"AAA"T'VAW1-41?)002
COO
6000
orsC' IL 470K
COIL 11 Fa
100 K
LOOP ANTENNA .054710 6AT6 (f)

AN -00011 t..3°Vg 400v
41
41050
PICKUP 0 WV 1.4
47K .01
.005 MID
MfD GOOT Fa
2000 500K 7010 LC -DORY
NOTES - VOL. 602, (10
1RAND SWITCH SHOWN IN ROADCAST POSITION. REAR VIEW CONT. MEG
2.CONDENSERS INDICATED RV -C. ARE CERAMIC SOOVD C
5Y3GT
Off -ON LC -00I0 sw-o041
03hi
SWITCH SRO" ZW SECTION 4
300 0 00 ,--i-r\.4ANW---.249 V DC REAR IS
UUS
TO TONE CONTROL
30/ff0 ZONED sw-0010 271(
A.G. T"" 4300
100 Pt
T 22016
220K
0
TON 3 VOLT FILAMENTS
6AT6 6V6GT
3
1,4050
MOTOR 4^ 002
SOCKET 1W .05 12117
00 $000 SK
12 20011 11.E
0 DIAL
10.7-o 6,115 F/L.
470K
2510F0 0-0004
LAMPS
A.4 25V T CR
E.
:s
0 k4U.14
NIF
.000g -,2S0000 .01 MFO
REC. AN T 0A
= A
2 0G
GEN. OUTPUT UFO
400."
OREG. GND.
WAI CD
150" 44
Howard Radio Company A
3 G
Circuit of Models 472AC, 472AF 150 4` CO
Models 472C & 472F are similar DUMMY GENERATOR CHART

TRIMMER LOCATION CHART
Howard Radio Company ** Models 472C - 472F - 472AC - 472AF
ALIGNMENT CHART USING MODULATED GENERATOR
See Sig. Gen. Gen. Band Dial Order of Trimmer See
Dummy Connection Freq. Sw. Sett:frig Slug and or Slug Notes
Gen. Trimmer Function Below
Chart Adjust.
2 Point C on 455 KC AM Gang 06)g).0 AM I.F. A & B
Diagram Closed Green D.
1 Ant. post,
rear of ch. 1.4 MC AM 1400 KC 0 CD AM - Osc. C & D
loop conn. & RF Trm,
2 Point D on
Diagram
WMC FM Gang
Closed
0 FM Det.
Adj.
E & F
ti
2 As above II I/
®Adj. II
G
to 0 v.
2 Point C on "
tt It
FM H
Diagram FP&P I.F.
3 Ant and Gr 0 (E0 0... & 1 & J
Back of Ch. 105 MC FM 105 MC RF FM
3 As above 90 MC FM 90 MC g) FM - RF
Ind. Adj. K & L
3 As above la MC FM 101 MC (a FM Ind. M
Adj.
A.Low voltage AC voltmeter across voice coil.

B.Repeat operation until no further improvement can be found.
C. Before adjusting set pointer on heavy gold line below 560 KC. with gang closed.
D.Check complete dial for sensitivity and calibration.
E.Signal generator modulation off and turned up to about 100,000 microvolts.

F.Connect electronic volt meter (equivalent to voltohmist) at point E on the wiring dlagr
and turn slug (7) on trimmer location chart to extreme counter clockwise position. Turn
clockwise to 1st peak and adjust to maximum.,
G.Turn slug (8) to extreme counter clockwise position.

Connect electronic voltmeter to Point F on wiring diagram and turn slug (8) until voltmete]
is to zero voltage. Repeat adjustments given in notes F & G until no further improvement
can be made.
H.Connect voltmeter to point E and generator at point C. Adjust (9) ap) al) (12) then retri
(7). Move voltmeter to post F and recheck zero voltage (retrim if necessary). These
adjustments should be made with input signal necessary to produce approximately .7 volts
at point E.
I.Change generator dummy as shown on dummy antenna chart picture 3, and modulation on.
J.Use meter across voice coil if using RF generator, but use AVC voltage if working with
AM generator.
K.Should 90 MC. signal not fall in at 90 MC. on the dial, adjust P.M. Osc. Coil to correct
calibration. It is only necessary to slightly press together or open spacing on one turn
to do so. Now adjust slug (15).
L.Repeat adjustments (13) (14) and then (15) until no further improvement can be made.
92 M. Adjust (16) for maximum sensitivity.

6BA6 68E6 T 6SG7 T2 6SG7 T3 6SH7 74 6S8
r- -ST41--1
S
CIS 7 LII
0 -- 16
RS 0 m 4
7 014 3S B
C13 0
R3
R6 C24
T R4 021
CE3
- RS
022 = R9
_
I., SI 0 RIO
IN BROADCAST
mC30
POSITION 050
LUG VIEW
CII ON SPEAKER C61
061,r,t251 26L6
C7 C34 4 26Z6 C 52 13
Ll
SEC.
/ R30
R29 .7r
R27
06 C53..
- JI _J
I
/
------- 01
SS S
L 1162A Stfl SIMS 557 4111147 MIN?
ILL_ ON TONE CONTROLA
SEC. 7 t t 7le 4.---4 1 7 e-f. if I-6 7
min C57 MI
.... .. ._ C56 0511
"5 760
-=-25. Z_ , --F. -.=
LI
PRI. BOTTOM VIEW OF I.F. S2
COIL FORM BASE
115 V. A.C.
0 C
RADIO
NOTES:- POSITION R3I
I, BAND SWITCH AND PHONO SWITCH (
ARE SHOWN AS SHAFT END VIEWS.
062 PNONO PICK-UP e*the,
MODEL 8FM776
2, SPEAKER CABLE PLUG AND
RECEPTACLE ARE SHOWN AS CHASSIS8BOTD
SOLDERING END VIEWS.
DENOTES CHASSIS
GROUND
MODEL
PARTS LIST 8807D
CHASSIS8FM776
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION

Cl,C48 017-4 .005 mfd, 600V
C2,C14,C15,C16,
C55,C56,C57 6-230 1000 mmf, 300V Ceramic
C3 7-25 Gang Tuning Condenser FM -AM
C4,C10 8-35 Trimmer, 2.5 - 30 mmf
C5,C23,C30,C32
C49 C50 015-5 .01 mfd, 200V
C6,C62 015-8 .05 mfd, 200V
C7 8-59 Trimmer, 2-30 mmf
C8 8-63 Trimmer, 1 5-115 Ent
C9 8-65 200 - 600 nut Padder
C11 6-218 1000 mmf, 500V, Mica
C12 8-38 Trimmer, 3-13 mmf
C13,C22 -6-159 47 me, 500V Ceramic
C17,C41 6-247 24 mmf, Ceramic Special
C18,C25,C26,C34,C35 6-246 33 mut, Ceramic Special
C19,C20,C27,C28,
C36,C37 6-250 750 mmf Mica Special
C21,C29,C38,C44,C51 016-5 .01 mfd, 400V
C24,C33,C40,C58,
C59,C60 6-259 .005 mfd minimum disk -type Ceramic
C31,C46,C61 6-151 220 lame, 500V Mica
C39,C45 6-232 100 limit, 500V Mica
C42 6-249 62 miff, Ceramic, Special
C43 6-248 15 mmf, Ceramic, Special
C47 017-2 .002 mfd, 600V
C52 017-5 .01 mfd, 600V. . . .. ...
. .
C53 19-37 100 mfd-- 150V, 200 mfd - 150B, 200 mfd - 10V.
Electr5lytic L+
C54 016-8 05 mfd, 400V
C63 19-32 20 mfd 150V Electrolytic
R1,R8,R11,R16
R21,R28 01-199 470K ohm, 1/4 watt `
R2,R13,R17,R20 01-157 47K ohm, 1/4 watt
R3,R12 01-37 68 ohm, 1/4 watt
R4,R14 02-108 1111
3300 ohm, 1/2 watt
R5 01-3 10 ohm, 1/4 watt
R6, R9 01-143 22K ohm, 1/4 watt
R7 01-101 2200 ohm, 1/4 watt
R10,R31 01-227 2.2 meg ohm, 1/4 watt
R15 02-132 12K ohm, 1/2 watt
R18,R19 01-174 120K ohm, 1/4 watt
R22 01-255 10 meg ohm, 1/4 watt
R23 03-32 Volume - Tone Control with switch
R24 01-132 12K ohm, 1/4 watt
R25 02-20 27 ohm, 1/2 watt
R26 9-332 100 ohm candohm
R27 02-52 150 ohm, 1/2 watt
R29 04-69 390 ohm, 2 watt
R30 01-45 100 ohm, 1/4 watt
41 S1400 Loop Antenna Assembly
L2 S1407 FM Antenna Coil
L3 S-1410 Wave Trap Coil V
L4 S-1408 FM RF Coil
L5 8-1411 AM Oscillator Coil
L6 S-1409 FM Oscillator Coll
L7 S-1384 R.F. Plate Choke
L8 2-32 Filter Choke
T1 S-1389 1st I.F. Transformer
T2 S-1390 2nd I.F. Transformer
T3 S-1391 3rd I.F. Transformer
T4 S-1392 Discriminator Transformer
O
94 DIAL STRING 2 TURNS
ALIGNMENT
CONNECT TEST DUMMY INPUT
SET DIAL
OPERATION OSCILLATOR TO ANTENNA SIGNAL BAND ADJUST TRIMMERS PURPOSE
TO
FREQUENCY
1 Stator Plates .05mfd. 455 KC BC 600 KC L12, L13, L16, L17, Align if channel for maximum
of C3d L20, L21 output.
2 Stator Plates
of C3d .05mfd. 455 KC BC 600 KC C8 Adjust wave trap for maximum
Modulated output.
3 1500 KC BC 1500 KC C10 Set oscillator to dial scale.
Modulated
2 TURNS
8" DIAMETER 1500 KC BC 1500 KC C7 Align antenna for maximum output.
COUPLED LOOSELY Modulated
TO LOOP ANTENNA
600 KC BC 600 KC C9 Rock gang to track BC padder
Modulated
6(a) Pin 4 (Grid) on .05mfd. 10.7 PE: FM 122 Coil Slug Primary Align Primary of discriminator
65E7 Limiter Socket Unmodulated Discriminator for maximum reading. 6Ph
7(b) Pin 4 (Grid) on .05mfd. 10.7 MC FM 1.9.3 Coil Slug Adjust secondary of discriminator 1
6SH7 Limiter Socket Unmodulated Secondary Discriminator for zero reading. Fa

8(c) Pin 4 (Grid) on .05mfd. 10.7 MC FM L18 and L19, Pri. and Align 3rd IF Transformer for
6307 2nd IF Socket Unmodulated Sec. 3rd IF Coil maximum reading.
9(c) Pin 4 (Grid) on .05mfd. 10.7 MC FM L14 and L15 Pri. and Align 2nd IF Transformer for
6507 1st IF Socket Unmodulated Sec. 2nd IF Coil maximum reading.
10(c) Lug "B" on Coil L4 .05mfd. 10.7 MC FM L10 and L11 Pri. and Align 1st IF Transformer for
Unmodulated Sec. 1st IF Coil maximum reading.
11(c) Antenna Terminals 300ohm 106 MC FM 106 MC C12 Oscillator Set oscillator to dial scale.
Resistorr Unmodulated Trimmer co
12(c) Antenna Terminals 300ohm 106 MC FM 106.1E C4 Antenna Trimmer Align antenna stage for maximum
Resistor Unmodulated reading.
13(c) Antenna Terminals 300 ohm 88 MC FM 88 MC L6 Oscillator Slug Set Oscillator to dial scale.
Resistor Unmodulated
14(c) Antenna Terminals 300ohm 88 MC FM 88 MC L4, L2 Slugs Align Antenna and RF stages for
Resistor Unmodulated maximum reading.
15(c) Antenna Terminals Repeat steps 11, 12, 13, and 14 until tracking is perfect at 88 and 106 MC.
IMPORTANT: Alignment of this chassis will in most cases be unnecessary unless an IF or RF transformer is replaced or the adjustment has
been tampered with. A vacuum tube voltmeter must be used for FM alignment. An AC output meter connected across the primary or
secondary of the output transformer will be satisfactory for all AM adjustments. The signal generator output should be kept
just high enough to get an indication on the meter.
NOTES: a Vacuum tube voltmeter pin "A" on discriminator transformer to chassis (half discriminator load).
b Vacuum tube voltmeter pin 1 of test jack to chassis full discriminator load).
c Vacuum tube voltmeter pin 3 of test jack to chassis limiter grid load).
A much more satisfactory IF and discriminator alignment may be obtained by using a 10.7 MC signal generator, frequency modulated
at an audio frequency and swept approximately 600 KC (±300 KC). An oscilloscope should be connected to test jack pin 3 and all
110 IF slugs adjusted fora symetrical pattern of highest amptitude. See Fig. 1. For discriminator alignment, connect oscilloscope
to test jack pin 1 and adjust T4 for highest linear symetrical pattern. See Fig. 2.
111
BC - F.M. ak_ RADIO-PHONO ON -OFF -TONE
SWITCH
TUNING VOLUME
11M
I L9
C12- 044. FM. CHOKE
C
9- PADDER
GOO KL.
O /
105 M.C.
CIO-OE0.4C.
MOO NA
SO -WAVE TRAP
455 KC
TI
04 -ANT. FM.
108 M.C.
O
L2- ANT. P.M.
O 88 M.C. Ca
PHONO JACK
TOP -L12 455K.C. /70P -L17 4551% TOP -1-21 455 KG
PHONO MOTOR 90T-LIO 10.74C SOT- Lib 10.7 MC 90T.- L19 10.7 MC
CONNECTOR SOCKET TOP -L13 455 KC TOP- L15 455 KC
807.-L11 10.7MO 80T- L14 10.7 MC. tTh
0
SPEAKER ,
SOCKET 10°cj )13
L TEST JACK A.C. PLUG
VOLTAGE TABLE
TUBE FUNCTION PLATE CATHODE SCREEN GRID
6BA6 RF Amplifier 80 0.5 78 ----
6BE6 Converter 100 0 78 ----
6SG7 1st IF Amplifier 100 0 100 -0.6

6SG7 2nd IF Amplifier 100 .7 100 ----
6SH7 Limiter Amplifier 70 0 21 -0.4
6S8GT Discriminator, Det., AVC 50 0 --- ----
25L6 Power Amplifier 105 7 100 ----
2525 Rectifier 117AC 105 --- ----
96 FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2
I4
CANINE,.
ANTENNA.
cif
140 1
IFI LIMITER 658
6541 4.1
FLF 1311
TI CIO Tw
T
1 5
ca. ,L11,
RIR San
CR C14
111. 414.
554
!00 um! OW,
/OCR CIO
/
214 00:
B.0
r
C T,
TR 1111.11
N.
C5
2.:7.1Jk
F00.0
C.
1
uur
Naga min
J
C.
I 5115
an oa
ur
ui Nem.
O. uP
Ei 10 OUT.,
PLUG
TIC
C (D
Ct 1,612
NTT V
C
MIORPTMUI
C.
0111 F. MOM Mar
C
4TO
R. ILLI
TEL
R10
DUAL SPEAKER FOR MODEL I2FM475
1163SIG 1.1 4547 s. 4. "AT
102 I
CONOW
NUM 11. COO.
7 az at
RFC .0 5
CD
SINGLE SPEAKER FOR 44

MODELS 12FM475, I2FM778, 12FM779 MODELS 12FM778 AND 12FM779 CO
CHASSIS 41201. 12826E Mt
w CO
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
C1,C2 7-17 Ganged Tuning Condenser
C3,C8,C10 8-38 Trimmer, 3-3 rare
C4,C55,C71 6-159 47 mmf, 500V, ceramic
C5,C6,C9
C13,C73,C74
C7
6-230
6-143
.001 mfd., 400V. ceramic
24 Ent, 500V ceramic
PARTS LIST
Cll 6-218 1000 mmf. 500V Mica
C12 6-199 15 mmf. 500V ceramic MODELS I2FM475, 12FM778, I2FM779
C14,C23,C27,C34, CHASSIS 41201-12826E
C48,C52,C54,C66,C67
C79,C82 5-74 .01 mfd 600V
C15,C16,C51
C53 Part of 1st. IF transformer, T2. .
C17,C22,C26 6-231 .002 mfd. 400V Ceramic

C18,C19,C45,C47 Part of 2nd IF transformer, T3 . .
C21,C24,C25 Part of 3rd. IF transformer, T4. .
C28,C29,C30 Part of discriminator transformer, T5

C31 6-232 100 mmf. 500V Mica
C32,C40,C46 6-86 220 mmf. 500V. Mica
C33,C49 5-63 .02 mfd. 500V
C35 5-69 .006 mfd. 600V.
C37A,C378 19-34 10-10 mfd. 450V Electrolytic . .
C38,C39 5-77 .05 mfd. 600V

C41 5-84 .001 mfd. 1600 V.
C42 6-102 470 mmf. Mica 500V.
C43 19-35 30 mfd. 450 V. Electrolytic
C44 6-234 1200 mmf. 500V.
C50,C68 5-64 .05 mfd. 400V
C56 6-207 220 if. 2% 500V. Ceramic
C57 8-65 200-600 Podder
C58,C59 Part of coil assembly L5
C61,C62,C63,C65 Part of coil assembly T7
C69 Part of coil assembly T8
C72 8-35 Trimmer 2 30 moot. ceramic
C75,C76,C77,C78 6-182 .01mfd..500V Mica FIGURE 1
C81 8-63 15-115 =S. Trimmer (Wave Trap).
Ll 20-27 Broadcast Loop Antenna
L2 Loading Coil, Part of Loop 20-27
L3 3-184 FM RF Coil
L4 3-189 FM Oscillator Coll
L5 3-171 AM Oscillator Coil Assembly
L6 3-1468 Have Trap Coil Assembly
R1 9-294 68 ohms 1/4 watt
R2 9-293 47,000 ohms, 1 watt
R3,R11,R37,R42 9-130 5600 ohms 1 watt
R4 01-2 10 ohms 1/4 watt
R5,R41 9-222 22,000 ohms 1/4 watt
R6,R40 9-209 22,000 ohms 2 watt
R7,R39 9-253 22,000 horns 1/2 watt
R8,R10,R25,R28,
R43 9-235 47,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R9 9-283 82 ohms 1/2 watt ..
R12 ..
47,000 ohms (Part of T4)
R13,R20,R35,
R38,R44,R45 9-223 470,000 ohms 1/4 watt
R14 9-256 33,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R15 9-8 100,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R16 9-211 470,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R17,R19 470,000 ohms (part of T5)
R18 9-121 47,000 ohms 1/4 watt
R21 9-213 10 megohms 1/4 watt
R22 13-25 Volume Control, 2 megohms
R23 9-225
R24
R26,R36
14-7
18,000 ohms 1/4 watt
Tone control, 2 megohms, with switch FIGURE 2
9-255 1 megohm 1/4 watt
R27 9-7 2200 ohms 1/2 watt
R29,R31 9-295 270,000 ohms 1/4 watt
R30 9-290 250 ohms 5 watt, wire wound
R32 9-264 12,000 ohms 1/2 watt
R33 9-240 2.2 megohms 1/2 watt
R34 01-160 56K ohms 1/4 watt
R50 01-44 100 ohm 1/4 watt
C80 19-36 100 MF 10V electrolytic Model 12FM475
98 R46
R47,R48
9-297
13-23
2 ohm 5 watt wirewound, Model 12FM475
Potentiometer, 25 ohm, 25 watt, Model 12FM475.
ALIGNMENT rn
CONNECT INPUT CD
DUMMY SIGNAL BAND SET DIAL AT TRIMMERS PURPOSE
OPERATION OSCILLATOR
ANTENNA
TO FREQUENCY pr.
.01mfd 455 KC BC 600 KC T2,T3 Bottom Align I.F.'s

a
..
1 Conv. Grid
0.
2 455 KC BC 600KKC C81 I.F. trap adjustment for Ul
ONE TURN minimum I.F. signal
LOOP MADE WITH Set BC osc. to scale at 1500 KC
3 GENERATOR 1500 KC BC 1500 KC C58 Z
LEADS 1500 KC BC 1500 KC C63,C72 Align BC RF. and Loop
0
4
5 600 KC BC 600 KC C57 Rock Gang to track BC gadder CDtil
6 Al -Gnd. 400ohn 15 MC SW 15 MC C59 Scale osc. at 15 MC

7 Al-Gnd. 400ohn 15 MC SW MC C62,C69 Align SW RF and Ant. 0
8 6807 2nd .01mfd. 10.7 MC FM 88 MC T4 top Align for max. voltage at test -i
I.F. Grid jack pin 3 Rock gen. over 10.7
MC to check for symmetrical I.F.
response. 14
1.4
Align for max. voltage at test 1
9 6807 1st. .01mfd. 10.7 MC FM 88 MC T3 top
jack pin 3 Rock gen. over 10.7 1-4
I.F. Grid
MC to check for symmetrical I.F. QD
response. 41
.01mfd. 10.7 MC FM MC T2 top Align for max. voltage at text CO
10 Converter
jack pin 3 Rock gen. over 10.7
MC to check for symmetrical I.F. ti
response. Re -check peaking of
T4, and T3.
11 Converter .01mfd. 10.7 /T FM MC T5 primary Align for max. voltage across

grid 6BE6 i discriminator Load (un -used 0)
Lug bottom of T5 to ground) 0
Align for zero voltage across
a.
12 Converter .01mfd. 10.7 MC FM MC T5 secondary
grid 6B6E full discriminator load
(Test jack pin 1 to ground) pi
13 FM ant.term. direct 108 MC FM 108 MC C10 Scale OSC at 108 MC (max.

a)
voltage Test jack pin 3.
4
1...
14 FM ant.term. direct 108 MC FM 108 MC C8,C3 Align FM RF and Ant. (max.
CO
voltage Test jack pin 3.
15 FM ant.term. direct 88 MC FM MC L4 Scale osc, at 88 PE. 0
0
16 FM ant.term. direct 88 MC FM MC L3,T1 Align RF and Ant. at 88 MC
repeat steps 13, 14, 15, 16 as PO
necessary. (I)
NOTE: 1. A much more satisfactory IF and discriminator alignment may be obtained by using a 10.7 MC Signal generator frequency modulated
a
a)
at an audio frequency and swept approximately 600 KC (±300 KC). An oscilloscope should be connected to Test jack pin 3 and all F+
IF screws adjusted for a symmetrical pattern of highest amptitude. See Fig. 1. For discriminator alignment, connect scope to 41
CD
Test jack pin 1 and adjust T5 for highest symmetrical pattern. See Fig. 2. bi
la CO
2. In all FM alignment calling for a voltage measurement at Test jack pin 3 (limiter grid resistor) keep signal generator output to
such a value as will result in approximately 2 volts measured avacuum Tube voltmeter such as the Voltohmyst, Vomax or equiv.
(0
MODELS 125M475, 12FM778, 12FM779
VOLTAGE TABLE
CHASSIS 41201, 12626E
Measurements made at 117 volts line; volume control at minimum; zero
signal input. Measurements made to chassis ground with vacuum tube voltmeter.
FUNCTION TYPE EF Ep ES EK Eo
FM RF AMP. 6BA6 6.3 210 90 1 0
FM CONVERTER 6BE6 6.3 210 100 0 0
AM RF AMP 6SG7 6.3 260 180 1 -1
AM CONVERTER 6SA7 6.3 250 90 0 ___ i
1ST IF AMP. 68G7 6.3 240 125 0 -1

2ND IF AMP. 6.907 6.3 240 125 1 0
LimIna 68H7 6.3 3 60 0 -.6
DISC.; 2ND AMDET:
AUDIO 638GT 6.3 80 - -- 0 -.8
PHASE INVERTER 68J7 6.3 160 --- 80 0
POWER AMP. 6V60T 6.3 260 270 15
POWER AMP. 6V6GT 6.3 260 270 15
RECTIFIER 5V4G 5 --- --- 300
TCTAL B CURRET- FROM RECTIFIER 120 MA.
r --
6V6
GT
6V6
GT
If I
II
..
I I It I
108 0 mc
0
C57
0 0 C581 ei: gos:C59
""" ''" l5
KC "
1.500 . ,
'MC
EE
z
o
ID (0 (CC CO'
,
6SJ7
E C72
'5 1500 KC
F LOOP
Tr 8(!/r 11
MC, C63
bMC
TRIMMER 6BE6 0 1
r-- ,
te;:BA6 107 MC l0 -1
C62
o® 6s8
GT
TEST
JACK
OP VIEW)gil
'-1 cp'
'-----'
ID oc)T2
107 MC
0
1500 KC
gal DISCRIM 1ST IF
SPEAKER
107 MC
®T4
0
0.7 MC.
tilt
107 MC
°T.,
0
107 MC.
Is POWER
TRANSFORMER
C SI
0
455 KC
L
SOCKET
3RO IF 2ND IF t°, 0
J
RECORDER r°- CI ° LINE
0 TUBE LAYOUT C_______/
,,,_,-,..,,,_i_CORD
opo @ (e @ 0 o) o) Co (0 0 (s .;3) PHONO MOTOR
PHONO JACK 234 Al A2 rm DIPOLE
0
I
DIAL STRING
ilt TURNS
j.* W
..4.
SHOWN WITH CONDENSER
PLATES FULLY OPEN
<#.
I'4 TURNS
DIAL STRINGING
5 VI TURNS 40j 514 TURNS
Of CONDENSER DRIVE
/
MEISSNER MODELS 9-2091A, 9-1091B
6AL5
100
A. M. - F. M. TUNER
O
04194 1,3 14
DO
0
9001
Power Supply - 105-125

9001
Volts, 5o -6o Cycles.
Power Consumption - 8o
BASS 0
Watts.
0413 ,
Type of Circuit - Super- 0
heterodyne.
Tuning Range - 527-1620 Kc.
'88-108 Mc. BAND 04193
SWITCH
Intermediate Frequency SAGS
455 Kc. 10.7 Mc.

ALIGN AT 455KC
co
O
Audio Fidelity - Flat with- 0
04193
6AGS
in A2 d.b. from 3o to
TREBLE
15,000 cycles. ALIGN AT 1400KC
29332
Band Width at 1,000 Kc. -
Sharp 7.5 Kc. Broad 18.5

0 O
0413
4
Kc. 0
Hum - 6o d.b. below rated 14
TUNING
output.
§
Distortion - Less than 5%.
Output - 8 Volts at High I ,4
Impedance - 0.75 Volts at

5oo Ohms.
04194
04 93 (14193 04193 66L3
6403
l,41.4o11,44
ov. Q4214 9003

.,400
334
OOOPPY
000015 .-yY
w
-----x-PF fig,
IHIHIU
§ --'8161
5 }
.2nmiur
a -
'1.
1! 3 V7=====...
KEr I2 AP -I CV- 5-2
1948 Models - R-12, RT-12, RG-12 and other
Midwest Models using RGT-12 Chassis
ALIGNMENT - Refer to the alignment chart for step by step procedure. It is
preferable to align the FM IF stages with an AM or CW Signal. It should
be noted that all adjustment are made for peak avc reading except the secondary of
the third transformer. At this point, if you use an AM signal, it may be tuned for
minimum audio signal; or the discriminator voltage may be used, reading it with
a VTVM, and the- secondary may be adjusted to the zero voltage. There may
be some discrepancy between these methods, and if it is not excessive, is of no
importance.
The FM RF alignment should be made using an FM signal and either avc or

audio for peaking. In doing this alignment, or when feeding the IF signal into the
FM mixer grid, care must be taken not to move the wiring. If the wiring is dis-
placed so as to affect the inductance of the RF circuits it is difficult to re-establish the
RF-Oscillator.tracking.
The AM, RF and IF alignment should be done with a VTVM .crcas the avc.
The recommended signal value is one which will generate 10 volts of avc. When
77 GC4 6BE6 5U4 XT -4 aligningtthe "AM" band the loop must be plugged in and you need not adjust the
X C-8 XC-4 RF padder core. The RF padder is very broad and can be aligned only if the con-
TR-I2 TR-II 7s7 7A7 6BA6 verter grid lead is connected to an RF type VTVM as indicator; this will usually
Top View of Series 12 Chassis involve a signal level greater than is normally available.
a Dial
AE -9 Af.1 Coupling Signal swS nitcdh Actitudnt.At
KB -I3 1000 KC
To 7Q7 converter grid 456 KC AM Peak 1st, 2nd and 3rd-
through .05 mfd. capa- AM IF trimmers on top of
citor. IF cans.
To "A" on antenna 1600 KC AM 1609 KC Peak RP, converter
ground terminal strip AM and oscillator trimmers
through 200 mfd. and marked "B".
400 ohms in series. 550 KC AM 550 KC Peak converter and
AM oscillator padder core.
marked "B". Loop
must be plugged in.
Do not adjust RF.
To 6BE6 mixer grid 10.7 MC FM 100 MC Peak core adjustments
direct. AM or CW for a vc (around 3
volts) at 1st, 2nd and
primary of 3rd IF.
Adjust secondary of
9rd IF for audio null
from 30% amplitude
modulated 10.7 MC IF
signal.
To "A" and "A on 105 MC FM 105 MC
doublet terminal strip FM Peak RF mixer and
UK -1 I xc-4 UK -I2 UK -13 through a pair ISO oscillator trimmers for
ohm rem;stors. avc or audio.
Bottom View of Series 12 Chassis
Read text for use of l.W for FM -IF alignment.
SERIES Mt MODEL MOE SCHEMATIC
,01 RFC
135 V MIDWEST RADIO CORPORATION
4711
CAPACITY IS GIVEN
IN WED. EXCEPT
.016 .05 ARE MFD.
RESISTANCE IS
GIVEN IN OHMS. 63A6 6BE6 6C4
M. MEGONNI
1(.1000 OHMS FM RF AMPLIFIER FM CONVERTER FM AFC
WATTAGE IS 1/2
EXCEPT WHERE
INDICATED.
TOLERANCE IS O
*20% UNLESS 7A7 7A7
INDICATED
RF AMPLIFIER v. AMPLIFIER
00
wt
I10 V
2V 125K
22 M _L 85 V. QL
°' 82 K
800V .01 22 K 220 0I
T MEI . ROOT
V
1800V. (eat
LL "n
22K
2W
052 300
470 1
I2%
FR
PHONO
6AL5
COL RESISTANCE VALUES GIVEN ARE APPROXIMATE. DEVIATION DOES NOT NECESSARILY
INDICATE FAULTY COILS. VOLTAGES SHOWN ARE UNDER NO -SIGNAL COMMONS.
7A7 IF 5U40
IF AMP IFIER
a 75 RECTIFIER
456 KG AM
op 2%
10.7 MC FM
12501
2n
O
220( OFF -ON SWITCH ON
TONE CONTROL
1(7
2000
.1 15M
200 - 1001(
.II
0L1100 V 7E6 80011 6S V
200 V. AM DETECTOR - I ST AF
K FILAMENTS
270 V. RECTIFIER
VPYR
.."200V
O FIELD
40 MFD 1000 ANL PANEL
47K 100K
1W 20 5V 135 V 10K
O 4-1 1150V. 46
AM
4 K
FM 365 V.
U P1.10110 40 MFD
470 K
01
VOLUME 500K
CONTROL 1211
.-Thrend through holes MIDWEST SERIES 12 DE LUXE
En in dial drum.
1948 Models - R-12, RT-12, RG-12 and other
Holes on top -Gong closed
Midwest Models using RGT-12 Chassis
FM. This is your FM band. It is calibrated in channels. It
is possible that an
FM station may identify its frequency in megacycles. Channel numbers have been
chosen as follows: beginning with No. 201 as 88.1 MC they are assigned every 200
KC up to No. 300 at 107.9 MC. This relation is shown in Figure.
FREQUENCY IN MEGACYCLES
88 93 98 108
Tie knot here I I I n il 1111 I I
Series 12 Dial Stringing 200 225 250 275 300

CHANNELS
DIAL STRINGING - Use a light weight flexible dial cord when replacing worn or FM Frequency and Channel Numbers
broken cord such as Beven-Wilcox FSN-25-12.
REPLACEMENT PARTS - Certain parts are available on an exchange basis; these
are shown on the parts list with an "*.-
PARTS LIST
Part Description Part Descriptor.
AD -1 I ---Glass Dial KB -13 --Tone & Band Knob
AE-9-Escutcheon EB.6--Push Buttons. Set of 7
AP-1-Wood Pulley (G- I--MiterGear, Pair
AP -2 I -Pointer PC-3-Loop Plug
n. )col)).syull
AS- I -Wood Pulley Stud PC-5-Phono & Television Plug
CE -6 --Filter Condenser 40-40 RV -5 --Tone Control
CE-4-Cathode Bypass 40 mfd. 25v ,V-6-Volume Control A
CE -7 --Electrolytic 8 mfd. 150v .. SP-5-Speaker
.
"CV-15-2-Tuning Gang .. SR-8-Band Switch LOCK SCREW
FG-5-Speaker Grommet TR_S-Povver Transformer
ES- 1 2-Miniature Tube Shield *TR-11-1st IF Transformer
HE-7-Speaker Mtg. Eyelet *TR-12-2nd IF Transformer Push Button Mechanism
IL- I -Panel Lamp 6-8v ',TR- 3 -3rd IF Transformer
KB-4-Volume Knob *UK-12-Mixer Coil Assembly
KB- 12-Tuning Knob *UK -13 --Oscillator Coil Assembly
PUSH BUTTONS - The push buttons are for your convenience in selecting stations
Note: Order resistors and condensers by value, tolerance and wattage or voltage. without the bother of making the exact tuning adjustments necessary for best
Note: When ordering include serial number of chassis, since Midwest records of
reception. There are seven buttons and each button may be set for a station. The
changes in parts specifications are kept by that number.
station may be at any point on the dial.
66A6 N.2 3 6BA6 N.4 6AL5
68A6
CLAM MIXER fM Ak. INPUT tE. AMP
6BA6AmP
FM 2. PM DETECTOR
T6 TIO
TS
ca
C38
LOOP SOCKET
C6 .1t
RIO
I 0 Loff 0
SPEAKER R.
MEG
WIRING SIDE
CS
1.0141M0
WIRING Si
ASTISROACC
XIERNAL AN ENNA Tft
NOTES
0.464aSSIO,R,S,Eg2 WATT UNLESS
5Y3GT,43
RECTrER BRNO SWITCH SNOW,. IN FM POSIT ION
6C 4 ....""bal-;ttZt`ZriaTta""m
M -AN OSCILLATOR
SOO
PR
REM FRONT REM

ALL WE.. RN. FRONT
OP TOP TOP tor
6-6v 1,0T LORI
I TRANSFORMER
SECTION 2 TCRARNAL BOARD
T 3- 8C OSCILLATOR ,011-
AM Sensitivity (For .5 waft output with external

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS antenna) -20 microvolts average
Power Supply 105 to 125 volts, AC, 50 -60 -cycles; FM Sensitivity (For .5 watt output)-I5 micro-
85 wafts. volts average.
Broadcast Band -540 to 1600 kc. Power Output 3.5 wafts 10% distortion. 7 wafts
Frequency Ranges maximum.
FM band -88 to 108 mc.
Loud Speaker 611x 9" oval electrodynamic. Voice
Intermediate Freq. AM -455 kc; FM -10.7 mc. coil impedance 3.2 ohms, 400
Selectivity AM -50 kc. broad at 1000 times
signal, measured at 1000 ke.. cycles.
I.F. FM -I80 kc. broad at 2 times

down.
MODEL 74BR-1812A
I.F. FM -290 kc. broad at 10 times WARD
down. MONTGOMERY
MONTGOMERY W A R D
GANG CONDENSER
FM OSC.
TRIMMER OSC. PADDER
C7 TRIMMER
C4 16C4
7 3
4
2
7 3
5
FM ANT 4
10.7 MC. TRAP
TRIMMER 68A6"'1TRIMMER
191 CI
..-INPUT
6V6GT 6A T6 T5 AM -FM I.F.
8 7
FM
PRI. PRI.
RATIO DETECTER 11\fix T4
TRANSFORMER 68A602
AM -FM I.F.
TIO FM OUTPUT LT
..
2
6AL5
Siiv
.3
®SEC. 4
4
PR t*, T6
6BA6"3
3
PRP'
I
6 BA6*4
*SEC.
5Y3GT
Chassis-bottom view
A.M. TRIMMERS
6-8 V PILOT LIGHT

6BA6 6AT6
6C4 ANT. TRIMMER - C-11- BROADCAST
6BA6 4C/ OSC. TRIMMER -C -6A -BROADCAST
LOOP
ANT.
6V6GT
ELECTROLYTIC
SPEAKER
SOCKET
F. M.
6AL5
TRIMMERS
PHONO
INPUT
6BA6
300 OHM
F.M. ANT.
106 LINK
GROUND 5Y3GT LINE CORD
Montgomery Ward Model 74BR-1812A
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Broadcast Band Section I.F. and R. F.
The alignment procedure below includes the sensit,vities at the must be set at maximum. The tone control must be set for max -
inputs of various stages. All signal input values are based on an imum treble.
output of 1/2 wet+. This may be measured by disconnecting the The signal source must be an accurately calibrated signal gene -
speaker voice coii and substituting a 3.2 -ohm resistor across the rater capable of supplying the frequencies designated, modulated
,secondary winding of the output transformer. A reading of 1.3 30% with a 400 -cycles audio signal. A 400 cycle audio signal is
volts AC across this resistor will be approximately equivalent to required for the audio measurement. Variations in sensitivities of
a 1/2 -watt output with +he speaker connected. The volume control plus or minus 25% are usually permissible.
AM - I. F. ALIGNMENT
Band Switch in AM Position. Tune Sef to 1400 Kc. Dummy Antenna .1 Mfd.
SIGNAL CONNECTION TO
ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE ADJUST FOR
GENERATOR
RADIO
FREQUENCY
455 Kc. Use Pin No. I of Primary and Secondary of 15 AM windings. Maximum output
2100 6BA6 No. 2 Should be 1/2 watt
See top and bottom views
microvolts and ground
Pin No. I of Maximum output
PinMaximum
6BA6 No.See
455 Kc. Use Primary and Secondary of T4 AM windings.
64 microvolts
I
top and bottom views Should be 1/2 watt
and ground
400 cycles. Use

63 millivolts
6A16 andShould
No.
ground
I of
None
output
be 1/2 watt
BROADCAST BAND - R. F. ALIGNMENT

Check Pointer so that it is Exactly Over Calibration Marker to the Extreme Left
When Gang is Fully Closed. For Adjustment Loosen Set Screw on Large Gear.
(see dial mechanism illustration.)
CONNECTION TO RADIO DUMMY ANTENNA ADJUST

SIGNAL GENERATOR FREQUENCY
1400 Kc. C6A for maximum

Antenna and Ground 200 mmf. 1/2 waft
Use 15 microvolts
600 Kc. C4 for maximum
Antenna and Ground 200 mmf.
Use 25 microvolts 1/2 watt
C6
1400 Kc. Antenna and Ground 200 mmf. See Note
NOTE: Recheck first two adjustments after this adjustment because of inter -locking effects.
Procedure for disassembly and assembly of dial mechanism
CALIBRATION FIRST MARK

SCALE
Aprimffrf
fat, 'SLID-
E dab
=if
I LOOSEN SET SCREW
2 PULL SLIDE OUT
;; 1111111
4 TURN GEAR UNTIL SET "°, .,....,". .14--r
IL
SCRE W IS APPROXIMATELY
IN P OSITION
5. REPLACE SLIDE a WITH
ROTORS CLOSED LINE UP
ET I
POINTER WITH FIRST MARK
ON CALIBRATION SCALE.
6. TIGHTEN SCREW.
3 ROTORS CLOSED
107
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
FM Band Section. I.F. and R.F.
IMPORTANT NOTE
No alignment of the FM section of this radio should be The following alignment is based on the use of the new
attempted unless you are positive that the circuits are Simpson vacuum tube voltmeter which has a "floating
in need of adjustment and you have the necessary equip- ground". In other words, the meter, when used as a
ment. vacuum tube voltmeter, can have both the positive
All components used in this radio are extremely stable and negative sides connected to points above ground
and the tuned circuits should require no adjustment and still give true readings.
over long periods of time. A standard AM signal generator is required.
FM - I. F. ALIGNMENT
Band Switch in FM Position. Dummy Antenna .1 Mfd.
SIGNAL VACUUM TUBE VOLT

CONNECTION TO
GENERATOR METER CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE
RADIO ADJUST FOR
FREQUENCY TO RADIO
Pin No.I of
10.7 Mc. Use 6BA6 no.4 and Pin no. 7 of 6AL5
Primary of TIO Resonance should be
about .1 volt and ground
ground about 3 volts
Pin No.I of
10.7 Mc. Use Zero. Use zero center scale.
about .1 volt
6BA6 no.4 and See note "A" Secondary of TIO
ground See note "B"
10.7Mc. Use Pin No.I of
about 4000 6BA6 no. 3 Pin no. 7 of 6AL5 Resonance should be
and ground
Primary and Secondary of T6
microvolts and ground about 3 volts
10.7 Mc. Use Pin No.I of Primary and Secondary of
Pin no. 7 of 6AL5
about 150
microvolts and groundSee
6BA6 no. 2
and ground
10.7 mc. windings of Is.
top and
Resonance should be
about 3 volts
10.7 Mc. FM Antenna Primary and Secondary of Resonance should be
Use 3000 input Pin no. 7 of 6AL5
10.7 mc. windings of T4. about 3 volts
microvolts and ground and ground
See top and bottom views See Note "C"
FM Antenna
10.7 Mc. input Pin no. 7 of 6AL5 Minimum reponse. This is
CI
and ground and ground a trap circuit
NOTES ON FM-I.F. ALIGNMENT: crossover point will be found at first. Careful adjustment of both
primary and secondary is necessary.
NOTE "A" Connect two resistors, 100K OHMS each, from Pin GENERAL: Input signals should be adjusted to give approximately
No. 7 of 6AL5 to ground. These resistors must be matched within 3 volts. The ratio detector is operating at a reasonable level at this
5%. Connect as shown in dotted lines on schematic diagram. Con- point and will give the truest indication of correct alignment with
nect vacuum tube voltmeter between the mid point of the resistors the procedure specified.
and point 1:x.
NOTE ''C" The input microvolts specified is based on the traF
NOTE "B" If TIO has been tampered with, it is possible that no circuits being adjusted.
FM - R. F. ALIGNMENT
Check Pointer so that it is Exactly Over Calibration Marker to the Extreme Left
When Gang is Fully Closed. For Adjustment Loosen Set Screw on Large Gear.
(see dial mechanism illustration.)
SIGNAL
CONNECTION TO VACUUM TUBE VOLT
GENERATOR
RADIO DUMMY ANTENNA ADJUST METER CONNECTION ADJUST TO
FREQUENCY
TO RADIO
100 Mc. Use
FM Antenna 300 ohms C7 Osc. Pin No. 7 of
about I5 lead
Resonance
microvolts C2 Ant. 6AL5 and Ground about 3 volts
NOTE: If a signal generator with the above fundamental fre-
to use a local station carrier of known frequency to align the FM
quency is not available, it is sometimes possible to use harmonics. Band and to use the vacuum tube volt meter as above for reson-
Use extreme care in picking harmonics. An alternate procedure is ance indication. A weak carrier, however will not produce 3 volts.
108
A short wave antenna is provided In cabinet.
The mAero-Vane" loop antenna for broadcast and CHASSIS HS -38
short wave reception is located at the rear of HS -39
the cabinet and should be rotated for maximum
Xerox* oltIRcutio.
volume of a weak station when the radio is in-
stalled. In locations where additional pick-
up on broadcast and short wave is desired, an
MODELS 95F31, 95F31B, 95F31M AND 95F33
external antenna may be connected to clip
marked AM EXTERNAL ANTENNA.
1ST OM F.
CONVERTER 63801 6K6GT
.0 -5 65G7 6507
LOOP DEt AvC 1ST 6,00 PoR OuTpuT
:F AMPLIFER. I -F AMPLIFIER
C-26 ONR RECAP
1515C;12NATOR ,TOP .
3r MC I -
.2S
61 t4
750 OCS
25
T R a
0 0 0 0
FLF 6 POO
tOTE . 014015L
VO"L"" ACrU:51. 1 .. ,O ELEC 0
ll6LE WE 005711.10.15 117 SPE.
L5-1
5501108 80115
-14-
-88 4.881718061 50014. TO MO..
_ re. 57. 4-14064450 FN. 4W
.41.
0 027 06.144ED FR. 414F TO .01.
C-314 440
R.16 G-40 00(0
04
6K6GT II -33 00E0
7. 16WR 4771, R-36 4700E0
PSZ,141. C-27 C-411 00E0
2
,5000% R-34
4006
11 II 1.--
it R 5: R-6
WOO. 33.000
16051710N SWITCH
SI.DMN IN 44051
8 0 LOOP
C-28
J
3
RIO
R-30
PI. 66015.7-0
T-7
0-32
'RED,
5Y3GT
RECT
51k COLLECTOR
VOL CON
NLor
POMO MR
0
mit ROT OSLO 564-561

SNORT WINE -56 Mc RV. ELECTIM 1
. ..71 Pan
ORORDCAST -555 RC -1620 RC -33 -I'
On .F15
58 PC -1. PC
661140
O TRAREPORINERS
LUG VIE IR -PORT OF AM FP ELECTRIC TONER E 33-7
ID
MOTOROLA INC.
MODELS 95F31, 95F31B, 95F31M AND 95F33 CHASSIS HS -38
HS -39
CHART I. ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE WHEN USING AM MODULATED SIGNAL
GENERATOR AND STANDARD OUTPUT METER FOR COMPLETE RECEIVER ALIGNMENT.
DI AL BAND SI GNAL SIGNAL ADJUST

SET SW. GENERATOR GEN ERATOR TRI TIER
STEP TO SET TO DUMMY CONNECTED TO SET AT OR CORE REMARKS
455 Kc I. F. CHANNEL ALIGNMENT
16 20 KC B. C. ME. 707 B. C. S. W. 455 KC

. I
& 1 , 2, 3 ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT
CONV. GRID & 4
(PIN #4)
& CHASSIS
2. 400 KC B. C. MF. 707 B.C. a S. W. 1 400 KC

. 1
5(B. C. SET OSCILLATOR TO DI AL.
CON V. GRID 0 SC. (ON CHASSIS HS- 38. MOUNT OR HOLD
(PIN #4) TRIM) DI AL SCALE TEMPORARILY ON CHASSIS
& CHASSI S
WITH GANG FULLY ME.9-1ED, POINTER
9-IOULD BE AT LAST, MARK ON CI AL.
THEN SET TO 1400 KC. AND SET
OSCILLATOR.)
3. 1400 KC B. C. NONE RADIATION LOOP 1400 KC 6 ( B. C. ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT

LOOP
AN TENN A
TRIM.)
S. BAND ALIGNMENT
4. 11.5 MC S.W. MF 707 B. C. & S.W. 11.5 MC

. 1
7( S.W. SET OSC. TO DIAL.
CON V. GRID OSC. MAKE SURE OSC. IS HIGHER IN
(PIN #41 TRIM) FREQUENCY THAN THE SIGNAL BY
8 CHASSI S
CHECKING IMAGE RESPONSE WHICH
SHOULD OCCUR WITH THE INPUT
SIGNAL AT 1 2. 41 MC.
5. 11.5 MC S.W. 50 MMF S.W. ANT. . S MC

11 8(S.W. B.C. LOOP PLUG SHOULD BE DI S.
TERMINAL AND ANT. CONNECTED. ADJ . FOR MAXIMUM
CHASSIS. COIL OUTPUT
TRIM)
4.3 Mc I. F. CHANNEL ALI GNME T
6.
9 ( DI SC. DETUNE DISCRIMINATOR SECONDARY BY
SEC.) SCREWING CORE OUT AS FAR AS IT
110 WILL GO.
DI AL BAND SIGNAL SIGNAL ADJUST
SET SW. GENERATOR GENERATOR TRIMMER
CONNECTED TO SET AT OR CORE REMARKS
STEP TO SET TO DUMMY
7. 112 MC FM .001 MF 7F8 2ND IN 4.3 MC 10, 11 , ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT
CONVERTOR GRID 12. 13 &
(Ft1 PIN) & 14 ( 4. 3
CHASSIS MC I. F. )
RI BAND ALIGNMENT
18 ( FM CHECK THE POSI TI ON OF THE FM OSC.

8.
OSC. TUNING CORE 18. SET SPACING BE -
CORE) TWEEN THE CORE AND BAKELITE PIECE
TO WHICH IT IS MOUNTED. TO 1/32"
BY TURNING TUNING CORE SLOTTED NUT.
90 MC NONE FM LOOP 90 MC 15. 16 & ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT

9. FM
ANTENNA 17 ( FM
RECEPTACLE 8r OSC. , ANT.

CHASSIS RE- & VARI -
MOVE FM LOOP. ABLE I . F.
TRIM)
10. 105 MC FM NONE FM LOOP 105 MC 18. 19 & ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT
ANTENNA 20 ( FM
RECEPTACLE 8 OSC. , ANT.

CHASSIS RE- & VARI -
MOVE FM LOOP. ABLE I . F.
CORES)
I 1 .
REPEAT STEPS 9 AND 10 SEVERAL TIMES
UNTIL FURTHER ADJUSTMENT DOES NOT
INCREASE THE OUTPUT. MAKE THE FINAL
TRI WER ADJUSTMENT AT 105 MC. ( I . E..
TRIWERS 15. 16 AND 17 AT 105 MC) .
12. 105 MC FM NONE RADIATION ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT WITH FM

LOOP 105 MC 17 (FM LOOP ANTENNA CONNECTED.
ANT.
TRI WAER 1
ALIGN DISCRIMINATOR SECONDARY
13. FM .001 MF 7F8 2ND FM 4.3 MC 9 ( DI SC. ADJUST DISCRIMINATOR SECONDARY FOR
CONVERTOR GRID SEC.) MINIMUM RESPONSE. THE CORRECT
(41 PIN) & ADJUSTMENT IS THE SHARPLY DEFINED

CHASSIS MINIMUM RESPONSE POINT BETWEEN THE
TWO PEAKS.
CONNECT OUTPUT OF SIGNAL GENERATOR TO A 5" DIAMETER, 3 TURN LOOP & RADIATE SIGNAL INTO RECEIVER LOOP.
MINIMUM DI STANCE BETWEEN LOOPS SHOULC NEVER BE LESS THAN 12".
11 1
VOLTAGE AND RESISTANCE DIAGRAM
TUBE AND TRIMMER LOCATIONS
NOTE :- A V.T.V.M. WAS USED TO MAKE MEASUREMENTS. IF A
20,000 OHM PER VOLT METER IS USED ALL GRID & AVC
VOLTAGES WILL READ LOWER.
MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE FROM TUBE BASE PIN TERMINALS
TO CHASSIS.
VOLUME CONTROL ON FULL.

VOLTAGE TOLERANCE t 10%.
RESISTANCE TOLERANCE t 20%.
TOWS BAND SWITCH IN BC. POSITION; BAND SWITCH IN F.M. POSITION
FOR ALL OTHER MEASUREMENTS.
aTzt pZ0212.2.0
PHONO RADIO SWITCH IN RADIO POSITION.
8 SWITG24
nt: ii..._, 1 ST & 2 ND. FM CONVERTER

S
PUT
TANS.
c,
7Q7
BC. 8 SW. CONY.
sorrow VIEW
T-3 T-5 T2 T4
,KC 3. 435. 18G
0158 5E2 I -F SEG I- SEG I SEG 14- SEC.
TUBE LOCATED ON TOP
OF CHASSIS O
6SQ7 6SG7
PHASE INVERT CD
I -F AMP
K.1000 (ONE THOUSAND) OHMS.
a Co
I I RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS. P3 cD
. VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS. cji
fo `xi
1-4 CA
*. MEASUREMENTS MAY VARY DUF TO ELECTROLYTIC Co I-,
CAPACITOR IN CIRCUITS.
Cn
5Y3GT 6K6GT 6K6GT 6S8GT 6SG7
RECT. POWER OUTPUT POWER OUTPUT CA
DET. AVC. 1 ST. AUDIO I -F AMP.
CO
U)
CA
CO
52
R-17 C-23 R-24 S-1

R-22 C 40 L-4
0-24 C10 C-20 C-28 C-37 L-2 C-30

I R-18 R- 5 R-13 T-3 I C-16 C-36 R-29
C-17 C 35
C 31
-T 6 R 31
L3
C-34
C-27 C-26 R-27
C 33
0-4f C-25 6S07 C-18
707
L1
R-5
R 30
R-4
T4
C9
/6 R6
R8
I
I/
A.M. ANT.
INPUT
5Y3 6K6GT C-29 R -I9 R-23 6K6GT C-22 R-16 8GT C-13 T-5 R-7 R-11 I C-15 R-33 6SG7 C-10 T-1
R-34 R-26 C-39 R-20 R-25 R-21 C-21 R-14 R-12 R-10 R-9 C-12 C-14 T 2 6SG7 R-28 C-11
NOTE: - R-33- NOT ' USED ON CHASSIS HS -38
BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS
ra
T-2
.5 4.511C
1149
15G
C.29 5112...1.
1.e.50
11-16
P401.!11.1/1100 f11
s..3eis IN awe egs,...1
/hose
11.
545
. lEss
7-
11.35
USED WITH HS -89 USED WITH HS -97

104
SCHEASTIC DIAGRAM - CHASSIS HS-EID& HS -97
MOTOROLA INC. MODELS 77FM21,77FM22,77FM22M,77FM22WM & 77FM23

WITH GANG FULLY CLOSED, POINTER
SLIDER SHOULD TOUCH EDGE OF HOLE.
VOLTAGE & RESISTANCE DIAGRAM

DIAL BACKGROUND
BRACKET
NOTE: A VTVM WAS USED TO TAKE MEASUREMENTS.
MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE FROM TUBE BASE NOTE
PIN TERMINALS TO 6-(*) USE 18 LB. TEST FISH LINE. GANG FULLY
CLOSED
VOLUME CONTROL ON FULL.
STRING DRIVE
BAND SWITCH IN FM POSITION FOR ALL
MEASUREMENTS EXCEPT AS NOTED. 0
WITH BAND SWITCH IN BC POSITION O
-9.6V; IN FM POSITION 0 V. FINISRS TENSION
SPRING
(FRONT OF CHASSIS)
V-6
5085
POWER
OUTPUT v-i
12AT7
I ST. a 2 ND.
TUNING
FM CONV. SHAFT
V-5 :MEASUREMENTS MAY VARY DUE TO

V-3 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR IN CIRCUIT.
19T8 44 1 MEG
DET. AVC. 80
12BA6 VOLTAGE TOLERANCE ± 10%.
1 ST. AUDIO 2 ND. FM -I -F
BC -I -F RESISTANCE TOLERANCE ± 20%.
400K K:1000 (ONE THOUSAND) OHMS.
I
GND 1
: RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS.
GND
c=7 :VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS.
GND :GROUND TO CHASSIS.
V-4 V-2 ALL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS ARE DC
128A6 12E3E6 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
58 3RD. FM -1-F 1ST. FM -I -F
55AC BC. CONV.

GENERATOR AND STANDARD OUTPUT METER FOR COMPLETE RECEIVER ALIGNMENT
DIAL BAND SIGNAL SIGNAL ADJUST

455 Kc IF CHANNEL ALIGNMENT

1. 1620 Kc BC .1 mf 12BE6, (V-2) 455 Kc 1,2,3 & Adjust for maximum output.
BC Cony. Grid 4
(Pin #I)
DROADCAST BAND alai/JUL'

2. 1620 Kc BC .1 mf 1213E6 (V-2) 1620 Kc 5 This sets oscillator to dial..1
(gang BC Cony. Grid (Calibrate pointer by fully
fully (Pin #1) closing gang and noting po-
opened) sition of pointer slider.
Pointer slider should be in
line with right hand hole in
dial background bracket as
shown in Figure 12.)
3. 1400 Kc BC None Radiation 1400 Kc 6 Tune In signal with receiver

loop* tuning knob, then peak trim-
mer 6..
FM VARIABLE
I -F TRIM.
T 1
SEC.
BOTTOM SEC.
VIEW
FM OSC. TRIM.
T-2
SEC.
T-4
SEC
0
BC DIODE FM DISC.
®
FM -I -F
0@
FM -I -F FM -I -F BG-I-F
0
FM ANT TRIM.
455KG 4.3MC 4.3MC 4.3MC 4.3MC 455KC
e o ®
FM ANT. CORE
0 FM OSG. CORE
7-2 -5
PRI PRI.
7-6
V-1
12AT7
TOP BC LOOP
TRIM
VIEW 1400 KC
0
OUTPUT )
TRANSF. BC OSC.
TRIM.
1620KC
0
FM VARIABLE
I -F CORE
116 \\N-----Th
(Alignment continued)
DIAL BAND S:GNAL SIGNAL ADJUST

4.3 NC ,..w. rolL 4

4. 7 Detune discriminator secon-
dary by screwing core out
as far as it will go.
5. (extreme .001 mf 12AT7 (V-1) 4.3 Mc. 8,9,10, Adjust for maximum output.
high fre- 2nd FM Con- 11, 12,
quency end) verter Grid 13 & 14
407 pin)
Eh ALIONME
6. 15 Check the position of the
FM Osc. tuning core 15.
Set spacing between the
core and bakelite piece
to which it is mounted,
to two turns from tight
by turning tuning core
slotted nut.
7. 98 Mc None FM Ant. ter- 98 Mc 18 Tuner is set to 98 Mc by

minal moving cores out with
tuning shaft until spac-
ing between bakelite
Pieces is 1-9/320. See
Figure 9. Peak 18 for
maximum output.
8. 90 Mc None FM Ant. ter- 90 Mc 19 & 20 Tune in signal with re-

minal ceiver tuning knob, then
adjust 19 & 20 for maxi-
mum output.
9. 106 Mc None FM Ant. ter- 105 Mc le & 17 Tune in Signal with re-
minal ceiver tuning knob, then
adjust le & 17 for maxi-
mum output.
10. Repeat Steps 8 & 9 sev-

eral times until further
adjustment does not in-
crease the output. Make
the final trimmer adjust-
ment at laa Mc. (i.e.,
trimmers 19 & 20 at IN
t1.0
11. 105 Mc None Radiate sig- 105 Mc 19 Adjust for maximum out-
nal (or use put with built-in an-
station after tenna connected.
Performing
Step 12)
magi DISCRIMINATOR ZECONDARY

12. - FM .001 mf 12AT7 (V-1) 4.3 Mc 7 Adjust discriminator secon-
2nd FM Con- dary for minimum response.
verter Grid The correct adjustment is
(Pin #7) sharply defined minimum
response point between the
two peaks.
* Connect output of signal generator to a 5' diameter, 3 turn loop and radiate signal into receiver loop.
Minimum distance between loops should never be less than 12'.
117
FM -BC TUNING UNIT 5085 rn
CD
30 PT -14 V-6
50 38 12 56 1-1 T-1 32 R-32 T-3 4
66 5 6 LS -1 12BA6 12 C)
51 19T8 o.
V-3 V-5
O
rt
fD
ca
O
C-7 52
C-8 (0
-9
G-6 T-6 1.4
rp T-5 i-a
cQi
C6 T-4
C-41 co
46
47
1-4
51
28
03
8,13
a.
1-3
31 cD
cD
S-3 7
O
(ON HS -97 ONLY) 15 35 18(HS-89)
PHONO 19(H5-97)
PWR. RECEPT. 11 C-1 2 128E6 PHONO PICKUP LEAD
52 51 27 CD
(ON HS -89 ONLY) V- 2
CD
16,36 61 54 62 12AT7 L-1 12BA6 11
PHONO
V-1 V-4 tD
PWR. RECEPT.
(ON HS -97 ONLY) to
FM BC
JUMPER IN PLACE WHEN
NO EXTERNAL FM ANT-
ENNA IS USED. METHOD OF SETTING TUNER TO 98 MC.
JUMPER
TURN TUNING SHAFT UNTIL DISTANCE
FOR ADDITIONAL PICK-UP BETWEEN BAKELITE PIECES IS 1-9/32" ...1-9/32
OF STANDARD BROADCAST AS SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION.
BC STATIONS, CONNECT EX
JUMPER OPENED WHEN TERNAL ANTENNA HERE.
FM ANTENNA IS USED.
CONNECT FM ANTENNA
LEAD -IN AS SHOWN.
300 OHM TWIN TRANS- 0
MISSION LINE FROM
FM ANTENNA. FIGURE 9. TUBE & TRIMMER LOCATION ra,
JUMPER
H
CHASSIS
HS -89 EXTERNAL ANTENNA TERMINALS HI
HS -97 PARTS LOCATION -CHASSIS HS -89 & HS -97 -BOTTOM
(CAPACITORS, RESISTORS, COILS, TRANSFORMERS, SWITCHES) H
R-32
C-38 R-26 C-37 C-33 R-10 T-1 R-27 R-30 R-31 C-11 R-7 R-5 C-5 R2 S-2
R-28)
I
R 13 R11 C-35 LS -1
N
tO
to
C -39-
G-40 -
C 25
R-23 -
R-20 -
T-3 -
C-17
C-30
C-31
R-21
R-22
T- 6
C-29
R 15
C-23
T-4
R 19
G-24IR-14R-17 R-9 1-2 R-1 R-8 R-12 C-10 C-18 C-12 L-5 S
C-22 C-28 C-27 C-15 R-16 R-6 R-4 T 5 C-16 C-14 C-3 R-
N (FRONT OF CHASSIS)
MEM DUMB OEMS V-6 NOTE :A VTVM WAS USED TO TAKE MEASUREMENTS.
0 VP NW 11 50B5 MEASUREMENTS ARE MADE FROM TUBE BASE
REMO POWER PIN TERMINALS TO B -lb)
gal OUTPUT V -I
12AT7 VOLUME CONTROL ON FULL,NO STATION TUNED
IN.
1 ST. a 2ND.
OEM MEM FM CONY. BAND SWITCH IN FM POSITION FOR ALL
MEASUREMENTS EXCEPT AS NOTED.
0=0 OESO
liar %V o WITH BAND SWITCH IN BC POSITION
9V; IN FM POSITION 0 V.
V-5
V-3 *=MEASUREMENTS MAY VARY DUE TO
I 9T8 ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR IN CIRCUIT.
DET. AVG. 12B46
1 ST. AUDIO 2 ND. FM -I -F VOLTAGE TOLERANCE t 10%.
BC- I -F
RESISTANCE TOLERANCE ± 20%.
KR 1000 (ONE THOUSAND) OHMS.
I I = RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS.
=)1.. VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS.

GND .GROUND TO CHASSIS.
V-4 V-2 ALL VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS ARE DC
12BA6 12BE6 UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
3 RD. FM -I -F 1 ST FM-I-F
OMMI MIN INPUT TO SET DURING VOLTAGE MEASURE-
BC CONY.
MENTS 11T V. AC.
ammo mum
FM BC
am
JUMPER .N PLACE WHEN
55.60-70-80.100-120.140ie AID NO EXTERNAL FM ANT-
ENNA .5 HOED
JUMPER
FOR ADDITIONAL P.CA UP

FM BC OF STANDARD BROADCAST
JUMPER OPENED WREN STATIONS, CONNECT E
PM ANTENNA ,5 USED. TERNA. ANTENNA HE NE
CONNECT FM ANTENNA
LEAD AS SHOWN
300 OHM TWIN TRANS-
MISSION ,NE FROM
FM ANTENNA.
JUMPER
77)a122 (Wood -Walnut) EXTERNAL ANTENNA TERMINALS

77X2228 (Wood -Blonde) 77X1121 (Plastic -Walnut)
CHASSIS
MODELS 77XM21, 77XM22 & 77XM22B w
HS -102 CD
7.5 V-6 E
v -I
V-3 V- 19TO 5085
12866 12866 110.211 OUI.,
1261'7 JIM Old P/S01...0 Of T.
2 SD rF INC S,S, 11010
ST 111 10 . Coav itt
T-3 T-7
OUTPUT
3.0 et TAMS,
5
027
R-25. R-26
yr
005
.25
0-28 "9 m
ZOO ;110o."' cO'
2.9 1613
Ir.
6-27 0
2
R-24,1 7cge
T-6
iopoo
555c 022T
R-21
,000.
R-11 111
I .01
C- 24
100M10
I
00.3,0
- 11
-79i - CD
ts... 8
Wir 411
° .t 1615
CO
1"Z 3051
71
14
0-2
0
`27
al 9°.
1-3
0 "b" CD
CD
.1116-34 44
:2206
r.
SOYI
R
SR.O.ST - 555 - 440 Re .11.0 .000
R- e
G 0.01.3.4
emt TKOUSAND 1.00411 01.1S
,7p OMT _tilt -74,w
OS
QAT cdc T1
C 19
C-39
35
T
L-3 L
105 ISS v
cc cc Qao
33
06'W '''opoe t000400
N
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F. M. and Television _Receivers
MOTOROLA INC. MODELS 77XM21, 77XM22 a 77XM22B
CHASSIS
HS -102.
GENERATOR AND STANDARD OUTPUT METER FOR COMPLETE RECEIVER ALIGNMENT
DIAL BAND SIGNAL SIGNAL ADJUST

455 KC IE CHANNEL AII0N1ENT

1. 1820 Kc BC .1 mf 128E6 (V-2) BC 455 Kc 1,2,3 & 4 Adjust for maximum output.
Conv. Grid
(Pin #1)

2. 1820 Kc BC .1 mf 12BE6(V -2) BC 1620 Kc 5 This sets oscillator to dial.
(gang Conv. Grid (Calibrate pointer by fully
fully (Pin jl) closing gang and noting Do -
opened)
sitIon of pointer slider.
Pointer slider should be in
line with right hand, hole in
dial background bracket as
shown in Figure 7.)
3. 1400 Kc BC None Radiation 1400 Kc e Tune in signal with receiver
loop* tuning knob, then peak trim-
mer 6.
1,1 = if CHANNEL ALIGNMENT

4. - - - - 7 Detune discriminator secon-
dary by screwing core out as
far as it will go.
5. extreme FM .001 mf 12AT7 (V-1) 2nd 4.3 Mc 8,9,10,11, Adjust for maximum output.
high ire- FM Converter 12, 13 & 14
quency end) Grid(17 Pln)
Ed tAND ALIGNMENT
6. - - - - 15 Check the position of the FM
Osc. tuning core 15. Set
spacing between the core and
bakelite piece to which it is
mounted, to two turns from
tight by turning tuning core
slotted nut.
7. 98 Mc FM None FM Ant. terminal 98 Mc 18 Tuner is set to 98 Mc by

moving cores out with tuning
shaft until spacing between
bakelite pieces is 1-9/32".
See illustration. Peak 18
for maximum output
8. 90 Mc FM None FM Ant. terminal 90 Mc 19 & 20 Tune in signal with receiver

tuning knob, then adjust 19
and 20 for maximum output.
9. 105 Mc FM None FM Ant. terminal 105 Mc 16 & 17 Tune in signal with receiver
tuning knob, then adjust 18
and 17 for maximum output.
10. - - - - - - Repeat steps 8 & 9 several
times until further adjust-
ment does not Increase the
output. Make the final
LEIggtr adjustment at 105 Mc.
122 (I.e., trimmers 19 & 20 at

10 dc_.)
ALIGNMENT (cont'd)
BAND SIGNAL SIGNAL ADJUST

DIAL
SW. GENERATOR GENERATOR TRIIMER
SET REMARKS
STEP DUMMY CONNECTED TO SET AT OR CORE
TO SET TO
Radiate signal 105 Mc 19 Adjust for maximum output

11. 105 Mc FM None
with built-in antenna con -
(or use station
after performing nected.
Step 12)
ALIGN DISCRIMINATOR MCONDAR/

.001 mf 12AT7 (V-1) 2nd 4.3 Mc 7 Adjust discriminator secon-
12. - FM
FM Converter Grid dary for minimum response.
The correct adjustment is
(Pin #7)
sharply defined minimum
response point between the
two peaks.
* Connect output of signal generator to a 5" diameter, 3 turn loop and radiate signal into receiver loop.
Minimum distance between loops should never be less than 12".
WITH GANG FULLY CLOSED,

FIGURE 7. STRING DRIVE POINTER SLIDER SHOULD LINE
UP WITH EDGE OF HOLE.
DIAL NOTE:
BACKGROUND USE 18 LB. TEST FISH LINE.
BRACKET
BOTTOM
T-3 VIEW ralle FM VARIABLE
I -F TRIM TENSION
C.
Die SPRING
S G.
FM OSC. TRIM.
V-2 3 TURNS
128E6
TUNING SHAFT
0 FM -I -F FM I -F FM I -F BC -I -F
0
FM ANT TRIM.
BC DIODE
455KC 4.3A1C 4.3MC 4..31/C 43SKC FM ANT. GORE BAND SWITCH SHAFT
O
METHOD OF SETTING TUNER TO 98 MC.

FM OSC. CORE TURN TUNING SHAFT UNTIL DISTANCE
BETWEEN BAKELITE PIECES IS 1-9132'
AS SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION.
rJ
5.
BC LOOP
TRIM.
i4OOKC
OUTPUT
TRANSF
BC OSC.
TRIM
TUBE & TR I tfER LOCATIONS
1620KC
16
FM VARIABLE
I -F CORE
) 123
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F. M. and Television
Receivers
Aiortoia **Vaal°.
H)
1'
_
ZO 0
O(
0 u_ 7
ci)
4,) II
cn
04 uj
co x w
in 0 ul i 00
0 u_ tij N
1
7 n
,..,
III4 e;,'-' 4 Oil 40
zm -
& N
in ig ,:i . z .7 _ , ,..a-i. is, N,
C° & --s--
li M. I xe,,,.
4 40,402,-.:106,61\.
c;J
it,_.4 aamp tj. L,
0 U k iiimip, i to r-
0.,
ca
IX Ilig 1 IK:
,....
--"*"---Tes6 oki' .,Z. Fq AWN ill,
sr c.r ._-..
. ., IF p -A
ci (-)
Ir PO
a , ,iger51,..0 MI cr
7 D.I ezraWitiltE II II It
K;) 0 5 _1
>_ -ai;mm-Noq-
w. 11.-r - \1141411INE
Ifr"
4.74,Lr/-71.041twor4 'Ave Emits ,-,-,
.E2
'444 -4741111/1-11111
-111.
, kumr..-1,0-r-, lii,. '.(viit.011111E11.11
411.11/1";;1C. In Min °
ifietora Television Receivers VT -71 and VK-101

Chassis TS -3
Motorola Models VT -71 and VK-101 Television receivers use 29 tubes

including a 10" picture tube. Antenna receptacle is provided for
either a 75 ohm unbalanced or 300 ohm balanced line. The picture I.F.
is 26.4 MC. and sound I.F. is 21.9 MC. The description of the receiv-
er will be divided into sections and reference should be made to the
complete circuit diagram or to other illustrations as instructed.
The material presented here is supplied through the courtesy of
Motorola, Inc., and is of preliminary nature. A great deal of know-
ledge of modern television design can be obtained by the serviceman
in carefully studying this material.
The R.F. tuner permits the selection of any one channel of the 13
television channels existing between 44-88 and 174-216 MC. A wave-
band switch is used. The resonant circuits involved are designed to
pass a band of about 4.5 MC. The overall receiver band pass is about
3.5 MC. as it is reduced by that of the I.F. system. See the upper
left hand corner of schematic diagram.
The secondary consists of a high and low frequency winding in
series to provide more constant impedance over the entire television
band and to avoid reflectioni which would produce ghost images in the
picture. Channels one through six are tuned by connecting capacitors
C17, C16, C15, C14, C13, C12, respectively, across the low frequency
winding L.F.S. These are trimmer condensers and each is pre -tuned at
the factory to a specific frequency in each channel. The high fre-
quency winding (H.F.S.) being a very small inductance has negligible
effect on the tuning of the low channels.
For channels sever through thirteen, the low frequency winding is
effectively shorted out of the resonant circuit by means of connect-
ing capacitors C11, C10, and C9, respectively, across this winding.
Capacitor C2 which is permanently connected across the low frequency
coil, resonates the coil above channel six and serves to short the
coil more effectively in the upper channels because of the series
inductance present in the wave -band switch. Resistors R1 and R2 are
used to secure amore constant input impedance.
The H.F. amplifier employs a critically coupled double tuned cir-
cuit. The mutual coupling is provided by capacitors C18 and C19.
Each pair of coils, such as L13 -L14 of the coils numbered from Ll to
L26, is pre -tuned at the factory to the same frequency in each channel
by means of a brass slug.
This type of double tuned circuit is similar in performance to
that of the double tuned I.F. transformer of the average broadcast
receiver. The difference is that a capacitive mutual impedance rather
than an inductive mutual impedance is used. The degree of coupling
which determines the bandwidth of the pass band is controlled by the
size of the capacities of C18 and C19. The smaller the size of this
capacity, the greater will be the mutual impedance and the greater will
be the bandwidth; however, if coupling exceeds critical coupling, a
double hump will occur in the response. .In these receivers, C18 and
C19 are so chosen that critical coupling is obtained in each channel,
and provides a pass band of apnroximately 4.5 MC. measured between
frequencies for which the output is 3 DB. down or .7 of the output at
the resonant frequency.
125
S.1
Jr rn
R.64
- elav rt
Vi
AL5
v$11(.0
40414
vVio vDATS
.
WFTNER
C.1
T. T,
ot.
cp
Z5
co
I
Co
NANO PO. R
regGROJ. Leta
R"..
TAI
STNC SEPARATOR
VS0 I. JgL
37.." NE.ii
- r--,
O
HORIZONTAL ['ENACTION SYST Al H,55 VOL.. 5014,

V.22 M2S A116
MS. C.G.T 5.1561 MOO
11,
406
1.-111 Va.
Goot. El. v.22T-
° T
T.
C -13r..6 a
mORIZORTAL GANI
CORTROL
triMirrp. 10 .00-410
10- XS .2 2.1.0
Motorola Television Receivers VT -71 and VK-101, Chassis TS -3

The double capacitor C18 and C19 is composed of two large circular
plates with a third circular plate sandwiched between them and insul-
ated from the two outer plates by mica sheets. The two outer plates
are grounded and represent one side of the capacitor. The inner plate
represents the other side of the capacitor. The coupling condensers
CS and C20 are used to keep D.C. off the exposed coils.
The oscillator circuit (the right hand section of the diagrammed
6J6, V2), is a Colpitts circuit in which the voltage developed across
the grid -cathode capacity provides the feed -back voltage necessary to
maintain oscillation. Capacitor C25 is a small variable condenser
which is provided for the operator to permit fine tuning of the
receiver to the sound carrier. The major change in frequency re-
quired in channel selection is obtained through selection of the
proper oscillator coil of which there are thirteen. These coils are
adjusted at the factory. Capacitors C22 and C24 keep the D.C. plate
voltage off the exposed coals. The very small capacity provided by
C23 has a temperature compensating characteristic and is used to
reduce oscillator frequency drift.
The mixer circuit employs a triode tube (the other section of the
6J6) V2. Some oscillator voltage injection occurs through the com-
mon cathode lead inductance; however, coupling capacitor C21 provides
the principle source of injection voltage. The plate circuit of the
mixer is resonated by Video I.F. coil L42 to a frequency of 23.5 MC.
The sound I.F. amplifier has three stages of amplification and a
limiter. The first stage using V3, is actually the first amplifier
stage of the video I.F. amplifier system. The second and third
stages (V10 and V11) are single iron -slug tuned coils which resonate
a fixed capacitor of 20 mmfd. and the tube capacities to the operat-
ing frequency of 21.9 MC.
The limiter grid resistor R55 is kept small so that the time
constant of it and the capacitor C74 will be small; hence, when
ignition interference is present and tends to drive the limiter grid
positive, the capacitor C74 will not store the energy very long and
the interference will be reduced.
The discriminator circuit is conventional as used in F.M. receiv-
ers. The circuit uses a novel method for introducing the primary
voltage into the secondary circuit and does away with the R.F. choke
usually placed between the center tap of the secondary and center of
the load. Resistor R61 and capacitor C81 produce audio frequency
de -emphasis necessary because in the F.M. transmitter the "highs"
are over emphasized.
The audio amplifier is conventional and consists of a triode
voltage amplifier 6S8, V13 driving a 6V6, V14 in the power stage.
Resistor R69 provides audio degeneration which reduces distortion.
BW
INDIVIDUAL STAGE
I. RESPONSES
INDIVIDUAL STAGE
/ \ RESPONSE CURVES
OVERALL RESPONSE
OVERALL RESPONSE
1
.64BW CURVE (2 STAGES)
+f
SINGLE FREQUENCY TUNED AMPLIFIER RESPONSE STAGGER TUNED RESPONSE 127
The video I.F. amplifier, sometimes referred to as the wide -band
amplifier, is designed to provide gain and a bandwidth of approxim-
ately 4 MC. (at .5 down) to the picture I.F. frequencies. It must
also reject the sound I.F. frequencies so as not to cause sound inter-
ference in the picture. Wide -band response and gain are accomplished
by means of a 5 -stage stagger -tuned system, four amplifiers and the
mixer. Basically, a stagger -tuned amplifier is one in which each
single tuned stage resonates at a different frequency in the pass band.
The overall response of all the stages is then considerably wider than
would be achieved with all the stages tuned to the same frecuency, and
the overall gain is still as high. See figure on page 127.
To vary the gain of the video I.F. amplifier the bias of the first
three stages is changed, and is accomplished by means of the CONTRAST
control. This nomenclature is used, as varying the amount of video
signal reaching the kinescope grid determines the amount of black
and white appearing in the picture.
It is necessary to nrevent the sound I.F. frequencies from reach-
ing the video detector and the sound from getting into the picture.
This is accomplished by means of the Low Frequency Trap (L.F.T.) L50
in the video I.F. amplifier which reduces the response to the
sound
I.F. frequencies to 1/50 or less than that of the video fre-
quencies. This causes the low frequency skirt of the video I.P.
response to become very steep, see figure.
The trap is made up of components L50, C43, C44,and 1122 and is
located in the 2nd Video I.F. amplifier stage. By resonating this
trap to the sound I.F. carrier frequency 21.9 MC., a negative
resistance is produced which equals the value of R22 and results in a
short to ground at this frequency. This results in high attenuation
of the sound carrier and its side bands. In alignment the signal
generator is set at the sound I.F. carrier and L50 is adjusted for
minimum current in the video detector circuit.
21.9 MC.
122.7 23 26 26.4
0:7A A
ADJACENT SOUND
.1 A OR LESS 27,9 CHANNEL OR HIGH
FREQUENCY TRAP.
5°1_
1
REJECTORI
TRAP
SOUND OR LOW
FREQUENCY TRAP
VIDEO I -F RESPONSE CURVE
NOTE:
THE FREQUENCIES ON THE CURVE, OTHER THAN THOSE OF THE
SOUND AND VIDEO CARRIERS, ARE APPROXIMATE. SLIGHT VARIA-
1215 TIONS WILL OCCUR BETWEEN SETS.
As the sound I.F. trap does not reduce the response sufficiently
to frequencies below the sound carrier, which could result in inter-
ference from any stations operating at these frequencies, a low fre-
quency rejector trap has also been included. This rejector trap
composed of L54 and C49 resonates to 21 MC.
To eliminate interference in the picture resulting from the sound
I.F. carrier of the adjacent television channel which is 27.9 MC., a
trap has been included to attenuate this frequency to 1/50 or more
of the frequencies in the pass band. This trap is of the same type
as that used for eliminating the sound I.F. frequencies and is locat-
ed in the 1st I.F. amplifier stage. It is composed of L46, C36, C37
and R17. In alignment it is tuned for minimum current in the detector
circuit at 27.9 MC.
Please notice that the first and second I.F. stages which contain
the high and low frequency traps, have two shunt tuning coils. In
each of these stages, both coils are effectively in parallel and de-
termine the net tuning inductance; the reason for two is that they
improve the performance of the traps. Two shunt coils were found
unnecessary for the third stage containing the low frequency
rejector trap.
The video detector uses one section of the 6AL5, V7A which is a
double diode tube. The signal voltage is applied to the cathode
producing a negative polarity'video voltage across the diode load
R31. This load is only 3900 ohms in order to prevent the shunting
tube capacities from affecting the high frequency video response.
A video response of approximately 4.5 MC. is desired. The induct-
ances L59 and L60 are peaking inductances which
tube capacities and C56 and extend the frequency response.
The video amplifier is a two stage resistance coupled system. It
is similar in operation to that used for audio amplification except
that the frequency response is much greater being approximately 4 MC.
This high frequency response is achieved by using small plate loads
and peaking L59 to L64 coils which resonate the tube capacities.
One other aspect of video amplifiers is the ability to pass the
signal without introducing phase shift. Phase shift causes distortion
due to improper displacement of picture elements. Phase shift at low
frequencies is caused by the reactance of the plate to grid coupling
capacitors. To compensate for this phase shift, the resistor -capacitor
network R34 and C60 is used. This network introduces compensation by
increasing the effective plate load at low frequencies.
To limit the amplitude of noise bursts and auto ignition type of
interference which would smear the picture and upset the synchroniza-
tion, the D.C. plate and screen voltages of the 4th video I.F. tube
and 1st video amplifier have been lowered. The use of a two stage
video amplifier system also aids in reducing trouble from noise in
that large noise amplitudes out of the detector operate in the cut-off
region of the 1st video grid. Stabilizing the 4th I.F. amplifier
plate return with a large capacitor C53 also helps reduce noise streaks
in the picture.
D.C. restoration is necessary because the video amplifiers are not
directly coupled and cannot pass the D.C. component present in the
video signal received from the detector. The D.C. component is that
which determines the average brightness of the picture and its magni-
vised at the station being received. Since the video stages are129
tude is dependent on whether a light or dark picture is being tele-
capacitively coupled, the D.C. component is not passed; but only the
A.C. component which is the variation about the D.C. component. This
subject receives detailed treatment in the lecture on Television in
"Advanced Radio Servicing" by M. N. Beitman.
In the Motorola television sets, the D.C. restorer consists of the
second section of the 6AL5 double diode V7B used in the video detector
circuit and is connected into the grid circuit of the kinescope. The
D.C. restorer load is R47 across which a positive voltage is developed
when the video signal is applied. The positive restorer voltage re-
duces the negative voltage applied by the Brightness Control R130 and
determines the average brightness. Since the diode is connected with
its plate below its cathode on the resistor string, it will conduct
only on the negative amplitude of the video signal. This means that
the D.C. restorer voltage produced across R47 will be nearly that of
the negative amplitude. The D.C. restorer voltage is maintained for
a time approximately a frame period, because during the period that
the restorer diode is conductive, condenser C64 is charged to the D.C.
voltage developed across R47; and when the tube is non-conductive, this
charge must leak through a resistive path made up of R47, R46, R44 and
R43. Since R47 is particularly high, it takes a comparatively long
time for the D.C. voltage on C64 to change.
In order to synchronize the sweep voltages of the horizontal and
vertical deflection systems, it is necessary to first separate the
synchronizing pulses from the video component. By taking the Sync.
Amplifier input voltage from a point in the kinescope grid circuit
below the D.C. Restorer, the D.C. Restorer tube aids in the Sync. sep-
aration. This action comes about from the difference in Sync. Ampli-
fier input voltage when the tube is conducting as compared to when it
is not. To understand this action, consider the method of obtaining
the Sync. Amplifier input voltage. It is seen to be the voltage
developed across R46, R45,and R130 are by passed by capacitor C65. On
the positive half of the video signal applied to the D.C. Restorer,
the Restorer tube V7B does not conduct as its plate is then negative
with respect to its cathode. The Sync. Amplifier input voltage is then
the fraction 33/1043 of the kinescope grid voltage or voltage across
R44 and, as can be seen, is quite small. On the negative half of the
video signal, the Restorer tube conducts and presents a series imped-
ance of several hundred ohms. This effectively shunts R47 and makes
the Sync. Amplifier input voltage 33/43 of the kinescope grid voltage.
This means that approximately 24 times as much Sync. signal is applied
to the Sync. Amplifier on the negative half of the video signal which
contains the Sync. pulses and some video than on the positive half
which contains mainly the video component. Because of the presence of
some video component on the negative half of the composite signal, the
Sync. input voltage still contains an appreciable amount of video and
further stripping is necessary.
The Sync. Separator removes the synchronizing pulses from the com-
posite video signal. It also stabilizes and limits the amplitude of
the synchronizing pulses so that a constant pulse amplitude is applied
to the deflection systems for a weak or strong video signal. It is a
three -stage system containing a pulse stabilizing amplifier, a pulse
stripper, and a pulse limiter.
The purpose of the pulse stabilizing amplifier is to amplify the
"Sync" pulses and also stabilize the output so that the output will
tend to remain constant for a wide range of input voltages. This
130 stabilization or compression is accomplished by operation over

non-linear portion of the plate current -grid voltage curve.
V-15 is a 6SK7 tube and has a remote plate current cut-off characteris-
tic. The signal received from the kinescope is of negative polarity
and tends to drive the tube toward plate current cut-off. With a weak
signal, the "Sync" pulse operates over the relatively high gain portion
of the curve, while on large signals, the "Sync" pulse operates over a
lower gain portion of the curve. The result is a more constant "Sync"
pulse amplitude.
The pulse stripper stage of the Sync. Separator V16 clips the sig-
nal at just above the blanking level and removes all of the video com-
onent from the "Sync" pulses. This is accomplished by driving the
grid of the Stripper positive. A negative bias voltage proportional
to the "Sync" signal is developed across grid resistor R72 and this
bias is of such value that plate current flows only during the peak
portion of the signal received from the stabilizing amplifier.
The shunt capacitor C91 serves to reduce the high frequency compon-
ents of the video signal reaching the grid of the stripper. The coup-
ling capacitor C92 is made small to discriminate against low frequency
voltage changes that would cause the "Sync" pulses to move up and down
and cause the picture to jitter. However, the use of a small coupling
capacitor causes differentiation of the vertical pulse group, that is,
the grid coupling condenser C92 charges up rapidly on the wide vertical
pulses which causes the pulse at the grid to have a saw -tooth shaped
top, as shown in the left hand figure at the bottom of the page.
The pulse limiter stage flattens the top of the vertical pulses
received from the clipper so that a good square shaped pulse is applied
to the integrating circuit which provides the resultant vertical pulse
that "Syncs" the vertical blocking oscillator.
a more constant pulse amplitude for change of signal input level.
A 6J5 triode V17 is used and is operated at zero bias. The "Sync"
pulse applied is negative going but the coupling condenser C95 pro-
duces an A.C. axis which because of the width of the pulses and the
Alort interval between pulses is located close to the top of the "Sync"
pulses. The positive component is then very large and drives the grid
positive producing a bias voltage across R76 which is quite large, see
figure at right belowcn this page. This bias voltage is represented by
Ec. The top part of the pulse wnich as the saw -tooth shape then falls
beyond the cut-off point and is, therefore, clipped producing a square
pulse in the plate circuit.
IP
Ec Ey
LC0
14-Ec
I
I
1 WAVEFORM - STRIPPER ACTION
OZ,
q WAVEFORM - LIMITER 131
The vertical deflection system generates the 60 cycle saw -tooth
voltage. It is a four circuit arrangement involving three tubes. It
consists of a pulse integrator, a blocking oscillator, a discharge
tube, and an output amplifier. The pulse integrating circuit generates
one large pulse from the vertical group of six pulses contained in the
composite video signal. This integrated pulse is then used to syn-
chronize the blocking oscillator. The blocking oscillator generates
a large positive pulse which is applied to the discharge tube grid and
makes it conductive. This tube then discharges a capacitor across
which the saw -tooth sweep voltage is developed. The output amplifier
converts this sweep voltage into the sweep current that is used to
deflect the kinescope beam.
The pulse integrator circuit consists of a double RC filter in the
grid return circuit of the vertical blocking oscillator. It is com-
nosed of resistors R78 and R79 and capacitors C97 and C98, see the
schematic diagram. The vertical group of pulses consisting of six
equalizing followed by six field pulses and then six more equalizing
pulses is applied to the integrator through capacitor C96. The time
constants of R78 and C97, R79 and C98 are so large that capacitors
C97 and C98 charge very little during each equalizing pulse period.
As the interval between equalizing pulses is larger than the pulse
period, any charge due to the equalizing pulses leaks off. During the
periods of the six field pulses, however, capacitors C97 and C98 are
charged appreciably since the field pulses are quite wide, further
since the interval between field pulses is very short, very little of
the charge can leak off before the next pulse is applied. The result
is the charge builds up on each field pulse creating a pulse of
sufficient size to reduce the negative voltage on the grid of the
blocking oscillator tube to a value less than cut-off and starts the
oscillator cycle. The vertical "sync" pulse built up in the integrator
leaks off in the long interval between vertical pulse groups.
The blocking oscillator is a regenerative arrangement. The oscil-
lator tube which is one section of a 6SN7, V18 has its plate circuit
coupled to its grid circuit by means of the transformer T4. This oscil-
lator produces a varying voltage on the grid that is used to control
the discharge tube. The circuit arrangement produces a very sharp
positive grid voltage rise. The peak value is limited by grid satura-
tion. The positive grid voltage gradually drops from the peak until a
reversed action takes place and the grid voltage drop through negative
values to cause plate current cut-off. The negative charge on C99
prevents immediate reversal of the action. The action would reverse
in time and continue even without the "sync" pulse, but this pulse
triggers the -action and produces these oscillations, at the same fre-
quency as the vertical synchronizing pulses.
The discharge tube is the second section of the 6SN7, V18, used
as the blocking oscillator. Its grid is tied directly to that of the
blocking oscillator grid so that during the non -conduction period of
the oscillator it is also cut-off. Capacitor C101 then charges
through resistors R133, R85, R82 and R132. Capacitor C101 continues
to charge until the positive pulse produced by the blocking oscillator
causes the discharge tube to conduct which discharges capacitor C101
quickly through the tube plate resistance and resistors R82 and R132.
Resistor R82 and the variable resistor R132 are placed in series with
capacitor C101 in order to produce a saw -tooth voltage of the shape
necessary to produce a linear cnange of current in deflection
coils which contain both resistance and inductance.
132
The variable resistance 8133 serves to control the size of the
sweep voltage since it determines the time constant or rate at which
the capacitor charges. The variable resistance R132 is a linearity
control as it determines the amplitude of the square pulse component
which produces linear current through the inductance of the deflection
coil. Indirectly it also affects the size so a readjustment of the
size control is usually necessary when the linearity control is changed.
The output amplifier V19 is a power stage and serves to convert
the voltage wave into a current wave of the same shape. This is done
by means of the output transformer in the plate which is a step down
transformer of approximately 8/1. The second linearity control R134
affects the bias of the 6V6 output tube and, therefore, controls the
linear operating characteristic of the output stage. It tends to
correct for any non -linearity in the sweep voltage applied to the grid
or any non-linear deflection characteristic of the kinescope.
Resistances R111 and R112 shunted across the vertical deflection
coils serve to dampen any oscillation which might occur in these coils
as a result of the distributed capacity resonating with the coil induc-
tance. The Vertical Centering Control is the potentiometer R137 and
controls the amount of D.C. current through the vertical deflection
coils L72 and L74.
The horizontal deflection system generates the horizontal sweep
current. The shape of this current is similar to that in the vertical
deflection coils, but its frequency is much higher being 15,750 c.p.s.
It also incorporates an automatic frequency control system (AFC) for
synchronizing the generated sweep voltage to the frequency of the line
"Sync" pulses. It differs from the vertical "Sync" method in that
horizontal synchronization is not deterMined by each consecutive line
pulse but rather by the frequency of the line pulses, thereby, reducing
considerably the interference caused by noise pulses which tend to upset
synchronization.
The deflection system also contains discharge tube V23 for gener-
ating the desired shape of sweep voltage and an output amplifier V24 to
convert the voltage wave into a current wave in the deflection coils.
The output amplifier performs one other function and that is to gener-
ate a high pulse voltage which is rectified and used on the anode of
the kinescope.
A very high voltage results in the transformer T-7 winding from the
rapid change in plate current when the discharge tube is cut-off during
the retrace time. By using an auto -transformer arrangement in the
primary, a very high pulse voltage of approximately 10,000 volts is
developed, which is rectified by tube V25 and is applied to the kine-
scope anode. Capacitor C124, Resistor R110 and the capacity between
the inner and outer Aquadag coating on the kinescope glass, C126,
provide a filter circuit that eliminates the 15,750 c.p.s. ripple
voltage which would otherwise exist.
Cathode ray tubes using magnetic deflection present the problem of
burning the screen by the negative ions existing in the beam. These
ions are thousands of times heavier than the electrons and though
charged are little affected by the magnetic field. In an electrostatic
deflection system the ions are also acted on by the electron fields, so
this problem does not exist. To prevent the dark spot resulting from
the burning of the screen by the ions, the electron gun of the 10BP4
magnetic type cathode ray tube used in this receiver is located in the
tube at a slight angle to the axis of the tube. This causes the beam
to strike the side of the tube rather than the face. By using
the Ion Trap which is a small double coil arrangement mounted 133
on the neck of the tube, a magnetic field is set up that acts on the
electrons in the beam and bends them so that they strike the tube fao.
The alignment procedure is not included in this text since our main
objective in this instance was to give the general theory of operation.
Because stagger -tuned I.F. system is used, the alignment frequencies
and procedure is critical.
Faults in a television receiver can be localized by examining vari-
ous raster distortions, or limitations in the quality of the picture
obtained. The hints given below are suggestive and can be applied to
other television receivers. It is recommended that you study these
possible faults by referring to the diagram on page 126.
No Raster on Kinescope Signal at Kinescope Grid, But No Sy

Ion trap out of adjustment Too much video I.P. gain
V22, V23, V24, or V25 defective Open C90
No high voltage -- T7 defective Defective V15, V16, V17
(open or shorted primary,
open V25 fil. winding) Raster, but No Sound, Pict. or Sync
Defective V26 or 10BP4 Defective R.P. Amplifier
R.P. oscillator dead
Small Raster Defective V3, open C29
Low V24 or V29 Ant. coil pri. shorted to ground
Partial short in T7 Picture Stable but Poor Resolution
Shorted C122 or C123
Low B voltage Open L59, L62, L63, or L60
Open C105 or C106 Video I.F. out of alignment
Low line voltage R.F. tuner much out of alignment
Picture Smeared
Trapezoidal Raster Video I.F. bandwidth excessive
Improper Ion Trap adjustment Video stages overloaded
Poor focus coil adjustment Low bias voltage on VS & V9
Defective yoke Condensers C61 or C63 leaky
No Horizontal Deflection, Vert. . Low Video Sensitivity
Open 173 or L75 Weak tubes in R.F., video I.F.
Open secondary T7
Improper video I.F. & R.F. align.
No Vertical Deflection, Horiz. Shorted Ant. coil pri. to ground
Open L72, L74, C100 Sound "Bars" in Picture
Open or shorted T5 Fine tuning control improperly set
Defective V18 or V19 Low freq. trap L50 adjustment
Open or shorted T4 L50 open or shorted
Poor Horizontal Linearity C43 or C44 shorted or open
Improper adjustment of R136, L70 Low Screen Intensity
Defective V24 or V26
Weak V24 or V23 tube
No Sound, Picture O.K. Partially shorted T7
Open speaker voice coil Improper Ion Trap adjustment
Defective V14, V13, V12, V11, V1 Defective V26 or V25 tube
Improper R.P. osc. frequency Open C121 or C120 condenser
Defective T2 or T3 Low line voltage
Shorted C80 or CA1
Band switch on wrong channel
134
6666 131 64,9 61107 (I)
.170At
40
6607(21
HF
666-GT/0 (2)
ALL ANN NCLONO WINN 000 CAITLIN - reAVAIA,V0101101L
Ur 00.100 N NA A I INNIS INA
.011tee
/
HH
t
TOL vir
T1011.1.10,1
SIVATIR
NITG.r. IN00 INa-10T-)LI

ALL 00100001 NIL TOLVINIZ NTT. AWNS NANO. 04010.0.
MAIN A.G. ANIL& I AN INN GOIONSEIN 00% TOLVINN.L11100101 00. NUNN.
NCLO & IWO LeCTOR WIRT NON MI ALL 1.011101
001101 INTO
0 ALL VOLTAIINNIANNID NNE. INNS MONAD NO NON, 10.1
LOT ANN. ONITTIIIL NAL NI NV NII NM NNW IV 0.00.7 AVM&
MN 00.000 0100.001-VOLY INN, ON VOLTAM 10101 MN
00010I GM NO I,.TN0490171 INMAN NMI N IONT VOLTAM OP In e..00 PALM. ..e.
ILL.
CNN
No
NoN
To remove the chassis from the console, it is first necessary to disconnect the loop connector plug, the female connector
plug on the speaker, the phono input plug, the motor plug and the two F.M. lugs nn the F.M. antenna terminal post. Then remove
OLYMPIC RADIO the four knobs and the four screws holding the chassis to its mounting panel.
ALIGNMENT
Models 7-925, 7-934, 7-936, 7-939 Equipment Required: Modulated a -m, r -f signal generator; modulated f -m signal generator covering the range from 88 to
108 megacycles; vacuum tube voltmeter; output meter; insulated screw driver; radiation loop (1 turn of about 6" to 8" diameter of
It1 2 or :4.14 wire connected across output of signal generator and placed parallel to receiver loop about 8" or 10" away); one .1
mfd 400 volt condenser; two 150 ohm resistors.
With the receiver removed from the cabinet, connect output meter, or vacuum tube voltmeter and signal generator as
indicated in the alignment procedure chart and keeping the output of the generator as low as possible, proceed exactly in the
sequence as shown on the chart.
Before aligning, close the variable condenser fully counter clockwise (plates fully closed) and check that pointer coincides
with the reference line on the dial.
OLYMPIC TRU-BASE RADIO I
Models 7-925, 7-934, 7-936, 7-939
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE CHART
SET BAND CONNECT HIGH SIDE OF SET SIGNAL TURN RE AD ADJUST THE FOLLOWING -
STEP SWITCH SIGNAL GENERATOR GENERATOR POINTER OUTPUT (KEEP SIGNAL FROM SIGNAL GENERATOR
ON- TO- TO- TO- ON- AS LOW AS POSSIBLE).
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
L5 (RATIO DETECTOR)
ACROSS 6800 OM RESISTOR
PIN 1 OF 6BA6 (3) TUBE FOR MAXIMUM READING.
1 F. M. (SEE -er ON CIRCUIT DIAGRAM).
FOR .1 VOLT SIGNAL.
10.7 MC. VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
L6 (RATIO DETECTOR)
ACROSS '13" ON
UNMODULATED FOR ZERO READING.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
SIGNAL.
EXTREME RIGHT HAND Ct3 NC C12 12m. LF TRANSFORMER)
2 F. M. PIN 7 OF 6BE6 TUBE
POSITION. (CONDENSER VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
FOR MAXIMUM READING.
IN SERIES WITH A JMFD., ACROSS 6800 OM RESISTOR
PLATES FULLY OPEN).
3 F. M. 400 VOLT CONDENSER. (SEE NON CIRCUIT DIAGRAM). C11 AM) CIO (1 R. I.F. TRANSFORMER)
FOR MAXIMUM READING
R.F. SECTION OF VARIABLE C9 AND CE1 (2.14 IF. TRANSFORMER)
4 A.M.
CONDENSER OR PIN 7 OF
OUTPUT METER ACROSS FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
THE 68E6 TUBE IN SERIES 455 KG
5 WITH A .1 MFD.,400 VOLT SPEAKER VOICE COIL. C7 AND C6 (1ST. LF TRANSFORMER)
A.M.
CONDENSER. FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
6 F. M. REPEAT STEPS 2 AND 3.
7 A.M. ANTENNA SECTION OF 1700 KC. 1700 KG ON DIAL. C.! (OSCILLATOR TRIMMER)
VARIABLE CONDENSER FCR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
OR PIN 1 OF THE 68A6 RESONANCE, APPROXIMATELY OUTPUT METER ACROSS C2 (R.F. TRIMMER)
8 A.M. 1500 KC.
TUBE IN SERIES WITH 1500 KC. ON DIAL. SPEAKER VOICE COIL. FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
A .IMFD., 400 VOLT RESONANCE, APPROXIMATELY
AM. 600 KC. C4 (PADDER)
9 CONDENSER.
600 KC. ON DIAL. ROCK VARIABLE FOR MAXIMUM SIGNAL.
10 A.M. REPEAT STEPS 7,8 AND 9.
ii Am. USE RADIATED SIGNAL 600 KC.
RESONANCE, APPROXIMATELY LI (ANTENNA LOADING COIL)
(CONNECT BOTH SIDES 600 KG ON DIAL. OUTPUT METER ACROSS ROCK MUtIABLE FOR MAXIMUM SIGNAL.
OF SIGNAL GENERATOR RESONANCE, APPROXIMATELY SPEAKER VOICE COIL.
12 A.M. 1500 KC ,
Cl (ANTENNA TRIMMER)
TO RADIATION LOOP). 1500 KC. ON DIAL. FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT
13 A.M. REPEAT STEPS 11 AND 12.
t4 F.M. 108 MC. 108 MG ON DIAL. CS (OSCLLATOR TRIMMER)
CONNECT F.M. SIGNAL OUTPUT METER ACROSS FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
15 F.14. GENERATOR TO DIPOLE 88 MC 88 MC. ON DIAL SPEAKER VOICE COIL. L4 (OSCILLATOR COIL)
TERMINAL POSTS WITH (CHECK IMAGE AT 109.4 MC.). FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT
16 F.M. A 150 OHM RESISTOR REPEAT STEPS 14 AND 15.
IN SERIES WITH EACH
L3 (R.F. COIL)
SIDE. 30% MODULATED
17 F. M. OUTPUT METER ACROSS FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.T.
SIGNAL. 102 MC. 102 MC. ON DIAL.
SPEAKER VOICE COIL. L2 ( ANTENNA COL)
FOR MAXIMUM OUTPUT.
m
0 o,
g 7, 4
F- 5
,4 0
2 It it, r rIi '- :D=, ;F_D-7 0
It
o_1 z
>0o \
f
0 ® (D
(r ,
Z
i :-:
. --
58
.. ..i2
.0
ei-g-- _. n
W---
011
-
....
,,, w ® Ii
0 - (ID -- - - ?':,
0 02
lal
0
!0I-
a. 1-
- l'er:.'-1;Ki..-
1.0 -.
//3
01
1
,,,
021,9
W
u.
i
--7 0
C
'-
to
C So
_I
4 a
o05 cre
----
LI- 2
"O
2 's2
3 3
Lo
ce
10 00 VS 01
1.7
2 5
0, a -5
E
0.
o 4 o.
x ,A.,
w 4
,
r-
up
03 03
Si<
ill xx., co
i
cisi -±-
2x wU
row
o
1-
0- `-
I-I IT ! -ND 6 0 .5 1:1 ,...7::72. 1
0 x2
i"")--AC'^-, -S I-
g -......., p- V)
c, ti ---46 g 8
2 s
..,
R
_mom s c, .,,_ DI 1
s. :,-
+
_, m
_ IiU L4
p-
1-, -1.
z z
o 4, 5< <o0 _, 4
III
/
/ -))r'
<
i
Z
41....
-,.
8x
-.
ax
0.4-..
;, s5
.
r i p,i.
, ...
_,
\
1,
1
F_ a
-4
. c= ,7,
g .
I-- o
.,, ,-.. .
,-
136
0.
LL .1 en m
5...
li I 5 0
o6001
.4 ..,
L.
X _.1
en
X0 00 Ln
0-1 00 43 a. E. en E .../
aufwegete
SERVICE DATA - MODEL 872 - FM TUNER
Tubes:
Tube Function
6BA6 R. F. Amplifier
6BE6 Converter Oscillator
6BA6 1st. I. F. Amplifier
6BA6 2nd. I. F. Amplifier
6BA6 Driver Tube
6AL5 Ratio Detector
6C4 Audio
5Y3 Rectifier
GENERAL INFORMATION
11111M111011R9M1 1111111,11111k Model 872 is a tuner designed to receive fre-
quency -modulation signals in the Frequency -
Modulation Band which extends from 88 to 108
SPECIFICATIONS megacycles. It may be fastened inside the record
Overall Dimensions: compartment of any Packard -Bell console type
Weight radio phonograph. If it is not practical to incorpo-
Height 71/2" Chassis 7 lb. rate the tuner and regular broadcast receiver, the
Width 12" Cabinet 4 lb. tuner can be purchased complete with its own
933 11 lb.
Depth Total . . . . cabinet.
Electrical Rating: Outstanding Features of the 872 Tuner are:
Line Voltage . . 110-120 volts 50-60 cycle A.C.
. 1. Ratio Type Detector which is more sensitive
Power Consumption 52 watts . . to desired FM signals and less sensitive
Tuning Frequency Range: to undesirable noise than types of detectors
Frequency Modulation Band . . 88-108Mc previously used.
Intermediate Frequency: 2. Two I.F. Stages assuring adequate sensitiv-
10.7 Mc ity, and permitting the reception of weak
Electrical Power Output: (distant) FM stations with good volume.
This tuner is designed to operate into the 3. Miniature Type Tubes, advantageous to FM
amplifier of any regular broadcast receiver. because of their size.
The output voltage is comparable to that of 4. Folded Doublet Antenna giving good pickup
the crystal pickup used on the phonograph. when located on back of radio cabinet and
A signal from an average strong station will maximum pickup when located as high as
give an audio output of 1 to 3 volts. possible above surrounding terrain.
Loudspeaker:
The speaker will be that of the receiver into
which the tuner is operating.
1000
P
P000 PPM? NWT
- ---,
Li 4
6AL5
;V,
It* 6C4 11°4
m3 T
Pe
ItO 01.1
30 ao,
/
Pt?
-- -
11101
/
/
lit Cu '41s6 `r Gat
"- ; ;.00t PACK ARO - BELL

MODEL 872
111111T01 E..010 10fi7l0111
137
Pao&44,4ffeac MODEL 872 Oscillator Cathode Voltages:
This measurement should not be made as it is
SPECIAL SERVICE INFORMATION impossible to connect a meter to the cathode
Stage Gain Measurements: without disturbing the proper functioning of
Stage gains are measured by connecting the the oscillator circuit. Fortunately, oscillators
VTVM to AVC (point A) and proceding back- either operate or do not function at all at these
wards stage by stage and calculating gain of frequencies. Make usual overall sensitivity
desired stage. measurements to determine if oscillator is
Audio Gain . . . 10X at 400 cycles functioning.
Ratio Detector Sensitivity . . . 100,00 microvolts D.C. Resistance Measurements.
on driver grid results in approximately 3.0 All three I.F. Coils are identical
volts as measured at AVC point. Primary . 0.6 ohms Secondary 0.6 ohms
Second I.F. Gain . . . 20X at 10.7 Mc Ratio Detector Coil
First I.F. Gain . . . 20X at 10.7 Mc Primary . 1.2 ohms Secondary 0.2 ohms
Converter Gain This measurement can not
. . .
R. F. Coils
be made accurately. The gain is approxi- These coils are wound with heavy wire and
mately 5X at 100 Mc have only a few turns. Their resistances are
R.F. Gain . . . 5X at 100 Mc extremely low and will read zero on any ohm-
Antenna Gain . . 1.2X at 100 Mc .
meter test.
MODEL 872 ALIGNMENT CHART
CONNECT TESTMETER ADJUST -

TEST OSC. OSC.
CONNEC. MENT
TO SETTING TO
STEP
1 "C" Driver 10.7 Mc A Slug S-1 S-8 S-6 S-4
S-2
Grid Max. Output
2 "C" Driver 10.7 Mc B *Slug S-2
Grid Zero Center
Output I ST 1.F 2ND. 3RD. I.F
RATIO
3 "E" 2nd 10.7 Mc A **Slugs S-3 DETECTOR
I.F. Grid S-4
Max. Output
4 "G" 1st 10.7 Mc A Slugs S-5, S-6 S-9
I.F. Grid Max. Output
6 "I" Cony. 10.7 Mc A Slugs S-7, S-8
Grid Max. Output
6 Antenna 108. Mc A Trimmer C-8 BOTTOM VIEW
Max. Output
7 Antenna 105 Mc A Trimmer C-7
Max. Output
8 Antenna 96 Mc A Slug S-9
Max. Output
6C4
5Y3 GT/G
RATIO 6 68A6
S-3 S-5 68A6 S-7
6C4
S-1
3RD. I.F. 2ND.I.F 1ST.
DETECTOR
5Y3 GT/G -7
6AL5
6BA6 66A6 6BA6
o
0
5.4
©© VAC
175
0 a' ° 75
AC
5.4
VAC
170 1
1.0 0 82 LO -0 a 82 1.7 100 TOP VIEW
90 180
- TRIMMER LOCATIONS
180
5.4
VAC VAC 0° % NOTE: * As slug S-2 (Bottom of Ratio Detector Coil)
0
75
0 is turned back and forth, a direct -current voltage of posi-
0 0 (31. tive or negative polarity should be observed if detector is
6BA6 6BE6
functioning properly. Adjust for zero (center) output.
6AL5 ** A resistive shunt consisting of 1000 ohms in series
with 100 mmf should be used. Connect shunt from point
"C" (on schematic) to ground and adjust slug S-3. Move
VOLTAGE CHART shunt from point "C" to point "D" and adjust slug S-4.
138 Same procedure for 1st I.F. and converter.

For steps 6, 7, and 8, the tuner should be set to the
required frequency.
PILOT RADIO - MODEL T-601
PILOTUNER ALIGNMENT CHART

Tuning Range 88-108 Mc.
(Follow sequence as indicated)

RCVR. SIGNAL GEN. TRIMMER OR PROCEDURE
CIRCUIT STEP DIAL METER METER CONNECTIONS
SLUG ADJUSTMENT
ALIGNED POINTER FREQ. CONNECTIONS
Through .01 mfd. VTVM Across two 100K resistors S2, SI, Adjust for maximum out-
IF 88 mc 10.7 mc
cap. fo grid of -indicated by dotted 54, 53, put
6BE6 lines in schematic S6, S5
2
Repeat Step No I
From: Junction of two Adjust meter to zero

3 88 mc 10.7 mc Same as No. I VTVM INK resistors
SI (Check proper zero set)
Ratio Meter should register re-
Detector TO: Audio output of
ratio detector. Connec- verse polarity when slug
tions indicated by dot- is rotated through zero
ted lines in schematic output.
90 mc Through carbon Same as Step No. I P8 Same as Step No. I

Oscil- 4 90 mc VTVM
lator 300 ohm resistor
to An*. Terminal
Same as No. T7 Same as No. I

5 106 mc 106 mc Same as No. 4 VTVM I
6 Repeat Steps No. 4 & 5
Same as No. I PIO Same as No. I

7 90 mc 90 mc Same as No. 4 VTVM
Same as No. I T9 Same as No. I

RF S 106 mc 106 me Same as No. 4 VTVM
TO ALIGN RECEIVER USE FREQUENCIES AS

S. RATIO DETECTOR SEC 0.7 MC INDICATED ON LEFT. ADJUST ALL TRIMMERS
St RATIO DETECTOR PRI. 0 7 MC FOR MAX. D C OUTPUT ACROSS 336[1. RESISTOR
53 2301 F. SEC. 0 7 MC PB
07 MC IN 6AL5 CIRCUIT.
Ss 2301.F PRI.
S3 133 I F SEC. 07 MC TO ALIGN SECONDARY OF RATIO DETECTOR
Si 15T I F. PRI. 07 MC CONNECT METER AS INDICATED IN SCHEMATIC
06 MC S 52 UPPER1
TT OSC. TRIMMER
90 MC 0 Ei AND ADJUST S, FOR ZERO OUTPUT.
Ps OSC. PADOER 5, LOWER
Ts ANT. TRIMMER 06 MC UNDERSIDE 53 S5
90 MC 54
P.O R.F.. PADOER
1st I F a CAN ASSY 2nd I FAGAN ASSY RATIO DETECTOR & CAN ASSY.
273-117 273-119 279-34
Kn I000.n.
_§ _sli__
ALL CONDENSERS 400V.
UNLESS OTHERWISE 1 "a i
INDICATED 0
1 A 1 a
,
,
//,
L
o
-; ...1
0
001:
18 0
0 L__ -
6BA6 68E6 5 6BA6 5 6BA6 5
2 2
2
7 6
6
/.=, / 23 7
4
01 3 3
00
PIO
/
100W /28044
Ic
97'
.01,1 ,x I
17 31(
oo P8 0 I o. Pf
005,,1 24-77
- _./
1_
JIA
1 \
ym_r-FARZmiETECNT-7
ONLY *
ON POWER I
SWITCH Ott 0 1500ppt
110-318
10 uyI
'tit 55-13 2W 470P.
30.421
0
40.1 3 6
I ill 24-77T T 24 77 2 71.050
Ali 75-19 6-8V PHONO - FM

100-125 V
601.A.C.
LINE CORD
103-18 .01m
400V.
1.47 MAZDA
68-6
ANT LINE INPUT OUTPUT
139
C. For distant FM stations: In a few cases, an outside FM dipole an -
BRIEF tenna may be found to be necessary when the FM PILOTUNER is oper-
at a great distance from the broadcasting station, or under unusual
INSTRUCTION ated
operating conditions. The outside dipole antenna (equipped with a 300 ohm
LABEL I
flat lead-in) should be connected to terminals No. and No. 3, after the wire
TERMINAL I
,ink between terminals No. and No. 2 has been disconnected.
CONNECTIONS ,===
The FM PILOTUNER is acomplete, superheterodyne frequency
modulation unit, consisting of 5 miniature tubes and a selenium rectifier. It -OUTSIDE DIPOLE
contains its own power supply, designed for AC operation only.
However,
it does not contain a loudspeaker and audio system. Therefore, the FM
PILOTUNER must be connected and operated through your own radio
receiver, or separate phonograph, record player or amplifier system. All in-
stallation connections from and to the FM PILOTUNER are made to the
terminals on the back of the cabinet, numbered from CONNECTIONS FROM PILOTUNER TO RADIO RECEIVER
I
to 7.
A brief resume of the installation instructions is printed on the label A 5 ft. shielded cable is furnished with
attached to the back of the cabinet. the FM PILOTUNER to facilitate connecting
ANTENNA CONNECTIONS the tuner to your radio receiver, or separate
phonograph, record player or amplifying
The choice of antenna to be used for the best FM reception depends on system. One end of this cable is provided
many factors: your location, the type of building, power and distance of the with spade lugs for easy connection to the
FM station. The three main types of antennas are explained below. Test terminals at the back of the PILOTUNER.
your
FM PILOTUNER and choose the one most practical for your use. Attach the center wire of one end of the connector cable to terminal
A. For local high-powered FM stations: No. 7; attach the outside shielded wire of the same end of the connector
The PILOTUNER, when cable to terminal No. 6.
shipped from the factory, is equipped with a permanent built-in antenna that
will be satisfactory for good reception of most local FM stations. This built-in OUTSIDE SHIELDED
antenna is connected internally through a wire link between terminals No. I
WIRE OF CENTER WIRE OF
and No. 2. For best results when using the built-in
antenna, keep the electric CONNECTOR CONNECTOR GABLE
line cord extended to its full length and separated from the connector cable
of the PILOTUNER. CABLE
WIRE LINK Now, the FM PILOTUNER is ready for attachment to your radio
receiver. The method of connecting the PILOTUNER will depend on whe-
ther the radio receiver is a combination set with phonograph, a radio with
B. For local weak -powered FM stations: phonograph outlet only, or a radio without phonograph or phonograph outlet.
Improved reception of weak
FM stations may be obtained, in some localities, by disconnecting the wire
I
link between terminals No. and No. 2, and attaching a 4 ft. length of wire Alignment of the PILOTUNER should be done by a competent radio
to terminal No. I. Keep this wire stretched out at full length in order to service technician, provided the proper output meter and signal generator
secure the maximum signal pick-up. are available. Insulated alignment +ools are
necessary. The output meter
should be a D.C. vacuum tube voltmeter with a range of at least 20 volts.
The signal generator should cover the frequencies of 10.7, 90 and 106 mc.
4 FT. Allow the PILOTUNER to warm up for at least 30 minutes before making any
(f4 adjustments. The location of the adjustment screws is indicated clearly on
WIRE\ the schematic diagram. Follow the sequence in the alignment chart.
610V2 (RC -610) FM Ratio Detector Alignment
RCAVICTOR RANGE SWITCH IN FM POSITION-VOL. CONT. MAXIMUM
Steps
Connect high
side of sig.
gen. to--
Signal gen-
orator output
Adjustments and
indications
VICTROLA 610V1, 610V2 1

Connect a 680 ohm resistor between pins 5 and 7 of
the ratio detector tube 6AL5. Connect the d -c probe of
a VoltOhmyst to the negative lead of the 5 mid. capac-
Chassis No. RC -610C RC -610 itor, C20, t..e common lead of the VoltOhmyst to chassis.
AM -FM Radio -Phonograph Combination Pin 1 of driver 10.7 mc. modu- Driver trans. T5,
tube 6AU6 in lated 30% 400 for max. d -c
2 series with cycles AM across C20
.01 mid. (Approx. .25 (Approx. 14.5
Circuit Description volt) volts)
Models 610V1 and 610V2 have individual built-in antennas for Disconnect the VoltOhmyst and the 680 ohm resistor
FM and AM coupled to individual 1st Det.-Osc. tubes (6BE6 VI from tne 6AL5. Connect two 68,000 ohm resistors (within
and V2). The outputs of these two tubes are connected to sepa- 1% of eacn other) in series across the 22,000 ohm re-
rate IF transformers (T1 and T2) whose secondaries are in series sistor R17. Connect the common lead of the VoltOhmyst
and connected to the IF amplifier tube (6BA6 V3). The output 3 to the center point of the 68,000 ohm resistors and the
of V3 is connected to separate IF transformers (T3 and T4) whose d -c probe to terminal "A" of the ratio detector trans.
primaries are in series. The secondary of T3 (FM IF) is connected T6. Use 30 volt scale of VoltOhmyst first, reducing to
to the driver tube (6AU6 V4). The secondary of T4 (AM IF) is lower scale as required.
connected to the AM second detector (6SQ7 V6). The output of
the driver tube (V4) is coupled thru the driver transformer (T5) t T6 bottom core
and ratio detector transformer (T6) to the FM ratio detector tube for zero d -c
(6AL5 V5). (in 610V1 the functions of both T5 and T6 are combined
Same as Step 2 balance.
in one unit (T5).) 4 Same as Step 2 t T6 top core for
The audio outputs of the AM second detector and the FM ratio min. audio
output.
detector are connected thru a section of the range switch to
the volume control input. Reconnect VoltOhmyst as in Step 1, omitting 680 ohm
5
The B+ supply (+245 V) to the plates and screen grids of VI resistor.
and V2 is controlled thru a section of the range switch.
6 Repeat Step 2.
Simple AVC is used on AM and is applied to both the IF
amplifier (V3) and the AM let detector (V2). Delayed AVC is 7 Remove ALL connections.
used on FM and is applied only to the IF amplifier (V3). The
AVC distribution is controlled thru a section of the range switch. t Near the correct core position the zero point is approached
rapidly and continued adjustment causes the indicated polarity to
reverse. A slow approach to the zero point is an indication of
Alignment Procedure severe detuning, and the bottom core should be turned in the
opposite direction.
The zero d -c balance and the minimum a -f output should oc-
Alignment Indicators: cur at the same point. If such is not the case, the two cores
should be adjusted until both occur with no further adjustment of
An RCA VoltOhmyst or equivalent meter is necessary for meas- either core. it may be advantageous to adjust both cores simul-
uring developed d -c voltage during FM alignment. Connections taneously, watching the VoltOhmyst, and an output meter, hooked
are specified in the alignment tabulation below. An output meter across the voice coil for the point at which both zero d -c and
is also necessary to indicate minimum audio output during FM minimum a -f output occur.
Ratio Detector alignment. Connect the output meter across the
speaker voice coil.
The RCA VoltOhmyst can also be used as an AM alignment
indicator, either to measure audio output or to measure a -v -c FM IF-RF Alignment
voltage. (FM Ratio Detector must be aligned first.)
When audio output is being measured the volume control should RANGE SWITCH IN FM POSITION
be turned to maximum.
Connect -Sig. gen. Turn radio Adjustment for
Steps sig. gen. output dial to-peak output
Signal Generator:
For all alignment operations, except FM IF-RF, connect the Connect the d -c probe of a VoltOhmyst to the negative
low side of the signal generator to the receiver chassis. The lead of the 5 mfd. capacitor C20 and the common lead
output should be adjusted to provide accurate resonance indica- 1
to chassis. Turn gang condenser to max. capacity (fully
tion at all times. It output measurement is used for AM align- meshed).
ment the output of the signal generator should be kept as low
as possible to avoid a -v -c action. 10.7 mc Using alter-
High30%
Calibration Scale.-The dial scale printed in this service note
may be temporarily attached to the chassis for quick reference
during alignment.
2
term. incore
side to
series with
modu-
one FM ant. lotion, 400
cycles AM .
Adjust to
.01 mfd. Low provide
3 volts
2 to
v lt indi-
Max. ca-
pacity
nate loading:
T3 bottom
(sec.)
T3 top core
(pri.)
Using Printed Dial Scale. - side to the cation on (fully Ti bottom
other FM meshed) core (sec.)
ant. term. VoltOhmyst T1 top core
1. Cut out the printed dial scale, or, better still, make a tracing during (pri.)
of the scale. alignment.
2. With gang at full mesh the pointer should be set to the first High side to
reference mark from the left hand end of the dial backing one FM ant.
plate. term. in
series with
3. Place the printed dial scale or the tracing under the pointer a 120 ohm
so that the extreme left scale graduations coincide with the resistor. C54 osc.
pointer. Use scotch tape to hold the dial scale in place. 3 Low side to 106 inc 106 mc C52 ant.
the other
FM ant.
610V1 (RC -610C) FM Ratio Detector Alignment term in
RANGE SWITCH IN FM POSITION-VOL. CONT. MAXIMUM series with
a 120 ohm
Adjustments and resistor.
Steps Connect high side Signal generator
of siq. goo. tom output Indications Same as 90 mc L3 osc.
4 Step 3. 90 mc L2 ant.
Connect the d -c probe of a VoltOhmyst to the negative
1 lead of the 5 mid. capacitor, C20, the common lead of Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until further adjustment does not
the VoltOhmyst to chassis. 5 improve calibration.
Top core T5 for Alternate loading involves the use of a 680 ohm resistor to
10.7 mc. modu- max. d -c across cad the plate winding while the grid winding of the SAME
Pin I of driver lated 30% 400 C20 (Approx. 4 TRANSFORMER is being peaked. Then the grid winding is loaded
2 tube 6AU6 in. cycles AM volts) with the resistor while the plate winding is peaked. Only one
series with (Approx. .1 Bottom core T5 for winding is loaded at any one time. Remove the 680 ohm resistor
.01 mid. volt) minimum audio after T3 and T1 have been aligned.
output
Repeat Step 2 until further adjustment does not improve
3 alignment.
141
AM Alignment Critical Lead Dress
(Correct alignment of the 455 be. IF requires that this 10.7 me. IF 1. Dress capacitor Cl near chassis base.
be aligned previously.) 2. Dress lead from pin 5, V-1. to terminal
T1, as near bottom of FM shelf as possible. of transformer
C,
RANGE SWITCH IN BC POSITION
3. The lead from capacitor C23 to the high side of the volume
Connect control must be dressed next to chassis along front apron.
high side Sig. gen. Turn radio Adjust for 4. Dress resistor R20 near chassis base.
Steps of sig. gen. output dial to- peak output 5. Dress all A.C. leads away from volume control.
to- 6. Solder FM antenna coil primary leads to
with as short a lead length as is practical. terminal board
'T4 top core 7. Make all FM 'leads as short as possible.
1 EM conver- (sec.)
T4 bottom 8. The lead from pin 2, V-3, to chassis ground must be dressed
ter grid Quiet point as close to base and as near to the back apron as possible.
6BE6 V-2 core (serf.)
in series 455 kc at low This lead provides degeneration for the IF stage and neither
with .01 freq. end. 'T2 bottom its length nor the point at which it is grounded to the chassis
2 mId. core (sec.) should be changed.
T2 top core 9. Dress all leads away from the 3300 ohm resistors R28 and
(pri.) R29.
"A" term!-
3 nal of ter- 1400 kc
C57 osc. Push Button Adjustment
minal 1400 kc C58 ant.
board at (loop)
rear of 660 -TO 740 TO 1430 610 TO 1250 640 TO
1600 KC
chassis in KC KC 1030 KC
4 series with
200 mint.
(link open)
600 kc 600 kc L5 osc.
(Rock gang)
TRIMMER
SCREWS
6
05 0 3
0 0
2
CORE
5 Repeat Step 3. RODS 0 0 0 0 0
After chassis and loop have been installed in cabinet, The push buttons connect to separate magnetite -core oscillator
8 adjust C58 for max. output on a weak station near coils and separate loop circuit trimmers which must be adjusted
1400 kc. for the desired stations. Use an insulated screwdriver or align-
ment tool such as RCA Stock No. 31031. Allow about five minutes
*Align T4 and T2 by means of alternate loading as explained warm-up period before making adjustments.
under FM IF-RF alignment. Use a 47,000 ohm resistor instead The procedure is as follows:
of a 680 ohm resistor. I. Make a list of the desired stations, arranged in order from
Oscillator frequency is above signal frequency on both AM low to high frequencies.
and FM. 2. Turn the range switch to the broadcast position and manually
NORMAL
tune in the first station on the list.
Ce RC 3. Turn range switch to push-button position and press in the
SOFT BAIR Ce
left-hand button.
4. Adjust core rod No. 1 to receive the first station.
To secure
OFF LOUR the best adjustment, rotate the loop for least pickup, and ad-
POWER -VOLUME TOME
just core rod No. I for peak output.
IltLECTOR TUNICS
11-151
5. Adjust trimmer screw No. for peak output on the first sta-
1
tion.
Proms Passel Controls 6. Proceed in the same manner to adjust for the remaining sta-
tions.
DRIVER RATIO DETECTOR 7. Repeat adjustments for best results.
06.06 64L5 On the 880 to 1,600 kc push-button, the higher frequency stations
V-4 V-5 may be received with core rod No. 6 either in or out (oscillator
frequency either 455 kc below or 455 kc above the station fre-
quency). The -adjustment with this core in its out position (oscil-
lator frequency 455 kc above the station frequency) is the correct
one.
NOTE: Clockwise adjustment of cores and trimmers tunes the clr-
snits lo lower frequently*.
-I TENSION
PULLEY SPRING
<_0121VE 0.055 C -
PULLEY
RATIO DETECTOR CIRCUIT 610V1 (RC -610C) cs3
Schematic Diagram otherwise same as 1110V2 (RC -810), except 's I
C59 of 1st I.F. Trans (FM) is omitted. 21 TURNS
TS IN NODES SIOVI WC/EL 610V2 CS EN. OSC.

OTC.6100 ONLY (2C610) MONO JACK 106NC.
7:G. A ill FM.
.Pte, .... F.. , DIAL INDICATOR----\.-
SW 1 F TRAK it: if TRANI L2
'DRIVER
TRANS. 10.7 MC. 10.7NC. FM NIT AND DRIVE MECHANISM
TB
(4 TS e FM.
TOP - PRI
DOT - SEC
T1 eF.M.
TOP-PRI
DOT -SEC -
90 INC.
C S2
FM ANT.
106 MC.
BLK. 'OUTPUT
PLATES
BLK-RED TR
2.11150.
76 RATIO
OAT TRANS. 455 KC,
TA SAM.
IT! IF TRANS
5510C Ut
TZ CAM. C53 C5I
TOP 10.71/C TOP-PRI. FM.
0%. C56 RECT.
ROT 10.7NC. SOT -PSI.
ri C55
kW.
CAC
ANT
ANT.
BRN-BLK
FILAMENT
CABLE
SOCKET
(FRONT VIEW) BLK. RED OUTPUT
SCREENS
LI L_I LJ OUTPUT TRANS.
57 A.I1 OSC. T7
I400 KC.
OSC
LAO AC
SPEAKER
PLUG
NET Nur (PRONG VIEW)
)142 Top View Chassis

SPEAKER CONNECTIONS
70x -I
SSAC. 400,
1
I
MEASUPFD WITH 3 vOLT 1101D WAS

IMI
I
v -s V-6
R1 V-3 IWDET- AV.C. PHASE IMV
DRIVE tO. QAT., DETECTOR
*2' DET OSO
11 cst 6BE6 GBA6 6AIJ6 GALS 6501
.v.ts ,>ov
ICENTSOHISI
,....61.6-017 TO
COQ
1,5
10IrITST 0
ME
et zng CD
NCO ROA M
0
PS
POs
E
C,<
CIS
L J
(0
IA
CATHODE CURRENTS
ail TzoPt N041
(,)66606 .
(1)600 9.500T I
(3)66A6 10.061A
(4 6.6u6 13.0MA 1,1
04 fisLS 0.
(6) 6SGIT 5640. CO
(7)650,
(67664-61 03.0MA.
111)1106-6T 15.0MA
075Y3-GT 15.000.
.r.ts ONLY
T A ONLY
St -REAR. 57
3 - 042
Lao, Ou
5 R U0
V -i0 LA -RED
RECTISHEIR 'am
JA '" 145Y
y TEL ----)2T-AiLl11
..Homes
LINK CLOSED FOR E 0,TAGSs SUR.) HOT. 1-3
LCOP PERATION RED .JALTST TOLTOmmysT
BL cD
.49011. VOLTAGES oLD HOLD WITH.
OH.. LPN TOTAL 27016 WITH Tv AC. sovALT
CD
TAL.
YE
61 FRONT
gERH4_
RAIME SWITCH VIEWED e6064 FRONT AND SHOWN -re
IN.1.0.0.POSITiON (MAO. E/O.OLAWISL POSITION)
POWER SURRLT
RS
0, RESISTANCE vALuE5 LEV. PILOT LAMP
I, M AH ENNA 7HAN ONE OHM ARE NOT SHOWN.
L LOOP
L
Model 610V1 ClIC-610C)

The schematic dials= 11C4110C chassis is similar to that
shows above. the motor dittemasee boWs 0. 1.00 6.1.077 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM-MODEL 610V2, 12C-610
cult the satessiatic diagram el which Is shows esdatzl. le od- (Simplified schematic diagrams, of bawd
1
dities a al 1. (10 LP. FM) is omitted. 613 I.
l MIL S
33.000 ohms. 6111 is 1.5 simmlims Umd CX 1. .006 old. mash Pow* ow follosuisig Dam)
CD
10
V2 V2 T2 'C' v2 12"2" RIO R2 T4 -2-
PINT, R3 V2 V2 T2 'C' v2 T2"F"
Pir22 & R34 PIN% IL Pi
RIO
4
PIN7 2 & 034 PING &
RS
I*VC TO V
AVC TO V3
C6 Az.
CS
r- ar- 4.245V CACD
I R7 I .4 +248V
R7
- CR3
;117G &
1133
3 -1-
'CB AM 5004413 INPUT - RIO
FM SOUND 1NPuT J -4'1227 -C7 AM SOUND INPUT Rle
r FM SOUND INPUT
SI REAR r--
't M4050
;(1 JACK S
2 r'+_-- ""iwr
_ ID
51 VOL
53 53 8
REAR CIO REAR 0%
C34 C29
ASSEM.1 BLUE - P. B. GREEN T 52 REAR

4.- BLUE
ASSEM{40-
-
F
3
CS.,
7 t 16 C54. CST
TO LOOP L5' 7
53 FRONT SI FRONT I TO LOOP
LO 53 rm..,
AM PVC SUPPLY L4
PHONO
Simplified schematic diagram of band switch PUSH BUTTON
Broken tines -
(- -)
indicate circuits not in use, some of which may be grounded Simplified schematic diagram of band switch
Broken lines (--
(indicated by dashed ground symbols) through range switch contacts. ) indicate circuits not in use. some of which may I a* grounded
v2 V2
(indicated by dashed ground symbols) through range switch contacts.
T2 -C' v2 72"F" RIO
NOT Ot512 8. R34 2m..5 V2 V2 T1TC' v2 T2"F" RIO 2 74.1,
RS NN.7 PiN2 & R34 PIN% &
04 I- 7j._
AVC TO V3
I AVC TO VS
C6 I
CS
P. 4245 V
1245V
R7 I
-"UNA.- -9 a)
033 r- 41:1 R33 -21' 0
AM SOUND INPUT I a.
/77 N -"CIS AM SOUND INPLLT.1 10 RIO
fM SOUND INPUT !r TCT r- FP. 30050 INPUT R2T
4
- L 31 51 REAR
0 110140
3 r JACK CD
U
CD
0 3
9
33
REAR
C29 REAR 4, CIO croz, in"
52 REAR I C29
P B. {4. -GREEN - - -4 -
ASSEM. P B. t*-GREZN-
t4t,o.,tPuz _ J .551M. 4 -SLUE - O
2
I
I
9 CD
52
FRONT it SL 0
AVC TO VS t CD
TO LOOP AVC TO V3
AM AVC SUPPLY L
G.
AM PVC SUPPLY
44
DIAL TUNING (BC) CD
Simplified schematic diagram of band switch PM

Broken lines (- - ta
-) indicate circuits not in use, some of which may be grounded Simplified schematic diagram of band switch
-
(indicated by dashed ground symbol) through range switch contacts. Broken lines (- -) indicate circuits not in use, some of which may be grounded
(indicated by dashed ground symbols) through range switch contacts.
vs VD V7
vi vz
CABINET 6BA6 6BA6 6BA6 6AU6 GAUL 6AL5 ___.
LI 250. IF E DRIVER Ts. 63.7 HE. T7- .0,-. mc , 15710 OCT.
WIRE SANER 15T LF TS -10.7 N.C. Ts -10.7 MC .-.).7,
IIII:FR Loop -, P45540.4m05.. r-
SAC 7 ,
-1(--
Ilan70. I.S. 235 V 25ov 250V. i ! 230v. i ! 200V. i
5 s
1.41.,,,,A._,
15.411
c43t : C IC47 csr. : 4157 1
F
e 17 ill774'1J 225
2 1 is m
INTERNAL CI 'e !
OR EXT
it 70V C75: ...
2-20 ICJ 6 L _ C2 1
DIPOLE c 5, 14:I" I
1
C27 c 65 > L--! ._____I

1.5V .00S TUNS ,......1
.003 _ F -4-
T2.455 KC.
L _ _ 1601
CABLE 527 2
_CH 1 100 CG8 C419-4.
RA 74 -455)4. 74. C59 C76 C 7?
.002 CG.7 RSI .005 .005 .005 .05
53 4700 27K c 41
r 1 i SMFT IS N.
C2 31
E --`d
- r C46...r .1Z C45 '1r 1-7:11
1
3- RIO C42 it__.', 1133 , T Rai c

2 5 C2G $51 2R47
390 .005 115N. p 225 '1Z00440 VA SWIF T..2 (MG.
I .003 C32 C33
7 Le. CIO .07 .05 CIS
1.536 220 -7/1-1 C49 .01 ne5
RAOP 174 100
,15.28,30
131 i-/1-- 71(-71
LOAD CO 225 C77 C2
SS "RFC 512 RSO po 5 .0083
52 2200 -41-9 L o
REAR 6 C43 _+Liso A.V.C. FM
5148 SS _100
ReR .005 j R37
RE 2.215?
3.9 044 lit0 r 1000 K 1000
350 0.456 .005
A
ALL RESISTANCES IN 011143,
C -Ct50
525 529 ALL CAPACITORS LESS THAN 1
532 ,,.. IN MF. AND ABOVE 1 IN 6045.
844 2200 270K 1564P.1
00 1 2200 UNLESS OTHERWISE 50720.
A '0 igsk O VOLTAGES SHOULD mall)
LIS LID
t4 0 WITHIN 420% WITH Ill V. AC.
5- R40 SUPPLY.
/ A 1502 523 GAIN 330 270K.
_ CIS 2.2 MEG 400 ti
CB
3-55 THROUGH ' 3 C671
013
C.NECTION
I 150 V. 141
35 6AT6
55 Rom OCT-ANC-
2.2 m G
FRONT .,
AUDIO
S. SD
REAR REAR Ce - CB
VS .01
232 SWITCHES VIEWED FROM 3V FIXED
3 FRONT AND SHOWN IN FM. 6BE6 10
ISO< ViPs LIDS
(MAX CLOCKWISE) POSITION. 05C
DF:4: Q19
Re 4-7- A.V.C.
C17 10 K BU1 .0
.005
225 18
C35 o44 C .0IA 027
C 341 225 75 Ra2 1 041145
%MIA .07 1 MED.
L9 Cis 180 -VW-) N.F. 7044E
6. 411C-1C2O
1,4 150 VOL.CONTR.
S4 CONTROL
TAPPED AT
ti FRONT 2505 AND
5445 ceE 500' CIA
2 27K .015
FM
00
5i%-
0,er 4-1
V2 VI V3 V5 V7 V5 VS MD c 5s c57 trT C
17.5-342 3.35 PrkoNo TEL A.F .0072
C4I Pt 25
3 %PVT INPUT OUTPUT 2 MIS.
*IS .05
413 /IA 314 3A1. 314 PLLIO
- 25V. 2.2 MM. Yr 1(
TO1111
06.1, TONA610 R38 CONTROL
66 L7 C40
73 R16 R17 47OK 270
57 C39 1005 180N
R20 R28 535
C21 C22 CIS 4. 270 V. .05 2216 1805 4005 270K
100 OI
1.01 CDI - 1005
.01
l 0, 117 v AC
I
Complete schematic for Radio Chassis -Range Switch shown in FM position. For separate schematic
of range switch positions see figures 11, 12 and 14. See fig. 2 for power amplifier.
Gain data found on A band schematic Fig. 11.
NOTE: -On some instruments C40 is .01 mfd.
TUBES CONTROLLED By AVC.
On later instruments starting with the Serial 1..7 AND
TOP CORE 40.2. AIM DEL A BAND V1, V2, V4
No. 25,000 an additional 10 ohm carbon V 1307704,, CORE An) 1,1z5
TRANS. 8 BAND - VI, V4
resistor is added between C16 (100 mmf.) and FM.- VI, V4
terminal No. 1 of S4 front. The purpose of this PLATE Cc OSC. OPEN FOR
PHONO. AND TELEVISION OPERATION. VOLTAGES SHOWN MeASURID
resistor is to eliminate dead spots between 1400 WIll VOLD:M.1T ET AND Nw,TCRES
to 1600 kc on "A' band. The resistor should be DIODE (50 5) FUNCTIONS TO IN FM. POSITION.
PRevENT Av C. BUS FROM ( FOR OTHER 55.,17c5 Posncors
added to any early model set developing that BECOMING 5087701. 515 VOLTAGE COAST)
trouble.
APRROX GAIN IX 12x
DATA USING ' RADIO CHASSIS UNIT RK121 VOLTAGE CHART rn
CHANALYST 6F6G a)
VZ OUTPUT Tube Type Pin 0 Pbono. B.C. S.W. F.M.
0) 6J5 3 375V. 1E1 Plate S 260 225 220 235
Ja A.F. CS VI 6BA6
-25 V. 4 .0035 MF.
AUDIO SCG 6 95 110 90 85
C 7 3
INPUT C
.05 MF. Plate 5 260 255 240 230
. T2
.02 MF. R6 VWue.14 L3 V2 6BA6 SCG 6 90 100 70 70
220K 600.n.
TOTALd Cathode 7 6 6.5 1.8 L3
N I -I
R2 2
R5
27K H Plate 5 0 160 155 140
56 K o
H R7 2 GRK. 4 Grids
R4 C4 220K 0 RED _ 2-3-4 6,7 0 155 160 140
TR. '
22 K .02 MF. -5.2 -10.5 -6.6
5
Grid 1 1 (1600 (9.5 (108
R3 -25v. 4 CG KC) MC)
JUMPER ON .0035 MF. V3 6BE6 MC)
2700 V4
N.
SPEAKER PLUGSPIiit
FIELD 3 375 V. -2.7 -15.5 -6
T YEL. Grid 1 1
+270V - I Fl (16.2
((55 M550 C) ((1100
I
YE L 2VI
s, L1 PIA
3 1060.8 2760 6FGG -9
BLK RED 5U4G OUTPUT Grid 1 I 188
4 RECT. MC)
15011.
a RIB Plate S 245 250 230 220
TOTAL CIA CI 5= 2520 C2. Note: -
15 16 on late models V4 -6BA6 SCG 6 110 120 105 95
Ca
CV RED -R. 14F MF., MF
T3° CIB is 50 mfd. Cathode 7 1.4 1.2 1.4 1.5
.0 ICAI
F_ RED 40 Plate 5 255 245 240 230
MF. 1 180 VS 6AU6
ELK. SCG 6 145 140 140
BRN. 140
fc. 6.3 V. Plate 5 0 0 0 200
V6 6AU6
15RH. SCG 6 0 0 0 110
117V. AC.
SUPPLY V7 6AL5
JI V8 6AT6 Plate 7 ISO 150 ISO 150
SOCKET 00 + tooV.
TERM. VIEW
+ 270V. AMPLIFIER UNIT RS123 VOLTAGE CHART
0 Plate 3 230 0
Fig. 2 V2 6J5
Cathode 8 36 0.1
PILOT LAMP Plate 3 375
1-3
V3 6F6G SCG 4 270
RECT. CD
OUTPUT Fr
T2 Grid 5 - 25
OUTPUT PLUG CD
(PRONG VIEW) V4 6F6G Same as V3
TRANS.
"B" Voltage Measured from Rectifier Fil (SU4G) to God. 380V.
4
LINK
TI ELK MN 5+ Voltages were measured with Voltohmyst with the Radio Chassis
POWER JI BLK RED 72 TAP RK121 connected. 0
TRANS SOCKET AUDK)
INPUT BLK GNO All voltages are measured in respect to ground.
Cathode Currents with Band Switch in FM Position
SOCKET
(FACE VIEW) I RF. Amp. 14 ma. V7 Ratio Det.
BLK-RED 7R, 72 CD
V2 Mixer 4.7 ma. V8 Det.-Avc.-AF
AF OUTPUT SRN RIA V3 Osc. CD
15.9 ma. Power amp. RS123
POWER CORD TV 32 SPEAKER CONNECTIONS V4 First IF. 12.4 ma. VI Rectifier Total 140 ma. 4
V5 2nd IF.-Ph000. Amp. 5.6 ma. V2 Phase Inverter 2.15 ma.
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 V6 Driver FM 13.7 ma. V3, V4 Power output 27 ma.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE CRITICAL LEAD DRESS
(Make lead dress before alignment)
Before aligning set, completely mesh the gang and set the
dial pointer on the mechanical maximum calibration point at 1. Lead from pin 5, tube V2, to terminal "C" on transformer
the extreme left hand end of the dial. T1 should be dressed close to chassis.
When making a complete alignment follow in proper se- 2. Leads to terminals "C" and "D" on transformer T2 should
quence the tabulated form below. be dressed close together.
3. The following capacitors must be dressed close to the
If only a portion of the circuit is to be aligned select the chassis with leads kept as short as possible: C32, C33, C66,
portion required, followed by the remaining steps in the chart. C69, C79, and C80.
Any adjustments made on the FM 10.7 mc. IF's make it 4. All FM coil connections must be soldered in exact place
necessary to realign the AM 455 kc. IF's. as the original. (One -sixteenth inch difference in length
For "A" and "C" band alignment use output meter across may be excessive).
voice coil keeping Test Oscillator output as low as possible to 5. Lead from pin 7, tube V8, must be dressed away from lead
prevent AVC action. to terminal "0" of transformer T7.
Equipment Required for Alignment Two 68,000 ohm Resistors within 6. ALL wiring in the receiver is critical as to length and
Electronic Voltmeter (VoltOhmyst)
1% of each other (Carbon) placement. It is therefore important when servicing, that
200 mmf. Capacitor extreme care should be taken so as not to disturb more of
Output meter 20-30 mirif. Capacitor
Test Ow. AM the wiring than absolutely necessary.
680 ohm Resistor .01 mfd. Capacitor
150 ohm Resistor Carbon Note: Keep tuning capacitor rotor grounding brushes clean
120 ohm Resistor and making good contact,
sir® c)e@
CrSC
izzer.
0 V2
V3 V4
1.6.,
TS -FM
TS
1"61
161
TI F
amc)?
calrm OFF
10G MC
CI3 -
SG MC
CF. CLFAAtar @0 8 10.7 MC
KC
10.711C.
TI- FM T5 FM
n n T4 -AM
05C ANT .A.RF -',.. OSC

LG:VAMT. I-13 C94 LIB CSG T, ....,
GOO KC.- GOON.C, 1.400NC GOOKC 1400KC. - -- -
k k 4.1 4161 1
ro_c.,,,.._LI1 CtS 1..17 == C37

Fig. 5 9.5144c, I5.2.mC. 9.5mc, 15.214C. 95MC. 15.214C
,....,,.
0 'n'-' C..12F 'C OSC.
NEXT TO Fig. 6
FM RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT CHASSIS
SET RANGE SWITCH TO FM POSITION ANT.-RF.-IF. ALIGNMENT

Connect. High Connect the Connect Radio
Steps Side of Test Tune the Turn Vol. Adjust High Side of Ground Tune the Dial
Osc. To- Osc. To- Cont. To - Steps Adjust
the Test Osc. Side of the Osc. To- Tuned
Connect a 680 ohm Resistor between lugs D and E of the
to- Test Osc. to --
ratio detector transformer T7. Connect DC probe of a volt -
I' ohmyst to the negative lead of the 5 mfd. Electrolytic
capacitor C81. The common lead of the meter to chassis.
`FM" IF Alignment
Driver grid 10.7 MC
pin 1, of 6AU6 30% Mod. Maximum Driver transformer
2. (V6) in series 400 Cycles Volume T6 for maximum Connect the DC probe o a voltohmyst to the negative lead
with a .01 MFD AM DC voltage across I. of the 5 MFD electrolytic capacitor C 81, and the common
capacitor. C-81 lead of the meter to chassis ground
Remove Meter Leads and disconnect the 680 ohm resistor Mixer grid pin To RF 10.7 MC Max. cap. 0T5, T3, TI
from D and E on T7. Connect two 68,000 ohm resistors #1 of 6BA6, Tube shelf 30% (Fully top and bot-
(within I% of each other) in series, across C81. Connect (V2) in series ground modulated meshed) torn cores al -
3. the common lead of the Voltohmyst to the center point of with a .01 near mixer at 400 ternately load-
the 68,000 ohm resistors and the DC probe to contact No. 7 MFD capacitor tube (use cycles ing primary &
on rear of Switch wafer S6. Use the 30 volt scale. (Adjust test very short AM. secondary of
osc. output for leads) each trans -
-ill Bottom core for 6 -10 volts former with
Zero DC Balance developed 680 ohms
Volume on Voltohmyst across C81) while the op -
Same as Same as Control 1-tT7 top core for (Range switch posite side of
4.
Step 2 Step 2 Maximum minimum audio in FM the same
output. (Output position) transformer is
meter across voice (Use very being ad -
coil) short lead) justed. Adjust
all trans-
5. Reconnect voltohmyst as in step 1, omitting the 680 ohm resistor. formers for
maximum
6. Repeat step 2 omitting 680 ohms. voltage across
C81.
7. Remove all connections.
(Near the correct core position the zero point is approached rapidly and
continued adjustment causes the indicated polarity to reverse. A slow
"AM" IF Alignment
approach to the zero point is an indication of severe detuning, and the
bottom core should be turned in the opposite direction. Mixer grid pin To chassis 455KC High **Top and
ttThe zero DC balance and the minimum AF output should occur at ei of (V2) in ground Freq. end bottom Cores
the same point: if such is not the case, the two cores should be adjusted series with a of Dial of T2 and T4.
until both occur with no further adjustment of either core. It may be 01 MFD (For maximum
advantageous to adjust both cores simultaneously, watching the volt- Capacitor. voltage across
ohmyst, and an output meter connected across the voice coil for the point (Turn band voice coil)
at which both zero DC and minimum output occurs. switch to "A"
Note: -Two or more points may be found which will satisfy the condition or "C" band)
required in step 4. T7 top core should be correctly adjusted when approxi-
mately ji inch of threads extend above the can, therefore, it is desirable
to start adjustment with the top core in its furthest "in" position and turn
out, while adjusting the bottom core, until the first point of minimum AF
and minimum DC is reached.
147
ANT-RF-IF-ALIGNMENT (Continued) When the windings are loaded, it is necessary to increase the 10.7 MC
input since the gain will decrease and the voltage across C81 will be less.
Connect the Connect Radio
High Side of Ground Tune the Dial Adjust
"It is necessary to alternately load the primary and secondary of each
Ste" the Test Osc. Side of the Osc. To- Tuned 455 KC I. F. transformer with 10.000 ohms while the opposite side of the
to- Test Osc. to - same transformer is being adjusted.
"*To guard against the possibility of alignment of L17 and C37 to
image frequencies, tune the test oscillator to 15.5 MC and turn the radio
dial to 15.5 MC. Then adjust the test oscillator to 16.41 MC (image
"C" Band OSC.-RF.-ANT. Alignment frequency). By increasing the test oscillator outlast, a signal should be
heard.
Tune the test oscillator to 9.5 MC and turn the radio dial to 9.5 MC,
"C" Band Ant. 15.5 MC 15.5 MC then adjust the test oscilliator to 10.41 MC (image frequency). By increas-
Terminal 4,3 Osc.-C37". ing the test oscillator output. a signal should be heard.
RF.-C15 (If these image frequencies cannot be heard, the set is incorrectly aligned,
4. Through a Ant. -C8 therefore repeat steps 4 and 5)).
dummy Ant. (For maximum ""Two points may be found to fulfill the requirements. Use the one
comprising a voltage across with the longest threaded end extending out of the transformer.
150 ohm re- To Chassis voice coil)
Two points can be found having the greatest noise voltage developed.
sistor in series ground Use the one with the greater capacity (tighter adjustment).
with 25 to 30 9.5 MC 9.5 MC
mmf capacitor Osc.-L17"""
RF-Ll2
5. Ant. -L5
(For maximum
voltage across
voice coil)
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for accurate alignment
"A" Band OSC.-RF.-ANT.

1400 KC 1400 KC Osc.-C36
RF.-C84
High Side Ant. -C1
7. (Red Lead) of (For maximum
Loop Primary voltage across
with link open voice coil)
through a To Chassis
Dummy Ant. ground TUNING CAPACITOR DRIVE
comprising a
600 KC 600 KC Osc.-L18
200 mmf.
RF-Ll3 PULLEY
Ant -L6
8. Capacitor (For maximum DIAL INDICATOR
voltage across DRIVE CORD - TO
voice coil) REAR SHEAVE OF
PULLEY.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for Max. output
"FM" Band OSC.-RF.-ANT. Alignment

106 MC 106 MC Osc.-C20 for TUNING CAPACITOR
maximum DRIVE CORD - TO
voltage across FRONT SHEAVE OF
C81. PULLEY
10. To FM
FM antenna antenna END VIEW OF DRIVE MECHANISM SHOWN
terminal Al terminal A2 WITH TUNING CAPACITOR AT MAX. CAPACITY.
in series with in series
a 120 ohm with a 120
resistor ohm
88 MC 5*
resistor 88 MC
Osc.-L9 for Fig. 8 Fig. 9
11. maximum
voltage across Loop anknna
C81.
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for exact calibration.
4.444
106 MC RF. C13 for
13.
No
Carrier
maximum
voltage across
011--t 95-N 100 110120 140 N 16.0 -AV....-
C81
(Noise POW F
Remove or turn Voltage) 1
test oscillator off. *.J. Xt- d d 55 60 70 80 100 120 140 160 H. -a...1
90 MC RF, L11 for el
No maximum
r -i I ---1
W96 1 toe
14. Carrier voltage across 90
C8I.
(Noise F,4 -y 88 100 104e) 108
Voltage)
15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for maximum output.
Fig. 10
Same as Same as 106 MC 166 MC Ant. CS for Dial scale drawing
16. step 10 step 10 maximum
voltage across
-
C81.
Circuit diagram breakdown description
Same as Same as 90 MC 90 MC Ant. L3 for
17 step 10 step 10 maximum In order to have the instrument function in all of the
voltaCge across. positions of the band switch, a number of extra tubes and
parts are required. We have attempted to simplify the
18. Repeat steps 16 and 17 for maximum output circuits by including simplified schematics showing only the
parts actually required for the instrument to operate in the
Disconnect dummy antenna and adjust Ant. trimmer Cl on position to which the switch is turned.
19' loop when set is installed in cabinet.
It can be noted by examining the different simplified
41.11's method is known as alternate loading which involves the use of a schematics, that a few of the circuits deviate from the con-
680 ohm resistor to load the plate winding while the grid winding of the ventional f'.rm.
same transformer is being peaked. Then the grid winding is loaded with
680 ohm resistor while the plate winding is being peaked. Tube V8 performs the function of 2nd Det., AVC and AF
amp. in "A' and "C" bands only. Diode #5 of V8 functions
as a device to prevent the AVC bus from becoming positive.
148 Tubes V6 and V7 are used only in the FM positions; V6 as
a driver and V7 as an FM demodulator.
MEASURED WITH 5 VOLT FINED 6IAS
APPROX. GAIN 70X O BX
1
DATA USING 600-4 55 KC. 455 KC. 455 KC. 455 KC.
CNANALYST Goo KC. 600 KC 600 KC I I
v2 V4
LI 68A6 GBAG GBA6
R.F. Km/MR Ti- 10.7 1ST. I.F. T3-10.7 MC.
LOOP r-
SEC.
r -a --1
I
c.451 s ,
CS ,
1
220 _L
, 1
612V1, 612V3
1
,
,
T2-4.55 KC.
L _ J NOTE:
R2I
- C9 100 T4-4551cC For gain measurement, use a 3v bat-
C83 R4 IT tery connected to a.v.c. bus as indicated
100 .005 4700 r
R3 in schematic.
522K c29Ia c
r0 O o C42 CA651:
L-1 2- 3- - Ia _S 26 II I
2200 .0.3 C32 C .05 .005
I
.01 --if q.J
± )1-* C49 r
LSA"LDOP
1224 100 1
last NOTE:
LOAD Lio T.1000 i <2 THE SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC INDICATES
A o RFC 512
S6 2200 ONLY THOSE PORTIONS or THE CIRCUIT
Si 52 REAR S
44Htfr2K
CSO BEINGS USED FOR TKE PARTICULAR oPERATIONy
REAR REAR -/vv- C43
.005 100 IT IS POSSIBLE FOR A FAILURE IN SOME
C85 COMPONENT NOT SHOWN TO EFFECT
5.6 c4.4 THE OPERATION OF THE RECEIVER.
.005
C12 C R.F.
C1
10-414
to -445 8255 529
C84-1 ;112%02 2200 270K
10-16r7 *
I
CUI es.17.; Ls4 A

56 =3.54 540
270 K
-C25
-- 6.5
THROUGH/
CONNECTION R4
vs6AT 6
SI s2 55 Der-AVC- 2.2 MEG.
7 FRONT
FRONT FRONT AF
tj 40 4
Ht \ 0w
'
0
2 0 0
\1
-,0 REAR C52 - C63
4 0 .01 .01
SWITCHES VIEWED FROM
FRONT AND SHOWN IN .A' )0 to
O o
BAND. POSITION. o 519
MEG. C55
RS .005
22K
SG -FRONT C64
C35 RA.4 527
R13 B 22K .015 R A MEG.S
.01 C 34 MEG.
CS a Itic20 180 8200 H.F.TONE
6.4-21 ./...7-2.5-13 S voL.CONTR.
SA CONTROL
IC 'A:6SC 4-vvvs--) TAPPED AT
FRONT 250K AND 3
Aa le s R45 C65 500K C54.
27K
- FM C 36
2-18 T
Li/3
2
.015 .01
VB V7 V6 vs V4 C38 V 74C53
V2 VI \/3 115-342 Now. TEL. F.M. .0012 R26
4 34 s INPUT INPUT OUTPUT 2 MEG.
/14 /14 /14 / 114 314 JI R15
(INNS AWAY 2.2 MEG. L.F. TONE
FROM You) - 25V. 558 CONTROL
LB 1.1
T 270
57
0 39 100K 180K
- C22 -C23 0010 .05 553
C21 +270v 270K
100 117V IC CGI -
1.01 -C-28-171-*
.ot Illy AC.
eTO T
.01 1r
rr
Ui RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA
C SAND VI V2 V4
RCA VI'TOR DIVISION 0
CABINET. 6BA6 6BA6
WIRE R.F. MIKE R
6BA6
71- 10.7 MC. 15T 1.F
0 7 T3- 10.7 MC.
5:
CG C451 0
O 220 2
IT0
1
1
455 KO L____ I 0
- C63 s- C9 R4
100 I T4-455KC.
Eo, 3 4_ .003 4700
R3
>22K m
C291:11.5 p.7 =031
L CAC.,,
o2 99 E
390RIO C 26 C42
2200 .003 .005
c10 C32 C33
220 .01 .05
tat A C49 r 612V1, 612V3
1 MEG. 424 -utp0 It
LIO 1000 431

55 RFC Ri2 22K
51 52 (1)
REAR REAR REAR 5 2200 L
G. 7
C43 C50 NOTE; 141
G .005 100
RE THE SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC INDICATES
CII oP 5 3.5 ***4
C44 ONLY THOSE PORTIONS OF THE CIRCUIT
330 4 330 4 MEG BEING USED FOR THE PARTICULAR OPERA.
Oy 005
9 R.F. TtON) IT IS POSSIBLE FOR A FAILURE IN
10-445 10 13445 SOME COMPONENT NOT 514OWN TO EFFECT
3\,/ 3 10
1 THE OPERATION OF THE RECEIVER
2 t R25< 929
52 Csole o 120520 2200,, 270K
C1 -4"
"C" ANT S I
IVF R22 WM
100 940
C5 0,1 C 25 270 K
-55 THROUGH/ 3'3E4
A CONNECTION
.64 Lt2
51 52 53 RAI
FRONT FRONT FRONT
6A16
PET- ANC - 2.2 699
5 4
AF
4
6
10 3 0
2
aI
54
V3 REAR
R32 SWITCHES VIEWED FROM - CAR
3 FRONT AND SHOWN IN "C' 6BE6 8 1;2 1-3
SAND CK
.0085
POSITION. osc CD
I
RG 419
RE C 17 10 K. I MEG
22K CSS CD
L 16 IS /Ns', .005
C35 56 -FRONT 504
(oN RE) 22Ced.
CIS 1C2O .01 .015 927
6.4- 4 CIS 1 MEG. CO
R41.5 MEG. 1054
--/v---) 2
54 4 vOL.COMTR. P.F. TONE or,
iz:2.5-15 r" FRONT TAPPED AT CONTROL .
-C16 3 445 C65 250 K AND 3
FM 27K 500 K C54
T'°° .015 .01
V2 VI V3 VS V7 VG VS N/4.
0-1(
C53 CD
ORONO. TEL. A.F. .0012
3 "A14 3 ^14 3'14 3"14 INPUT INPUT OUTPUT 52.6 .
(PINS AWAY Ri5 2 MEG.
L6 L7 FROM You) - 25v. 2.2 MEG.
.m. ... R36 2 L.F.TONE N.
RIG RiT 1 CONTROL
C21
100
C22
01 07
57
\O ry7 ;AC 4 270V.
.
C3.3
.05
100K 150K
270
R53
41
T C6I 270K lot

.01 117V AC
I
PRESS PUSH BUTTONS INWARD PUSH BUTTON CAP REMOVED
SHOWN. PUSH SUTTON ROD
Push -Button Adjustment SCREWDRIVER
SLOTTED HEAD ADJUSTMENT SCREW
The push -buttons should be adjusted for eight favorite sta- - PUSH BUTTONS
tions after the receiver is operating, and has had a 5 or 10
minute warm-up period. :^.: rvidormr ,r, -
1111111W
Any standard broadcast or frequency modulation stations
may be chosen. The preferable arrangement is to adjust for
stations in the order of frequency, from low to high. Proceed ORO
as follows: MARKER PLATE
Remove the first PUSH-BUTTON (Just pull) and note

IT
1. THREE SCREWS
the adjustment screw beneath. MARKER PLATE
2. Loosen the adjustment screw.

3. Manually tune very accurately for the desired station. WINDOW STRIP
STATION
4. Push the PUSH-BUTTON rod in till it is against stop. MARKER
TABS
MARKER BOARD
5. Tighten adjustment screw.
6. Make adjustment for the other buttons, setting up and Fig. 15
checking each for the chosen station in a similar manner. Push -Button set-up
7. Recheck all PUSH -BUTTONS and reset if found
necessary. TO REMOVE SHAFT AND BALL BEARINGD
I. LOOSEN BRASS LOCK NUT.
2. TURN COLLAR TOWARD
TO PHONO. HEX. SHOULDER
DIAL CORD DRIVE DRUM
MOTOR AND CLUTCH
t YELLOW SPACING
2 I i
GREEN II 2 WASHER
.............
1=11 I
TO
3 RED II
I I
3 TO
4 II BLUE 4 CORRESP.
CORRESP. 5 I
BLK -RED ELK- RED -\.6
TERMINALS
TERMINALS BLK- BRN 4
ON SOCKET 45-212
ON PLUG BLACK I I 7
8
I I
BROWN 1
B BRASS LOC NUT 1 TENSION SPRING
9 v
i 1
BLK-RED TR. 9
C WASHER
Fig. 15 SOME MCCIELS MAY HAVE EXTRA SPACING WASHER
Power Cable TO INCREASE CLUTCH FRICTION
Some instrument may not have the color code as indicated, therefore Fig. 17
use continuity method to check cable assembly. Tuning Shaft and Clutch A ssembly
6AU6
2ND. TR A_ o., PAC
C54f
612V1, 612V3
430
15K C59
.002
R33
13K t
CBS C58
NOTE.
THE SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC INDICATES R50
ONLY THOSE PORTIONS OF THE CIRCUIT 2.2 MEG
BEING USED FOR THE PARTICULAR OPERATION,
IT IS POSSIBLE FOR A FAIU,ZE IN SOME
COMPONENT NOT SHOWN TC EFFECT THE 22KS 1.1t.
OPERATION OF THE RECEIVER.
15 3AF
295
22 K
2700
VB
6AT6
03 T AVt
SWITCHES VIEWED FROM FRONT

AND SHOwN IN "PHONOGRAPH"
POSITION
C55
040 064
22K 015 R42
1 5 MEG
) F TONE
VOL CONTR
A CONTROL
045 250 it AHD C0 54
2TKSrs' 5000
CAI P110110. TEL AF

63
.0012 R26
INPUT INPUT OUTNUT
.05 I 2M136,
PINS ROOT
PROM V003 - 25V 2 114
v., Am- W,,tt. (
c,c, 0 CD Trtl, L.F. TONE
CONTROL
RN -I,. 4.1... 2.70
ft 0 c,._ 100K
RC/ 003
Pirak.0
OW0 2700
ISOK
,
ra
000 CHI -
.°, -r
+
Fig. 14. Schematic shown for phonograph reproduction.
Note: Oscillator plate voltage is removed when operating phonograph. 151
nob
UI DIAL
(REAR VIEW) U RAE
612V1, 612V3 BAND INDICATOR LAMPS
Fig. 13. BAND
63
Radio chassis wiring diagram.
BAND -.I-
N WIELD NI.
IDET)5 AA RAS FNI BAND
GREEN
II YELLOW
5'7
C 2 R26
CONNECT COMMON LEAD OF LEE.Ni C87 R 38
VOLTOmmTST HERE FOR STEP
No. B AND NO.A OF RATIO _I5LX) LAMP
DETECTOR ALIGNMENT.
SHIELD
_f 82k-1- 1 E XT.
ORM
BROWN
.t_ C81 4-
CONNECT DC. PROBE -CPA
OF voLTONERYST r-
R47
HERE FOR STEP 40.2 R49
OF RATIO DETECTOR -e
ewowN\
C190 ':c
B.
r SHIELD
A
SLACK
YELLOW MOUNTING
BRACKET
cc:
123
191
TA VOL TEL
rS
P.I
C 20
C se B. IX
IN
SHIELD
T3
BIN C IB
BLUE
LL ng ns nz II
ORB.
BOTTOM VIEW
- BEN.
SWITCHES ARE SHOWN As
VOWED FROM FRONT.
INDICATES 040- SOLDERED 71-1)
GRN AU5K)
- RED P1.10110 TEL. TO CHASSIS.
vEUD FR IO LOOP C-INC DIPOLE
Servicing Notes on 1947.1948 F. M. and Television Receivers
RCAVI CTOR
TELEVISION RECEIVER
MODEL 630TS
Chassis No. KCS 20A (60 cycles) and
KCS 20C-2 (50 cycles)-Mfr. No. 274
Important information on the operation, adjustment, and repair

on RCA Victor Yodel 630TS television receiver is presented on pages
153 to 162. The RCA Victor Division of Radio Corporation of America,
through its Home Instrument Department, has made these service notes
available to the trade for the development of television and as an
information medium to the service fraternity.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Model 630TS is a thirty -tube, direct -viewing, 10" table model, hold; Stabilized vertical hold; Two stages of video amplifica-
Television Receiver. The receiver is complete in one unit and tion; Noise saturation circuits; Three stage sync separator and
is operated by the use of seven front -panel controls. Features clipper; Four mc. band width for picture channel, and Re-
of the receiver include; Full thirteen channel coverage; F -M
sound system; Improved picture brilliance; A -F -C horizontal duced hazard high voltage supply.
RECEIVER OPERATING
The following adjustments are necessary when turning the 9. Adjust the PICTURE control for suitable picture con-
receiver on for the first time. trast.
1. Turn the receiver "ON" and advance the SOUND VOL- 10. After the receiver has been on for some time, it may be
UME control to approximately mid -position. necessary to readjust the FINE TUNING control slightly for
2. Set the STATION SELECTOR to the desired channel. improved sound fidelity.
3. Turn the PICTURE control fully counterclockwise. 11. In switching from one station to another, it may be
necessary to repeat steps number 6 and 9.
4. Turn the BRIGHTNESS control clockwise, until a glow
appears on the screen then counterclockwise until the glow When the set is turned on again alter an idle period.
12.
just disappears.
it should not be necessary to repeat the adjustments if the
5. Turn the PICTURE control clockwise until a glow or pat- positions of the controls have not been changed. If any adjust-
tern appears on the screen. ment is necessary, step number 6 is generally sufficient.
6. Adjust the FINE 13. If the position of

TUNING control for the controls has been
best sound fidelity and changed, it may be nec-
SOUND VOLUME for essary to repeat steps
suitable volume. number 1 through 9.
NOTE: II any diffi-
7. Adjust the VERTI- culty is experienced with
CAL hold control until steps number 7 or 8,
the pattern stops vertical turn the PICTURE con-
movement. BRIGHTNESS VERTICAL PICTURE STATION
trol 14 turn counterclock-
HOLD SELECTOR
8. Adjust the HORI-
wise and repeat those
NORI ZONTAL OFF -ON CI4ANNEL NO.
ZONTAL hold control HOLD SOUND
adjustments.
until a picture is ob- VOLUME FINE TUNING
tained and centered. Figure I-Receiver Operating Controls 153

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION otherwise be airectly applied to the control grids of the 6J6
r -f amplifier, VI. Cl and C2 are antenna isolating capacitors.
It is advisable that the reader be familiar with a recent stand-
ard textbook of television principles in order to properly under- The d -c return for the grids of VI is through R3 and R13 which
stand the receiver circuits and their functions. Such a knowl- also properly terminate the 300 ohm antenna transmission line.
edge is assumed for the purpose of this publication. The C3 and C4 are neutralizing capacitors necessary to counteract
discussions which follow will not dwell on the operation of the grid to plate capacitance of the triode r -f amplifier.
conventional circuits used which have been used in previous
In the plate circuit of the r amplifier are a series of induct-
f
receivers and which should be well known. In general, the
ances LI to L25 and L2 to L26 inclusive. These inductances
circuits discussed will be only those that are new to the field.
may be considered as a quarter wave section of a balanced
For ease of understanding the basic operation of the receiver, transmission line which can be tuned over a band of frequen-
a 15 unit block diagram of it is shown in Figure 2. The circuit cies by moving a shorting bar along the parallel conductors.
description will follow the numerical order of these blocks in
order to logically follow a signal through the set. Adjustable coils L25 and L26 provide the correct length of line
for the thirteenth channel, 210- -216 mc. L13 to L23 and L14
R -F UNIT (block # l)-The r -f unit is a separate subchassis of to L24 are fixed sections of line which are added to L25 and
the receiver. On this subchassis are the r -f amplifier, converter, L26 as the shorting bar is moved progressively down the line.
oscillator, fine tuning control, channel switch, converter trans- The physical construction of each one of these inductances is
former, r -f, converter and oscillator coils and all their tuning a small non-adjustable silver strap between the switch con
adjustments. The unit provides operation on all thirteen of tacts. Each strap is cut to represent a six -megacycle change
the present television channels. It functions to select the in frequency. In order to make the jump between the lowest
desired picture and sound carriers, amplifies and converts to high frequency channel (174-180 mc) and the highest low fre-
provide at the converter plate, a picture i-f carrier frequency quency channel (82-88 mc), adjustable coils L11 and L12 are
of 25.75 mc. and a sound i-f carrier of 21.25 mc. inserted. To provide for the remaining five low frequency
R -F Amplifier --Referring to the Schematic Diagram channels, LI to L9 and L2 to LlO are progressively switched
in to add the necessary additional inductance.
T1 is a center tapped coil used for the short circuiting of low
frequency signals picked up by the antenna which would
ANTENNA
2. 3.
SOUND IF AMPLIFIER E AUDIO AMPLIFIER
DISCRIMINATOR 2 TUBES 4 SPK.
4 TUBES 6AT6, 6 KEGT
-11.-1 611A 6 SISA6, 6 AU6,6ALE
R F AMPLIFIER, CON-
VERTER E R. F. OSC.
3 TUBES
6J6, 6,14, 6J6 tJ 5.
PICTURE IF AMPLIFIER
6.
VIDEO AMPLIFIER
4 DETECTOR $ DC RESTORER
4'4. TUBES 2'4 TUBES
GAGS, 6AG5, GAGS
6AG6 4 '4 of 6 AL5 6AU6,6K6GT,EYa .f
8. 9. 14
SYNC. AMPLIFIER VERTICAL OSCILLATOR 1416N VOLTAGE
E SEPARATOR DISCWARGE 4 OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY
2'/2 TUBES 2 TUBES 1 TUBE
6SK7, 6517E 'A- 6SW7GT 6..) 5 , 6 K 6 C,,T 163-G7/G016
13
10 I1 WORIZONTAL DISCWARGE
HORIZONTAL SYNC WORIZONTAL OUTPUT 4 REACTION
DISCRIMINATOR OSCILLATOR SCANNING
I TUBE I TUBE V2 TUBES
GA LS 6K6GT '/2. OF bSN7GT
12 E BGEG 5V4G 15
WORIZONTAL LOW VOLTAGE
OSCILLATOR POWER SUPPLY
CONTROL
2 TUBES
154
TUBE
6ACT Figure 2-Receiver Block Diagram 5U4G, 51.14G
6606 6 BP6 6Ault
stiT RAC 001,40 2P SOu0 0500. 100115.4 IST6111AUTA
V104 VI
SinSouDEus, (10. V107 V105
s
JIGS J 126J
2;o20
xto 220i gra,
11220 G
t
2
'1!111.16
51.1T IT,11
RI !:4?:
`2.74-1%.1 aukzJ
SR
6 RL 5 6 Au6
P. ENO DST 151 VIDEO
C9
NS
;T:eztz. Tat 78'
fle,m TOW,
- °"
eig%
RI2 %a
'5""
S'sv .**; rVee
10 Zoo
FS 115v
1. LS tel, Let 1.64 Lee ISA de 112 t CI, l C7-4.1 22S0 -115.
Rua R9 275 V.
.W2.715 100A 100 It 6J 5 6K 66T
esuiTtoCM.-'. 65K 7 65(7 6 50707 l24.1 L202
151 R.0 SYNC SE pAPATcP tat SYNC 21.0ft veal OSC y 015C1:14 VERT. OUTPUT
pY.C. vt10 VV/004 V111 V122
v oe,
VAR COE TO VON!
-... -100V. s1(REEL CO,
17.! TICT
VERT
nil
CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 19R
= 1000 Pf
0172 .1/07
All tosistance valuers in ohms. and
COOCGotence whets in Rant& unless vaRT.1101. OGG
arra ECONITRO, RfeI
otherwise noted. 0161 Ca nal. Soon, 170
loan 416 4
Direction of snows at controls indl.

2±0_.
cotes clockwise rotation. t5el. ..
-e ET GT/ 211.0
All voltage measured with Volt. C.4.25ji.22222
Ohmyst and tin th picture control coon. KVCT.
0016jl 02220
tercla,kwise. Volt000s should hold 023 V127
within 220% with I I/ v. a, us*Y. 5V46
CKG GALS 61(60T 65N 7GT 6006-6 ReAcTiOriii
In some roceivers, C19 Is omitted. HORDSC NOR. DiSCR POR:OuT PUT SCPPG4 els Yawl
It SYNC 0,5CR Cl72 vas v120-15 V124 UO2. woo pert COG
V123 0.2.13 2
In some receivers CI4 is fisod. ROO vet.
-
3ov. ,so "i :!11....E. I If L. L19.1 C2204
In some recoivInt substitutions hote CHI- Pot RV.'
cc sod choruses in component lead cola 1046 .7.
:100
cOdes. in electrolytic comxitor rolues
-651. 5
and their identification martin,* 6600 T101
lug 140.07. ;OGG RL: SLI*6
R2o2 C4E1. 0551110.64, e acr Rccr.
p. 0,1=040.. .ro. v .10
t.20. WORit
1.1.4PEOPT
"0'4 al< To C108

.035
52,4
gasi1 CitiN2
.275v. -be Vs., E75 V
i 10
.110
TAP
REITIE Le.. COPP. PO 4.0
VICKY
7g11tiL7tTEZ
TELEVISION RECEIVER
N RCAVI CTOR MODEL 63oTS
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F . M. and Television Receivers
Coils LI to L9 and L2 to L10 are unusual in that they are SOUND LF AMPLIFIER AND DISCRIMINATOR (block #2)-A
wound in figure 8 fashion on fingers protruding from the portion of the energy absorbed by the T2 trap circuit is fed to
switch wafer. This winding form produces a relatively non- the first sound i-f amplifier. Three stages of amplification are
critical coil since the coupling between turns is minimized. A used to provide adequate sensitivity. A conventional dis-
maximum amount of wire is used for the small inductance criminator is used to demodulate the signal. The discriminator
which is required, thus permitting greater accuracy in manu- band width is approximately 350 kc. between peaks.
facturing.
AUDIO AMPLIFIER AND SPEAKER (block #3 and 4)-The
Converter-The converter grid line operates In a similar man- audio amplifier is a conventional system employing a 6AT6
ner and is so arranged on the switch to provide coupling high mu. triode amplifier and a 6K6GT power output tube
between it and the r -f line. CIO, C12, C13 and a link, provide feeding a 5 -inch E.M. dynamic speaker.
additional coupling which is arranged to produce at least a
4.5 megacycle band pass on each of the channels. PICTURE LF AMPLIFIER AND DETECTOR (block #5)-The
picture i-f amplifier departs considerably from the conventional
L80 and C14 form a series resonant circuit used to prevent coupled amplifier. To obtain the necessary wide band char-
i-f feedback in the converter by grounding its grids for 1-f acteristic with adequate gain: four stages of i-f amplification
frequency. They also act as a trap to reject short-wave signals are employed. The converter plate and each successive i-f
of i-f frequency which arrive at the converter grids in a push transformer utilizes only one tuned circuit and each is tuned to
push manner. a different frequency. The effective Q of each coil is fixed
by the shunt plate load or grid resistor so that the response
A 6J6 twin triode is used as converter. Since the grids are fed product of the total number of stages produces the desired
in push pull by both the signal and the oscillator, the hetero- overall response curve. Figure 3 shows the relative gains and
dyne products (i-f signals) are in phase on the converter plates selectivities of each coil and the shape of the curve of the
so toe two plates are connected in parallel. Unwanted sig- quintuple combination.
nals of i-f frequency that arrive at the converter grid in a
push pull manner are out of phase on the converter plates. uARP CuT OFF
ON OVER',U
TYE EFFEC,S OF 1-E
I
TRAPS ON TuE
RESPONSE DUE T2 T103
Since the plates are tied together, these signals tend to cancel TO 21. TS NC
I
DaDivIDUAL ReSPONSE
eves ARE ROT
SOUND TRAPS
thus reducing the possibility of interference from this source. sNORN
RI' Oscillator-The oscillator line is similar except that trimmer

adjustments are provided for each channel and the low fre-
quency coils are not figure 8 windings. For tuning each chan-
nel, brass screws are used in close proximity to the high
frequency tuning straps L66 to L76, and brass cores are
adjusted through coils L54 to L62. It is obvious that the high Figure 3-Stagger Tuned 1-F Response
frequency adjustments should be made before each lower fre- In order to obtain this band pass characteristic, the picture i-f
quency one. transformers are tuned as follows:
C15 is a fine tuning adjustment which provides approximately Converter transformer 21.8 mc. (T2 primary)
plus or minus 300 kc. variation of oscillator frequency on First pix i-f transformer 25.3 mc. (T103 primary)
channel 1 and approximately plus or minus 750 kc. on channel
Second pix i-f transformer 22.3 mc (T104 primary)
13. On a few early production units, slightly less range is
Third pix i-f coil 25.2 mc. (L183)
available.
Fourth pix i-f coil 23.4 mc. (L185)
The physical location of the oscillator line with respect to the
converter grid line is such as to provide some coupling to the In such a stagger tuned system variations of individual i-f am-
converter grids. This coupling is augmented by the link shown plifier tube gain do not affect the shape of the overall i-f re -
on the schematic and provides a reasonably uniform oscillator so -rise curve if the Q and center frequency of the stages re-
voltage at the converter grids over the entire tuning range main unchanged.
of the unit. The converter transformer T2 is a combination picture i-f trans
former, sound trap. and sound i-f transformer.
The converter transformer T2 is a combination picture i-f trans-
former, sound trap, and sound i-f transformer. The converter To align the i-f system, the transformers are peaked to the
plate coil is assembled within the structure of a high Q reso- specified frequencies with a signal generator. The overall
nant circuit tuned to the sound i-f frequency. This high Q coil response is then observed by use of a sweep generator and
absorbs the sound i-f component from the primary. Thus on oscilloscope. Slight deviations from standard circuit Q are
the T2 primary (from which the picture i-f is fed), the sound compensated for with slight shifts in transformer center fre-
carrier is attenuated with relation to the picture channel. quency until the desired response curve is obtained. If this
response cannot be obtained, the difficulty is likely to be in a
156 location that affects either the frequency or Q of one or more

of the i-f transformers.
The response curve does shift slightly as the picture control is tuned to the adjacent channel picture carrier frequency. The
varied due to the Miller effect. This effect is the change in fourth trap (T105 secondary) is in the cathode circuit of the
tube input capacitance as its gain is varied by grid bias fourth picture i-f amplifier V113 and is tuned to the accom-
changes. The change of input capacitance causes a slight de - panying sound carrier i-f frequency. The primary of T105 in
tuning of the preceding i-f transformer and a small shift in re- series with C181 forms a series resonant circuit at the fre-
sponse shape. This effect Is slight, however, and when the quency to which L185 is tuned (23.4 mc.). This provides a low
receiver is aligned with the specified grid bias, no difficulty impedance in the cathode circuit at this frequency and per-
from this source should be encountered. mits the tube to operate with a gain. However, at the resonant
frequency of the secondary (21.25 mc.), a high impedance is
For familiarization with the frequencies which are important reflected into the cathode circuit, and the gain of the tube
in the receiver's operation, Figure 4 shows the relative position for this frequency is reduced by degeneration. The rejection
of the picture and sound carriers for channels 2, 3 and 4. If with this circuit is limited to the gain of the tube.
a station on channel 3 is transmitting a picture with video Picture Control --The picture (or contrast) control varies the bias
frequencies up to 4 mc., the picture carrier will have side band
on the r -f amplifier and the first, second and third i-f amplifier
frequencies up to 65.25 mc. The lower side bands are sup-
control grids. It is a manual sensitivity control, and is oper-
pressed at the transmitter.
ated to prevent overloading of the i-f stages and to provide
the correct video output level from the second detector. A
,4---CNANNEL 2 CHANNEL CHANNEL 4-4.1
54 -6O MC 60-66 MC 66 -72 MC novel arrangement is used in conjunction with the control.
59.75 MC 65.75 MC 71.15 MC The object of this system is to provide optimum signal to
SOUND
SOUND
CARRIER
SOUND
CARRIER CARRIER noise ratio from the receiver. This is achieved by allowing
55.25 SIC 61.25 MC 67.2541C the r -f amplifier to run essentially at full gain over a consider-
PIX PIE
PIX
CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER able range of the picture control. The gain in the r -f stage is
reduced only when it becomes necessary to do so in order to
54 6O 66
MC MC MC MC
prevent overloading of the first i-f stage. The circuit shown in
Figure 6 is used to provide the non -proportional r -f and i-f bias
Figure 4-Television Channel Frequencies
from a single control.
With the receiver r -f oscillator operating at a higher frequency SIGNAL INPUT

than the received channel, the i-f frequency relation of picture
+270V.
to sound carrier is reversed as shown in Figure 5. 1-1F
SIAS
-18 V.
ADJACENT ADJACENT R -F BIAS
CHANNEL CHANNEL
mmmmm
Pitt CARRIER Figure 6-Picture Control Circuit
25.15 When the picture control is in the maximum gain position, the
NC
i-f bias is approximately minus one volt. The r -f bias is taken
ZT is MC from a tap up the control network which would be several
C:lb
MC CIMOMEL S
2-1.25
C volts positive except for relatively heavy conduction of the
SOUND CARRIER CUNMSL 1
diode. Diode conduction holds the voltage at this point to
CHANNEL 4
PM CARRIER OURD C419012
approximately ground potential.

Figure 5-Overall Picture FF Response As the picture control gain setting is reduced slightly, the i-f
Traps-Since it is necessary for the picture i-f to pass fre- bias begins to go more negative. At the r -f bias junction,
quencies quite close to the sound carrier frequency, the sound diode conduction is reduced but the voltage remains essen-
carrier would produce interference in the picture. In order tially constant. When the picture control setting is reduced
to prevent this interference, traps must be added to the picture still further, diode conduction is stopped and the r -f bias volt-
i-f amplifier to attenuate the sound carrier. If the receiver age changes rapidly to assume a more negative potential than
should be operating on channel 3, it is possible that inter- the i-f grid.
ference would be experienced from the channel 2 sound carrier
and the channel 4 picture carrier. The adjacent channel traps This high value of bias on the r -f amplifier is necessary to
are provided to attenuate these unwanted frequencies. reduce the triode nearly to cut-off. Although triodes are not
generally considered to be remote cut-off tubes, sufficient curva-
The first three traps are absorption circuits. The first trap (T2 ture is present in the grid control characteristic to provide ap-
secondary) is tuned to the accompanying sound W frequency, proximately a ten to one reduction in gain when the bias ap-
the second trap (T103 secondary) is tuned to the adjacent proaches the cut-off point.
channel sound frequency, and the third trap (T104 secondary)
157
VIDEO AMPLIFIER AND D -C RESTORER (block #6)-The func- Integrating Network-The purpose of this network is to sepa-
tion of this section of the receiver is to amplify the video output rate the horizontal from the vertical sync and to pass the
of the second detector. Two amplifier stages are employed. vertical to the vertical oscillator.
The gain from the first video grid to output plate is 30X and
the frequency response extends to 4 mc. Since the horizontal sync pulse is of short duration (5 micro-
D -C Restorer-Since the video amplifier is an a -c amplifier, seconds) and the vertical pulse is of much longer duration
the d -c component of the video signal that represents the (190 microseconds), they can be separated by an r -c filter
which is responsive to wave shape. The integrating network
average illumination of the original scene will not be passed.
Unless this d -c component is restored, difficulty will be ex- which is such a filter is composed of R163, R164, R165, C151,
C152 and C153. In operation it can be considered as a low-
perienced in maintaining proper scene illumination. For any
pass filter which by-passes the narrow or high frequency
given scene, this average illumination could be set properly
horizontal sync but passes the broad or low frequency vertical
by the brightness control. However, a change of scene would
sync.
probably necessitate resetting this control. The d -c restorer
accomplishes this setting automatically thus assuring proper
picture illumination at all times. VERTICAL OSCILLATOR DISCHARGE AND OUTPUT (block
#9)-The function of these circuits is to provide a sawtooth
KINESCOPE (block #7)-The Kinescope is a 10" tube employ-
of current of the proper frequency and phase to perform the
ing a new type screen material which provides considerably
vertical scanning for the Kinescope. To produce such a current
improved picture brilliance. The tube employs magnetic de-
in the vertical deflection coil, a somewhat different shaped
flection and magnetic focus. An ion trap is employed to pre-
voltage wave is required.
vent the ion beam from producing a brown spot on the picture
Since the vertical trace is slow, requiring approximately 16,000
screen. The inside and outside of the flaring portion of the
microseconds, and the vertical deflection coil inductance is
bulb are given a metallic coating. The inner coating, which
small, approximately 50 millihenries, the majority of the volt-
is the second anode, is connected to the high volt -age supply.
age across the coil during trace is across its resistive com-
The outer coating is grounded by means of two small springs
ponent. In order to produce a linear change of current through
on the deflection yoke support. The capacity between the two
a resistance, a linear change of voltage is necessary. Retrace,
coatings is approximately 500 mmf and is used as a high volt-
age filter condenser.
however, must be accomplished within the 666 microsecond
vertical blanking time and therefore requires a much faster
rate of change of current through the coil. During this time,
SYNC AMPLIFIER AND SEPARATOR (block #8)-The function
the effect of its inductance becomes appreciable because of
of this system is to amplify the sync signal and effect separa-
the required fast rate of change of current. It is therefore
tion of sync from the video.
necessary to apply a large pulse of voltage across the coil in
order to obtain rapid retrace. The composite waveform re-
Sync Amplifier-The first sync amplifier V118 is a 6SK7 which
quired to produce a sawtooth of current in the coil is a saw -
has a remote cut-off characteristic. The signal from the cl-c
tooth of voltage with a sharp pulse as shown in Figure 7.
restorer is fed into this amplifier with the polarity such that
V121 and V122 supply such a voltage.
the sync is in the negative direction. Noise pulses above sync
that remain after the limiting action of the first video grid are Vertical Oscillator and Discharge- A single 6J5 triode, V121,
thus further compressed and the sync to noise ratio is again with its associated components form a blocking oscillator and
improved. discharge circuit. The wave form of the voltage at the control
grid of this tube with respect to time, is a small, positive surge
Sync Separator-The sync at the sync separator grid is posi- followed by a large negative drop which returns to the posi-
tive in polarity. The operating voltages applied to the grid, tive condition at a relatively slow rate. During the negative
screen and plate, are such that the negative portion of the part of the cycle, the grid is beyond cut-off and the discharge
applied signal is cut off. Thus, the video and blanking pulses capacitor, C158, charges through resistors R169 and R170.
are removed and only the sync pulses appear at the sync
VERTICAL OSCILLATOR VERTICAL DEFLECTING COIL
separator plate.
I
cuRRIFOIT
Second Sync Amplifier-The sync pulses appearing at the sec- Oki IN T.IE
VOLTAGE COIL
ond sync amplifier, (VI20A), grid are negative in polarity and
must be inverted before they can be injected into the sweep
oscillators. The signal at the V120A grid is sufficient to drive
the tube beyond cut-off and the signal is again clipped. This
final clipping removes all amplitude variations between sync VOLTAGE
PLATE ACROSS
pulses due to noise. hum, etc., and it appears with the correct VOLTAGE Tme
COIL
polarity at the plate.
158 Figure 7-Vertical Sweep Waveforms

When the grid reaches a voltage that permits plate to cathode HORIZONTAL SYNC DISCRIMINATOR. HORIZONTAL OSCIL-
conduction, C158 discharges through T106 secondary and LATOR AND OSCILLATOR CONTROL (block #10, 11 and 12)
V121. The discharge current of C158 builds up a magnetic -These circuits are a radical departure from the conventional
field in T106 that in turn induces a positive voltage at the grid systems used for framing the picture in the horizontal direc-
of V121. This positive voltage on the V121 grid lowers the tion. Their features are ease of operation, stability and good
plate resistance of the tube and allows C158 to discharge noise immunity.
more rapidly. This process builds up very rapidly until C158
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR (block #11)-The horizontal oscil-
is nearly discharged. The magnetic field in T106 then collapses
and drives the V121 grid negative. The charge placed on C154 lator is an extremely stable Hartley oscillator operating at the
due to grid conduction during the positive pulse now holds scanning frequency 15,750 cps. The primary of T108 (ter-
the grid negative. As the charge on C154 leaks off through minals A. B and C) is the oscillator coil. This coil is closely
11171, 8172, etc., the grid slowly becomes less negative and coupled to the secondary winding (terminals D, E and F) and
approaches the point which will allow plate to cathode con- thus feeds a sine wave voltage to V123.
duction. Just before the conduction point is reached, the 60 HORIZONTAL SYNC DISCRIMINATOR (block #10) The sync
cycle vertical synchronizing pulse from the integrating net- discriminator, V123, is a 6AL5 dual diode in a circuit which
work is applied to the V121 grid. This pulse is sufficient to produces a d -c output voltage proportional to the phase dis-
drive the tube to conduction and the process is repeated. In placement between two input voltages.
this manner, the incoming sync maintains control of vertical
scanning. The sine wave oscillator voltages applied to the plates of V123
are equal in amplitude and opposite in phase. The syn-
On the plate of V121, a sawtooth of voltage appears due to
chronizing pulses from the second sync amplifier are fed
the slow charging and rapid discharging of C158. A sharp through a differentiating network to attenuate the vertical sync
negative pulse also occurs during the discharge period. See
and then applied to the center tap of T108. The horizontal sync
Figure 7. This pulse appears because of the action of R174 pulses thus appear in phase and of equal amplitude on the
and C158, an action which is known as peaking. When V121
diode plates as shown in Finure 8. When the pulse and sine
is conducting, the plate voltage drops nearly to cathode po- wave are properly phased as in (A), both diodes will produce
tential. C158 discharges during this time. However, since the
equal voltage across their load resistances, R191 and 8192.
conduction time is short, C158 cannot be completely discharged
However, these voltages are of opposing polarity and there-
due to the time constant of 11174 in series with C158. When
the sum of the voltages across these two load resistors
V121 becomes non -conducting, the plate voltage does not
will be zero. If the phase of the pulse changes with respect
have to rise slowly from cathode potential but instead rises
to the sine wave as in (B), the top diode will produce more
immediately to an appreciable value due to the charge that voltage across R191 than the bottom diode produces across
remains on C158. The plate voltage then slowly rises from R192. Thus, the voltage across the two will be positive. In
this value as C158 charges through R170 and R169. Ad- (C) the reverse condition exists. It is obvious that the output
justment of the height control 11169 varies the amplitude of of the discriminator can swing from positive through zero to
the sawtooth voltage on V121 plate by controlling the rate negative dependent upon the phase relation of the synchro-
at which C158 can charge. nizing signal and the oscillator. This d -c output is applied to
The voltage present on the V121 plate is of the shape re- the grid of V124.
quired to produce a sawtooth of current in the vertical 'de-
flection coil. It is now necessary to amplify it in a tube
capable of supplying a sufficient amount of power.
Vertical Output --A 6K6GT is connected as a triode. for the
output stage, V122. The vertical output transformer
matches the resistance of the vertical deflection coils to the
T106 TOP DIODE
r\P
plate impedance of the 6K6GT. C) 0 O
j\J
R178 is provided as a vertical sweep linearity control. Since
the grid control characteristic curve of V122 is not a straight
line over its entire range, the effect of adjustments of 11178 is to
produce slight variations in shape of the sawtooth by shifting
BOTTOM DIODE
the operating point of the tube,
Since the slope of the curve varies at these different point% Figure 8-Sync Discriminator Waveforms
and thus varies the effective gain of the tube, it is apparent
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR CONTROL (block # 12) V124
that adjustments of linearity effect picture height and that such
the oscillator control is a 6AC7 connected as a reactance tube
adjustments must be accompanied by readjustments of the
across the V125 oscillator coil. A change in 'the d -c output
height control R169. Adjustments of the height control affect
of the discriminator produces a change in Gm of V124 which
the shape of the sawtooth voltage on V121 plate so that ad-
justments of height must be accompanied by readjustments of
linearity. 159
Servicing Notes on 1947-1948 F . M. and Television Receivers
in turn changes the frequency of the oscillator. If the phase In operation, the visible portion of the horizontal trace is ap-
of the oscillator shifts with respect to the synchronizing pulse, proximately 53 microseconds in duration. Although the induct-
the corresponding change in d -c from the discriminator brings ance of the horizontal deflection coil is in the order of 8 milli -
the oscillator back into correct phase. C167 and C170 form henries, at the horizontal scanning frequency, the reactance of
a voltage divider to attenuate rapid changes in d -c from the the coil predominates over its resistance. This is a different
sync discriminator such as are produced by vertical sync or case than that encountered in the vertical deflection system
bursts of noise. and so a different method of operation must be employed.
HORIZONTAL DISCHARGE. OUTPUT AND REACTION SCAN-
NING (block # 13)-The purpose of these circuits is to produce Horizontal blanking is approximately 10 microseconds in dura-
a sawtooth of current in the deflection coils to provide horizon- tion. During this time, the Kinescope beam must be returned
tal scanning. One-half of a 6SN7GT is employed for to the left side of the tube, the trace started and made linear.
the discharge tube V12013. In order that all this be accomplished within the horizontal
The oscillation in V125 takes place between screen -grid and blanking time, only 7 microseconds can be allowed for the re-
cathode. Since the peak to peak voltage on its grid is ap- turn trace. In order to obtain such rapid retrace, the hori-
proximately 130 volts, a square wave is produced on its plate. zontal deflection coil, output transformer and associated cir-
This wave is differentiated by C176 and R202, and the pulse cuits are designed to resonate at a frequency such that one
so obtained is applied to the grid of the discharge tube V12013. half cycle of oscillation at this frequency will occur in the 7
The discharge tube is normally cut off due to bias produced by microseconds retrace time limit.
grid rectification of these incoming pulses. The pulse from
VI25 overcomes this bias and drives the tube into heavy During the latter part of the horizontal trace, the output tube
momentary conduction. During this period the plate voltage conducts very heavily and builds up a strong magnetic field
falls nearly to cathode potential and C179 discharges rapidly. in the deflection coil and output transformer. When the nega-
However, since the period of conduction is quite short, C179 tive pulse from the horizontal tube is applied to the output
is not completely discharged due to the time constant intro- tube grid, its plate current is suddenly cut off and the magnetic
duced by R187 and 8210 in series with C179. Then when field in the transformer and deflection coil begins to collapse
V120B again becomes non conducting, the plate voltage rises at a rate determined by the resonant frequency of the sys-
quickly to a value determined by the charge remaining on tem. Actually the system is shock excited into oscillation.
C179. From this point the plate voltage rises slowly and ap- Since the output tube is cut off and since the voltage generated
proximately linearly as C179 charges through R204. by the collapsing field is negative on the reaction scanning
tube plate so that it is non-conductive, there is essentially no
Horizontal Output and Reaction Scanning-The operation of
load on the circuit and it oscillates vigorously for one half
cycle. If the reaction scanning tube were not present, the cir-
these two circuits is so interconnected that it will be neces-
sary to discuss them simultaneously. The function of the out- cuit would continue to oscillate as shown in Figure 9 (A). This
condition, however, is not permitted. One half cycle of oscilla-
put tube V126 is to supply sufficient current of the proper
wave form to the horizontal deflection coil in order to provide tion is permitted because at the end of such a time the cur-
horizontal scanning for the Kinescope. The function of the re- rent in the deflection coil has reached a maximum in the op-
action scanning tube V128 is to stop oscillation of certain posite direction to which it was flowing at the end of the trace
components at certain times and thus help provide a linear period. This reversal of the direction of flow of current was
trace. Other functions of these circuits include the utilization the requirement for retrace and it was accomplished in the
of energy stored in the horizontal deflection coil to furnish re- allotted 7 microseconds.
trace and Kinescope high voltage. The reaction scanning cir- Now that retrace has been completed, it is necessary to start
cuit also recovers some of the energy from the yoke kickback the next trace. The energy which was placed in the deflec-
and uses it to help supply the plate power requirements of the tion coil by the output tube in the later part of the last trace
output tube. has not been dissipated. During the one-half cycle of oscilla-
tion retrace was accomplished with very little loss of energy.
The field in the coil was merely reversed in polarity. So, at
1401tiloNTAL OUTPUT TUE. 00517057AL DEFLECTION Cots this point, a strong field exists in the deflection coil.
As mentioned previously, if the coil were not damped, it would
continue to oscillate at its natural frequency as shown in Fig-
Oslo
VOLTA.' CU RRRRR
Ti.. ure 9 -(A). To prevent such an oscillation the reaction scan-
COIL
ning tube is brought into action. This tube is in a modified
damper circuit which is effectively connected across the de-
flecting coil.
/_, In the oscillating circuit, the current in the deflection coil lags
the voltage by approximately 90 degrees and when the cur-
rent has reached its maximum negative value, the voltage
across the coil being 90 degrees ahead, has begun to swing
160 Figure 9-Horizontal Su'eep Waveforms positive. When the voltage on the reaction scanning tube
plate becomes positive with respect to its cathode, it begins to
SERVICE SUGGESTIONS
conduct heavily. This places such a load across the deflection
coil that it cannot oscillate. Instead the field begins to decay Following is a list of symptoms of possible failures and
an indication of some of the possible faults.
at a rate permitted by the load which the reaction scanning
tube placed on the coil. The circuit constants are such that NO RASTER ON KINESCOPE:
this decay is linear and at a rate suitable for the visible trace.
(1) Incorrect adjustment of ion trap-Coils reversed either
If no additional energy were fed into the coil, the field would front to back or top to bottom, ion trap coil open.
fall to zero and the Kinescope beam would come to rest in
the center of the tube. In such an r-1 circuit, as the current (2) V126 or V127 inoperative-check voltage and waveform
approaches its final value, it does not do so linearly but on grids and plates.
asymptotically as indicated in Figure 9 (B). It is therefore
necessary to have the output tube begin to supply power to
(3) No high voltage-If horizontal deflection is operating as
evidenced by the correct waveform on terminal 4 of
the deflection coil before the energy in the coil is completely horizontal output transformer, the trouble can be isolated
dissipated. Figure 9 C) shows the shape of the current sup- to the 8016 circuit. Either the T109 high voltage winding
plied by the output tube. Although the currents supplied by is open. (points 2 to 3), the 8016 tube is defective, its
the output tube and by the decaying field are curved at the filament circuit is open, C187 is shorted or R239 open.
cross over point, together they produce a coil current that is
(4) V125 and V120 -B circuits inoperative-check for sine wave
linear.
on V125 grid, pulse on V120 .B grid, and sawtooth on
By the time the beam has reached the right side of the Kine-
V126 grid. Refer to schematic,
scope. the output tube is conducting heavily and has built up
a strong field in the transformer and coil. At this point, the ;5- Reaction scanning tube (VI28) inoperative.
output tube is again suddenly cut off and the process is re-
peated. (6) Defective Kinescope.
The 6BG6G plate voltage is supplied through the SV4G which
(7) P152 open. (terminal to ground).
is conducting over the major portion of the trace. Capacitors 3
C186 and C188 are charged during this period and this charge
(8) No receiver plate voltage-filter capacitor or speaker
is sufficient to supply the 6BG6G plate when the SV4G is not
field shorted-- negative bleeder or speaker field open,
conducting.
The charge is placed on these capacitors by the receiver d -c
NO VERTICAL DEFLECTION:
supply and by the current from the collapse of the field in
the horizontal deflecting coil. The a -c axis of the sweep volt- (1, V121 or V122 inoperative. Check voltage and wave forms
age is 275 volts above ground since the T109 secondary is on grids and plates.
conceded to the receiver 275 volt bus. The charge placed on
(2) T107 open.
these capacitors by the coil kick -back is therefore in addition
to that from the d< supply and thus the capacitors are (3) Vertical deflection coils open,
charged to a voltage greater than the d -c supply. This per-
mits operation of the 6BG6G at a higher voltage than is ob- NO HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION:
tainable from the receiver power supply and produces an in-
crease in the system efficiency by salvaging energy that would It V123, VI20B. V126 or V128 inoperative-check voltage and
wave forms on grids and plate.
otherwise have been wasted.
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (block .#14) The Kinescope ,2) T109 open.
high voltage supply is unusual in that the power is obtained
(3:, Horizontal deflection coil open.
from the energy stored in the deflection inductances during
each horizontal scan. When the 6BG6G plate current is cut
off by the incoming signal, a positive pulse appears on the
POOR VERTICAL LINEARITY:
T109 primary due to the collapsing field in the deflection coil_
This pulse of voltage is stepped up, rectified, filtered and ap- 1) If adjustments cannot correct, change V122.
plied to the second anode of the Kinescope. Since the fre-
quency of the supply voltage is high, (15,75G cps), relatively (2) Vertical output transformer defective.
little filter capacity is necessary. Since the filter capacity is
(3' V121 inoperative-check voltage and wave forms on grid
small, the stored energy is small, and the high voltage supply
and plate.
is made less dangerous.
(4) R174, C158, C221 -C or C222 B defective.
LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (block #15) -The low volt-
age power supply provides the filament and plate voltages (St Low bias or plate voltage ---check rectifiers and capacitors
in supply circuits.
for the receiver. The unit is conventional, and employs two
5U4G rectifier tubes in parallel to supply 400 volts d -c at
approximately 290 ma. 161
SIGNAL AT KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO SYNC: PICTURE JITTER:
(1) Picture control advanced too far. (1) Picture control operated at excessive level.
(2) V114 -B, V118, V119, or V120 -A inoperative. Check voltage
and waveforms at their grids and plates. (2) If regular sections at the left picture are displaced change
V126.
(3) C142 defective.
(3) Vertical instability may be due to loose connections or
noise.
SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO VERTICAL SYNC:

(4) Horizontal instability may be due to unstable transmitted
sync. Connect sync link to terminal 1 and 2.
(1) Check V121 and associated circuit -C154, T106, etc.
RASTER BUT NO SOUND, PICTURE OR SYNC:
(2) Integrating network inoperative -Check CI49, C151, C152,
C153, R162, R163, R164 and 11165.
(1) Defective antenna or transmission line.
(2) 11-F oscillator off frequency.

SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE GRID BUT NO HORIZONTAL SYNC:
(3) R -F unit inoperative -Check VI, V2, V3 and their socket
(1) T108 misadjusted voltages.
(2) V123 or V124 inoperative -check socket voltages and DARK VERTICAL LINE ON LEFT OF PICTURE:
waveforms.
;1) Reduce horizontal drive and readjust width and hori-
(3) T108 defective. zontal linearity.
(4) C166, CI67, C170 or C171 defective.
(2) Replace V126.
(5) If horizontal speed is completely off and cannot be ad-
justed check C168, C169, R168 and R196. LIGHT VERTICAL LINE ON LEFT OF PICTURE:
(1) C181 defective.
SOUND & RASTER BUT NO PICTURE OR SYNC: (2) V128 defective.
U) Picturei-f, detector or video amplifier inoperative -check (3) Change tap on R209.
V110, Viii, V112, V113, V114, V115 and V116 -check
socket voltages. POOR HORIZONTAL LINEARITY:
(2) Bad contact to Kinescope grid.
,1) II adjustments do not correct, change V128 or V126.
(2) T109 or L201 defective.
PICTURE STABLE BUT POOR RESOLUTION:
3) C186 or C188 or R209 defective.
(1) V114, V115 or V116 defective.
)4) C179, R187 or 11210 defective.
(2) Peaking coils defective -check for specified resistance.
WRINKLES ON LEFT SIDE OF RASTER:
(3) C138, C140, C141 or C142 detective.
(1) R180, 11201 or C181 defective.
(4) Make sure that the focus control operates on both sides
of proper focus.
(2) Defective yoke.
(5) R -F and I -F circuits misaligned.
PICTURE OUT OF PHASE HORIZONTALLY:
PICTURE SMEAR:
(1) T108 winding D to F incorrectly tuned or connected in
(1) Video amplifier overloaded by excessive input -reduce
reverse.
picture control setting.
(2) 11200 or R202 defective.
(2) Insufficient bias on V115 and V116 resulting in grid cur-
rent on video signal. Check bias and possible grid current.
RASTER & SIGNAL ON KINESCOPE BUT NO SOUND:
(3) Defective coupling condenser or grid load resistor -check (1) R -F oscillator off frequency.
C138, C140, C141, C223B, R138, R142, 11143, R148, etc.
(4) This trouble can originate at the transmitter -check on (2) Sound I.1, discriminator or audio amplifier inoperative -
another station. check V104, V105, V106, V107, V108, V109 and their socket
voltages.
(3) T114 or C209 defective,
162 (4) Speaker defective.

Sparton Superheterodyne Model 10 -76 -PA
FM. I.F: ALIGNMENT
In that the alignment of the I.F. stages of an F.M. receiver is inherently far more critical than is
the case in the conventional A.M. receiver the visual method using an oscilloscope and frequency modulated
signal generator should be used where such equipment is available. In case this equipment is not available
any good signal generator providing a stable signal at 10.7 Mc. may be used providing a vacuum tube volt-
meter and zero center voltmeter are used in place of the output meter. Both methods are outlined below.
Visual Alignment of F.M.-I.F. Transformers and Discriminators.
1. Equipment required.
(a) Cathode ray oscilloscope with both vertical and horizontal amplifiers and preferably with
calibrated screen.
(b) Frequency modulated signal generator providing sweep width up to approximately 400 Wc.,
preferably variable. The modulation voltage should be available at terminals to syncronize
the oscilloscope sweep.
(c) Insulated alignment tools and shielded leads for the scope and signal generator.
2. Preliminary adjustments.
(a) Set the signal generator for a center frequency of 10.7 Mc. and allow sufficient warm up
time for the generator to stabilize. It is very important that the frequency remain at
exactly 10.7 Mc. throughout the entire alignment procedure. A shift in frequency during
alignment might result in stagger tuning with consequent impairments of :vceiver performance.
(b) Turn the oscilloscope on and after focusing the beam for the smallest spot of desired bril-
liance, center the spot exently.
(c) Connect syncronize or sweep terminals of sirnal generator to the horizontal input cost on
the oscilloscope.
3. Alignment of plate reactor and discriminator.
(a) Connect output from signal generator to pin #4 of 1st limiter tube (46.77C7).
(b) Connect output cable from pin #5 of 6S8GT tube to the vertical input terminals on the scope.
(c) With the sweep or modulation control off advance the F.F. control on the sionel generator to
give a trace approximating Fig. 1.
(d) If the sweep contrpl is now advanced the trace will tilt like Fir. 2.
(0 Adjust core in L15 plate reactor for maximum vertical deflection. Note that the length of
trace increases as Fig. 3.
163
(f) Align discriminator transformer by adjusting primary C60A for maximum vertical deflection,
meanwhile keeping the trace in the exact center of the screen by adjusting secondary C606.
See Fig. 4 Fig. 4
When the discriminator has been properly aligned and the generator sweep increased to about
400 We. the conventional shaped discriminator curve will be presented on the screen.
See Fig. 5.
This presentation will be helpful for final alignment and balance of the discriminator trans-
former. Make sure that the straight center position crosses the exact center of the screen
and that the distance from the .7ertical center line to each peak is approximately equal.
4. Alignment of #3 I.F. Transformer
(a) Connect input from signal generator to pin #4 on No. 2 I.F. amplifier tube (6SK7GT).
(b) Connect output cable from AVC terminal on #3 I.F. transformer to the vertical terminals on
the scope using a 50 K ohm isolating resistor at the set end of the cable.
(c) With generator sweep width set for approximately 400 be. increase R.F. output until a con-
venient pattern is presented on the screen.
(d) Adjust C42A and C42B for maximum vertical deflection with a symmetrical curve. See Fig. 6.
Fig. 6
DUMMY ANTENNA
1110
Cl A
A
0 O
Generator
2I Receiver
A
0
0 0
G
G
C1-200 mmf.Condenser 400 V.D.C. ----Case Shield

C2-400 mmf. Condenser 400 V.D.C. Choke Coil Specification
C3-.02 mmf.Condenser 400 V.D.C. Tubing - 3/8" Diameter Bakelite
R -100 ohms Resistor 1/4 Watt Wire - No. 3R Enameled
L -Choke Coil Turns - 59 closely wound (Impregnated)
164 Note: When using this dummy antenna the generator

output impedance should be 10 ohms or lower.
5. Alignment of No. 2 I.F. Transformer
(a) Connect input from signal generator to pin #4 of No. 1 I.F. tube (6SK7GT). The output
connection remains at the AVC terminal of the 3rd I.F. transformer.
(b) Align C33A and C33B per instructiens and diagram in (c) and (d) above.
6. Alignment of No. 1 I.F. Transformer
(a) Connect input from signal generator to Pin #6 on the converter tube (7Q7). (Note: There
will be an apparent reduction in gain here due to the short circuiting effect of the F.V.
detector coil but this may be compensated for by increasing the generator output. If the
generator output is still too low the lead from 7Q7 pin #6 to the wave band switch may be
unsoldered thus removing the short circuit).
(b) Align C27A and C27B per instructions in (c) and (d) Par. 4. See Fig. 6.
7. Caution: Do not try to "touch up" or worse yet completly align the I.F. channel by applying
the signal to the converter grid. To do so will almost certainly result in misalignment of
one stage to compensate for the poor alignment of another.
8. For alignment of the A.M. -I.F. transformers see alignment chart. Operation 12

VOLTAGE CHART
Position of volume control: Full with set tunned to quiet channel.
Line Voltage: 117 Volts AC
Position of Band Switch: Broadcast with the exception ***.
Voltage of Socket Prongs to Ground
See ?rang Noa. on B emati
TUBE FUNCTION Grid
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 No. 6 No. 7 No. 8 Cap
6SG7 R. F. Amplifier 0 0 2.20 .10 2.20 155 6.0* 270
7Q7 Osc. & Convt. 6.05* 270 110 -9.8 0 ** 0 0

6SK7GT No. 1 I. F. Amp. 0 0 3.0 ** 3.0 95 6.05* 270
6SK7GT No. 2 I. F. Amp. "'I 0 0 3.0 ** 3.0 *** 6.05* 270
6SJ7GT 1st Limiter 0 0 0 -.3 0 46 6.05* 270
6SJ7GT 2nd Limiter 0 0 0 -.42 0 47 6.05* 207
6S8GT F.M.-A.M.Det. 1st Audio -.20 0 -.20 -.30 ** 95 6.05 0 -.27
6V6G Power Amp. 0 0 260 270 *4 **** 6.05* 12.5

5Y3GT Rectifier 0 375 0 360* 0 360* 360 375
6E5 Viso -Glo 5.95* 23 -4.4 270
NOTES: Voltage readings are for schematic diagram on back of sheet. Allow 15% / or - on all measurements.
Always use meter scale which will give greatest deflection within scale limits. All DC measure-
ments made with 20,000 ohms per volt voltmeter. All AC voltages made with rectifier type voltmeter.
Unless designated otherwise, voltages in table are X DC voltages.
* AC volts.
** Cannot be measured with 20,000 ohms per volt voltmeter.
***
*44*
Band switch in F.M. position.
Zero volts or 237 volts. (Tie point only on some receivers). 165
THE SPARKS-WITHINGTON COMPANY

ALIGNMENT CHART
NOTE: See page 6 of this bulletin for complete F.M. channel to megacycle equivalents.
OPER- ALIGNMENT GENERATOR DUMMY GENERATOR BAND TUNNING

ATION OF CONNECTED ANT. FREQUENCY SWITCH COND. TRIMMER REMARKS
TO SETTING SETTING
1 Set dial pointer even with left-hand stop line with condenser closed.
Pin #6 of 7Q7 C34A & B Peak Accurately
A.M.-I.F. Convt. .02 MFD 456 KC. BC. Open C28A & B " "
2 Tube Cond.
3 1600 KC. 1600 KC. C24B Oec.T. " "
BC. BC. BC. 1500 KC. C3B R.F.TR. " 1,
4
R.F. ANT. 1500 KC.
C2A Ant.TR. " "
5 600 KC. 600 KC. C24A Osc. P. *4,
6 Repeat operations 3, 4, & 5.

7 Check calibrations at 600 KC., 1000 KC., and 1500 KC.
C25 Osc.Tr. Peak Accurately

C2B R.F.Tr. **
1 S.W. F.M. ANT. 18 MC. S.W. 18 MC.
BAND C3A Ant.Tr. **
to BAND
GND. C26 Osc. P. See Oper. #9
9 C26 Osc. Padder is precision set at the factory and should not be moved.
10 Repeat operation #8.
11 Check calibration at 6 MC. and 18 MC.
SPECIAL NOTE: For complete F.M.-I.F. visual alignment instructions see pages 3, 4, and 5 of this
12 bulletin. An alternate F.M.-I.F. alignment using a V.T.V.M. is shown in operations 13, 14, 15, 16,
17, and 18 below.
Pin No. 4 on 1st .02 MED. 10.7 MC.
13 LIMITER Lim. Tube. Cond. Unmod. F.M. Optional L15 Slug ww,,,
Disc. Pin #4 on lst C60A

Stage limiter to Gnd. Disc. ***
14
Pri. .02 RFD. 10.7 MC. F.M. Optional Prim.
Cond. Unmod.
Disc. Pin #4 on 1st C6OB
15 Stage Limiter to Gnd. Disc. See Note 1.
Sec. Sec.
C42A B B
16 F.M.-I.F. Note "A" No. 3. I.F. See Note 2.
17 Note "B" .02 MED. 10.7 MC. C33A & B

F.M. 10.7 MC.
Cond. No. 2 I.F. " " "
Unmod.
18 Note "C" C27A & B
No. 1 I.F. " " "
C22 Osc.Tr. " " "

108 MC.
F.M. 270 108 MC. F.M. 300 C13 R.F.TR. "
19 F.M.-R.F. " "
Ant. OHMS Unmod. Channel C8 Ant.Tr. " " "
20 Repeat operation 19.

21 Check calibration at 200, 250, and 300 channels.
NOTE: The F.M.-I.F. alignment proceedure shown above is made with a measurements vacuum tube voltmeter.
* Use dummy antenna as described on page 1 of this bulletin.
** Rock dial while adjusting for maximum output.
*** Connect V.T.V.M. from C.T. of discriminator coil to chassis gnd. using lowest scale on D.C.
range. Adjust for maximum reading.
NOTE 1: Connect V.T.V.M. from pin #5 of 6S8CT tube to Fnd. adjust for zero reading on V.T.V.M.
NOTE 2: Connect V.T.V.M. between A.V.C. terminal on #3 I.F. Trans. to gnd. Tune for maximum response
on lowest scale D.C. range.
"A" Connect signal generator between pin #4 on No. 2 I.F. tube and gnd.
"B" Connect signal generator between pin #4 on No. 1 I.F. tube and Gnd.
1 6 6 "C" Connect signal generator between pin #6 on 7Q7 converter tube and pnd.
Sparton Superheterodyne Model 10 -76-PA
THE SPARKS-WITHINGTON COMPANY
L16
C3A O
L3 J -- C2A
03E 1
0 2b
Sparton
H Superheterodyne Model
IA
10 -76 -PA
IC
#C2,
CHASSIS DIAGRAM
L13 Col 036
e 042
e, o 0"
OA 6 A
B
A
L12
62:K731
(
6SK7ST
e, 0
022
L11 ()A e A C4A
0
C28 C27
lwr. Tr9n5.
013
0 655
C8
Creen
,c) Sleek t:=°

U See Schematic
SW.& Tone Control Volume hand Switch Tuning

167
=lb
0)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM MODEL IO-76PA
A.M. INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY 456 K.C.
F. M. INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY 10.7 M.C.
BOTTOM VILISS OF AU. SOCKET GOMECTON5
6567 7(37
R.F AMP 06c. A GONV.
155KIGT
MM 1,14.4.
65K7GT 65 311J7GT WO -
.11...6$rl .5.5 r. 3 31014.11
NI% NV* -
wwo' isto
mu
.T.
uSr .41.3 PIT 1.1.414 .1.311
/Oa .1.0 TM(
110.01q. 311.3.3
6556 T
c r14
.51,4 1.4.
'..Vt3grt"' PROMO JACk
TOE00.5 ,T,5 Tr 5 l< -OW

5Y3G T
33 C A
PA.,
pA4.114.1
C444 IC IS .00 441.13103
GI / a. 50.0 003010 LecA
4014.13, .0. TIAL11.AR %ICAO. 510
a: 10 .4141,-.00
OS NO 400 V. /1101.11..R PC .1110.3 Sol
0011.00. IGO V 11.1.134,111 arl..4011.
201.3.
t3 7t, 03...1 Pe 113111411.0
1111.45R 4.114
;sr 314 0.11433, PREFIX 4111....(
05 UM 400. T.13R 40.3303 1:14.1
- LOOP 414104. ASSOA
W41.1.1.11.41.1.11.1.4."..T.1" 1/34 it loos4 L IA
SS'Y^ 6% Zr:Z
"k;:iir5"' 3 .A.G.
..000 O. 41.1103 PA AM 11 "'"0"
4011. TU... PC
u. 3 14.T10013 33 I V/ w, CCM .53304 40193-0
5.4 a== trmoco oma Orly- .15 Lo at. 1.1 M.O. CROKE PM
Moo, 14030. 1.101/101
2.3U "CI zar /11
1/1- .04 Et t.t
- 1.f.M. wi = :3231-
1,4113.8, ME: V,
k. 0.
1p..,
T ac 3. 313 L .4
nt.,., garl IL.141:2:15.> tr.t. 1:0 tt, 11174.1 0U0
... r TRU.. (A ....) 0, Y. KO V PC.4.01.3.0)
10.
.....-.003
. ROO II, S... P.M It 0 0
r.4 441 SOO : It3.1 ti?
00(11)
:t: I." 1:41 Ell P, 0 op
7fg"' Mill. Fiiirl- 7 ROO IR
in v.,..,.. 100. TYRYL. ktroVa
30.6 0(10000C TO 455001 0110.76501 15 5 0(10.7 MC )
...-23 )1110001M ) 5 0110000C )
3 01116 MC.) 2.2 ISIINC.T010.700 )
1011111PMC)
67 0145511C I
RATIO
1. DETECTOR
c-5.5
F
AMPLIFIER 1ST I.F
0.1
0,40 Oa*
MVP/0
ra
R IS
A7,000 A
t...0041
..y
360,C4
x 1700 H-3) 32 01 400 H.,)
1ST AUDIO TWO AUDIO

S A NI OF T. PHASE
115 vt RTER
-
O (?)
616
OUTPUT
NOTES:
I- RANGE SWITCH SHOWN IN F -1 POSITION
PRONG INDICATES SWITCH ELEMENTS ON FRONT
JACK
SIDE OF WAFER 11
7-
3-.11.INDICATES SWITCH ELEMENTS ON REAR
cVP SIDE OF WAFER II
?SOAR.
RECTIFIER
SWITCH C11C
SLIDER CARRIAGE
0
Iberia
0,1111/0
WIRE 0
RECORDER
CABINET
0..
uwP
1 lo.000 Voltage Rating 50-60 Cy. 105-125 V. 01..
Type of Circuit Superheterodyne 0
Tuning Range Broadcast -540 KC. -1700 KC. 0
FM. 1-88 MC. -108 MC. FM. 2.42 MC. -50 MC.
Number & Type of Tubes -1 1
Stromberg-C arl s on 1-6BA6 R.F. Amp. 1-6116 Ratio Det.
1-68E6 Converter 1-6AT6 1st Audio-A.M. Det. n
DRIVE PULLEY 1-613A6 1st I.F. Amp. 1-6SC7 .2nd Audio -Inverter a,
1-6BA6 2nd I.F. Amp. 2-6V6 Audio Output
1-6AU6....13rd I.F.) Driver I -5Y3 Rectifier .01
NO. 1210 Input Power Rating Radio 86 Watts, Phono 30 Watts si

Intermediate Frequency A.M. 455 KC, F.M. 10.7 MC. m
WHEN DRIVE PULLEY, SLIDER CARRIAGE Speaker Voice Coil Impedance at 400 Cycles 6-8 Ohms
SERIES NO. 10 -11
a AND POINTER ARE IN POSITION SHOWN,
CORES ARE COMPLETELY MESHED. Power Output 10 Watts
0
'
L
In
01
- e- 2,
_../
i00
STROMBERG-CARLSON
Measurements are made at 117V line, using electronic Voltmeter.
Except where otherwise Indicated, voltages are D.C. and are
positive with respect to the reference point which is the chassis.
i07.
VIW,.,
,s.
W
8.
DOD
'
.
00
.444
v., e
0
<.--r-rovI
,1.4 -1._J^:o
i,4,
wit
E.
"
^
.
: : .:
it'
o
..
W te
9a
'I xo
2 I-
§i
o
21.:
is
In
/
CC
11.1
CC
:o
M
:71
t2
oC
(,)
C
.-0
-a
04"
...I
2
1...
MO
>-1-=
jr) 0
Model 1210, Series No. 10-11
(IS
o:
gar
i
3 oi
toe, re
5-'1'
dm.
J_
;' i;a.,
0 0
iv
2,
---1 § . .. §01,.
' 12.
-
ffo, ..
:0'0
:-
44
.....6
.1E !
F
,',
-, r.
F!
o
,"
!o
,
-n /
2 L.
.0.
.._._.
114 0.ii
i- 0.
L._
,
0
Cr
E
'
LI
a: V
X -.EWA,
olive
,:,;' :', 71 i
a,63 fie j
,.
13
C
0
a
..
,,..,
iiti
..
r..-3
. Iim
- I. I-
m. vs 0 0
0)
WO
>,-_-
(00
V-9
too
, 4,
:F. 2
"r)
' ii r .
0
=o il- .
II,- 0.4 er..IN
.
j ili _1 b gem CIus

4- 2 . LL; e. j:
,___, .,
cc
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 1210

Bond and Pointer Setting Input Generator Setting Input and Dummy VTM and Scope Input Trimmer Adj. and Notes
A.M. I.F. AUGNMENT
1 AM Low end 455 kc. Junction C-17 and L-8. Junction R-12 and Adj. Pri. and Sec. 1st and 2nd I.F. (Top
of dial 400 cy. mod. See location chart. C-60 (See location of Chassis) for highest voltage on -3V
100 mmf. dummy chart) DC Scale
2 " 455 kc.
swept 15 kc. Adj. same cores as above for best
over -lapping curve on scope.
F.M. I.F. ALIGNMENT
FM (1) Low end 10.7 mc. Junction C-17 and L-8. AVC buss Detune Sec. Ratio Det. (Top of Chas-
of dial 400 cyc. mod. See location chart. (Green and White Wire) sis). Adj. Pd. and Sec. 1st and 2nd I.F.
1
100 mmf. dummy Pri. Ratio Det. (Bottom of Chassis) and
3rd I.F. (1-9 Top of Chassis) on -3 VDC
Scale for max. AVC voltage.
" 10.7 mc. ...
Pin No. 6 Driver tube Adj. some cores ( as in step 1) for best
2* swept 150 kc.
3* " "
(screen) thru .01 capac.
Junction
overlapping curve on scope.
Adj. Sec. of Ratio Det. for zero volt -
_
R -12 and C-60 age. (Top of Chassis).
*Repeat 2 and 3 if necessary
A.M. R.F. ALIGNMENT
Broadcast Extreme 535 Kc. Ant. term. AVC Buss
Low Freq. 400 cyc. mod. Adj. C-16 for max. AVC voltage
1
200 mmf. dummy Green and White Wire
2 Extreme Hi Freq. 1700 Kc. 400 cyc. mod.
Adj. L-11 for max. AVC voltage
3 Repeat 1 and 2
4 600 Kc 600 Kc. 400 cyc. mod. " " Adj. C-15 for max. AVC voltage
5 1500 Kc 1500 Kc. 400 cyc. mod. " " Adj. 1-12 for max. AVC voltage
6 Repeat 4 and 5
7 600 Kc 600 Kc. 400 cyc. mod. .,
" Adj. C-14 for max. AVC voltage
F.M. R.F. AUGNMENT
1 FM 1 Ant. term. (DD) AVC Buss CAUTION: Align FM -1 1st.
Channel 260 100 Mc 150 ohm series Green and White Wire 1. C-17
with each side Adjust for max. AVC
of Gen. 23:
L.5 and Voltage. (All Trimmers)
1.. C-11
2 FM 2
2 C -12 Adjust for max. AVC
.
Channel 60 46 Mc. Voltage (All Trimmers)

CAUTION: Use low signal input especially for steps 2 and 3 of F.M. I.F. Alignment to avoid overloading.
Use dummy loop No. 114048 for A.M. R.F. Alignment
Use insulated aligning tool No. 80777 to prevent damage to iron cores.
Refer to Number 4, Vol. 1 Current Flash for suggested instrument use.
170 R.F. alignment procedure of iron core tuners is different from condenser tuners in that trimmers ore adjusted at low frequency
end and coils are adjusted at high frequency end of dial.
STEWART-WARNER 1266
811811111111ATOlt
12BAS ) A72T2( ) A72T3 A72T4 121A1
Tot Nem .0 144 Mai MODELS JA72T1(
NOM is" OW -a Fit F -11/11.F. 9026-A 9026-B 1 9026-C ( I
40,00,44 17 hivii of 40-
k 9026-D f lathe IF.
NUM 70
weiviENNA iflogoi47 12110 12BA6 5115
05 07
lst IET.- 1.11.F. $r Gum
114ssessJ
A96 T"
11-N1 A.F.
39. 15-18111 HT.
12
4-1(-4
SAKI salmi 26 27
woo. no 40 "h" --f.
736
rt
Fr
so
It 69 92 100
129 4,1 TO 19
221 23t O
40 'Resistor .44 a located in Is I.F.

LOCATING " t onslormer housing and is con-
LUG "="" nected between terminals ad
tip 74
CD
511
6. S2.4. 1060
I SI% NOTE it&
SIO S3 The above circuit applies to chassis which have a letter "6" `14
or -IV stamped on rear surface adjacent to model number.
Z4 SS BC. OSC. Chassis which do not show either of these letter designations AUDIO OSCILLATION
PM ANT. T 1-1
I4 COIL COIL have the fallowing circuit differences The audio system of this receiver utilizes a two stage type of inverse feed-
505062 505042 -
1. Resistor No. 7 is connected to A.V.C. instead of B as CO
58 560 shown -above.
back arrangement and, should it ever be necessary to replace the speaker
DIA. 2. or output transformer, it is important to maintain a definite phase relationship
GRAM PART DESCRIPTION Condensers Nos 107 and 108 are omitted.
BAND SWITCH NO. NO. 3.Resistor 087 is 33.600 ohms. in the feed -back circuit. If the connections to the output transformer are
504838
Changes 1 and 2 are incorporated in chassis which carry reversed or if the feed -back connection is made to the wrong side of the
CONDENSERS
504725 Condenser -.02 Mid. 200 volt the "6- designation and all three changes appear in chassis output transformer secondary, the system will become regenerative instead
1
4.A to E 504955 Condenser -variable gang and drum with the "if' designation.
504954 Condenser -trimmer; 3 to 12 Mmtd. These changes were made to increase sensitivity on FM of degenerative. Under those conditions audio oscillation may result. If that
2
.
6 504974 Condenser -ceramic 47 Mmid, 500 volt operation. cccurs. oscillation may be prevented by reversing the connections to the
8 504069 Condenser- trimmer( 3 to 35 Mmfd.
10 504976 Condenser -ceramic 1500 Mmfd. 150 volt secondary of the output transformer.
12 505025 Condenser -ceramic 100 Mmid. 350 volt 91 505028 Condenser .05 Mfd. 150 volt
13 505052 Condenser -.002 Mid. 400 volt 95 505073 Condenser -05 Mfd. 400 volt SOCKET VOLTAGES
14 505073 Condenser -.05 Mid. 400 volt 96 5099-3 Condenser -ceramic 22 Mmfd. 500 volt
15 504975 Condenser --ceramic 470 Mmid. 350 volt 50J27 Condenser -.01 Mfd. 400 volt Measured with voltmeter having sensitivity of 1000 ohms
17 502295 Condenser ---ceramic 10 Mmid. 500 volt 102 505071 Condenser -.2 Mid. 400 volt per volt except where indicated by (). The 11
18 505053 Condenser ceramic 15 Mmfd. 500 volt 106.A, B, symbol designates a vacuum tube voltmeter measurement.
20 504954 Condenser --trimmer: 3 to 12 Mmfd. C. D 504380 Condenser lectrolytic 0
23 505027 Condenser -.01 MI d. 400 volt A- 20 MM. 25 volt I
ALL MEASUREMENTS MADE WITH BAND SWITCH IN 'TM" POSITION UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED
25 504730 Condenser -ceramic 3 Mmid. 500 volt B 60 Mfd. 150 volt } DIAL TUNED TO 108MC. FOR "FM" MEASUREMENTS
17 504973 Condenser -ceramic 22 Mmtd. 500 volt C--40 Mid. 150 volt
I
29 505954 Condenser ...05 Mid. 400 volt flow impe- D -40 Mfd. 150 volt DIAL TUNED TO 540KC. FOR "AM" MEASUREMENTS
FM B.F. dance at 455 Ke.-do not substitute 107 504975 Condenser ic 470 Mmid. 350 volt
COIL ordinary capacitor) 108 509979 Condenser ceramic .01 Mfd. 150 volt VOLUME CONTROL SET TO MINIMUM WITH NO SIGNAL 1-3
505060 505072 Condenser -ceramic 33 Mmid. 350 volt
30
31 504954 Condenser -trimmer( 3 to 12 Mmid.
Condenser-- ceramic 47 Mmid. 500 volt ..
RESISTORS 110 A.0
33 504974
119491 Condenser --trimmer; 10 to 90 Mmfd. 7 502134 Resistor carbon 470,000 Ohms .4 watt 12116
34 123 0 C.
Condenser trimmer; 440 to 660 Mudd. 9 504969 Resistor carbon 33 Ohms t. watt 6AQ6 128E6
36 505051 IISCIIMINATOI SELENIUM RECTIFIER
Condenser --ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt 11 502794 Resistor carbon 68 Ohms I watt
37 504979 RATIO lYPE (F -N) I d BET,-OSC.
504975 Condenser -ceramic 470 Mmld. 350 volt 22 502133 Resistor carbon 220.000 Ohms t watt
38 ---)BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS
504979 Condenser. ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt 26 502130 Resistor carbon 22,000 Ohms ( watt (11.1112al BET.-A.V.C.-A.F.
4.
39
504979 Condenser- ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt 40 502406 Resistor carbon 1.500 Ohms r watt .,....: -6
41 Ill VOLT IS CYCLE A. C.
505068 Condenser. -ceramic 91 Mmfd. 350 volt 44 502134 Resistor- carbon 470,000 Ohms i watt NOSE
43 .? sa'
Condenser-- ceramic 1500 Mmid. 150 volt 45 502794 Resistor carbon 68 Ohms 1/4 watt 0 t, POIVEI SIMPLY ISE. 85 T:CCi41
46 504976
505028 Condenser- .05 Mid. 150 volt 50 502287 Resistor --carbon G80 Ohms t4 watt 0 , -A FOI TICK MEASIMEMENTS. - NOW
97 0 95 O
Condenser ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt 55 504710 Resistor carbon 33.000 Ohms watt ,.......
911 504979 ..
;..,-00.1 2 61; IlEATEll VOLTAGES MEASURED ACIOSS
505211 Condenser --.08 Mfd. 400 volt 57 502134 Resistor carbon 470.000 Ohms ( 4 watt
49 SOCKET TEIMIIALS. ALL OM, VOLTAGES
505068 Condenser -.-ceramic 91 Mmfd, 350 volt 59 502268 Resistor carbon 1 Meg. 7'4 watt *- 4'6;
52
505028 Condenser --.05 Mid. 150 volt 60 504968 Resistor carbon 10 Ohms to watt -025 MEASIIMO BETWEEN SOCKET
53
505026 Condenser. ceramic 150 Mmfd. 350 volt 64 502287 Resistor carbon 680 Ohms V watt
54 TEIMMALS An s- LBO. tc J
-
505026 Cond -ceramic ISO Mmid.'350 volt 69 502514 Resistor .carbon 3,300 Ohms 14 watt
56 rtsi
FM OSC. 504978 Condenser-- ceramic .005 Mid, 150 volt 73.A. B 504967 Resistor -Volume control 1 Meg 0.51 SEE SE
58
COIL 504979 Condenser ceramic .01 Mfd. 150 volt (with Switch) NOTE A NOTE A
61
505060 504976 Condenser ceramic 1500 Mmfd. ISO volt 75 505024 Resistor --carbon 21 Ohms 2 watt 0 0.8
62
63 504978 Condenser., .ceramic .005 Mfd. 150 volt 79 502134 Resistor-. carbon 470,000 Ohms tit watt 0 0
505074 Condenser- -ceramic 43 Mmfd. 350 volt 80 502136 Resistor carbon 10 Meg. t1/4 watt . 95 0 98 38 *-065 *-0.6 105 0.8
66 t SEE OTE A
67 504954 Condenser -trimmer: 3 to 12 Mmid. 504710 Resistor carbon 33 003 Ohms watt
505025 Condenser -ceramic 100 Mmfd. 350 volt 07 502408 Resistor tbon 68.000 Ohms tj watt 98 01,f 105
68 115 6.2 98 40 Or 0
70 505028 Condenser -.05 Mid. 150 volt (used only in chassis stamped with
71. 72 504979 Condenser -ceramic Al Mid. 150 volt letter "H") 0
89. 90 502134 Resistor carbon 470.000 Ohms 14 watt (49) (. 1
) C
74 505083 Condenser -.02 Mfd. 400 volt
Condenser ceramic 1500 Mufti. ISO volt 92 502139 Resistor carbon 470,000 Ohms T.:} watt A.0 AC
77 504976
78 504977 Condenser ceramic .002 Mid. 150 volt 94 505023 Resistor -corbon 33 Ohms 1 watt
81 505082 Condenser .02 Mid. ISO volt 97 502135 Resistor -carbon 2.2 Me I2 watt SOBS 128U 12BU
84 505027 Condenser .01 Mid. 400 volt 98 504437 Resistor carbon 150 Ohms t 'c watt
504937 Condenser electrolytic 5 Mfd. 50 volt 103 502132 Resistor carbon 100,000 Ohms ti,} watt OUTFIT (F -MI tad I.F. 1st IF.
85
86 504979 Condenser ceramic .01 Mid. 150 volt 104 504971 Resistor -carbon 2,200 Ohms t'o watt
88 505005 Condenser ceramic 100 Mmfd. 350 volt 105 504970 Resistor carbon 470 Ohms, 2 watt
FREQUENCY MODULATION -
INSTRUMENTS: Alignment of the FM circuits in this receiver may be accomplished with either a conventional AM type signal generator or an
FM signal generator. The output indicator should be an oscilloscope or a vacuum tube voltmeter.
Although it is preferable to use an FM generator and an oscilloscope, reasonably accurate alignment is obtainable when using a conventional
AM generator and a vacuum tube voltmeter providing proper care is exercised in adjusting the discriminator circuit trimmer condenser.
IMPORTANT: If an AM signal generator is used, it should be capable of producing fundamental frequencies of 10.7 and 88 to 108 MC. Avoid
using an AM generator which produces signals in the 88 to 108 MC range by using harmonics higher than the second. Generators which are
dependent upon third, fourth or fifth harmonics for frequencies of 88 to 108 MC will generally produce undesireable spurious beat signals with
the local oscillator in the receiver and alignment will be exceedingly difficult.
The following procedure is adaptable for use with either an AM or FM generator and oscilloscope or vacuum tube voltmeter,-merely follow
the instructions that are applicable to the instruments that are used.
SIGNAL GENERATOR CONNECTIONS V -T VOLTMETER OR OSCILLOSCOPE CONNECTIONS
CONNECT HIGH 'CONNECT GROUND FREQUENCY IF A V -T VOLTMETER IF AN OSCILLOSCOPE BAND
SIDE OF SIGNAL LEAD OF SIGNAL & TYPE OF IS USED, CONNECT IT IS USED, CONNECT IT SWITCH
GENERATOR TO GENERATOR TO MODULATION AS FOLLOWS: AS FOLLOWS: POSITION
bp
Ut
0
10.7 MC 4)
Pin tt 1 of 12BA6 (FM) - AM signal may be Connect vertical amplifier
2nd 1.F. use a .01 MFD. B- in vicinity of 12BA6 400 cycle modu- Connect common (or ground) ter- "high" lead in series with FM
con denser in series (FM) 2nd I.F. tube. toted minal of meter to B .D.C. probe an 0.1 MFD. condenser to Maximum to
with generator lead. Or lead of meter is then connected to pin #7 of 6AQ6 tube. Con- clockwise
FM signal should Pin #3 of the 121i6 tube. nett scope ground lead to position O
preferably be mod-
ulated ±300 KC.
Ut
Ut
Before connecting V -T voltmeter, it a)

is necessary to connect two 68.000
ohm resistors (resistance of both
units must compare within 1%) in
series from pin #3 of the 12H6
Same as above Same as above Same as above tube to B-. Then connect common
(or ground) terminal of V -T volt- Same as above Same as above
meter to the junction of these two F.;
resistors, D.C. probe lead of meter a)
is now connected to junction of re-
sistor #69 (3300 ohms) and con-
denser #70 (.05 MFD.) which are
m the discriminator output circuit.
Recheck the two preceding adjustments to be sure that both trimmers are set as accurately as possible to obain the specified output indication on vacuum 4-3
Pin #1 of 12BA6 (FM)
1st I.F. tube; use a .01 Connect common (or ground) ter-
MFD. condenser in se- B- in vicinity of 12BA6
ries with generator (FM) 1st I.F. tube.
Same as above mined of meter to B-. D.C. probe
lead of meter is then connected to Same as above Same as above 0
lead. Pin #3 of the 12H6 tube.
Pin #7 of 12BE6 tube;
use a .01 MFD. con- B in vicinity of 128E6 Same as above Same as above Same as above
denser in series with tube. Same as above
generator lead. *1-4
4-)
Generator output leads must be connected to 98 MC
the two "External FM Antenna" terminals at AM signal may be 0
back of antenna loop frame. Connect "high" 400 cycle modu- O
lead to one terminal in series with a 120 ohm lated Same as above Same as above Same as above
resistor and connect generator ground lead or V)
to the other terminal in serie with a 150 ohm FM signal should sr -1
resistor. pfaetteerab#11 )eriod-
00
4-5
Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above 05
C.)
Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above
6
Check calibration and tracking of receiver with input signals of 88 and 108 MC.
172 'If your signal generator has an AC -DC type pgwer supply, insert a .25 MFD, condenser in series with the ground lead before making the cor nections
"FM" - ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
align the AM channel first, then align the FM channel as instructed
1. If alignment of both AM and FM channels is required it is necessary to
in the following chart
2. Before removing the chassis trom the cabinet, turn the tuning control until dial pointer is at 98 MC. Then remove chassis and place a pencil
mark on dial frame so as to indicate the 98 MC calibration point.
3. Do not attempt to reposition pointer by releasing it from clip on dial card as this is done only during AM alignment.
4. Set the receiver volume control to the maximum volume position.
5, Dress FM circuit leads as short and straight as possible, particularly those in the oscillator circuit. I.F. plate and grid leads should also be
kept short and straight.
6. Alignment of receiver circuits may now be accomplished by using the procedure in the chart below.
TYPE OF ADJUSTMENT AND OUTPUT INDICATION
RECEIVER
ADJUSTMENT AND OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT AND OUTPUT
TRIMMER INDICATION WHEN USING
DIAL OR SLUG TRIMMER INDICATION WHEN USING
DESCRIPTION A V -T VOLTMETER AN OSCILLOSCOPE
SETTING NUMBER Set vertical amplifier of scope for maximum ampliti
cation. Where FM signal generator provides an out
put voltage for synchronization, connect this voltale
to "sync" terminals of the scope. Then adjust setting
of trimmer #9, before attempting to adjust trimmer
#8, until a pattern similar to the following appears
on the screen. If pattern does not remain stationary
operate sweep frequency control on scope and also
"sync" control until desired result is obtained.
A A
Any position where Discriminator Set meter to a low D.C. voltage range and
it does not affect 8 Primary adjust trimmer #8 for maximum meter
the signal. reading. (This voltage will be negative.)
C C
This double "S" curve This single "S" curve

pattern results when pattern results when
'scope uses "Sawtooth" 'scope uses properly
horizontal deflection phased "sine wave"
voltage. horizontal deflection
voltage.
Adjust trimmer #8 for maximum amplitude and
steepness of that portion of the curve between "A"
and "C".
Set meter for operation on its lowest D.C.
voltage range. Note that as trimmer #9
is rotated a point will be found where With the 'scope set up as described aboite, adjust
voltmeter will swing rather sharply from trimmer #9 until the cross -over point "B" is cen-
Discriminator a positive to a negative reading or vice trally located in both the horizontal and vertical
Secondary versa. Correct setting of trimmer #9 is directions; in addition, the portion of the curve be-
Same as above 9 Use an insulated phas- obtained when meter reads zero as trim- tween "A" and "C" should be as linear (straight)
ing tool to adiust this mer is moved through this point. The ad-
justment is somewhat critical and con- as possible.
trimmer. siderable care must be exercised to set
the trimmer for a zero meter indication.
vacuum tube voltmeter connection in the 2nd step.

tube voltmeter or oscilloscope. Then disconnect and remove the two 68,000 ohm resistors that were used for the With 'scope set up as described above, adjust trim-
Adjust trimmers #10 and #11 for maxi- mers #10 and #11 for maximum amplitude and
steepness of that portion of the pattern between "A"
Same as above 10 and 11 2nd I.F. mum meter reading. and "C".
Adjust trimmers #12 and #13 for maximum ampli-
Adjust trimmers #12 and #13 for maxi- tude and steepness of pattern as described above.
If the enlarged pattern now indicates a lack of sym-
Same as above 12 and 13 1st I.F. mum meter reading. metry, readjust trimmer #9 for correct cross -over
point.
Adjust trimmer #14 to obtain the symmetrical pat-

Oscillator Set trimmer # 14 to receive 98 MC. signal tern shown above. Correct setting of trimmer #14 is
14 and adjust for maximum meter reading. obtained when moss -over point in pattern is cen-
98 MC Trimmer trally located.
Adjust trimmer # 15 for maximum meter Adjust trimmer #15 for maximum amplitude of
15 R.F. Trimmer reading. pattern.
98 MC Recheck adjustment of these trimmers for Recheck adjustment of these trimmers for maximum
12 and 13 let I.F. maximum meter reading. amplitude and symmetry of pattern.
Adjust trimmer # 16 for maximum meter Adjust trimmer #16 for maximum amplitude of
Antenna
98 MC 16 Trimmer reading. pattern.
Read this chart across two pages. 173

A72T1
Stewart -Warner Models 9026A A72T2 A72T3 A72T4
9026B 9026C 9026D
BROADCAST BAND - "AM" - ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
1. Remove chassis and loop antenna from cabinet.
2. With the gang fully meshed, the dial pointer should be in the position indicated by the last mark below 55 on the dial, If it is set
incorrectly, release the pointer clip on the dial cord and reposition pointer.
3. During the alignment of this receiver, it will be necessary to set the dial pointer to the following frequencies: 1500 Kc., and 600 Kc. In
order to avoid replacing the chassis in the cabinet each time a dial setting is required, it will be found more convenient to mark the
required frequency points on the white dial background before starting the alignment.
4. Connect an output meter across speaker voice coil or from plate of the SOBS tube to B - through a 0.1 Mfd. condenser (see voltage chart
for convenient B- connection).
5. Connect ground lead of signal generator to B- lug.
CAUTION: If your signal generator is designed with an AC -DC type power supply, connect ground lead of signal generator to B lug
through a .25 Mfd. condenser.
6. Set volume control to the maximum volume position and use a wea'r signal from the signal generator.
7. If alignment of both AM and FM channels is required, it
is necessary to align the AM channel first; then align the FM channel as
instructed in the preceding section.
DUMMY ANT. CONNECT

IN SERIES SIGNAL BAND RECEIVER
HIGH SIDE OF TRIMMER TRIMMER
WITH SIGNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR SWITCH DIAL
FREQUENCY POSITION NUMBER DESCRIPTION TYPE OF ADJUSTMENT
GENERATOR GENERATOR TO SETTING
0.1 MED. Pin _zt 7 of Broadcast Any point

where it does 1-2 2nd
Condenser 12BE6 tube. 455 KC not affect the
I.F.(counter-
Adjust for maximum output.

clockwise) Then repeat adjustment.
signal. 3-4 1st I.F.
200 MMFD.
External Anten-
na Terminal Broadcast
Mica (AM) on 1500 KC (counter- 1500 KC 5 Broadcast
Condenser clockwise) Oscillator Adjust for maximum output.
Loop Antenna
200 MMFD. External Anten- Broadcast Tune to
na Terminal (counter- 1500 KC Broadcast
Mica (AM) on 1500 KC clockwise) Generator 6 Adjust for maximum output.
Condenser Loop Antenna Signal Antenna
External Anten- Tune to Adjust for maximum output
200 MMFD. Broadcast Broadcast Try to increase output by de -
Mica na Terminal 600 KC (counter- 600 KC
7 Oscillator tuning trimmer and retuning
Condenser (AM) on clockwise) Generator (Series Pad) receiver dial until maximum
Loop Antenna Signal output is obtained.
200 MMFD.
External Anten-
Mica
na Terminal
(AM) on Repeat adjuStment of trimmers 5 and 6 at 1500 Kc. Then re -check adjustment of trimmer 7 at 600 Kc.
Condenser Loop Antenna
OSC.
600 KC.
R.F. 455 455 DISCRIMINATOR
98 MC. KC. KC. SECONDARY
10.7 MC.
OSC.
1500 KC 12H6
12BE6
OSC.
98 MC.
12BA6 12BA6 (j)
ANT.
12BA6
1500 KC
Y Y
ANT
98 MC DISCRIMINATOR
10 PRIMARY
10.7 MC.
10.7 10.7
174 MC. MC. TRIMMER LOCATION CHART

external faults
These helpful notes on adjustment and detection of T-711 Manual.
in television receivers is taken from Stewart -Warner
CONTRAST-The receiver has now been properly tuned to the READJUST BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST-The "Brightness" and
selected Television Station and the picture may be made visible by "Contrast" controls must be adjusted simultaneously to strike a
proper balance of picture quality. Too much contrast and too little
turning the "Contrast" knob oil the front panel in a clockwise direc-
brightness is apparent when the picture is lacking in gradation
tion. As the name suggests, the "Contrast" control adjusts the black between black and white or if the picture loses form as shown in
and white contrast between the various picture elements. This control
should be turned clockwise until the picture remains stationary on Figure 9. Too little contrast and too much brightness causes the
picture to appear laded so that it seems composed entirely of grays,
the screen but not so us illustrated in Figure 10.
high that the gradation
between black and whiLE FOCUS - If the pic-
is lost. In the event th.-:t ture has a fuzzy cr
the picture does not re cloudy appearance as il-
remain stationary on the lustrated in Figure 11,
screen, proceed to the the "Focus" control
next step. should be readjusted to
a position which gives
-Should the picture on pest definition.
the screen appear to
HORIZONTAL LINE-
move horizontally cr ARITY Adjustment of
completely break up as Fig. 6 picture linearity, both
shown in Figure 7, ad- Sound Interference Caused by horizontal and vertical,
justment of the "Horizon- Incorrect Tuning
must be made while re- Fig. 10
tal Hold" control on the ceiving some form of cir- Increase Contrast-Reduce Brightness
rear of the chassis :s cular test patten on the
necessary. This control receiver screen. Broad-
locks the horizontal pic- casting stations usually
ture elements in synchro- transmit a pattern of that
nism with the transmitted type before their regular
picture, and although it entertainment programs.
has a relatively wide Improper horizontal line-
control range, care
J--rity will cause the cir-
should be taken to set it
correctly so as to insure cular pattern to appear
optimum performance. As condensed on one side
a check for proper set- of the screen and ex-
Fig. 7
ting of this control, turn Horizontal Movement tended on the other side
the set off for a few sec as shown in Figure 12. Fig. 11
Proper horizontal bal- Adjust Focus
onds and then turn it on
again. If the control is ance can be obtained by
properly set, the picture adjusting the "Horizontal
should lock into position Linearity" control on the
within a reasonable in- rear of the chassis. It
terval after the picture may be necessary to re-
tube becomes illumi adjust the "Width" con-
nated. trol if an appreciable
In the event that strcn-r
change was made in the
reflections or "ghosts
occur, which are dis-
linearity control setting.
placed approximately 1,:r VERTICAL LINEAR-
raster width from the true Fig. 8 ITY -- Improper vertic.11
picture, then the "Hori- Vertical Movement linearity will cause the Fig. 12
zontal Hold" control may circular test pattern to Adjust Horizontal Linearity
not lock the picture into appear condensed on the
synchronism. It will upper edge of the screen
therefore be necessary tc and extended an the low-
orient the antenna so as er edge or vice vers.".
to minimize reflected sig- The effect of incorrect
nal response. setting of the "Vertical
VERTICAL HOLD- Linearity" control is
Should the picture ap-
shown in Figure 13.
Proper linearity is ob-
pear to roll by in a
v e r t i cal direction or
tained by adjusting the
"Vertical Linearity" con-
cause multiple overlap-
ing vertical images, as Fig.9 trol on the rear of the
Reduce Contrast-Increase Brightness chassis. it may be nec-
shown in Figure 8, it is Fig. 13
necessary to adjust the -Vertical lh,, ,-cntrol on the rear of the
t
essary to readjust the Adjust Vertical Linearity
"Height" control if on
chassis. After the achustrfient is nt.r,.re. reduce the setting of the
contrast control until the picture is Ir :rely visible, then readjust the appreciable change was
"Vertical Hold"' control to "lock" tit.- 1.ture in position.
I
made in the linearity control sr !ih t. 175
The quality of the picture that is reproduced on the screen of a Severe static, or man-made
modern television receiver is dependent upon many factors, some of electrical interference,
which are beyond the control of the receiver. The information pre- which is audible in a con-
sented in the following paragraphs is therefore intended to aid the ventional receiver may be
installation and serviceman in becoming acquainted with the way both audible and visible in
a perfectly normal television receiver will perform when it receives a television receiver. For
transmitted picture signals which have been affected by some un- example, interference from
favorable external condition. automobile Ignition sys-
tems, inadequately filtered
The strength of the trans-
electrical appliances, arc-
mitted picture signal that
ing electrical contacts,
reaches the receiver is a
elevators, street cars, or
vitally important factor in
electric signs may cause Fig. 18 Multiple Images
determining the quality of
white streaks in the pic-
the picture that is repro-
duced on the screen. A ture as shown in Figure
17. If the interference is
very weak signal will pro-
particularly severe, the
duce a picture similar in
picture may lose syn-
appearance to that shown
chronization and effects
in Figure 15. In cases
where the signal is ex-
similar to those shown in
Figures 7 or 8 will prevail.
ceedingly weak the pic-
ture has a "milky" ap- A "herring bone" pattern
pearance which is usually Fig. 14 in a television picture in-
accompanied by a "speck- Correctly Adjusted Picture dicates the existence of
led" or "snow" effect. interference from electric-
The very high frequency
ally operated medical Fig. 17 Auto Ignition Interference
equipment such as dia-
waves used for the trans-
thermy machines. When
mission of television picture signals act quite similarly to rays of
such equipment is in rela
light in that they do not bend around corners and are reflected by
Lively close proximity to a
obstacles in their path. It should therefore be appreciated that tele- television receiver, the re
vision waves do not follow the curvature of the earth and reliable suiting interference may
reception should only be anticipated in the region determined by either partially or com-
the "line of sight- to the horizon in all directions from the antenna pletely obliterate the pic-
tower of the transmitting station. This region is generally designated ture as indicated in Fig-
as the "normal service area" of the station and the strength of ure 18.
signals encountered within that area is usually found to be adequate.
Interference created by
Since signal strength decreases rapidly when the "line of sight" signals coming from a
distance is exceeded it is not possible to reliably predict conditions short wave transmitter that
which might prevail at greater distances away from the transmitter. may be close to the re- Fig. 18
The technician who installs the television receiver must always care- ceiver or operating on the
fully check to determine if signals at a particular location are of wrong frequency will pro- Diathermy Interference
satisfactory strength. duce the type of pattern
shown in Figure 19. This
The characteristic of high bar pattern appears to
frequency television sig-
ripple or 'move across the
nals which permit them to screen diagonally and
be reflected from the walls should not be confused
of nearby buildings or with the horizontal pattern
other objects may, under produced by incorrect tun-
certain conditions, create ing. The type of interfer-
"multiple transmission ence described here should
paths." This would permit be rarely encountered and
the reflected signal to ar- is only included in this sec-
rive at the antenna a short tion in the interest of fur-
interval of time later than nishing complete informa- Fig. 19
the signal traveling in a tion on the subject of Interference from
direct path from the trans- interference phenomenon. Radio Transmitters
mitter and the effect pro- Fig. 15 If the quality of the television picture is unsatisfactory, the
duced on the picture of Weak Signal fault
the television receiver is
may not lie in the antenna system or the receiver, but may be due
illustrated in Figure 16. to temporary operating difficulty at the transmitting station. Keep in
These multiple images, mind that television picture quality is heavily dependent upon the
lighting conditions of the actual scene. Where the "telecast" origi-
known as "echoes" or "ghosts," may generally be prevented b) nates in the studio of the transmitting station, excellent results may
careful installation and orientation of the antenna. be expected since lighting conditions cad be closely controlled;
Aircraft in the vicinity may also produce a temporary "multiple however, where the "telecast" originates from locations outside of
transmission path" as the surfaces of a plane are capable of reflect- the studio, lighting conditions may occasionally be inadequate for
ing television signals. Although this source of interference is usually highest quality picture reproduction.
rare, its effect would be recognized by a temporary fluctuation in Should you find that poor quality is noted when observing
picture brightness and sound volume as well as the existence of a cast" of a motion picture film, this may be due to the qualitya "tele-
"ghost" image. In areas of relatively low signal strength, aircraft of the
interference may cause the picture to temporarily lose synchronization
film-wait until the motion picture program is finished and observe
or "tear out." whether picture quality improves when the next studio program
begins. If there is more than one television station in the locality
176 it is always desirable to tune in on another station and obtain a

quick check on picture quality whenever some transmission fault is
suspected.
1-4 T-6
SW -3
SW -3 SW -3 2 ND IF TRANS (FM) Fun° DETECTOR TRANS
SECTION I
(REAR)
SECTION 2(FRON7A
SECTION 3 (REAR)
L77
CHASSIS
SLACK
RIC*
L-7
VVRT
3 RED OMEN
%V°
C-20
47
MFAF R-31 8-33
T-2 T-5 IRK 1 11
1ST IF TRANSIFM. 2ND IF T-7

SW -3 TRANS (AMJ 3RD IF TRANS
-------014)
O 0
SECTiON.2, GREEN BLUE GREEN 0
43
:IL 444
R-31
R-2 1. :43
12 ) 470 K
.., T
BURT -IN F.M. NED BLACN
C -I6 __..RUCK
FOLDED DIPOLE 7-5 G-27
Ci00 OHM now 220 IF 711/145. 330 WO
MMF 4.
LEAD CABLE) UE TA,1410FLCCN
E
I C-3
L
L-2 R 6800
.
K<7) C-34 F),
R-27 47K
0,
C-17 G-24 5-26
5 DTs
R-7 72(:)1 2_20K5
/77177
CHASSIS
L -3C
R -I5 MEG
L-4 910 MMF 4.44
8n
V
,O,
C-10
4 !Pk
L5n SW -3 C-23
L-3 D 02
0-9 .1- SECTM.1 CMARRIR
L-5 14.)
C-7 G 12
5 MMF.4r PRONG END
R-12
VIEW
0-4 2 ME
05 HEATERS
SW -I GREEN CS
B ACE ()) 4..7
PILOT LAMPS .01
GE MAZDA NO, 47 R-10
33K C-33
1 MEG SP -1
.4. .005
30 30 TO SPEAKER
I7 VOLTS AC.
G-22 AivrAtI4 BASKET
60 CYCLES
YELLOW of
SW -2
YELLOW
CHASSIS
RESISTANCE VALUES ARE IN OHMS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
"K" EQUALS 1000 OHMS:MEG" EQUALS 1,000,000 OHMS.
ALL TUBE SOCKETS ARE SHOWN FROM PIN ENO VIEW. VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
CAPACITY
SWITCHES ARE SHOWN IN EXTREME COUNTERCLOCKWISE
POSITION (PHONO POSITION) SHAFT END VIEW.
F M-107 *AC IF
A.M.-455 KC IF
WESTERN AUTO SUPPLY COMPANY TRUETVNE

-41 STOCK NO. D1752
ALIGNMENT CHART
The following equipment is necessary to properly align this receiver:
I. AM signal generator. with frequency coverage NOTE: Oscilloscope equipment not required if aligned ac -
from 455 kc. to 1700 kc. cording to the following procedure:
2. FM or CW signal generator covering the FM The accuracy of the AM RF and AM antenna slug
band from 87.25 mc. to 108.75 mc. and the 10.7 adjustments may be determined by noting the trim-
mc. frequency for FM IF alignment. mer adjustment at each end of the band when the
3. Vacuum Tube Voltmeter (VTVM). oscillator is set for proper coverage. The proper
4. Output meter -to match 4 ohms, 5 watts maxi- setting of the AM or FM oscillator slugs is indicated
mum. by proper tracking of the receiver at the center of the
5. Insulated alignment screwdriver. respective band. The FM RF and FM antenna slugs
6. Dummy antenna -0.1 mfd. capacitor, 300 ohm must be adjusted to dimensions given in the perme-
carbon resistor and inductive loop (fashioned ability tuner illustration.
from several turns of wire).
Step Band Signal Connection
Switch at Dummy Dial Adjust Remarks
No. position Generator Receiver Antenna Setting Trimmer
1 AM 455 kc. 6BE6 Con- 0.1 mfd. HF end E, F, H, J, L, M, Adjust for Maximum Output.
verter Grid AM IF Trimmers
Pin No. 7
2 AM 535 kc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. LF end C-10 AM Osc. Adjust for Maximum Output.
Pin No. 1 Trimmer
3 AM 1620 kc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. HF end L-4 AM Osc. Adjust for Band Coverage.
Pin No. 1 Shunt Tracking (See Note 1.)
Adjustment.
(Remove Fly-
wheel from
Shaft of Tuning
Control.)
4 AM 535 kc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. LF end C-14 AM RF Adjust for Maximum Output.
Pin No. 1 Trimmer
5 AM 1400 kc. Thru Loop Inductive 1400 kc. C-1 AM for Maximum Output.
(With Re- Loop Antenna
ceiver Loop Trimmer
Connected
to Set.)
6 FM 10.7 mc. 6SG7 Driver 0.1 mfd. HF end L-8 Ratio Adjust for Maximum AVC between
(CW Sig- Grid Detector Point "A" on Wiring Diagram and
nal) Pin No. 4 Primary Chassis using Electronic Voltme-
ter. See Notes 2 and 3.
7 FM 10.7 mc. 6SG7 Driver 0.1 mfd. HF end K Ratio See Note 2. Adjust for Zero Posi-
(CW Sig- Grid Detector tion (Using Electronic Voltmeter)
nal) Pin No. 4 Secondary from No. 12 Position on Single Sec-
tion Switch and Point "B" on Wir-
- ing Diagram.
8A FM 10.7 me. 6BE6 Con- 0.1 mfd. HF end L-6, D, L-7, G See Note 2. Adjust for Maximum
(CW Sig- verter Grid 1st and 2nd AVC.
nal) Pin No. 7 FM IF
8B FM 10.7 mc. 6BE6 Con- 0.1 mfd. HF end L-6, D, L-7, G See Note 3. Adjust for Maximum
(CW Sig- verter Grid 1st and 2nd Output.
nal) Pin No. 7 FM IF
9 FM 87.25 mc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. LF end C-12 FM Osc. Adjust for Maximum Output.
(FM Sig- Pin No. 1 Trimmer
nal)
10 FM 108.75 mc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. HF end L-5 FM Osc. Adjust for Band Coverage. (See
(FM Sig- Pin No. 1 Shunt Tracking Note 4.)
nal) Adjustment
11 FM 87.25 mc. 6BA6 Grid 0.1 mfd. LF end C-15 FM RF Adjust for Maximum Output.
(FM Sig- Pin No. 1 Trimmer
nal)
12 FM 87.25 mc. Thru 300 ohm 300 ohm 87.25 mc. C-2 FM Adjust for Maximum Output.
(FM Sig- Carbon Re- Carbon Antenna
nal) sistor to End Resistor Trimmer
FM Antenna
Terminal
and Center
178 FM Antenna
Terminal.
ROWER CORO
535 KC -8125 MC 800 KC 1000 KC 08 MC

88 MC 98 MC 1360 KC 1620 KO-108.75MC
IC -121, 14
OSCILLATOR
TRIMMER
IL -514M
OSCILLATOR
O ®
O
9AINT TRACKING
ADJUSTMENT
IL-
DC OSOLLATOR
SHUNT TRACKING
ADJUSTMENT
TONE CONTROL PHONO

OMOET SWITC VOLUME CON TROL STATION SELECTOR RANO SWITCH
Calibration Points Trimmer Location
Reference Notes to Alignment Chart on Page 178.

Note 1-If 1620 kc. signal is received lower in fre- Note 3-For all tests requiring an FM signal, the
quency than the 1620 kc. dial calibration, turn generator output (22.5 kc. deviation, 400 cicles)
BC oscillator shunt tracking adjustment (L-4) must be adjusted to give approximately one-
outward. Retrack at 535 kc. (Step 2). If higher half watt receiver output before final adjust-
than the 1620 kc. dial calibration, screw adjust-
ment inward and retrack at 535 kc. Repeat un- ments are made. Either STEP 8A or 8B may
til 535 kc. and 1620 kc. signals coincide with be used depending on equipment available.
their respective dial calibrations.
Note 4-If 108.75 mc. signal is received lower, in
Note 2-Adjust input voltage to give approximately frequency than the 108.75 mc. dial calibration,
5 volts AVC before final adjustment is made.
turn FM oscillator shunt tracking adjustment
For STEPS 6 and 8A-Voltmeter "common" (L-5) outward. Retrack at 87.25 mc. (STEP 9).
lead to chassis.
If higher than the 108.75 mc. dial calibration,
For STEP 7-Voltmeter "common" lead to screw adjustment inward and retrack at 87.25
point "B" on wiring diagram. The desired zero mc. Repeat until 87.25 mc. and 108.75 mc. sig-
position is at the point where the meter indi-
cates a polarity change from plus to minus or nals coincide with their respective dial calibra-
vice -versa. tions.
TO TERM. NO2 TO CHASSIS GROUND

(FRONT-SEC.I)
ON BAND SWITCH TO FM RF
RIMMER BRACKET
(GROUND)
FM OSC. SHUNT
TRACKING COIL TO FM ANTENNA
TRIMMER BRACKET
TO TERM. NO. (GROUND)
(FRONT -SEC. I )
ON BAND SWITCH TO 'AM" TERMINAL
TO AM ANTENNA
TO AM OSC. SHUNT TRIMMER
TRACKING COIL
TO DIPOLE ANT
TO AM RF TRIMMER TERM. BOARD
TEN D"FACTERM)
TO TERM. NO.10
(FRONT -SEC. 2) TO FM RF
ON BAND SWITCH TRIMMER
AM RF COIL TO FM ANTENNA
TRIMMER
L -3C AM OSC.
COIL L-38 FM ANT COIL
III
1.r3D FM OSC. L -3F FM RF COIL
COIL 0414*- "AA L -3A AM ANT COIL
TO FM OSC.
TO FM OSC. TRIMMER BRACKET
TRIMMER (GROUND)
Permeability Tuner illustration

179
Western Auto Supply Company TRUETVNE
STOCK NO. D1752
SOCKET VOLTAGES
TUBE POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GBA6 RF Amplifier 0 0 6.3 AC 0 250 100 .6

6BE6 Oscillator -Converter 0 0 6.3 AC 0 250 90 0
6SG7 1st IF Amplifier 0 0 .6 0 .6 125 6.3 AC 250
6SG7 2nd IF Amplifier 0 0 .6 0 .6 125 6.3 AC 250
6SQ7 AM Detector-AVC- 0 0 0 0 0 90 6.3 AC 0
1st Audio (AM -FM)
6H6 FM Detector 0 6.3 AC 0 0 0 0 0 0
6V6GT Power Output NC 0 240 260 0 260 6.3 AC 14
5Y3GT Rectifier NC 325 NC 325 AC NC 325 NC 325
NOTE: All DC voltages measured with a 1000 ohm -per -volt Tone control in clockwise position.
meter from B- to socket contact indicated. All volt- Band switch in "AM" position.
ages are positive DC unless otherwise marked. Line voltage 117 volts, 60 cycle AC.
Volume control full on. Zero signal input.
CHASSIS REMOVAL - Remove the receiver 3. Remove the loop and dipole antennae leads from
power cord from the electrical outlet before starting their respective terminals.
to remove chassis.
4. Detach the phono-motor cord (plug and socket
1. Turn the tuning control so that the dial pointer connection).
is in the extreme left-hand position (low fre- u. Remove the phono input leads at the terminal
quency end). board on the chassis shelf and remove the
2. Unhook the dial cable from dial pointer and slide speaker plug from receptacle at back of chassis.
the pointer to center of cutout in the pointer
track. The dial pointer may be removed, if neces- 6. Remove knobs and the f:Air chassis mounting
sary, by turning it clockwise and clearing it screws. The chassis can now be removel from
through the cutout. the cabinet.
eesesse
GS 411) 6 Cid 1113 6 0 0-12 ID C clit ID 0 01) 0 CID
e ID 41D
CD
it g
a1--N7=5..-AlmcM.2...-SiLilidEil . VIM MT w
--, i: irWAIf
Pik. n ol ff''') 0
6
d if,
i 40
11- v 0 LIII. (11D
W littemlir/PME9-:,,,-IA /7 1-11-ge.4M=LteMre
tl; 1. , .....s,
51-"A=
1 r44-1, 7 -1 70"
r-fitil,viiver .
CD
lor511111)
4.
32
m t0071-1144> i
41--i-d,,,_4.' -A4gi J 1117,0i, ili i, 14.641ir
t
0 41)
0
.
'
.
R,2. if Chr 5
MFG
it% 111) 0 ID 0 0 0 CD ID ID 0 ID
0 et CID P to 011D 0 6 ----.E%,,,:'°7=1'1°.:"Z.Zn":A:,5E'

(GROUND) r OSCILLATOR TRIMMER, C -I2
180 Bottom View- Ports Layout

3 A 12.. 9floaIII 0 1 8 4 6
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
AM STAGES -
Volume Control Maximum all Adjustments. The following is required for aligning:
Conned Radio Chassis to Ground Post of Signal Generator with An All Wave Signal Generator Which Will Provide an Accurately
a Short Heavy lead. Calibrated Signal at the Test Frequencies as Listed.
Allow Chassis and Signal Generator to -Heat Up'" for Several Output Indicating Meter, Non -Metallic Screwdriver, Dummy An -
Minutes. tennas - .1 mf, and 50 mmf.
SIGNAL GENERATOR GANG ADJUST TUNING SLUGS
CONNECTION AT GROUND DUMMY CONDENSER (I -F ONLY)
FREQUENCY
RADIO CONNECTION ANTENNA SETTING TRIMMERS (OSC. & ANT.)
SETTING
Control Grid Chassis .1 mf Turn Rotor to 2nd I.F. Pri. & Sec.
455 KC
1st 6BA6 Pin No. 1 Base Full Open
Control Grid Same .1 mf Turn Rotor to 1st I.F. Pri. & Sec.
4.55 KC
6BE6 Pin No. 7 as above Full Open
1st Det.
Control Grid Same .1 mf Turn Rotor to Oscillator C-39
1620 KC
6BE6 Pin No. 7 as above Full Open
External Same 50 mmf Turn Dial to Antenna C-35
1400 KC
Antenna Lead as above 1400 KC.
See Note A
NOTE A-Set pointer at the 1400 KC mark on the dial scale. Attach pointer to drive cord.
FM STAGES
Allow chassis and signal generator to warm up for several minutes. Zero center scale DC vaccum tube voltmeter having a range of
The following equipment is required for aligning: approximately 3 volts.
An accurately calibrated signal generator providing unmodu-
lated signals at the test frequencies listed below.
(If a zero center scale meter is not available, a standard scale
Non-metallic screwdriver.
vacuum tube voltmeter may be used by reversing the meter
Dummy Antennas and 1.F Loading Resistor-.01 mf, 300 ohms
and 100 K ohms. connections for negative readings.)
SIGNAL GENLRAIOR BAND ADJUSTMENT

SWITCH CONDENSER FOR MAX. METER
FREQUENCY CONNECTION AT DUMMY
Discriminator SETTING SETTING DEFLECTION
SETTING RADIO ANTENNA
Disc. Pri.
6BA6 2nd I -F
& Chassis .01 mf FM Rotor to Full Open Note A

10.7 MC Pin 1
mf FM Same as above Cisc. Sec.

10.7 MC Same as above .01
Note B
10.7 MC Same as above .01 mf FM Same as above Disc. Fri.
Same as above .01 mf FM Same as above Disc. Sec.
10.7 MC
Note B
Same as above 2nd I -F Pri.
I -F 10.7 MC 6BA6 1st IF .01 mf FM
Pin & Chassis
1
2nd I -F Sec.
Note C
Unsolder lead from Pin 7 mf FM Same as above 1st I -F Pri.
10.7 MC .01
to band switch. Insert 100K Note C
ohm resistor between Pin
7 & Ground and feed sig-
nal into Pin 7 of 63E6
.01 mf FM Same as above 1st I -F Sec.
10.7 MC Same as above
Note C
RECHECK I -F ADJUSTMENTS IN ORDER GIVEN

300 ohms FM Rotor to Full Open Osc. C 38
Ant. & Osc. 108.4 Disconnect dipole and con-
nett generator to dipole
terminals with resistor in
Note D series.
FM Tune rotor for max. Ant. C-37
104.5 Same as above 300 ohms
AVC voltage
RECHECK ANTENNA & OSC. ADJUSTMENTS IN ORDER GIVEN
FM ALIGNMENT NOTES
megohm resistor (R-14) and its junction with the
the
NOTE A-The zero center scale DC vacuum tube voltmeter is to
1
A.V.C. terminal strip. Adjust for zero voltage indication.

be connected between chassis ground and the
line at the 27 K. ohm resistor (R-11) and its junction with NOTE C-Connect zero center DC vacuum tube voltmeter as in
Note A. Adjust input to give some output on the zero
terminal strip. A signal of .1 volt must Le fed into the center DC vacuum tube voltmeter as in Note A.
receiver for this adjustment. NOTE D-Remove the 100 K ohm load resistor and solder the lead
Note output voltage on the zero center DC vacuum from pin 7 of 6BE6 tube to the band switch before at -
tube voltmeter. tempting to check the antenna and oscillator coil adjust
NOTE B-Disconnect zero center DC vacuum tube voltmeter from
ments.
A.V.C. and connect it to the audio takeoff point at
181
6BE6 6BA6
Am Fn. CONVERTER 6BA6
2ND IF DISCRIMINATOR
5
5r IF TRANS/,m, TRANS./Fm.
/ ...----, 2
.
1
\
N 0 OIA - ...... TRANS 41
!I-- J .7757. -s
'477-.1
DIPOLE. I
100 ."'.10 I
ANTENNA\ 100 7 1 -23 5
I
/ SWITCH
FE'MMF. ' I mmr I 70
1 ND SEC 1
12- .Lmur_r" si _ _I I
INF.
FRONT
i.?, 741M1
E 22 K. li ii.k___(.25 _ ____1
Fit 1-4# 1ST IF TRANIrAm ;71 'j 2ND TRANS. (AMI 5000
CIpK C-3 MAW
To 47 NINE 40..
6 1 II0Ak`
LOOP ANTENNA AM OSC MMF Reif
(AM) Nis
1 II° 5001 68. -410-0Vsn,-
TA°F.4". I
MMF100^C,MMF.
tt ei 0,1 27K.. 'MMF.
OSCrFM, SO.TEN L.
1ST SEC REAR _.1
C> I 15 Mr
0 BA 1200A 11000 MMF MMF
T2700
ro MMF Ir
100k; -571 I MMF
T T
OINF. 39K 1000.
47K. 6800.. 6800.
1 FM
8200,
1200 ft_ 11177) MMF
SWITCH R-14
AHDNO.
15T. SEC.FRONT 1.0 MEG.
SA ircH
<312 N0 SECToN
RE 49
5Y3 05 mr FM 1
. RELY
1400. 1000. AM
RED 4 6 AT6
470K. 2ND DET AVC OUTPUT
POWER PHONO. TRANSFORMER
TO EXTERNAL TRANSFORMER 0.0(:',7CA PHONO 7 450.
ANTENNA 20 INPUT .02 ME.
REDYEL 220
BLACK -YELLOW
1a IMF
r 350 V. 7 40
MF
vr 2ND SECTION
MMF
Mf "350 V.1 FRONT 6

ono:.RED 0.5 MEG. T 7
swircH CONTACT SwtTE:,
NUMBERING TEL CO 68 MMF
VOLUME 11.005
sysre 2 CONTROL MF.
PHONO MOTOR YELLOW 10 MEG.
CAN
SOCKET BLACK 6.3 V 470K.
HEATERS 15K
oC
DR 3 MEG
J .L. TONE
PAINT DOTS .04 MF CONTROL
DIAL
LAMPS z
2 ASI
SWITCH SECTION NOTE,
VIEWED FROM FRONT COIL WINDINGS FOR WHICH NO
OF CHASSIS
4
RESISTANCES ARE SHOWN,HAVE
3
A DC RESISTANCE OF LESS
OSC. COIL THAN 0.1.
FM SEC. ADJ. C-17
CAW MA PRI A0J. ANE. SECTION
c_N
GANG
SEC. ADJ.
LOOP
Socket voltages are shown on the Bottom Socket ANTENNA-, A 1 (AND.
FM DISC.
diagram at the tube socket terminals. All voltages are TRANS.
between the socket terminal and chassis ground. Plate,
screen and cathode voltages were taken with a 1000 A ffit FN SEC. ADJ.
ohm -per -volt meter with a 300 volt scale used for plate
-33 (AM/ mum Fit, ADJ
tekir
FM PRI. ADJ piti ADJ.
and screen voltages. Audio grid voltages were read
AM SEC. ADJ FM PRI. ADJ. AM SEC. ADJ
with a vacuum tube volt -meter. DRIVE
SHAFT
1ST I F. 1ST I. F. 2ND I.F. 2801.F.
TRANS. (AM) TRANS.(EM ) TRANS. (AM) TRANS. (FM
6SG7 6307 65.17/GT
6 SG 7 6SB7Y LIMITER
R F AMP. CONVERTER
5V
CD
220 MM /206 V
0 -3 4:2:: BUM
AV, i:(0'411ALL AR! .2, :::
Ofii0 Z(::::.
owe BLUE I. F TRANS. ss. DISC RIMINATOR 1111811
.clE I.E. TRAMS. BLUE i
016.."0 L 1:1P !NS
S0 i0 TUC
.21,2
iv V 0 ?MC C64'
II1LACK
5'
V
14 CAS
5'
LIO Irt UI
S.C. ANT. COIL CU I vat
0611. El YEI
057 GR L2 (2) ORN
=1 LIN
r LZ2
Ea oce C69
Tfl us
_L0115
, 4
O (C1
0 PIS OFR:
RIS C 4 I
005 eY 401 12,n_IG

C. 200 I
0 S TI- ,. L
11,Y
SW. gi_ce-45 K c 21.,L .1.13 '741712-12N
24rrii tRLD C0 OT
.01 036- .05 CO0 s,
Z
OND. c -g!
MP 0
SAN 41 OIL (c,3,22
"r
0 In N re.
C29 CI
C63 .005 f(0.4t%
P'jCSB
3
Ri .1,13.077--161
.16. ANT MIL 215
ELL
RES L62 Z. 0
220 el
FY 0
L3 6H6/GT 6307 GT
SRC -REAR 6Mr -220
DISCRIMINATOR OFT -vG IOTA
PRASE INVERTER
3 o
0 oo Pb
a AM, a 7, b' 1.1
0 sa.
036 S614
00
SW3 Of 1.1
01
CS 1--1 en
ca 10,
22MPAP Re
59 6
C60
_ VOLUME
CONTROL 1M 0 0 SPEARED 5001ST
pia
053 A513 z RIP TAR AT 5000 Co
10011 TON IN SCHEMATIC " l
TEST d
TNT JACK CONTROL RS -170 rD peed
, N0Tef
I 03,56
GIt
C33
'11% q13:1T rt. MI te.
W ca t --J
t 3 4 5 6
MIAF
RIP T RIP RP SIT EAR
=KT
I 1 I .001 roT.AN.
*Lc ..
6Y6G SPRR
SLUR I
OUTPUT CD
I r, G35 lir
0a E5
G7. 111 SI CSOI GIIII Gilt G.& 0
2
LSO
c -41.443L1'7
LISSJ LSS
v
LS9rL30r L3I
1'.1:
PROMO
ICKUP
P56-56
igstTUNANO
0,0
TE
YS
02
0
6Y6G
0v
OUTPUT
rr
j ova
'1:1x lq
05
CI;
cb-
EA
I
as
-
CD
PUSH BUTTON SWITCH TUNERS 052

`0`;`Iggg, 20 01
R33-100
T RE 00
INPUT 306 I154 v30 RS 0
S CD X 1.A.
SIVITON ON GOA
140V.
A.G. INPUT VOLUME CONTROL 0 3, CA I
262 A -C U4G 20 ST0 0
AL DA
aki, I. RECT
0 A.C. POWER P2-13
SOCKET 29202 C OVIe CAOMFD
ct
Vi17211 RS- 00 0 -3 0,4
oki
TO ALL HEATERS E. SOF T .51146 RECT. co :4
PILOT EMPS Cr> I
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCIES in
NOTES - A.M.- I.F. - 455 K.C.
SPEATER Pt uG 11E1E0,0
2 VOICE COIL DISCONNEC TED F.M.-1.F. -10.7 M.G.
4,0f NS EOUNPER-CL OCKTUSE OR PIR51 P051,00. I Li RAND
3 521,2C21 2 3 5 6 718 5NOWN
SECOND OS1T.ON CLOCK AuSE -111LouL BAND
TRIR0 1,061,0 CLOCKWISE -ec eo
ROM 005,10n GLOCAT/i5E SLIP RANO
E TN POSIT ION CEOCKWi5E - PROMO CO
5*,C1165 ROLA, 60. BETWEEN P05,10115 ARE 1.10V/11 AS Tip wE D PROM RON` OP 5E1
AL L vOi TLE 5 MP AE,LREO PROM CR53.3 KOMI 10,000 ORM, VOLT MEIER
El V RAND
LINE TOL TGE v St T 'PIRG T RO 511;NAL COR01,10.5 TOR
c PA" OLUME CONTROL St
E 4 3 2
0.1f0 Li 0 Li 0 0. 0
R46
R28 L28
Cl2 L31 L30 L29 L27 L26
1 - 4 24
IWIRRI F- TOP LUG

S-DOTT LUG
F -L6
S -L8
R8
IILLIJI LIAM L3
MI III IIII M F -L7
DI 0 67613 P8 COILS mil

C39 _ova JJ SW. ANT. TRIM.
C C G C59 FM. ANT. TRIM et
Rfa 1 C22
44:S1 C58
I RI2 057 W4 BC ANT. TRIM.
1 CA
C35 SW R F. TRIM.
R2 84 C23
R22
Ain
C604. 14 FM. RF. TRIM.
R31 C36 io
miromm)
1:176D
SW5 C48
R42 7 BC. RF. TRIM.
163. CI7 R25
R
I; C. C. §3877 T F - LIPS
JMMY C51
R20 C21 VC> LUG
C. C. C 083
101 R
:; DIU R39 BC. OSC. TRIM.
CII A SW7 1C413147... BC. OSC. PAD.
.
- RIO aN.
R38
II110 RI 0 R30
R21 CIO ,4aaDirl a Al
-,
R29 II: R4 1141101116,:h. ji
R37 C38 1.11 CSI FM. OSC. TRIM.
rkg 11161C2 C56
O 0 T.1/414111e2.- .
O O 0 0 e *re ltD)
ono 0
C4 G45
0 0
00
R13
00
0 0
00
0
Val
\ C74,\11.
C82
S R44 C13
SWB LI
LBW OSC TRIM
O ,6) RI5 64,
C43 ILI
UgLyil 5H8/6 I 41,117/
cif C3I RI I C)
5U46 gSiliG F 7
'07-'3 Lei Q. R33 aIISTIF
ek
1,1045BL CC e_sima2D.VIF *Ito
O TRANS C. C..
B 0 rm 0 CI5
CI4
RED 0 \--20 4,4
CC CTRANSp C
a
{C.
RI8 00 R35
10
R
°2: C C
A ol. ]'t.
17 -77 R27
O
BLUES
4,4 PTRANS.0
C42 0
11111In
44 VD TRANS
DISCRIMINATOR
OR8
C 9
R32
l'iWt611
AC POWER INPUT SPEAKER SOCKET 1;io "cictz,rgair lzwr
FM TEST JACK PHONO JACK
PHONO POWER SOCKE T
Westinghouse RADIO . TELEVISION

POWER OUTPUT:
Undistorted
Maximum
14 walla
25 watts
FREQUENCY RANGES: POWER SUPPLY RATING: 105-120 volts, 50-60 cycles A -C

Standard Broadcast 550 to :700 kc.
International Short Wave 5 0 to 18.0 ma POWER CONSUMPTION (radio sect. only): 175 watts
Frequency Modulation 88 to 108 mc.
ALIGNMENT BROADCAST AND SHORT WAVE BANDS

AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Connect an output meter across the speaker voice coil.
With the volume control set for maximum output and the signal from the generator attenuated
to avoid A.V.C. action, proceed as follows:
Connect Signal Signal Generator Radio Dial
Step Generator to- Frequency Setting Adjust
1 Set Phono-Band switch to "BC"
2 65G7, 2nd I -F, control grid 455 kc 550 kc 455 kc secondary and primary trimmers
through a 0.1 mid capac- of 3rd I -F transformer for maximum output.
itor
3 6SG7, let I -F, control grid 455 kc 550 kc 455 kc secondary and primary trimmers
through a 0.1 mid. capac- of 2nd I -F transformer for maximum output.
itor
4 6SB7Y, converter, control 455 kc 550 ke 455 kc secondary and primary trimmers of
grid through a 0.1 add ea- 1st I -F transformer for maximum output.
pacitor
5 65B7Y, converter, control 455 kc 550 kc carefully "peak" all 455 kc I -F trans -
grid through a 0.1 mid ea- former trimmers for maximum output.
pacitor
6 BC antenna terminal 800 kc 600 kc BC oscillator padder for maximum output.
through a 200 mmf capac-
itor
7 BC antenna termina1 1600 kc 1600 kc BC oscillator trimmer for maximum output.
through a 200 mmf capac-
itor
Re -check steps 6 and 7
9 Radiated signal (no con- I_ 1400 kc 1400 kc BC 11-F and ANT trimmers for maximum
nection) output.
10 Set Phono-Band switch to "S.W."
11 SW antenna terminal 18.0 me 18.0 Inc SW oscillator trimmer for maximum out -
through a 400 ohm resistor put.
NOTE: If the signal is heard at two dif-
ferent trimmer settings, the one nearest
minimum capacity is correct-the other is
the image.
12 Radiated signal (no con- 16.0 me 16.0 me SW 11-F and ANT trimmers for maximum
nection) output.
Itilli
I A 3 3 6
CHASSIS LAYOUT
.
cst CO3
WO Pi OT LSP
4e 44 1.'L°' 41P G75 C19 coo cal
TRIM
L 2.. G 04 L .
... . -
-,. _--
------
M
-C33 410 INS" 100 PC
4.000...
-c S 0 6E5 114 it
- POWER '''.1!'11
...."'.
=MA -05'
-G54
4rip 10 !, i .
0
.
_.5, 6407 6407
,
_____ -can 65.17

/GT GT OT
- r
,a,- ....
mia anir. Aft an, .I. 1

::
6S./7 SG
GT 1,
114# I 11
-,
OP
INSC1011NAT011
10-7160
55 KGfe 455 KC
H-116 H-117
455 KG P
MAHOGANY WALNUT
10.755 10 75C DISCROMMATOR
i0.711G
0 TEST JACK
ent) PWORO. JACK LE AC. PROMO

0
185
5
6685U SPKR. SOCKET 0 UNI C4415

il/Ve3Iinghou3e electric MODELS H-113, H-114, H-116, H-117 AND H-119
F. M. BAND
FREQUENCY MODULATION
Connect a 20,000 ohms -per -volt or Vacuum Tube Voltmeter between the Discriminator Test
Jack and the chassis.
With the volume control set for maximum output and the signal from the generator attenuated
to avoid A.V.C. action, proceed as follows:
Step Connect Signal Signal Generator Radio Dial Adjust
Generator to- Frequency Setting
1 Set Phono-Band switch to "F.M."
2 Detune secondary trimmer of discriminator transformer.
3 6SG7, 2nd I -F, control grid UNMODULATED 88 me 10.7 me primary trimmer of 3rd I -F trans.
through a .01 mid mica 10.7 mc for maximum voltage.
capacitor
4 6SG7, 1st I -F, control grid UNMODULATED 88 mc 10.7 mc secondary and primary trimmers
through a .01 mfd mica ca- 10.7 mc of 2nd I -F trans. for maximum voltage.
pacitor
5 Fixed plates of the FM UNMODULATED 88 me 10.7 mc secondary and primary trimmers
converter tuning capacitor 10.7 mc of 1stI -F transformer for maximum volt -
through a .01 mid mica ca- age.
pacitor
6 Fixed plates of the FM UNMODULATED 88 mc carefully "peak" all 10.7 me I -F trimmers
converter tuning capacitor 10.7 me for maximum voltage.
through a .01 mfd mica
capacitor
7 FM antenna terminal UNMODULATED 105 mc FM oscillator trimmer for maximum volt -
through a non -inductive 105 me age.
300 ohm resistor
8 FM antenna terminal UNMODULATED 105 me FM R -F and ANT trimmers for maximum
through a non -inductive 105 mc voltage.
300 ohm resistor
9 Fixed plates of the FM UNMODULATED 88 mc Primary trimmer of discriminator trans -
converter tuning capacitor 10.7 mc former for maximum voltage.
through a .01 mid mica ca-
pacitor
10 Fixed plates of the FM UNMODULATED 88 mc Secondary trimmer of discriminator trans -
converter tuning capacitor 10.7 me former for zero voltage. The voltage will
through a .01 mid mica ca- change polarity as the trimmer is tuned
pacitor through resonance. Tune carefully for
zero voltage.
11 Re -check steps 9 and 10.
PUSH BUTTONS
Push buttons to 3 are designed to receive stations
1 4. Adjust C78 for maximum receiver output (either
from 900 to 1600 kc; push buttons 4 to 6 are designed to a station or static will be heard depending on the
receive stations from 540 to 900 kc. setting of L26). Now adjust L26 until the desired
Refer to CHASSIS LAYOUT drawing for location of station is heard. It will be necessary to re -adjust
push button adjusters, and then proceed as follows: C78 at intervals to maintain maximum output.
1. Turn on radio and allow it to warm up for five 5. Make a final adjustment of L26 for proper tuning
minutes. and C78 for maximum output.
2. Set the Phono-Band switch on -BC,- and tune in 6. Return the band switch to "B. C." to make certain
the desired station in the frequency range 900 to that the push button has been set to the desired
1600 kc.
station.
3. Re -setthe Phono-Band switch on -P.B.-, and de-
press the first push button (right button viewed 7. Adjust the remaining push buttons in the same
from the front). manner.
TENSION SPRING
III,
.---- II4 c
41ir
4,
14
0
..... C.
z.:7:11,11.11111110- 2 TURNS -0- ....
-.. to
OK
.0. POINTER
186 DIAL DRIVE MECHANISM

Westin ghouse RADIO
11-161
.
11-168 and H -168A
TELEVISION
MAHOGANY AND BLONDE MAHOGANY AND BLONDE
ALIGNMENT
BROADCAST BAND -AMPLITUDE MODULATION
Connect an output meter across the speaker voice coil.
While making the following adjustments, keep the volume control set for maximum output, the tone
control set on treble, and the signal generator output attenuated to avoid AVC action.
Connect Signal Signal Radio Adjust for Maximum Output
Step Generator to- Gen. Freq. Dial
1. Set Phono-Band Switch to "AM"
2. 6BA6, 2nd I -F, control grid 455 kc 540 kc 455 kc primary trimmer of 3rd 1-F transformer.
through a 0.1 mId capacitor
3. 6BA6, 1st I -F, control grid 455 kc 540 kc 455 kc primary and secondary trimmers of 2nd
through a 0.1 mid capacitor I -F trans.
4. 6J6, converter, control grid 455 kc 540 kc 455 kc primary and secondary trimmers of 1st
through a 0.1 mid capacitor I -F trans.
5. 6J6, converter, control grid 455 kc 540 kc Peak all 455 kc I -F transformer trimmers.
through a 0.1 mid capacitor
6. Radiated signal (no actual 1600 kc 1600 kc AM oscillator trimmer.
connection)
7. Radiated signal 600 kc 600 kc AM antenna padder.
8. Radiated signal 1400 kc 1400 kc AM antenna trimmer.
9. Recheck steps 7 and 8 in order given. "Rock" tuning capacitor while adjusting AM antenna trimmer.
FM BAND -FREQUENCY MODULATION

Do not align the 10.7 mc I -F circuits until all 455 kc I -F adjustments have been completed.
Connect Signal Signal Radio Adjust -
Step Generator to- Gen. Freq. Dial
1. Set Phono-Band switch to -rm.-
2. Connect a vacuum tube voltmeter between point X (see Figs. 3 and 4) and ground (chassis).
6BA6, 2nd I -F, control grid Unmodulated 88 mc 10.7 mc primary and secondary of 3rd I -F
3. trans. and primary of discriminator trans. for
through a .001 mid mica 10.7 mc
capacitor max. voltage.
Unmodulated 88 mc 10.7 mc primary and secondary of 2nd I -F
4. 6BA6, 1st I -F, control grid
through a' .001 mid mica 10.7 mc trans. for max. voltage.
capacitor
Stator of FM tuning capacitor Unmodulated 88 mc 10.7 mc primary and secondary of 1st I -F
5. trans. for max. voltage.
(C42) through a .01 mid mica 10.7 mc
capacitor
6. Connect the vacuum tube voltmeter between point Y (Figs. 3 and 4) and chassis.
Stator of FM tuning capacitor Unmodulated 88 mc Secondary of discriminator trans. for zero
7.
(C42) through a .01 mid mica 10.7 mc voltage. The voltage will change polarity as
the trimmer is tuned through resonance. Tune
capacitor carefully for zero voltage.
8. Connect the vacuum tube voltmeter between point X and chassis.
Unmodulated 88 mc Primary of discriminator trans. for max. volt -
9. Stator of FM tuning capacitor age.
(C42) through a .01 mid mica 10.7 mc
capacitor FM oscillator trimmer for max. voltage.*
FM antenna terminal through Unmodulated 105 mc
19.
a 72 ohm non -inductive re- 105 mc
sistor for max. voltage -
FM antenna terminal through Unmodulated 105 mc FM antenna trimmer
11. "rock" tuning capacitor while adjusting.
a 72 ohm non -inductive re- 105 mc
sistor
12. Check dial calibration and tracking at 90 mc."
the outside drum
The FM oscillator and antenna trimmers can be adjusted by using the thumb and forefinger to rotate 1st I -F trans. can.
of the capacitor. Hand capacity effects may be reduced by holding the heel of the hand against the
After the radio has been aligned at 105 mc., check calibration by tuning to a 90 mc. signal from the generator. If the
dial pointer indicates 90 mc., no further adjustments are necessary. If the pointer is on the high frequency side of 90 mc.,
and repeat steps 10, 11, and 12 above until dial calibration is correct.
slightly compress the length of oscillator coil (L6) slightly If
the pointer is on the low frequency side of 90 mc., expand the length of oscillator coil (L6) and repeat steps 10, 11,
and 12 until dial calibration is correct.
After calibration has been checked and the antenna circuit has been "peaked" at 105 mc., check the antenna circuit
tracking by tuning to a 90 mc. signal and rotating theIfFM antenna trimmer. If the "peak" setting is the same at 90 mc. as it
was at 105 mc., no further adjustments are necessary. coil the trimmer capacitance must be increased to obtain maximum out-
put at 90 mc., slightly compress the length of antenna (L3) and repeat steps 11 and 12 until correct tracking is obtained.
If the trimmer capacitance must be decreased to obtain maximum output at 90 mc., slightly expand the length of antenna
coil (L3) and repeat steps 11 and 12 until correct tracking is obtained.
187
WWI SOCKET
R1110111 taINK.3.1 OMR 1.0111'11:

MOOTS 457.1,00
PORTEN 40.
FIG. 1-CHASSIS LAYOUT F3

FIG 2-DIAL DRIVE MECHANISM
,1445011
-'4x0w0
cowntc7 00
10 F .0 floc
FIG. 3-BOTTOM VIEW OF CHASSIS

12.& 68A6
OSC -CONVERTER
44 I4 0000
CH 4311*
02I 10044444
22 USES '400.4W
1E1F TR
013mrsATOR TRAMS
L1 0 isi 161-311
C2T - -
ewe
it
OUT POT S.54.33
C511
L24 110
LOOP
IN< LEECSI IFF0.1 I
L IS.NAA-s/50 4.031
C47 151 *0 St
;;,g, 50
.4 NT 343-3,
V.; Mom
.1100 Rai II Ilt01412 \WZOIFFiF
c) LJ
ii 01
007 10T- St7 wf 013 0111
1004441 1.244 3300,, PPOIINTT
'Mt WNW
SPKR
RP3 *OK 43 33., SOCWT
2114441 AL.
CIS 015
*MOW 6AT6 001
WAY T
WET *ASK. " ..! OUTS.
c( Dos
*LAW CONTSCa.
-CC;2;
-1- CONTIWIL sw3
1205 TONE RI ..
111 3.0
PO nivs,
c /33 C6.03
PII0140 SSP
CZ*
GOWIWOR 11
pss, FANG
Lr111/4 31 WT.
ON 10011mt COMM.
"pxT
3 WS
MAT
. 7- C35
306S0 3051F1)
CCWO RORER AC SLR
33
:1 51 3
PILOT LOWS--
SRN
IC 44 PILOT L 211P ,61.5 0tet1e3 ExCIFI 5334
TUNER RSV.'
31344 ASV,
NOTES
I SCIACTCS SWITCH SHOWS IN 1 MEW 004155111 CLOCKWISE 0051100 IFS HANOI
5100140 POSITION 560c61.151 IS OS YHO t ALL VOLTAGES 01135u1t0 Ms CHASSIS Isnal 05. 20,000 OWS/POLT WIETOT - LINE POLTARE
Trove POSITION CLOCKWISE Is now. vOLTAWS SHOULD RE AS SHOWS 'I CO PERCENT !IT vC
3 SPEAKER PLUS 0E50010
vOlGt COIL 05000010110
FIG. 4-SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

O co C-1 MODELS 12H090 -12H091 -12H092 -12H093 -12H094
ct (D CD Co
P. CHASSIS No. 11C21
IA
0'ct0 0
1- ct ssAt6Joss Ass -sus,. Fs (3, .1.
0s 6'> VC.
., Otostga 4C. 10 6. 'AK 0 to,Tv
O P' 0 A, 4.00 -(21-i0. rs1,4 so0Ac 045,,C ASS.,oo TO.00 ^
,13
co 0 4
0 01,041 vit. , fs' S8GT
ato 10 0 0 Tut. SvCAE TS LL vOLTALES PEAEO mos
6AG5 uin TO P011 7W7 6SH7 DISCRIMINATOR
ct RF 0ICATEC grin AS C0 c OP 6S87 6SG7/GT
LIMITER A V.C,DET In AUDIO a
.0 CuUs TUSE vOLTSIETEP. CONVERTER 220. I F
(D Ca el-
St 265
I--$ (-I' ct 0. 00 cg,P4-1,1J-4.
co I i TRAPS
OeLinG
0 le Ph S
sq sr SPANS
. S:A.0C
Co
000
11.3OC7 2s.tor XL.
0 ,
.4. r;
§CD Co (I)ct
M CP P.
I I
Co m0
0 CO
la* It ro
00 CD I-' 0 100. XIS
O 0 CD A-NrYsT171: 110%
1St. UAL
Stsr,
la 0 0 1i0iar
at
1- or 01
.00
Lri. en Ria
2200 2010 POO Ih
2' Cs
ct Po. m 1113 ,A,S Sit
100 ie 220111
3 CO Sr SSIA
t- co a 0ses
TA"' -
0 vir .M1. CDR 20
1-1> c0
IF can
0. ct, ,C,C
o to 1--$ CD
/1 0 1-1 OCSITSOL
0100 PIS
CO
L, bD PIS
i0 n 1123 Yir !ctn.
MON 2201A C 2520_02
LS 104
CO Ca Sc. OSC- c
utocica tirc -
12 Au.° TO II Sul., ColASSIS
ct o r iF
F.. a o LS _ C
6J5GT 6V6GT
o C VMS Cif INVERTER PWR. AMP
r
laPO C AUTO SI -I- '1- '1' -r
_ SAS LO SASS ,EOMMAI.
pNom co co
CEPSca Tois_[ vOICA ALTO
Swots> Cunt. ions) K.., i11,41
62 T,142 ,WITCH
I! 0 zz 005 1125 -.333
cr 6ALTGT
Gat 0. TUNING EYE
NOT: CPAs.
1-0 VI
m cl .1:14TERIPHIPA ENO OP
15 tc MONO SOVIET
r r SI-40 mol
go a05 Ct
L.* 440110
SUPPLY 4
H0OIAE920
I-' 0 0 210
tt2IN
"4 CD
t- SIL L
chHct TOP ntso
0 1- Ct Of
YMt SIPTCP Si SHOW I. !Ai POS. EN PS MC POSEN
SOCKET Ni
4.1 POI Flo ASIA C
toPPOS FM 100111C SOWED
a '<I
O0 PD MAD SWATCH POSITS. "SAO, UOATC
OS FOS Slt. BTIOSOCASS
S OS
iiPOS P40.
{SIAM tsiisTC), 0.
AM.{ COPTIAC
ALL 400101,111ASS -PAPER Yrs
Ass Ottitrots !SO% 104.2,,AKE liticAsscAnAscse20, Us. 10,AGES AN DC uMA.[fI. OTEAWISE SPIV.
usLESS OTASIEVOSE SPECIE r[0.
ID
ZENITH RADIO CORPORATION rn
DIG
-
NO 0E5066161,0N
_.___PART
MODELS 12H090 -12H091 -12H092 -12H093 -12H094 CI 27:+5-6T. 5 -GANG VARIABLE
22-1502 25 MMFO.CCR. 500v.
504 . 0 mATID. CER. 500 v.
CHASSIS No. 11C21 C4 ON CI BROADCAST ANT. TRIM
is 221506 2261,0 CLR
06 2 Fm ANTENNA TRIM.
50 MFO. 300V.
.
--71,?f, .
2 "2R-Am
-,,CiFt7iVIIIIMMEN
The 11C21 chassis incorporates a superheterodyne circuit CII 2 508 55603F0 CER, 5009
012 22-196 .01100. 6009 0
with two stages of IF, and one stage of BF amplification on 063 22-1505 17MMi0 CER. 5000
all hands. C.,. p_.6.44 FM DET. TRIMMER
AM Alignment: The alignment of this chassis on the short OSC S W :1: tO2!IC5'02 r:.'::::%,".L.TRRI"
MC CIT ON CI BROADCAST 05C.TRIM.
wave and standard broadcast band is conventional. The align- CIO 22-1347114FD.CL 500V.
ment slugs in the IF transformers are threaded and screw into 069 22- 669,001 TAFITINCA 600 V. 0
C20 221509 52 1014,0 CCP 500,
C21
the coil forms. The slugs are slotted for a small size fiber 27-47 475 MIFF0.411CA DISC
screw driver. Do not press hard on the aligning tool (fiber 022 12-151. F.M. 06C. TRIMMER
023 22.111F9 .05 NFL, WO*
screw driver) or the threads in the coil forum will strip and yme. I. F TRANS CON 72-142 JOOMMFD.M1CA 4009
Lao l.F TRANS
L23, L-24 45500 L-14, L213 4554C. 520 02-430 c02 MFO. SOOT.
adjustment will be impossible. L2I, L22 6 3 MC L17, L18 SSMC_ CON 2I II3M 00.84.F0 MICA 6009
FM RF Alignment: The same coil slug arrangement which L21 ° MICA "o V -
L22 122-171
COTC24- 05M"F"OF
.")° 600V.
tunes the 100 MC FM band also tunes the 45 MC band. However, on C29 21-1552 .004 WO. 6004.
LI* C50 6009
45 MC the band switch connects trimmer condensers in 22-440 .004 Mr0210%
parallel CSI 22-o27 .025,5. AOCV.
and padding wires in series with the 100 MC coils. The tuning COT 2Z -tag_ 0116IFO. 4009
slugs are attached to threaded shafts and the slugs are varied 50.21,13.7). MICA
600v. OD
6SB7 ,C;.! 2,0z --2s: 2009.
in the field of the coils by turning the shafts clockwise or F TRANS.
4.7C-13, I L -I5, L -i6 4550C - MS 22-242 750m.AFOrACA 5009.
counter -clockwise. After adjustments the shafts must be secur- L -13, L-44 S.) MC TYT22,
OSC.FM 146.10,_SILVER MICA CO
ed with a drop of speaker cement. 45 MC. G!4 22-1041 0054!0 4009
019 22-6237 . 03-AFF0 1000 V
FM IF Alignment: The same type of tuning slugs for align- l\LM 0 MFOALEGT143 450V
C
12- ., '71
L5 OCT FM 30 MOO. 450v.
ing the AM IF Amplifier are used for the FM I.F.'s. Observe 98 MG. G42 22-1)84 .02 MFD. 2009
the same precautions when making adjustments. The second 8.3
SW CANT%) SAGS 4540.
Mc IF stage is overcoupled. Overcoupling gives a wide band 6SEIGT 1E7 MC
CO L3 ANT. FM 63'607 15410RM
pass with good sensitivity. When an overcoupled stage is align- SW ANT
-0 IM MO. FL 63-715 600M OHM W
.5 MC ANT FM R3 43.485 825 ORM /2 W.
ed with an unmodulated signal, the stage must be loaded. A 300 RE 63.14413 R.
6AL7ST 4540. 5400_004
ohm carbon resistor soldered across the secondary of the second RS 63 -223 4722 .9DM_____ NTT
"ON -OFF" SWITCH 116 65-712 55M06413
IF transformer provides a satisfactory load for this circuit. a VOLUME BAND SWITCH TUNING 7 65.510 164 OHM
4*
29F cl,
The resistor leads must be kept short to reduce the R8 63.5/9 220 Dow WW.
distribut- 10.0 OHM NSW
ed capacity of the circuit. RIO 600 2.2 MLGONM 144W.
piI 63.9E0 RIM OHM *
When aligning a loaded stage, it will be found that con- RIO 65,446 1200 OHM 2W. cp
013 63-592
355 OHM 611
siderable signal from the generator will be required, and that R14 63-1447 1204 ORM /2W
it will tune broadly. i LOAD RESISTOR MUCT BE REMOVED AFTER Pit, 65-403 22000/161 I,ezw.
tri
RIG 63-296 22011 C//61 1/421
ALIGNMENT. 417 (63-)40 lOOM OHM 1,62
- C.
If the signal generator used does not have sufficient out- MIS 63-160 M OHM T.:45
put to overcome the temporary loss caused by the load resistor, RIP 63-979 I3 MCGONN ..44,69.
LEI 63 515 100M OHM 1NW
the load resistance may be increased or the signal fed into the 6 1 2 .25.411.0LIOL . CONTROL
LEI w
preceding stage. 154 OIIM
CO:1 3-501 4,4' 0
FM Discriminator Alignment: When the secondary of the R24 63-441 IMEOONM YT W.
R2S 63-)665394 0042 /4 vo.
discriminator is aligned (operation 9) use sufficient signal 424 55-595 2200 OHM --WIL
input to get a good positive and negative AUDIO a POWER SUPPLY 427 3-645 47M OHM 9.1,7
indication before 16 471 X I yo.
setting the slug for zero reading. A center zero indicating Rt. 65-657 330M OHM 1/440
A30 43.397 470M OHM 1/441
meter is recommended for this adjustment, but is not absolutely 31 - on 200 0.1114PRUROUNOtva
necessary, Reversing the leads of a non -zero center meter, or U343-00 0-- 4,45
IRA 3-1114 120 DIFM- 3W.
observing closely when this meter starts to go to the left TUBE AND TRIMMER LOCATION 41
(negative) of zero will give the same results.
ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Connect Dummy Input Signal Set Dial
Opera- Purpose
Oscillator to Antenna Frequency Band To Adi.Trimmers
Lion Align I.F. channel for CO C)
Pin 8 on Converter 455 Kc. L15,16,19,20,23 ct
and 24 maximum output (0 0 in 0
Tube 6SB7 socket .05 Mfd. Modulated BC 600 Kc. cr
1 O Co
455 Kc. Preee any but- Adjust wavetrap to
Pin 1 on R.F. tube
Modulated Aut. ton on Auto. C10 minimum Ct 93 5 Ii
2 6AG5 socket .05 Mfd.
Set oscillator to dial ¢5 6-4
2 Turns loosely 1600 Kc. C) .13 CO fl ct of
Modulated BC 1600 Kc. C17 scale
-
3 coupled to wavemag.
O CD r o '10
2 turns loosely 1400 Kc.
Align det. and ant. stages. ctp ct f --'z <
Modulated BC 1400 Kc. Cl, & C4 y7 1-"
4 coupled to wavemag.
400 11.7 Mc. ,
Set oscillator to dial
Antenna Poet (Re-
C16 scale J c t-
ohms Modulated SW 11./ Mc.
move line any , Cn
5
Antenna Poet Re- 400 11.7 Mc. CO: ct CCD N 13
ohms Modulated SW 11.7 Mc. C9 Align ant. stagp
6 move line ant,)
rD CD
Align ant. stage Repeat H00
7 cr a:
Antenna Poet (Re- 400 9.7 Mc. ct- :3
SW c8 Oper. 6 for MAIL= autDit
move line ohms Modulated 9.7 Mc,
7
FM L25 coil slug Align primary of discrimin- coc) 09' 3 cri
on
Pin 4 gridant.a7 8.3 Mc.
etor for maximum reading O 0" 1-3 D (.0
limiter socket .05 Mfd. Unmodulated r 45 _primary disc. CD
8 (a) 3
8.3.Mc. FM L26 coil slug sec. Adjust secondary of discr. ct ct- CD CD
Pin 4 grid on 68E7
.05 Mfd. Unmodulated 45 of diecr. for zero reading CD 0 H -0
9 (b) limiter socket o ct 0 0 cr
L21 & L22 prim. &
Pin 6 (grid) on ct 0 0 glo 0' P.
7W7 2nd IF tube 8.3 Mc. FM eec. of 3rd IF Align 3rd IF transformer (I)
.05 Mfd. Unmodulated 45 transformer for maximum reading

10 (c) socket N (0 CO co p3
Pin 4 (grid) on L17 & L18 prim. & ct O En 0-43
8,3 Mc. FM eec. of 2nd IF Align 2nd IF transformer 1-.
11 (c) 6SG7 let IF tube
45 transformer tor maximum reading cn 0 to CD 0
(d) eocket .05 Mfd, Unmodulated CA 0 Gu
Pin 8(grid)on 6SB7 L13 & L14 prim. & ci)
FM eec. of let IF Align let IF transformer CD H-0
12 (c) converter tube 8.3 Mc. OH
45 for maximum reading c
socket .05 Mfd, Unmodulated transformer Cc.
(d) co* Ci
270 98 Mc. FM 98 Mc. L10 Oec. coil Set oscillator to CD PD
Antenna Post (re-
ohms Unmodulated 100 Slug dill Scale Sa.cc cl 0 (0-, 0
13 (c) move line ant.) F-' CD t-0
270 98 Mc. FM 98 Mc. L5 and L3 Det, Align &et. and Ant.
Antenna Poet (Re- t-1 ct H* CD
move line ant.) ohms Unmodulated 100 and RF coil stage to maximum ct 0 ct ct
slugs reading 1-'
14 (c) ct 0 ct 0 0 CD
Antenna Poet (re- 270 45 Mc. FM 45 Mc, C22 Set oscillator to o
h-
move line ant.) ohms Unmodulated 45 dial scale O OCD co
15 (c)
Antenna Poet (re- 270 45 Mc. FM 45 Mc, 014 and c6 Align detector and 1-* COrt
u) '1.1 0 <
move line ant.) ohms Unmodulated 45 ant. stages for CD 1-4 CD
maximum reading
16 (c) 3
A vacuum tube voltmeter with an isolation resistor of 200,000 ohms In series with the hot lead will
serve for FM adjustments. This lead must be shielded. ss
An ordinary AC output meter connected across the primary or secondary of the output transformer will Ci
be satisfactory for all AM adjustments.
The signal generator output should be kept just high enough to get an indication on the meter.
(a) Vacuum Tube Voltmeter pin 5 on discriminator transformer to chassis (half discriminator load.)
(b) Vacuum Tube Voltmeter pin 7 on discriminator transformer to chassis (full discriminator load).
(c) Vacuum Tube Voltmeter 65E7 limiter grid (pin 4 to chassis).
(d)300 ohm watt carbon resistor soldered across the secondary L18 (pin 2 and 3 of 2nd IF trans.).
W The leads to the resistor must be as short as possible and the resistor removed before operation
ask 13 is started.
INDEX
Reference is made to the first page where
material for the particular model begins.
Admiral Corp. Majestic Radio R.C.A. Victor

7C73 5 8807D 93 KCS 20A 153
9A1 5 8FM776 93 RK-121 145
12826E 97 RS -123 145
Airline 12FM475 97 610V1 141
748R -1812A 105 12FM778 97 610V2 141
12FM779 97 RC -610C 141
Bendix Aviation 41201 97 612V1 145
847-B 13 612V3 145
Meissner Mfg. Co. 630TS 153
Crosley Corp. 9-1091A, -B 101
86CR 21 Sparks-Withington
SECS 21 Midwest Radio see Sparton
87Cq 21 R-12 102
88TA 18 RGT-12 102 Sparton
08TC 18 RT-12 102 10 -76 -PA 163
146CS 29
Montgomery Ward Stewart -Warner
Du Mont Laboratories 74BR-1812A 105 A72T1 171
RA -101 33 A72T2 171
Motorola, Inc. A72T3 171
Emerson Radio TS -3 125 A72T4 171
528 47 HS -38 109 T-711 175
537 51 HS -39 109 9026A to -D 171
120038 47 VT -71 125
120043 51 77FM21 114 Stromberg-Carlson
77FM22 114 1210 169
Espey Mfg. Co. 77FM23 114
7-B 54 77XM21 121 Truetone
77XM22, -B 121 see Western Auto
Farnsworth Television HS -89 114
GK -140 to 144 55 95F31, -B, -M 109 Western Auto
GV-220 59 95F33 109 D1752 177
GV-240 59 HS -97 114 D1846 101
GV-260 59 VK-101 125
HS -102 121 Westinghouse Electr.
Galvin H-113 183
see Motorola Olympic Radio H-114 183
7-925 135 H-116 183
7-934 135 H-117 183
General Electric H-118
417A 7-936 135 183
63
801 7-939 135 H-119 183
69
H-161 187
Packard -Bell H -168,-A 187
Howard Radio 872 137
472AC, -AF 91 Zenith Radio
472C, -F 91 Pilot Radio 11C21 189
474 89 T-601 139 12H090 to -094 189
192
_Another
Supreme Puilicationo
Radio Root
Supreme Publications are Sold by All Leading Radio Jobbers

Beitman 1947 FM TV

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Beitman 1947 FM TV

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Most -Often - Needed

This manual has a two -fold purpose.

As always, it is the object of

All rights reserved,

Preface 2 Motorola, Inc.

Crosley Corporation Models VT-71,VK-101 using

87CQ, & Revised 86CR,8605 21-28 Olympic Radio & Television

Model RA -101 33-46 Packard -Bell Co.

Model 801 69-88 Stromberg-Carlson Tel. Mfg. Co.

Model 74BR-1812A . . . 105-108 Index 192

changers, improve audio response. Practical

4 Giant manual. Wt. 31/2 lbs. Price only

FM ALIGNMENT POINTER SETTING

Fig. 6. Receiver Tilt -Out Mounting

67.5 IAC. 10E5 MC.

ADMIRAL FREQUENCY MODULATION CIRCUIT

C tional Discriminator Due to the function of a limiter (which is essentially a class

ADMIRAL 9A1 R ECEIVER CIRCUIT

POWER SUPPLY OSC.

COILS, TRANSFORMERS, ETC.

W t0 COILS, TRANS.,ETC., Cont.

R18... 2,200 Ohms, 1 Watt 60B 14-222

With the gang closed, the lower edge of the pointer

FM IF AND RATIO DETECTOR ALIGNMENT

SETTING SIGNAL GENERATOR TO

fa °ea ida '12b

Controls - -The various controls are shown in the above drawing.

CIRCUITS USED ON EARLY MODELS

TERM *5 -45 PAW

ALL CAPACITANCE IN WHOLE

1-- R27 R28 .006 C30

1ST IF FM SIGNAL TEST JACK

TEST CIRCUIT FOR FM ALIGNMENT 30 vALUE OF TO BE

GND SIDE OR CHASSIS

F.M. DUMMY ANTENNA

Gen. Dummy Gen. To Band Sw. Pointer Special VTVM

* See Fig. "Test Circuit for FM Alignment".

Ant coil is checked and adjusted exactly like RF coil.

SET POINTER TO THIS MARK

16 ALIGNMENT REFERENCE POINTS

[Ai SIGNAL AKY

NOR : SGMAL mAT PE TAKEN 'ROM

Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 17

TO EXT. ANT. INTERLOCK PINS TO

CHASSIS TOP VIEW SHOWING ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

1 AM 455 100 Mixer Grid AM Open A&B Single See Note 1

AM 1400 220 Loop AM 1400 kc. D Above See Note 1.

4 FM 10.7 30 2nd I.F. Grid FM Closed E See Notes 1, 3, 4. 5 & 6

5 FM 10.7 30 1st I.F. Grid FM Closed F See Notes 3, 5 & 6.

FM 10.7 30 F.M. Ant. FM Closed G See Notes 3, 5 & 6.

9 If Trimmer (J) in Step 8 is turned more than % turn, repeat Step 7.

10 Repeat Step 8 if Step 9 was necessary.

11 FM 98.0 *78 F.M. Ant. FM 98 mc. K Adjust for maximum out

Model 86CR-Walnut Cabine,t

300 25.5 SEC. ADJ.1 25 0 LINK AD T ADJUST. N

5.0 clime Switch in FM aoslhon.

Ist 0 C1LLATON GNI WOOS 101 P411

SOCKET VOLTAGE CHART SHOWING BOTTOM ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS

Dummy Antennas: 39 OHM

"Signal Web" antenna, when chassis is removed

HIGH SIDE OF LOOP

Chassis top and

tubes and top

In W01 1100710 101010 0,11,10